alcatel bts hardware description
TRANSCRIPT
Alcatel GSM
Evolium BTS A9100 Hardware
Description
BTS Document
Sub-System Description
Release B9 from MR4
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Status RELEASED
Short title EVOL. BTS A9100 HW Desc.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, useand communication of its contents not permitted without writtenauthorization from Alcatel.
BLANK PAGE BREAK
2 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211.1 Modularity and Common Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221.2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.1 Cabinet Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3 Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281.3.2 Subrack Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382.2 Indoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.3 A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822.3.3 G3 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842.3.6 G3 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.4 A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862.4.2 G4 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872.4.3 G4 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882.4.5 G4 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902.4.6 G4 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . . 1202.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382.6.1 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1532.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682.6.7 Extended Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 3 / 910
Contents
2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with TwinTRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772.7.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1782.7.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792.7.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802.7.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1812.7.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822.7.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
2.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX(Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852.8.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . 1862.8.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 1872.8.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . 188
2.9 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902.9.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902.9.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2062.9.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2102.9.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2172.9.5 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2.10 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2362.10.1 Capacity Mode Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2372.10.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2382.10.3 Multiband Configurations - CBO - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX . . . . 2392.10.4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402.10.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX
Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2412.10.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations - CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity
4RX with Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2422.11 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
2.11.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2442.11.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2452.11.3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2452.11.4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
2.12 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472.12.1 MBO Standard Configurations - GSM 850/900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472.12.2 MBO Low Losses Configurations - GSM 900/1800/1900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2542.12.3 MBO High Power Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2572.12.4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations - GSM 900/1800 and GSM 900/1900 . . 2612.12.5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2682.12.6 MBO Multiband BTS, Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 850/1800/1900 273
2.13 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX . 2752.13.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2752.13.2 MBO1 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2762.13.3 MBO1 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2772.13.4 MBO2 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2782.13.5 MBO2 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2792.13.6 MBO2 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
2.14 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Single TRX . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.1 A9100 MBO1E 1 Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.2 A9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2812.14.3 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2822.14.4 A9100 MBO2E 2 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2832.14.5 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2832.14.6 A9100 MBO2 4 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2842.14.7 A9100 MBO2 6 Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.15 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Based on Extension withTwin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
2.15.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2852.15.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2862.15.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2872.15.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2882.15.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
2.16 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Configurations with Twin TRX . . . . . . . . . . . 2902.16.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2902.16.2 Transceiver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2912.16.3 Cabling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2922.16.4 Capacity Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2982.16.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3072.16.6 Multiband & Multiband Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3122.16.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3172.16.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3212.16.9 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3262.16.10 Extended Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3312.16.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
3 Indoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3353.1 CIMI/CIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3373.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3403.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3413.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3463.1.5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3473.1.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3493.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.2 CIMA/CIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3543.2.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3553.2.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3553.2.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3563.2.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3593.2.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3603.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3613.2.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3633.2.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3683.2.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
3.3 Multistandard Base Station Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3743.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3753.3.2 AC Power Supply Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3753.3.3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3763.3.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3803.3.5 MBI Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3823.3.6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3863.3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3873.3.8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3933.3.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4 Outdoor Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.1 Outdoor Cabinets General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4004.1.1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4014.1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4024.1.3 CPT2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4034.1.4 MBO1 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4044.1.5 MBO1DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4054.1.6 MBO1E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4064.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4074.1.8 MBO1T with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 5 / 910
Contents
4.1.9 MBO2 with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4094.1.10 MBO2E with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114.1.12 MBO2EDC with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4124.1.13 COBO with Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4134.1.14 Side Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4134.1.15 BTS Compartment 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4154.1.16 BTS Compartment 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4164.1.17 MBO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4174.1.18 MBO1DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4184.1.19 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4184.1.20 MBO1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4194.1.21 MBO1EDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4204.1.22 MBOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4214.1.23 MBOEDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.24 MBOEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.25 MBOEEDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4224.1.26 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
4.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4254.2.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4254.2.2 CPT2 Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4264.2.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4274.2.4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4284.2.5 CBO Cabinet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4304.2.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
4.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4344.3.1 Interconnection Panel - COME/COMI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4354.3.2 Interconnection Panel - CODE/CODI COAR Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4364.3.3 Interconnection Panel - BTS A9100 Outdoor Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
4.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4384.4.1 XIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4384.4.2 External Clock Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4414.4.3 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4414.4.4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
4.5 Outdoor Control Board CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4424.5.1 Connection Area (COAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4444.5.2 BTSRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4464.5.3 XIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4474.5.4 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
4.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4504.6.1 COME/COMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4504.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4534.6.3 MBO1/MBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4554.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4564.6.5 MBO1T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4574.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4584.6.7 MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4594.6.8 CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4604.6.9 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
4.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4634.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
4.8.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4644.8.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
4.9 Outdoor Cabinet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4824.9.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4824.9.2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
6 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
5 External Battery Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4955.1 External Indoor Battery Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
5.1.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4985.1.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5005.1.3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
5.2 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5015.2.1 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5025.2.2 External Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5055.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5065.2.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5136.1 STASR General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5146.2 STASR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5146.3 STASR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
6.3.1 Power Supplies and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5156.3.2 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5156.3.3 Connectors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
7 AC Power Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5177.1 SRACDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
7.1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5187.1.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5197.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7.2 ACSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5217.2.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5217.2.2 ACSR Subrack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5227.2.3 ACSR Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
7.3 ASIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5257.3.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5257.3.2 ASIB Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5267.3.3 ASIB Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
8 Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
8.1 Introduction to Station Unit Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5308.2 Transmission and Clock Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
8.2.1 Abis Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5348.2.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5358.2.3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5358.2.4 Q1 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
8.3 Base Station Internal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5378.4 Operations and Maintenance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
8.4.1 BTS Control Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5398.4.2 OMU Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5398.4.3 Glue Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
8.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5408.6 Station Unit Module Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5418.7 Station Unit Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5428.8 Station Unit Module Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
9 Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5479.1 Single Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
9.1.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5489.1.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5499.1.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5619.1.4 TRE Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5679.1.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5699.1.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
9.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 7 / 910
Contents
9.2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5739.2.2 Digital Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5749.2.3 Analog Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5779.2.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5799.2.5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5819.2.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5829.2.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
10 Antenna Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58510.1 ANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
10.1.1 AN Downlink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58710.1.2 AN Uplink Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58810.1.3 BTS Control Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58910.1.4 Antenna Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59010.1.5 AN Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59210.1.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59410.1.7 ANX Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59610.1.8 ANX Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
10.2 ANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59910.2.1 ANY Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60010.2.2 ANY Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60210.2.3 ANY Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
10.3 ANC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60610.3.1 ANC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60610.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60710.3.3 ANC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60810.3.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60910.3.5 ANC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61010.3.6 ANC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
10.4 AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61510.4.1 AGC Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61510.4.2 AGC Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61610.4.3 AGC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61710.4.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61810.4.5 AGC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62310.4.6 AGC LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62510.4.7 AGC Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62610.4.8 AGC Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
10.5 ANB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63210.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63210.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63310.5.3 ANB Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63410.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63510.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63510.5.6 ANB Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-Siting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63910.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64010.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64110.6.3 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64210.6.4 EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
11 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
11.1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64411.1.1 Fan Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64511.1.2 Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64711.1.3 Top Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
11.2 HEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65111.2.1 LED(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
8 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
11.2.2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65211.2.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65311.2.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
11.3 HEX3/HEX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65411.3.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65511.3.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65611.3.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65611.3.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
11.4 HEX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65811.4.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65911.4.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66011.4.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66011.4.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
11.5 HEX8/HEX9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66211.5.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.5 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66311.5.6 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66411.5.7 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66411.5.8 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
11.6 DAC8/DAC9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66611.6.1 Blower Rotation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.2 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.3 Filter Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.4 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.5 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.6 Test Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66711.6.7 RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66811.6.8 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66811.6.9 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66911.6.10 Mechanical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
11.7 HEAT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67011.7.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67111.7.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
11.8 HEAT3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67311.8.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67411.8.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
11.9 HEAT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67511.9.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67611.9.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
11.10 HEATDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67711.10.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67811.10.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
12 Power Supplies and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
12.1 ACIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68012.1.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68112.1.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 9 / 910
Contents
12.2 LPFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68212.3 LPFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68312.4 LPFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68412.5 LPFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68612.6 ACDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
12.6.1 Technical Charateristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68712.6.2 ACDUE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
12.7 ACMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68812.8 ACMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69012.9 ACSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69012.10 ACUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69112.11 APOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
12.11.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69412.11.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
12.12 PM08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69512.12.1 PM08 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69512.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69612.12.3 PM08 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
12.13 PM11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69912.13.1 PM11 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69912.13.2 PM11 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70012.13.3 PM11 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70212.13.4 PM11 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
12.14 PM12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70312.14.1 PM12 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70312.14.2 PM12 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70512.14.3 PM12 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70712.14.4 PM12 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
12.15 PM18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70812.15.1 Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70812.15.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70912.15.3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71112.15.4 Protection and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71112.15.5 PM18 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71212.15.6 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
12.16 BCU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71412.16.1 BCU1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71412.16.2 BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71612.16.3 BCU1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
12.17 BCU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71812.17.1 BCU2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71812.17.2 BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72112.17.3 BCU2 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72412.17.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
12.18 BACO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72512.18.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72612.18.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
12.19 BAC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72712.19.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72812.19.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
12.20 ABAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72912.20.1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73012.20.2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
12.21 ADAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73112.21.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73212.21.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73312.21.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
10 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
12.22 ADAM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73412.22.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73512.22.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73612.22.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
12.23 ADAM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73712.23.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73812.23.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73912.23.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
12.24 BU41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74012.24.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74112.24.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74112.24.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74212.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
12.25 BU100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74412.25.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74512.25.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74612.25.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
12.26 BU101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74712.26.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74812.26.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74912.26.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
12.27 BU102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75012.27.1 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75012.27.2 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75112.27.3 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
12.28 BATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75212.28.1 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75212.28.2 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75312.28.3 Discharging and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75312.28.4 RIBATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.5 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.6 Battery Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75412.28.7 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
12.29 RIBAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75512.29.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75512.29.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75612.29.3 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75712.29.4 XBCB Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
12.30 DCDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75812.30.1 Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75912.30.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76012.30.3 Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
12.31 DCDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76112.31.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76212.31.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
12.32 DCDUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76412.33 DCMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76512.34 DCUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
12.34.1 Front and Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76912.34.2 Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
13 ACRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77113.1 ACRI Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77213.2 ACRI LEDs and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77313.3 ACRI Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
14.1 Lightning Protector Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 11 / 910
Contents
14.1.1 Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77614.1.2 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77614.1.3 Lightning Power Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77714.1.4 Quarter-Wave Stub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
14.2 Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77914.3 Lightning Protector Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
15 Range Extension Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78115.1 Introduction to REK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78215.2 Overall Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
15.2.1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78315.2.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
15.3 Masthead Amplification Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79015.3.1 Transmit Power Amplifier and Required Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79115.3.2 Receive Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.3 Output Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.4 Input Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79215.3.5 RF Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79315.3.6 Supervision Circuits and Alarm Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79415.3.7 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79415.3.8 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
15.4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79615.4.1 Supervision and Alarm Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79715.4.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.3 Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.4 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79815.4.5 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
15.5 REK Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80115.5.1 Masthead Amplification Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80115.5.2 Power Distribution Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
15.6 REK Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80315.6.1 Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80315.6.2 Masthead Amplification Box Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80515.6.3 PDU Cabling in Indoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80615.6.4 PDU Cabling in Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
15.7 REK Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81015.7.1 Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81015.7.2 Alarm Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81115.7.3 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81215.7.4 Jumper Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81516.1 Introduction to TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81616.2 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
16.2.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81816.2.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
16.3 Tower-Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82016.3.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82116.3.2 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82216.3.3 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
16.4 Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82416.4.1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82416.4.2 Switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.3 Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.4 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82616.4.5 PDU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
16.5 Bias T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82716.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
12 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Contents
16.6.1 Indoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82916.6.2 Outdoor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
16.7 TMA Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83216.7.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83216.7.2 Indoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83316.7.3 Outdoor BTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
17 Cable Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83517.1 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
17.1.1 ANCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83617.1.2 ANIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83617.1.3 ANLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83717.1.4 ANOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83717.1.5 BOBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83817.1.6 BOMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84317.1.7 BOMUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84517.1.8 BOMUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84717.1.9 BOSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84917.1.10 BTSRI3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85317.1.11 BTSRI5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85317.1.12 BTSRIMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85417.1.13 BTSRIMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85417.1.14 BTSRIOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85517.1.15 BUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85617.1.16 BUMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85717.1.17 CA12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85817.1.18 CA-2MMC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85817.1.19 CA-ABIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85917.1.20 CA-ACB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85917.1.21 CA-ACSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86017.1.22 CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86017.1.23 CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86117.1.24 CA-ADCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86117.1.25 CA-ALPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86217.1.26 CA-APC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86317.1.27 CA-ASMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.28 CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.29 CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86417.1.30 CA-BTSCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86517.1.31 CA-CSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86517.1.32 CA-DFUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86617.1.33 CA-GCMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.34 CA-Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.35 CA-Ground1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86717.1.36 CA-Ground2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86817.1.37 CA-H2PC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86817.1.38 CA-H2PC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86917.1.39 CA-H2PC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87017.1.40 CA-HOAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87017.1.41 CA-MLBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87117.1.42 CA-MXBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87117.1.43 CA-OHAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87217.1.44 CA-ONCCx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87317.1.45 CA-OSCP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87617.1.46 CA-OSCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87717.1.47 CA-OSCP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87717.1.48 CA-OSPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87817.1.49 CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 13 / 910
Contents
17.1.50 CA-PCOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87817.1.51 CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.52 CA-RFMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.53 CA-RIBCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87917.1.54 CA-RICPT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88017.1.55 CA-RICPT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88017.1.56 CA-RIMO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88117.1.57 CA-RIMO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88117.1.58 CA-SENSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88217.1.59 CA-XBCBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88217.1.60 CA-XIOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88317.1.61 CA-XIOPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88317.1.62 CIMA Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88417.1.63 CIMI Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88517.1.64 RXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88617.1.65 TXRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
17.2 External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88717.2.1 CA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88717.2.2 CA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88817.2.3 CA03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88817.2.4 CA04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88917.2.5 CA-CBTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88917.2.6 CA-GC35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.7 CA-GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.8 CA-PC2W16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89017.2.9 CA-PC35BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.10 CA-PC35BL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.11 CA-PCEBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89117.2.12 CA-PCEBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89217.2.13 CA-RIBEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89217.2.14 CA-RIBEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89317.2.15 OCC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89417.2.16 OCC33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89517.2.17 SCG2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89617.2.18 SCG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89717.2.19 SCM1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89817.2.20 SCM2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
18 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
18.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90218.1.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90318.1.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
18.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.1 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.2 Operational Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90518.2.3 Transportation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90618.2.4 Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
18.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90818.3.1 EMC Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90818.3.2 Transient Bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90918.3.3 Spurious Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
18.4 Acoustic Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91018.5 Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
14 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Preface
Preface
Purpose The Evolium BTS A9100 Hardware Description describes the cabinets,subracks, modules and cables of the Evolium BTS A9100.
All equipment, features and functions described in this document may not beavailable on your system.
What’s New In Edition 13Section Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support (Section 16.2.2) wasadded.
Description improvement in Transceiver Equipments LEDs (Section 9.2.6).
In Edition 12The following sections were added:
Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional
Variant ’B’ (Section 10.4.7.2)
Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module FunctionalVariant ’C’ (Section 10.4.7.3).
Description improvement for filter attenuation in:
ANC Performance Characteristics (Section 10.3.5)
General Performance Characteristics (Section 10.4.7.1).
Information about AGX module was removed.
In Edition 11Section DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6) was added.
In Edition 10Description improvement in:
Indoor Cabinets (Section 3)
Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection Panel COMI/COME/CODI/CODE (Section
4.3)
Outdoor Cabinet Signal Interfaces (Section 4.4).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 15 / 910
Preface
In Edition 09The following sections were added:
A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.3)
A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.4)
Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based onExtension with Twin TRX (Section 2.7)
Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed Configurations Based onExtension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 Cabinet Variant AB) (Section 2.8)
Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension
with Twin TRX (Section 2.13)
Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution Mixed Configurations Basedon Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.15)
Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX (Section 2.11).
In Edition 08Insertion loss in transmit pass band parameter was corrected in AGCPerformance Characteristics (Section 10.4.7).
Section External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces (Section 5.2.4) was added.Description improvement in:
LEDs (Section 12.15.2)
PM18 Front View (Section 12.15.5).
In Edition 07Section TWIN Transceiver Equipment (Section 9.2) was added.Description improvement in:
LEDs (Section 12.17.2.1)
BCU2 Front Panel (Section 12.17.3).
In Edition 06Description improvement in:
LEDs (Section 12.17.2.1)
BCU2 Front Panel (Section 12.17.3).
In Edition 05Section DCDUE (Section 12.32) was added.The following sections were updated for MBOxEDC cabinet variant:
Outdoor Cabinets (Section 1.2.1.2)
Available Cabinets and Subracks (Section 1.4.1.1)
Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules (Section 1.4.1.2)
Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment (Section 1.4.2)
Outdoor Cabinets General Information (Section 4.1)
16 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Preface
Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features (Section 4.2)
Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding (Section 4.6)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables (Section 4.8.1.4)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)
Description improvement in Output Power Parameters (Section 12.15.1.3).
Title formatting for Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/ MBO2E/CBO(Section 4.5)
In Edition 04The document was updated for A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor.The following sections are added:
HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)
ACDUE (Section 12.6)
BOMUE (Section 17.1.7)
PM18 (Section 12.15)The following sections were updated for MBOxE cabinet variant:
Outdoor Cabinets (Section 1.2.1.2)
Available Cabinets and Subracks (Section 1.4.1.1)
Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules (Section 1.4.1.2)
Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment (Section 1.4.2)
Outdoor Cabinets General Information (Section 4.1)
Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features (Section 4.2)
Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and Grounding (Section 4.6)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables (Section 4.8.1.4)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)
In Edition 03The following sections were added for Geran Antenna Network:
AGC (Section 10.4)
AGX.
Section ANC (Section 10.3) was updated for ANCGP.
In Edition 02The document was updated with remark that XBCB connector is used forinventory of powered off BTSs at factory level.
Section Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) was updated for new poweramplifier TEPADHE on TADHE.The following sections were added for MBO1T cabinet variant:
ACMUT (Section 12.8)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 17 / 910
Preface
LPFMT (Section 12.3)
BOMUT (Section 17.1.8)The following sections were updated for MBO1T cabinet variant:
Outdoor Cabinets (Section 1.2.1.2)
Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules (Section 1.4.1.2)
Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment (Section 1.4.2)
MBO1T (Section 4.1.19)
Outdoor Cabinet Access and Features (Section 4.2)
MBO1T (Section 4.6.5)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables (Section 4.8.1.4)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC (Section 4.9.1.3)The following sections were updated for CBO cabinet with permanent DCconnection:
Outdoor Cabinets (Section 1.2.1.2)
Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / Modules (Section 1.4.1.2)
Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment (Section 1.4.2)
CBO (Section 4.1.26)
CBO (Section 4.6.8)
CBO (Section 4.9.1.5)The following sections were added:
Outdoor CBO - 2x2 (Section 2.9.1.5)
Outdoor CBO - 3x1 (Section 2.9.1.9)
HEAT4 (Section 11.9)
DCDU (Section 12.31).
Section External Battery Cabinet Outdoor (Section 5.2) was updated for newEBCO Design on KNUERR TECORAS basis.
In Edition 01Improvement of Abis interface description in Abis Interface (Section 3.1.3.4).
Introduction of TRX EDGE+ with RF High Power for GSM 900/1800,Transceiver Equipment (Section 9) has been updated due to introduction ofTRX EDGE+ with RF High Power for GSM 900/1800.
Update for widen the AC voltage range of PM12 AC/DC converter from230V+/-15% to 150~280V AC.
Audience This manual is for:
Commissioning personnel
System support engineers
Training department (for reference use)
Any other personnel interested in the Evolium BTS A9100 hardware.
18 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
Preface
Assumed Knowledge The reader must have a general knowledge of telecommunications systems,terminology and BTS functions.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 19 / 910
Preface
20 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
1 Overview
This Overview gives information needed for project managers and foremen, forthe presentation to the customer and site planning.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 21 / 910
1 Overview
1.1 Modularity and Common InformationThe BTS A9100’s modular design allows for omni-directional, sectorizedand multiband configurations. Configurations are built from a small rangeof primary components. This allows BTS installations to be tailored to suitdifferent situations and applications.
The basic building blocks of a BTS A9100 installation are:
Cabinets for indoor and outdoor installations
Four types of subrack. SRACDC, ACSR, and ASIB house the AC/DCpower modules; STASR houses the telecommunications modules and
AC/DC power modules
A number of telecommunications modules
Power supply modules
Modules for temperature control.
Additional cabinet equipment is required, such as fans, power supplies, heatexchangers, optional batteries and cables.
The arrangement of the subracks in the cabinets takes into account therequirements for:
Thermal cooling, achieved with forced-air cooling
Minimization of floor space, achieved with back-to-back, back-to-wall or
side-to-side cabinet installations
Ease of access and maintenance, from the front of the cabinets
Future system expansion.
22 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
Configurations Based on those building blocks all possible BTS A9100 configurations areassembled, see Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).
OperatingTemperatures
All BTS A9100 equipment operates in a temperature-controlled environment. Theinternal temperature of enclosures is regulated with a combination of heaters,heat exchangers and cooling fans, depending on the type of installation required.Environmental conditions, such as the availability of an indoor or outdoor site andclimate, are taken into consideration when planning an installation.
Grounding Grounding of BTS A9100 equipment installations is maintained throughout, via adistributed earthing system which interconnects all metallic parts with the cabinetground. A cabinet bus bar (or a cableform equivalent) is an important part of thisearthing system. The bus bar complies with European standard EN60950 V2.Equipment cabinets must be connected to a suitable external system groundat the installation site.
Units ofMeasurement
Standard TEP units of measurement are used for BTS A9100 equipment. Metricand imperial equivalents for the TEP units are as follows:
1 HU = 44.45 mm (1.75 inches)
1 WU = 5.08 mm (0.20 inches).
Standards All BTS A9100 equipment complies with the following ETSs:
ETS 300 342-2 EMC for European Digital Cellular Telecommunications Systems
GSM Recommendation for Base Station Equipment 11.21, prETS300.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 23 / 910
1 Overview
1.2 Cabinets
1.2.1 Cabinet Overview
The type of cabinet used depends on a number of different items required for aparticular installation. Cabinet types and requirements are described below for:
Indoor cabinets
Outdoor cabinets
Configurations
Indoor power requirements
Outdoor power requirements
Cabling.
1.2.1.1 Indoor CabinetsThe available indoor cabinets, and the number of subracks they can contain,are:
CIMI - two STASRs
CIDI - two STASRs
CIMA - five STASRs, or three STASRs and one ASIB
CIDE - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or
BU100s
MBI3 - three STASRs, or two STASRs and a battery area for BU101s
MBI5 - five STASRs, or four STASRs and a battery area for BU101s.
24 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
1.2.1.2 Outdoor CabinetsThe available outdoor cabinets, and the number of subracks they can contain,are:
COMI - two STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area forBU41s or BU100s and MV area
COME - five STASRs and one SRACDC or ACSR and a battery area for
BU41s or BU100s and MV area
CODI - four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and MV area
CODE - seven STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s and
MV area
CPT2 - five STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU100s
MBO1 - four STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s
MBO1DC - three STASRs and an MW area
MBO1T - three STASRs and an MW area
MBO1E - three STASRs, power supplies subrack and an optional areafor batteries or microwave
MBO1EDC - three STASRs and an optional area for microwave
MBO2 - eight STASRs and a battery area for BU41s or BU101s
MBO2DC - six STASRs and a MW area
MBO2E - six STASRs, power supplies subrack and an optional area forbatteries or microwave
MBO2EDC - six STASRs and an optional area for microwave
CBO - two STASRs with a MW area and optional BATS for the AC variant.
An additional cabinet, COEP, is required when upgrading a COMI to thefunctionality of a COME, or when upgrading a CODI to the functionality ofa CODE.
1.2.1.3 Indoor Power RequirementsThe CIMI/CIDI, CIMA/CIDE, and MBI3/MBI5 cabinets are designed to operatefrom the following external supply voltages:
CIMI and CIMA DC external supply variant:
0/ -48 VDC
0/ -60 VDC.
CIMA/CIDE and MBI3/MBI5 AC external supply variant, 230 VAC 1 ØThe AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom. for use within the cabinets.In the event of a mains failure, an optional battery backup unit BU41 orBU100 can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.
For more information about the CIMI/CIDI and CIMA/CIDE, refer to CIMI/CIDI(Section 3.1) and CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2), respectively. For more informationabout the BU41 and BU100, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section12.25) respectively.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 25 / 910
1 Overview
1.2.1.4 Outdoor Power RequirementsThe COMI/CODI, COME/CODE, CPT2, and MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2Ecabinets are designed to operate from external AC mains supplies:
230 VAC 1Ø
400 VAC 3Ø.
The CBO and MBO1T cabinet are designed to operate from external ACmains supplies 230 VAC 1Ø.
The AC input is converted to 0/ -48 VDC nom. for use within the cabinets.
In the event of a mains failure, an optional battery backup unit, BU41 or BU100,can be used to provide the DC supply voltage.
The CBO DC and MBO1DC/MBO2DC cabinets are designed to operate fromexternal DC mains supplies. The 0/ -48 VDC nom. input is distributed for usewithin the cabinets.
For more information about the COMI/CODI, COME/CODE, CPT2, CBO andMBO1/MBO2, refer to Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4). For more informationabout the BU41, BU100 and BU101, refer to BU41 (Section 12.24), BU100(Section 12.25) and BU101 (Section 12.26) respectively.
1.2.1.5 CablingThe cable sets supplied with the BTS A9100 fall into the following categories:
Power
Abis links
Internal interconnection.
26 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
1.2.2 Cabinet Dimensions and Weight
The following table shows the overall dimensions and the weight of all cabinets.
CabinetHeight Overall/Usable
Width Overall/Usable Depth Weight
CIMI/CIDI 920 mm/ 16 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm
115 kg fully equipped
CIMA/CIDE 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm
270 kg fully equipped(AC and DC)
COMI/CODI
(side compartment)
1500 mm/ 24 HU
24 HU = 17 HU forequipment + 7 HUfor battery
1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU 700mm
200 kg empty (exceptfor HEX2 and HEAT2)
COME/CODE(compartment 1 and 2)
(side compartment)
1500 mm/ 24 HU
24 HU = 17 HU forequipment + 7 HUfor batteries
1800 mm/ 3 x 84 WU 700mm
295 kg empty (exceptfor HEX2 and HEAT2)
COEP 1500 mm/ 24 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 700mm
95 kg empty (except forHEX2 and HEAT2)
CPT2 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1200 mm/ 2 x 84 WU 700mm
380 kg fully equipped w/o battery
MBI3 1300 mm/ 23 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm
170 kg fully equipped(AC and DC)
MBI5 1940 mm/ 38 HU 600 mm/ 84 WU 450mm
270 kg fully equipped(AC and DC)
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T 1500 mm/ 24 HU 825 mm/ 162 WU 750mm
95 kg not equipped w/ obattery
MBO1E 1610 mm/26 HU 940 mm/ 185 WU 750mm
90 kg for empty cabinet
MBO2/MBO2DC 1500 mm/ 24 HU 1500 mm/ 295 WU 750mm
175 kg not equipped w/o battery
MBO2E 1610 mm/26 HU 1550 mm/ 305 WU 750mm
150 kg for empty cabinet
CBO/CBO DC 900 mm/ 18 HU 720 mm/ 84 WU 700mm
150 kg fully equipped
Table 1: Cabinets, Dimensions and Weight
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 27 / 910
1 Overview
1.3 Subracks
1.3.1 Overview
The subracks are constructed from two steel-chromate side plates and fivemetal extrusions which form a frame box. Attached to the frame box are thebackplane module and FANU guide rails, and other components such as aground connector. The subrack is equipped with six integral lugs which enableit to be fixed to the equipment rack with self-tapping screws.
The subracks conform to ETSI standard IEC297-3 for 19 inchtelecommunications equipment practice.
The subrack plug-in modules are electrically connected by inserting them intothe backplane connectors along plastic guide rails. The connectors haveguide-pins which ensure the module and subrack connectors mate together,without risk of bending the connector pins.
The plug-in modules are secured in the subrack with Camloc quarter-turnfasteners.
There are four types of subrack:
STASRThe STASR is the basic subrack used for all indoor and outdoor applications.It can contain a mixture of telecommunications and power supply plug-inmodules. When the subrack contains TREs additional components, theFANU and FACB, are attached to the subrack.For more information about the STASR, refer to StandardTelecommunications Subrack (Section 6).
SRACDCThe SRACDC is an AC power supply subrack for BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations. For more information about the SRACDC, refer to SRACDC(Section 7.1).
ACSRThe ACSR is an AC power supply subrack used for BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations. For more information about the ACSR, refer to ACSR(Section 7.2).
ASIBThe ASIB is only used for indoor applications. For more information aboutthe ASIB, refer to ASIB (Section 7.3).
1.3.2 Subrack Dimensions
The following table shows the overall dimensions of all the subracks. They arethe same for STASR, SRACDC, ACSR and ASIB.
Height (TEP/ mm) Width (TEP/ mm) Depth (mm)
7 HU/ 311.5
(= 6 HU for modules + 1 HU for fans)
84 WU/ 431.8 304.4
Table 2: Subracks, Dimensions
28 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
1.4 Cabinet-Mounted Equipment
1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment
The cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the BTS A9100are listed in the following tables. The tables also provide a reference to thesections that describe each item.
1.4.1.1 Available Cabinets and SubracksThe cabinet and subracks available for the BTS A9100 are listed below.
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
ACSR AC Subrack for PM11 3BK 08712 ACSR (Section 7.2)
ASIB AC/DC Subrack Individual Battery 3BK 08676 ASIB (Section 7.3)
CIDE Cabinet Indoor Medi 3BK 25098 CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2)
CIDI Cabinet Indoor Mini 3BK 25099 CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.1)
CIMA Cabinet Indoor Medi 3BK 07181 CIMA/CIDE (Section 3.2)
CIMI Cabinet Indoor Mini 3BK 07605 CIMI/CIDI (Section 3.1)
CODE Cabinet Outdoor Medi 3BK 25100 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
CODI Cabinet Outdoor Mini 3BK 25101 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
COEP Cabinet Outdoor Expanding Part 3BK 07979 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
COME Cabinet Outdoor Medi 3BK 07606 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
COMI Cabinet Outdoor Mini 3BK 07607 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
CPT2 Compact Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25468 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBI3 Multistandard BTS Indoor, 1 Door 3BK 25964 Multistandard Base StationIndoor (Section 3.3)
MBI5 Multistandard BTS Indoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25965 Multistandard Base StationIndoor (Section 3.3)
MBO1 Multistandard BTS Outdoor, 1 Door 3BK 25673 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBO1E/MBO1EDCMultistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor, 1Door
3BK 27263 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBO2 Multistandard BTS Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 25675 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBO2E/MBO2EDCMultistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor, 2Doors
3BK 27264 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBOE Extension Outdoor Cabinet Multistandard 3BK 25677 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBOEE/MBOEEDCExtension Outdoor Evolution CabinetMultistandard
3BK 27265 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBO1DC Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor, 1 Door 3BK 26612 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBO2DC Multistandard BTS DC Outdoor, 2 Doors 3BK 26614 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
MBOEDC Extension Outdoor DC CabinetMultistandard
3BK 26616 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 29 / 910
1 Overview
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
MBO1T Multistandard BTS Outdoor Tropical, 1Door
3BK 27138 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
SRACDC AC/DC Subrack Outdoor 3BK 07987 SRACDC (Section 7.1)
STASR Standard Communications Subrack 3BK 07193 Standard TelecommunicationsSubrack (Section 6)
CBO Compact BTS Outdoor 3BK 26320 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
CBO DC Compact BTS Outdoor DC powered 3BK 27013 Outdoor Cabinets (Section 4)
Table 3: Cabinet and Subrack Part Numbers
1.4.1.2 Available Cabinet-Mounted Equipment / ModulesThe cabinet-mounted equipment and modules available for the BTS A9100 arelisted in the following table.
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
ABAC AC Indoor Battery Control Unit 3BK 08673 ABAC (Section 12.20)
ACDUE AC Distribution Unit Evolution 3BK 27266 ACDUE (Section 12.6)
ACIB AC Interface Box 3BK 07989 ACIB (Section 12.1)
ACRI AC Remote Inventory 3BK 07941 ACRI (Section 13)
ACMU AC Switch Unit Multistandard 3BK 25785 ACMU (Section 12.7)
ACMUT AC Distribution Unit Tropical 3BK 27140 ACMUT (Section 12.8)
ACSU AC Switch Unit 3BK 25126 ACSU (Section 12.9)
ACUC AC Connection Unit Compact 3BK 26323 ACUC (Section 12.10)
ADAM Adapter Module 3BK 25025 ADAM (Section 12.21)
ADAM2 Adapter Module 2 3BK 25475 ADAM2 (Section 12.22)
ADAM4 Adapter Module 4 3BK 25997 ADAM4 (Section 12.23)
AFIP AC Indoor Filter Panel 3BK 08674 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply andGrounding (Section 3.2.7)
ANCD Antenna Network Combined GSM 1800Module
3BK 08995 ANC (Section 10.3)
ANCG Antenna Network Combined GSM 900Module
3BK 08993 ANC (Section 10.3)
ANCL Antenna Network Combined GSM 850Module
3BK 25900 ANC (Section 10.3)
30 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
ANCP Antenna Network Combined GSM 1900Module
3BK 25393 ANC (Section 10.3)
ANXD Antenna Network X GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07241 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANXG Antenna Network X GSM 900 Module 3BK 07232 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANXP Antenna Network GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08459 ANX (Section 10.1)
ANYD Antenna Network Y GSM 1800 Module 3BK 07245 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYG Antenna Network Y GSM 900 Module 3BK 07237 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYL Antenna Network Y GSM 850 Module 3BK 25903 ANY (Section 10.2)
ANYP Antenna Network Y GSM 1900 Module 3BK 08465 ANY (Section 10.2)
APOD AC Indoor Power Distribution Panel 3BK 08675 APOD (Section 12.11)
BACO Battery Connection Box 3BK 07988AA
BACO (Section 12.18)
BAC2 Battery Connection Box 3BK 07988AB
BAC2 (Section 12.19)
BATS Small Battery Unit 3BK 25848 BATS (Section 12.28)
BCU1 Battery Control Unit 1 3BK 06784 BCU1 (Section 12.16)
BCU2 Battery Control Unit 2 3BK 08714 BCU2 (Section 12.17)
BU41 Battery Unit 40 Ah 3BK 08035 BU41 (Section 12.24)
BU100 Battery Unit 100 Ah 3BK 08932 BU100 (Section 12.25)
BU101 Battery Unit 100 Ah for using in MBO 3BK 25854 BU101 (Section 12.26)
DAC8 Direct Air Cooling 8 used in MBOEE 3BK 27794 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)
DAC9 Direct Air Cooling 9 used in MBO1E 3BK 27795 DAC8/DAC9 (Section 11.6)
DCDP DC Distribution Panel 3BK 07990 DCDP (Section 12.30)
DCDU DC Distribution Unit 3BK 27015 DCDU (Section 12.31)
DCDUE DC Distribution Unit Evolution 3BK 27267 DCDUE (Section 12.32)
DCMU DC Connection Unit Multistandard 3BK 26618 DCMU (Section 12.33)
DCUC DC Distribution Unit Compact 3BK 26324 DCUC (Section 12.34)
FACB Fan Control Board 3BK 07202 Cooling System (Section 11.1)
FANU Fan Unit 3BK 07205 Cooling System (Section 11.1)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 31 / 910
1 Overview
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
HEAT2 Heating Unit 2 3BK 08075 HEAT2 (Section 11.7)
HEAT3 Heating Unit 3 3BK 26343 HEAT3 (Section 11.8)
HEATDC Heating Unit DC 3BK 26619 HEATDC (Section 11.10)
HEX2 Heat Exchanger 2 3BK 07978 HEX2 (Section 11.2)
HEX3 Heat Exchanger 3 for using in MBOE 3BK 25659 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)
HEX4 Heat Exchanger 4 for using in MBO1 3BK 25660 HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3)
HEX5 Heat Exchanger 5 for using in CBO 3BK 26325 HEX5 (Section 11.4)
HEX8 Heat Exchanger 8 for using in MBOEE 3BK 27148 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)
HEX9 Heat Exchanger 9 for using in MBO1E 3BK 27149 HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5)
LPFC Lightning Protection and Filter UnitCompact
3BK 26322 LPFC (Section 12.2)
LPFMT Lightning Protection and Filter Unit Tropical 3BK 27141 LPFMT (Section 12.3)
LPFM Lightning Protection and Filter UnitMultistandard
3BK 25786 LPFM (Section 12.4)
LPFU Lightning Protection and Filter Unit 3BK 25157 LPFU (Section 12.5)
PM08 Power Module 800 W 3BK 06783 PM08 (Section 12.12)
PM11 Power Module 1100 W 3BK 08713 PM11 (Section 12.13)
PM12 Power Module 1200 W 3BK 25024 PM12 (Section 12.14)
PM18 Power Module 1800 W 3BK 27198 PM18 (Section 12.15)
RIBAT Remote Inventory Battery 3BK 25134 RIBAT (Section 12.29)
SUMA Station Unit Module Advanced 3BK 08925 Station Unit Modules (Section8)
SUMP Station Unit Module PCM 3BK 07224 Station Unit Modules (Section8)
TADH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 25373 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TAGH Transceiver Module GSM 900 High Power 3BK 26154 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRAD Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower
3BK 08980 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRADE Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower Enhanced 8-PSK power
3BK 26526 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
32 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
Mnemonic Description Part No. For More Information...
TRAG Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower
3BK 08967 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRAGE Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower Enhanced 8-PSK power
3BK 26525 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRAL Transceiver Module GSM 850 MediumPower
3BK 25894 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRAP Transceiver Module GSM 1900 MediumPower
3BK 25825 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRDH Transceiver Module GSM 1800 High Power 3BK 07723 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRDM Transceiver Module GSM 1800 MediumPower
3BK 07372 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRGM Transceiver Module GSM 900 MediumPower
3BK 07206 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
TRPM Transceiver Module GSM 1900 3BK 08556 Transceiver Equipment(Section 9)
Table 4: Equipment and Module Part Numbers
1.4.1.3 Module ReplacementFor detailed information on how to replace modules in the BTS A9100, see theEvolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbook.
1.4.2 Dimensions and Weight of Cabinet-Mounted Equipment
The following table shows the overall dimensions and weight of heavycabinet-mounted equipment.
Module
Height
TEP/ mm
Width
TEP/ mm
Depth
mm Weight
ABAC 3 HU/ 128 44 WU/ 223 285 -
ACIB 3 HU/ 128 28 WU/ 141.6 285 -
ACMU -/172 -/237 127 -
ACMUT -/172 -/217 125 -
ACRI 3 HU/ 128 6 WU/ 30 285 -
ACUC -/ 135 -/ 150 146 -
ADAM -/ 39 42 WU/ 213 280 -
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 33 / 910
1 Overview
Module
Height
TEP/ mm
Width
TEP/ mm
Depth
mm Weight
ADAM2 -/ 39 28 WU/ 142 280 -
ADAM4 -/ 39 56 WU/ 284 280 -
ANC 6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 298 -
ANX 6 HU/ 265 31 WU/ 160 298 -
ANY 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -
APOD 3 HU/ 128 34 WU/ 172 285 -
BACO 3 HU/ 128 50 WU/ 253 285 -
BAC2 6 HU/ 265 14 WU/ 71 285 -
BATS 6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 280 15 kg
BCU1 3 HU/ 128 9 WU/ 45.7 280 -
BCU2 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 51 280 -
BU41 -/ 200 -/ 250 200 50 kg
BU100 -/ 234 -/ 250 400 120 kg
BU101 -/ 234 -/ 250 400 120 kg
DCDP 2 HU/ 89 95 WU/ 482.6 152.5 -
DCDU -/227 -/120 147 -
DCDUE -
DCMU -/ 172 -/ 237 125 -
DCUC -/ 135 -/ 150 146 -
FACB -/ 95 -/ 55 - -
FANU 1 HU/ 44 26 WU/ 133 298 -
HEAT -/ 80 -/ 234.5 140 -
HEAT3 1 HU/ 44 19 WU/ 482 350 -
HEAT4 -/60 -/445 350 -
HEATDC -/ 101 -/ 170 -/ 145 -
HEX2 -/ 1045 -/ 440 152 24 kg
HEX3 -/ 1150 -/ 450 150 24 kg
34 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
1 Overview
Module
Height
TEP/ mm
Width
TEP/ mm
Depth
mm Weight
HEX4 -/ 1150 -/ 600 150 28 kg
HEX5 -/ 770 -/ 450 130 16 kg
LPFM -/261 -/181 75 -
LPFMT -/261 -/181 75 -
LPQD n/a n/a n/a -
LPQG n/a n/a n/a -
LPQM n/a n/a n/a -
LPQP n/a n/a n/a -
PM08 3 HU/ 128 15 WU/ 76 280 -
PM11 6 HU/ 265 15 WU/ 76 280 -
PM12 -/ 240 14 WU/ 71 280 -
SUMP 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -
SUMA 6 HU/ 265 10 WU/ 52 298 -
TRE 6 HU/ 265 21 WU/ 106 298 -
6 HU/ 265 28 WU/ 142 298 -
Table 5: Cabinet-Mounted Equipment, Dimensions and Weight
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 35 / 910
1 Overview
1.5 CablesMost BTS A9100 cables are common to both the mini and medi cabinets.The number of standard RF cables that are used varies according to theconfiguration.
The cabling consists of both:
Discrete cables, which have the designation CA
Cable sets, which have the designation CS.
The grouping of certain cables into cable sets can provide advantages in termsof ease of installation or manufacturing.
The BTS A9100 cables are categorized as internal and external cables.
Internal CablesThese are the cables and cable sets that are internal to the BTS. Theyinterconnect the various modules and are necessary for all configurations.
External Cables
These are the cables that connect the BTS A9100 to:
The customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board
The customer’s 0/ -48 V DC power source and ground point (indoor
BTS A9100s)
The BTS Terminal
Another BTS for clock synchronization.
36 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
This chapter shows all possible configurations of the rack layouts for thefollowing BTS types.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 37 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.1 Naming Conventions for the BTS ConfigurationsIn the following sections all possible configurations are listed in figures, sortedby the different types of BTSs.
The naming conventions used for the BTS configurations are listed in thefollowing table.
1x1...4 Means 1 sector with up to 4 TREs
3x1...2 Means 3 sectors with up to 2 TRXs per sector
1x1...2/ 1x1...2 Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector andup to 2 TREs in Band 1, and 1 sector and up to2 TREs in Band 2
1x(...2/ ...2) Means Multiband configuration, with 1 sector andup to 2 TREs in each band
Table 6: Naming Conventions Used for the BTS Configurations
2.2 Indoor Configurations
2.2.1 Indoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900
The following configurations are valid for GSM 900/1800/1900 unless otherwisestated.
2.2.1.1 Indoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...4configuration.
FANU
FANU FANU
TRE4
SUM ANY ANX
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1
Top Stage
Dummy Panels
− The BTS has n TREs
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.): TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1
Stage 1
Empty space
IDU 2
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Connection Area
ANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4
a b( Sector 1 )
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
SUMA
IDU 1
FANU
FANU FANU
Figure 1: Indoor MINI - 1x1...4 Configuration
38 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.2 Indoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 2x1...2configuration.
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1
Dummy Panels
ANXSUM − Sector 1 has n TREs
− Sector 2 has p TREs
ANX
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
FANU FANU FANUTop Stage
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
Stage 1Empty space
IDU 1
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Connection Area
ANC 1
TRE 1 2
a b
ANC 2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )
ANC 2
a b
TRE 1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs
SUMA
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
Figure 2: Indoor MINI - 2x1...2 Configuration
2.2.1.3 Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE1
ANC 1
Stage 1
Empty space
IDU 1
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Connection Area
ANC 1
TRE 1 2 3
a bANC 2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC 2
a b
TRE 1
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs (p=1)
SUMA
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
Figure 3: Indoor MINI - 1x1...3 + 1x1 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 39 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.4 Indoor MINI - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 3x1configuration.
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
TRE
TRE
TRE
ANX( Sector 1 )
ANX
ANX( Sector 3 )
( Sector 2 )SUM
The BTS has 3 TREs,one per sector
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE1TRE1
ANC 1
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC 1
TRE 1
a bANC 2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC 2
a b
TRE 1
The BTS has 3 sectors with1 TRE each
ANC 3
( Sector 3 )ANC 3
a b
TRE 1
SUMA
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
Figure 4: Indoor MINI - 3x1 Configuration
40 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration. (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).Top Stage
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANXANYANYANYSUM
FANU FANU
1 23
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
− The BTS has n TREs
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
− If ANY2 only:ANY2 is connected to ANX
− ANY filling order:ANY2
then ANY1then ANY3
− If the BTS has 6 TREs max.,
(TRE6) (TRE5)
the numbering scheme isa little bit different for:TRE5 and TRE6.
Dummy Panels
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE7TRE8TRE5TRE6
ANCANYANY2 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has n TREs
If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU 1 IDU 2
ANCa b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Microwave IDU(Optional)
SUMA
Figure 5: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 41 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.6 Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8 (GSM 1900; ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version).
The BTS has n TRE
a b
ANY1
ANX
ANY2 ANY3
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU 1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANXANY2
ANY1
ANY3
SUMA
− ANY filling order:
then ANY3then ANY1
ANY2
− If ANY2 only:ANY2 connected to ANX
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.):TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX
Empty space
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Figure 6: Indoor MEDI - 1x2...8 Configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version)
42 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.7 Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12This configuration is the logical extension of the 1x2...8 configuration with aminimum of nine TREs. The following figure shows the rack layouts of theIndoor MEDI - 1x9...12 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 1x10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANXANYANYANYSUM
FANU FANU
1 23
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
− The BTS has n TREs
(TRE6) (TRE5)
Dummy Panels
ANX
TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
ANYANY
1
24 5
− Both ANXs are set to thesame sector number
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANC 1ANYANY2 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has n TREs
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU 1 IDU 2
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Microwave IDU(Optional)
ANC 2
TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2a b
TRE 9 10 11 12SUMA
Figure 7: Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 43 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.8 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANXANY2ANY1ANY3SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX
TRE5TRE6
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.):TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
− ANY filling order:ANY2
then ANY1then ANY3
For each sector:
Sector 1 has n TREsSector 2 has p TREs
Dummy PanelsFANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
Stage 2
Stage 3
ANX
TRE5TRE6
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2
TRE5TRE6
ANC 1ANY1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 2 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU 1
ANC 1a b
ANY1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU(Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC 2( Sector 2 )
ANY3
TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n and p TREs
SUMA
ANY4
ANY2
ANY2
5 6
ANC 2a b
ANY3
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANY4
5 6
ANY2ANY1ANY3
Figure 8: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 Configuration
44 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.9 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 (GSM 900/1800)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 +1x1...4 configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANC 1(Sector 1)
ANYANY2 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU 1 IDU 2
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Microwave IDU(Optional)
ANC 2(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4SUMA
Figure 9: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 45 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.10 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4. (TheANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
For each sector:TRE1 and TRE2 are connected
ANX(Sector 3)
ANY
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
Sector 1 has n TREsSector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
Dummy Panels
to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY)
IDU 1 IDU 2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC 1a b
Microwave IDU(Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC 2( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC 3( Sector 3 ) TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
Figure 10: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration
46 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.1.11 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 (GSM 1900; ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
The BTS has 3 sectors with respectively n, p and q TREs
a b
ANY2
ANX1
TRE 1 2 3 4
a b
ANY2
ANX2
TRE 1 2 3 4
a b
ANY3
ANX3
TRE 1 2 3 4
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANX1 (Sector 1)
ANX2 (Sector 2)
ANX3 (Sector 3)
ANY1
ANY2ANY3
SUMA
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
TRE1 and 2 connected to ANX if 2 TREs only (no ANY)
For each sector,
Figure 11: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration (GSM 1900; ANX version)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 47 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.2 Indoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900
2.2.2.1 Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 -Low Losses configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
TRE7TRE8
ANX2
ANY1
ANY2
SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
− The BTS has n TREs
Dummy Panels
ANX1
and one sector
− ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number
Extension from1x6 to 1x8
− ANY1 only present if n>6or if ANY Pre−equipment
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8
TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2 7 8
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2
ANC2a b
Both ANCs are set to thesame sector number
SUMA
FANUFANUFANU
TRE5TRE6
TRE 3 4 5 6
Extension from1x6 to 1x8
In case of 1x3...4,on each ANC,The bridges will be removedat installation (on site)if no more than 2 TREs are onnected to them
Figure 12: Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low Losses Configuration
48 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.2.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
IDU 1 IDU 2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8
TRE3TRE4TRE9TRE10
ANC 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC 1a b
Microwave IDU(Optional)
ANC 2
TRE5TRE6TRE11TRE12
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 3TRE 1 2 7 8
ANC 2a b
TRE 3 4 5 6
ANC 3a b
TRE 9 10
SUMA
The 3 ANCs are set to thesame sector number
Extension from1x8 to 1x12
11 12
Figure 13: Indoor MEDI - 1x9...12 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 49 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.2.3 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
When no ANY, TREs 3 and 4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
(Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4
In each sector,
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Dummy Panels
ANX4(Sector 2)
ANX2(Sector 1)
ANX3(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4
both ANXs are set tothe same sector number.
ANYANY
TRE5TRE6TRE6 TRE5
are directly connected to ANX
Extension from2x4 to 2x6
FANUFANUFANU
Figure 14: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 - Low Losses Configuration
50 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.2.4 Indoor MEDI - 2x3...6 - Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 2x3...6 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 2 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
Microwave IDU(Optional)
ANC2
respectively n and p TREs
ANC2a b
Both ANCs are set to thesame sector number
ANC3
ANC4
Sector 1:
ANC3a b
ANC4a b
Sector 2:
In each sector:
TRE 1 2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6
FANUFANU FANU
TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6
Extension from2x4 to 2x6
In case of 2x3...4:
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them
Figure 15: Indoor MEDI - 2x3...6 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 51 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.3 Indoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800
2.2.3.1 Indoor MINI - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MINI- 2x1- High PowerGSM 1800 configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE1
ANC1
Stage 1
Empty space
IDU1
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Connection Area
ANC1
TRE 1
a bANC2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC2
a b
TRE 1
The BTS has 2 sectorswith 1 TRE each
SUMA
On each ANC:the two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE1
ANC1
Stage 1
IDU 1
Connection Area
ANC2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )
SUMA
Rack Layout with classical HP TREs:
Rack Layout with EDGE HP TREs:
Figure 16: Indoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
52 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.3.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI- 1x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Connection Area
Stage 3 FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Empty space
Microwave IDU(Optional)
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
On site, on the ANC:Bridges can be removed if only2 TREs connected to the ANC
Connection Area
FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
With classical HP TRE:
Figure 17: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
2.2.3.3 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1...2 -High Power configuration.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 53 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.3.4 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MED I- 2x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Connection Area
Stage 3 FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 2
Stage 1
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
TRE4 TRE3
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE2 TRE1
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
On site, on each ANC:the two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs connected
With classical HP TRE:
a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
Connection Area
FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE2 TRE1
TRDH
Figure 18: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
54 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.3.5 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2
ANX2
SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX1
ANX3
TRE1
TRE2
(Sector 2)(Sector 3)
(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2TRE1
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU2
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC2a b
SUMA
ANC3
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2TRE1
ANC1
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2ANC2
SUMA
ANC3
TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
(Sector 1)
IDU1
With classical HP TREs:
TRE 1 2
On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site).
Figure 19: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 55 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.3.6 Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Stage 3
Stage 2
Stage 1
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
Connection Area
FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE1
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE2 TRE1
ANC3(Sector 3)
(HP) (HP) (HP)
(MP) (HP) (HP)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE3(MP) (HP) (MP)
With classical HP TRE:Connection Area
FANU
IDU1 IDU2
TRE1
SUMA
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE2 TRE1
ANC3(Sector 3)
TRE3 TRE2 TRE3TRDM TRDH TRDM
TRDH TRDH TRDH
TRDM TRDH TRDM
The BTS has 3 sectors withrespectively n, p and q TREs
1 2
a b
ANC1 ANC2 ANC3
a b a b
3nc
HP MP
1 2 3nc
HP MP
1 2 3nc
HP MP
For 3x1...2:
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time. (On site)One HP TRE transmitting per antenna
For 3x3:On each ANC:The bridge where the MP TREis connected is removed on site
Figure 20: Indoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
56 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.4 Indoor Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900
Extended cell configurations are based either on REK or on RX TMA useas shown in the following figures.
A B
ANC
Sector 1
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
A B
ANC
PDU 1
Sector 2
TRE 2TRE 1ncnc
MAB MAB
A B
ANC
PDU 2
Sector 2
TRE 4TRE 3ncnc
MAB MAB
OUTER CELL
In the Outer Cell, the br idges are removed on each ANC
INNER CELL
Figure 21: Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use
A B
ANCSector 2
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
A B
ANC
PDU 1
Sector 1
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
TMA TMA
OUTER CELLINNER CELL
Figure 22: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 57 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.4.1 Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REKThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cellconfiguration based on REK use.
a b
ANC1
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1Outer cell
(Sector 1)
ANC2
Inner Cell(Sector 2)
ANC3Outer cell
(Sector 1)
SUMA
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs:
− n TREs in the Outer cell
− p TREs in the Inner cell
The configuration is based on1x4 Low Losses configuration,extended with a 1x4 sector
Inner Cell:
Outer Cell:
− ANC1 and ANC3 are set to the same sector number
− The bridges are removedon ANC1 and ANC3
TRE 1 2ncnc
a b
a b
ANC3
TRE 3 4ncnc
Figure 23: Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use
58 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.4.2 Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA UseThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI extended cellconfiguration based on RX TMA use.
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANC1Outer Cell
(Sector 1)
ANC2Inner Cell
(Sector 2)
SUMA
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs: − n TREs in the Outer Cell
− p TREs in the Inner Cell
Inner Cell:
Outer Cell:
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
a b
Figure 24: Indoor MEDI - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 59 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5 Indoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800
2.2.5.1 Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
Stage 1
Top Stage
− Sector 1 has n TREs
ANX
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
− Sector 2 has p TREs
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
Stage 1
Empty space
IDU 1
Microwave IDU(Optional)
Connection Area
ANC 1
TRE 1 2
a bANC 2
( Sector 1 )( Sector 2 )ANC 2
a b
TRE 1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs
SUMA
GSM 1800
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
Figure 25: Indoor MINI - 1x1...2/ 1x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
60 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANXANY2ANY1ANY3SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY2ANY1ANY3
TRE5TRE6
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
− ANY filling order:ANY2
then ANY1then ANY3
For each sector:
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
− Sector 1 has n TREs
− Sector 2 has p TREs
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
TRE5TRE6
ANC1ANY1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1
ANC1a b
ANY1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU (Optional)
(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANY3
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
SUMA
ANY4
ANY2
ANY2
5 6
ANC2a b
ANY3
TRE 1 2 5 6
ANY4
3 4
GSM 1800
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
Figure 26: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 61 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.3 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Top Stage FANU FANU FANU
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANX1
(Sector 1)
ANX2(Sector 2)
ANY4
ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM
GSM 1800
Dumm y panels
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANY2
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
The BTS has 2 sectors: − One with n TREs in GSM 900− One with p TREs in GSM 1800
The configur ation is based on 1x8 configur ation, andextended with a 1x4 sector
a b
ANC1
a b
ANC2
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4
TRE 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
If no ANY (4 TREs maxim um),TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC
SUMA ANY1
The configur ation is based on1x8 configur ation, andextended with a 1x4 sector
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectiv ely n and p TREs
Figure 27: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
62 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.4 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/1x1...8 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE6 TRE5 TRE8 TRE7
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANY2
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
a b
ANC1
a b
ANC2
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4
TRE 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
SUMA ANY1
If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to 4 are connected to ANC
The configuration is basedon 1x8 configuration, andextended with a 1x4 sector
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
Figure 28: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/1x1...8 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 63 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Top Stage FANU FANU FANU
Stage 3 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
ANX1(Sector 1)
ANX2(Sector 1)
ANX3(Sector 2)
ANY
ANY
ANY
SUM
Dummy panels
GSM 1800
Connection Area
Stage 3
IDU1 IDU2
TRE8 TRE7 TRE2 TRE1
TRE2 TRE1 TRE4 TRE3
TRE4 TRE3 TRE6 TRE5
Stage 1 FANU FANU FANU
Stage 2 FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 1)
ANC3(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
The BTS has 2 sectors: One with n TREs in GSM 900 One with p TREs in GSM 1800
extended with a 1x4 sector
a bANC1
a bANC3
TRE 1 2 7 8
a bANC2
TRE 3 4 5 6
TRE 1 23 4
ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number
SUMA
extended with a 1x4 sector
The BTS has 2 sectors with respectively n and p TREs
Minimum TREs in sector 1 is 5
ANX1 and ANX2 are set
The configuration is based on1x8 Low Loss configuration,
to the same sector number
The configuration is based on1x8 Low Loss configuration,
In case of 1x3...4LL/1x1...4On ANC1 and ANC2:The bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them
Figure 29: Indoor MEDI - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
64 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.6 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/2x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
For each sector,TRE1 and TRE2 are connected
ANX(Sector 3)
ANY
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
to ANX if 2 TREs max. in the sector
Sector 1 has n TREsSector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
IDU1 IDU 2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC1a b
Microwave IDU (Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC2( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC3( Sector 3 )
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
GSM 1800
Figure 30: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 65 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.7 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/1x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
For each sector,
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
ANX(Sector 3)
ANY
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
IDU1 IDU2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC1a b
Microwave IDU (Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC2( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC3( Sector 3 )
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
GSM 1800
Figure 31: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
66 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.8 Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
In sectors 2 and 3,
ANX(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
Sector 4 has r TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
IDU1 IDU2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 4 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC1a b
Microwave IDU (Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p, q and r TREs
ANC3(Sector 3)
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
GSM 1800
ANC4( Sector 4 )
ANC4a b
TRE 1 2
Figure 32: Indoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 67 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.9 Indoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI -...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector
In sectors 2 and 3:
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
Sector 4 has r TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANXANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANX(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
IDU1 IDU2
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 4 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC1a b
Microwave IDU (Optional)
(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p, q and r TREs
ANC3(Sector 3)
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
GSM 1800
ANC4(Sector 4)
ANC4a b
TRE 1 2
Figure 33: Indoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
68 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.10 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/2x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector.
In sectors 2 and 3:
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
Sector 4 has r TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANX3(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2
ANX4(Sector 4)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANC4
a b
ANC3
ANC4
Sectors GSM 900:
ANC2a b
ANC3a b
Sectors GSM 1800:
TRE 1 2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
(Sector 4) (Sector 1)
FANUFANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
GSM 1800
TRE 1 2
The BTS has 4 sectors with:n+r TREs in GSM 900p+q TREs in GSM 1800
STASR 3
TRE 1 2 3 4
Figure 34: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...4/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 69 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.5.11 Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2/2x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector
In sectors 2 and 3:
Sector 1 has n TREs
Sector 2 has p TREs
Sector 3 has q TREs
Sector 4 has r TREs
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANX3(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2
ANX4(Sector 4)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANC4
a b
ANC3
ANC4
Sectors GSM 900:
ANC2a b
ANC3
a b
Sectors GSM 1800:
TRE 1 2 3 4
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
(Sector 4) (Sector 1)
FANUFANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
GSM 1800
TRE 1 2 3 4
The BTS has 4 sectors with:n+r TREs in GSM 900p+q TREs in GSM 1800
STASR 3
TRE 1 2
Figure 35: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
70 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.6 Indoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800
2.2.6.1 Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
Stage 1
Top Stage
ANX2
The single sector has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Empty space
Microwave IDU (Optional)
Connection Area
ANC1
TRE 1 2
a b
ANC2ANC2
a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1 and ANC2 are setto the same sector number
SUMA
GSM 1800
IDU1
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
Figure 36: Indoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 71 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.6.2 Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) -Multiband Cells configuration.
The single sector has:n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANX1ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY2ANY1ANY3
TRE5TRE6 TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected
ANY filling order:ANY2
then ANY1then ANY3
For each frequency band:
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
to ANX
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6
ANC1ANY1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1
ANC1
a b
ANY1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANY3
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
The BTS has one sector with:
SUMA
ANY4
ANY2
ANY2
5 6
ANC2
a b
ANY3
TRE 1 2 5 6
ANY4
3 4
GSM 1800
p TREs in GSM 900n TREs in GSM 1800
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
Figure 37: Indoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells Configuration
72 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.6.3 Indoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
In the upper part of the BTS,TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
ANX3(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
Sector 1 has:
ANX4(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
− n TREs in the GSM 1800 band− p TREs in the GSM 900 band
Sector 2 has:− q TREs in the GSM 900 band− r TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANX3 and ANX4 are set tothe same sector number (2)
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
ANC4a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 1 and ANC 2 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANC3 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number (2)
Sector 1 has:
− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band− n TREs in the GSM 900 band
Sector 2 has:− r TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANC3
ANC4
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
FANUFANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
GSM 1800
STASR 3
Figure 38: Indoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 73 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.6.4 Indoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
In the upper part of the BTS,
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
ANX3(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
Sector 1 has:
ANX4(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Sector 2 has:− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band− r TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANX3 and ANX4 are set tothe same sector number (2)
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC4a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANC3 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number (2)
Sector 1 has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Sector 2 has:− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band− r TREs in the GSM 900 band
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANC3
ANC4
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
FANUFANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
GSM 1800
STASR 3
Figure 39: Indoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
74 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.6.5 Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
FANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM
FANU FANU
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Top Stage
ANX2ANY
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
In the upper part of the BTS,
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
ANX3(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
if 2 TREs max. in the sector
Sector 1 has:
ANX4(Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4
ANY
− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− r TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Sector 2 has:− p TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX1 and ANX4 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANX2 and ANX3 are set tothe same sector number (2)
GSM 1800
Dummy Panels
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC4a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC1 and ANC3 are set tothe same sector number (1)
ANC2 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number (2)
Sector 1 has:− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Sector 2 has:− r TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
SUMA
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
TRE3TRE4
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU1 IDU2
Microwave IDU (Optional)
ANC2ANC3
ANC4
(Sector 1) (Sector 2)
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
FANUFANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
GSM 1800
STASR 3
Figure 40: Indoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 75 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.7 AC Indoor Configurations GSM 900/1800
2.2.7.1 AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration.
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANX
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANY2ANY1ANY3SUM
BBU
PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 BCU112345
ABAC APODACRI
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3(*)
(*)
BTS−CA AFIP
TRE7TRE8
ANX
ANY1
ANY2 ANY3
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
a b
Dummy Panels
Options dependingof the configuration
Options if GSM 1800
(*) Fan stage always present
− If no ANY (2 TREs max.),TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
− If ANY2 only,ANY2 is connected to ANX
− ANY filling order:ANY2 then ANY1 + ANY3
7 8
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANCANY1ANY2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has n TREs
If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connected to ANC
Empty space
Connection Area
ANCa b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4
BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional)
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
ADAM
BBU (Option)
Pre−equipment of ANY possible
PM12 PM12 PM12
BATSor
2 x IDU
5 6 7 8
Figure 41: AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration
76 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.7.2 AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the 3x1...2configuration (sector 3 is not equipped).
2.2.7.3 AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2configuration.
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANU FANU
ANX
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2
SUM
PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 PMO8 BCU112345
ABAC APOD
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
ANX
TRE 1 2
a b
Dummy Panels
Options dependingon the configuration
Options if GSM 1800
(Sector 1)ANX
(Sector 2)
ANX(Sector 3)
ANXa b
ANXa b
1 12 2Sector 1 2 3
BTS−CA AFIP
BBU
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2 TRE1TRE2
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
IDU2IDU1
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
BATS or Microwave IDU (Optional)
SUMA
FANU FANU
ADAM
BBU
ANC2ANC3
(Sector 1)
(Sector 2)(Sector 3)
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
FANU
PM12 PM12 PM12
BATS
ACR I
Figure 42: AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...2 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 77 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.7.4 AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANU
TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6
TRE1TRE2
TRE5TRE6
ANC1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 2 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC1a b
(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n and p TREs
TRE 1 2
SUMA
ADAM
PM12 PM12 PM12
3 4 5 6
ANY1
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
ANY2
ANY1
FANU
BATS or Microwave IDU (optional)
ANC2(Sector 2)
BATSor
2 x IDUANY2
Figure 43: AC Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 Configuration
2.2.7.5 AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration.
BATSor
2 x IDU
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 3 sectors with
Empty space
Connection Area
ANC 1a b
BATS or Microwave IDU(Optional)
( Sector 1 )
ANC 2( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n, p and q TREs
ANC 3( Sector 3 )
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
ADAM
PM12
PM12
PM12
Figure 44: AC Indoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration
78 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.7.6 AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the AC Indoor MEDI -1x1...8/1x1...4 Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
The BTS has 2 sectors withConnection Area
ANC 1a b
( Sector 1 )
ANC 2( Sector 2 )
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
FANU FANU FANU
respectively n and p TREs
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANY 2
5 6 7 8
ANY 1
TRE 1 2 3 4
SUMA
ADAM
PM12
PM12
PM12
IDU ANY 2 ANY 1
GSM 1800
Empty space
Microwave IDU(Optional)
ANC 2a b
If no ANY (4 TREs maximum),TRE1 to TRE4 are connectedto ANC
Figure 45: AC Indoor MEDI - 1x1...8/1x1...4 Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 79 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.2.7.7 DC Power Distribution from an AC Indoor CabinetTo extend on site the capacities in terms of TREs per sector, the coupling of aDC Indoor cabinet to an AC Indoor cabinet can be envisaged.
A typical case is a 3x6 sectored site with the following hardware: 1x6 ACIndoor MEDI + 2x6 DC Indoor MEDI.
This configuration requires the following actions:
Add additional AC/DC converters in the AC Indoor cabinet, (3 x AC/DC
converters in the case of a standalone AC Indoor cabinet)
Use of a DC power cable between the two cabinets.
BU41
AFIP
ASIB
BTS−CADC
Power Cable
AC Cabinet DC Cabinet
Subrack AC/DC
Figure 46: Interconnection between an AC Cabinet and a DC Cabinet
Maximum number of TREs depending on DC Consumption:
GSM 900: 3 x PM08 up to eight TREs, 5 x PM08 if more than eight TREs;
maximum TREs: 18 (a 3x6 site configuration is possible)
GSM 1800: 3 x PM08 up to six TREs, 4 x PM08 up to eight TREs, 5 x PM08if more than eight TREs; maximum TREs: 12 (a 3x6 site configuration is
not possible).
80 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.3 A9100 BTS Indoor (G3) Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
AC
Carriesrs persector
DC
Carriesrs persector
Cabinet Number ofsectors
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
1 n.a. 4 -> 8
2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4
Mini
3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2
1 n.a. 12 -> 16
2 n.a. 6/6 -> 8/8
Medi
3 n.a. 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
2.3.1 G3 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 81 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.3.2 G3 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
2.3.3 G3 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
82 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.3.4 G3 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 83 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.3.5 G3 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
84 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.3.6 G3 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 85 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.4 A9100 BTS Indoor (G4) Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
AC
Carriesrs persector
DC
Carriesrs persector
Cabinet Number ofsectiors
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
1 n.a. 4 -> 8
2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4
Mini
3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2
1 n.a. 12 -> 16
2 2/2 -> 4/4 6/6 -> 8/8
Medi
3 2/2/2 (4/4/4) ->4/6/6(6/6/6)
4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
* : Change of SUMA location
2.4.1 G4 MINI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
86 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.4.2 G4 MINI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
2.4.3 G4 MINI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 87 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.4.4 G4 MEDI - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
88 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 89 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.4.5 G4 MEDI - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
90 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 91 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.4.6 G4 MEDI - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
92 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 93 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
94 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations withSingle TRX
2.5.1 MBI Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 850/900/1800/1900
The following configurations are valid for GSM 850/900/1800/1900 unlessotherwise indicated.
2.5.1.1 MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DCconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x7...8 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 1x6 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs arerequired. Pre−equipment possible
Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipped,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC
FANU FANU FANU
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
TRE2TRE3TRE4
SUMA ANY2 ANY1 ANC1
Dummy Panel The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case fewer than 3TREs
Figure 47: MBI3 - 1x1...8 - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 95 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.2 MBI3 - 1x1...4 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...4 - ACconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Air Inlet
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
TRE2TRE3TRE4
SUMA
12345671234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
ADAM
PM1 2PM1 2
ANC1
Dummy Panel
FANU FANU FANU
BATS(Option)
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs
Connection Area
Figure 48: MBI3 - 1x1...4 - AC Configuration
96 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.3 MBI3 - 2x1...4 - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 2x1...4 - DCconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x4 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 2 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE2TRE1TRE2
SUMA
Dummy Panel
ANC1a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3TREs
Figure 49: MBI3 - 2x1...4 - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 97 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.4 MBI3 - 2x1...2 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 2x1...2 - ACconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 2 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
TRE2TRE1TRE2
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567ADAM
PM1 2PM1 2
ANC1(Sector 1)
FANU FANU FANU
BATS(Option)
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2SUMAANC2
(Sector 2)
Dummy Panel
The ANC can be replacedby the ANB also
Figure 50: MBI3 - 2x1...2 - AC Configuration
98 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.5 MBI3 - 3x1...2 - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 3x1...2 - DCconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 3 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs,Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1
TRE2TRE1TRE2
SUMA
Dummy Panel
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC3(Sector 3)
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 3
The ANC can be replacedby the ANB also
Figure 51: MBI3 - 3x1...2 - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 99 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.6 MBI3 - 3x1 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 3x1 - AC configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
FANU FANUFANUAir InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 3 sectors,one TRE per sector
TRE1TRE1TRE1
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567ADAM
PM1 2PM1 2
ANC1(Sector 1)
FANU FANU FANU
BATS(Option)
ANC3(Sector 3)
Dummy Panel
ANC1a b
TRE 1
ANC2a b
TRE 1
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC3a b
TRE 1
Sector 3
SUMA
ANC2(Sector 2)
The ANC can be replacedby the ANB also
Figure 52: MBI3 - 3x1 - AC Configuration
100 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.7 MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DCconfiguration.
Connection Area
ANC1
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456
STAND
BBU or STASR(Option)
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
BATS(Option)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2PM1 2 PM1 2
123456123456
12345671234567FANU
123456123456FANUFANU
SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANY1ANY2
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs arerequired. Pre−equipment possible
Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipped,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connectedto the ANC
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
123
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 53: MBI5 - 1x1...8 - AC or DC configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 101 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.8 MBI5 - 1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DCThis configuration is the logical extension of the 1x1...8 configuration with aminimum of nine TREs. The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 -1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DC configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 1x10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
Connection Area
ANC1
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC2
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANY1ANY2
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Both ANCs are set to the same sector number
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
ANC2
TRE9
11 1012
a b
Dummy Panel
BATS(Option)
Figure 54: MBI5 - 1x9...12 (Low Loss) - AC or DC Configuration
102 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.9 MBI5 - 2x1...4 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...4 - ACconfiguration with BU101.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
Connection Area
STAND
BBU(BU101)
FANUFANUFANU
TRE3TRE4
Empty space
PM12
ADAM
The BTS has 2 sectors:Sector 1 with n TREs,Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
Air Inlet
TRE3TRE4
3 4 3 4
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1(Sector 1)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
ANC2(Sector 2)
Dummy Panel
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
PM12 PM12SUMA
Figure 55: MBI5 - 2x1...4 - AC Configuration with BU101
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 103 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.10 MBI5 - 2x1...6 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...6 - AC or DCconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANY2
TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
In each sector, If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
SUMA
TRE2
TRE5TRE6
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
BATS(Option)
ANY1
ANC1
a b
ANY1
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
Sector 1
ANC2a b
ANY2
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
Sector 2
Dummy Panel
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 56: MBI5 - 2x1...6 - AC or DC Configuration
104 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.11 MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4- AC or DC configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850 and GSM 1900.
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
ANY2 BATS(Option)
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANY1
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
Sector 1
Sector 2
Dummy Panel
ANC2a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC1
TRE
a b
1 3 2 4
Figure 57: MBI5 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 105 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.12 MBI5 - 3x1...2 - ACThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 3x1...2 - ACconfiguration with BU101.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
Connection Area
ANC1(Sector 1)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
BBU(BU101)
FANUFANUFANU
SUMA
TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE1TRE2
Empty space
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANC3(Sector 3)
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs,− Sector 3 with q TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
ANC3a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 3
Air Inlet
The ANC can be replacedby the ANB also
Figure 58: MBI5 - 3x1...2 - AC Configuration with BU101
106 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.1.13 MBI5 - 3x1...4 - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 3x1...4 - AC or DCconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
Connection Area
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs,− Sector 3 with q TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space1212
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2SUMA
TRE2TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
TRE
ANC1a b
1 3 2 4
ANC2
a b
1 3 2 4
ANC3
a b
1 3 2 4
ANC3(Sector 3)
BATS(Option)
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 59: MBI5 - 3x1...4 - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 107 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.2 MBI Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900
2.5.2.1 MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses- AC or DC configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
TRE2TRE3TRE4
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789
ADAM
PM1 2
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
BATS(Option)
ANC2a b
3 4
SUMAANC2
Dummy Panel
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
1212
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 60: MBI3 - 1x3...4 - Low Losses - AC or DC Configuration
108 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.2.2 MBI5 - 1x3...8 - Low Losses - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x3...8 - Low Losses- AC or DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC1
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456
STAND
BBU or STASR(Option)
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
BATS(Option)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
123456123456
12345671234567FANU
123456123456FANUFANU
SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE7TRE8
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
PM12
ADAM
ANC2
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC2a b
TRE 3 4
TRE5TRE6
5 6 7 8
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
In case of 1x3...4
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them.
Dummy Panel
PM12 PM12
Figure 61: MBI5 - 1x3...8 - Low Losses - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 109 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.2.3 MBI5 - 1x9...12 - Low Losses - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x9...12 - Low Losses- AC or DC configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
Connection Area
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
ANC1
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC3
123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789
ADAM
PM1 2SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
Dummy Panel
TRE
ANC1a b
1 5 2 6
ANC2
a b
3 7 4 8
ANC3
a b
9 1110 12
ANC2BATS
(Option)
TRE
The 3 ANCs are set to thesame sector number
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 62: MBI5 - 1x9...12 - Low Losses - AC or DC Configuration
110 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.2.4 MBI5 - 2x3...6 - Low Losses - DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x3...6 - Low Losses- DC configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 45 W at + 40� C or with 28 W at + 45� C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 1)
TRE5TRE6TRE5TRE6
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE4TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 2)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 2)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
ANC2
a b
3 5 4 6
Sector 1:
TRE
ANC3
a b
1 2
ANC4
a b
3 5 4 6
Sector 2:
In each sector:Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
In case of 2x3...4
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them.
TRE2
Dummy Panel
Figure 63: Indoor MEDI - 2x1...6 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 111 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.3 MBI Configurations - High Power GSM 1800
2.5.3.1 MBI3 - 2x1 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 2x1- High Power- AC or DC configuration.
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 2 sectorswith 1 TRE each
SUMA
ANC1a b
TRE 1
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2a b
TRE 1
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Dummy Panel
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
PM12
ADAM
FANU FANU FANU
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
123123
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB also
PM12
Figure 64: MBI3 - 2x1 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration
112 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.3.2 MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power- AC or DC configuration.
Connection Area
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty space
TRE4
TRE
ANC1a b
1 2
TRE1TRE2
On site, on the ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected
TRE3
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
3 4
ANC1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM
PM1 2SUMA
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Modules present onlyin AC configuration123
123
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 65: MBI5 - 1x1...4 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 113 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.3.3 MBI5 - 2x1...4 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...4 - High Power- AC or DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
ANC2
a b
TRE1TRE2
On site, on each ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected
TRE3
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3TRE4
3 4 1 23 4
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2 ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Dummy Panel
TRE1TRE2
TRE4
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Dummy Panel
Empty space
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
1212
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 66: MBI5 - 2x1...4 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration
114 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.3.4 MBI5 - 3x1...3 - High Power - AC or DCThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 3x1...3 - High Power- AC or DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
The BTS has 3 sectors withrespectively n, p and q TREs
Empty space
TRE1TRE2
On each ANC:The two bridges can be removedif only 2 TREs are connected (on site). One HP TRE transmitting per antenna.
TRE3
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 23
ANC3(Sector 3)
TRE3 TRE2
ANC2
a b
1 23
ANC3
a b
1 23
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM
PM1 2 ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
Modules present onlyin AC configuration12
12
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Air InletFANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1
Dummy Panel
FANU
Dummy Panel
In case of 3x1...2:
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
PM1 2PM1 2
Figure 67: MBI5 - 3x1...3 - High Power - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 115 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.3.5 MBI5 - 3x4 - High Power - DCThe MBI5 - 3x4 - High Power - DC configuration is an extension of the 3x2configuration described earlier. The extension is realized by adding a secondBTS cabinet with the following TRE split:
Cabinet 1: 2x4 HP TREs (the MBI5 3x1...2 is reconfigured to MBI5 2x1...4)
Cabinet 2: 1x4 HP TREs build on an MBI5 cabinet basis.
2.5.3.6 MBI5 - 3x6 - High Power - DCThe MBI5 - 3x6 - High Power - DC configuration is based on two cabinetswith the following TRE split:
Cabinet 1: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs
Cabinet 2: 1x6 TREs + 1x3 TREs
These configurations use a mixture of high-power and medium-power TREs.
116 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.4 MBI Configurations - Extended Cell GSM 900
Extended cell configurations are based either on REK or on RX TMA useas shown in the following figures.
A B
ANC
Sector 1
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
A B
ANC
PDU 1
Sector 2
TRE 2TRE 1ncnc
MAB MAB
A B
ANC
PDU 2
Sector 2
TRE 4TRE 3ncnc
MAB MAB
OUTER CELL
In the Outer Cell, the br idges are removed on each ANC
INNER CELL
Figure 68: Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use
A B
ANCSector 2
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
A B
ANC
PD
U 1
Sector 1
TRE 3TRE 1TRE 4TRE 2
TMA TMA
OUTER CELLINNER CELL
Bias T
Bias T
DC
DC
Figure 69: Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 117 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.4.1 MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REKThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - Extended CellConfiguration Based on REK Use.
Connection Area
ANC2Outer Cell(Sector 2)
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456
STAND
BBU or STASR(Option)
TRE3TRE4
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs:− n TREs in the Inner cell,− p TREs in the Outer cell
ANC2a b
TRE
ANC3a b
TRE
Inner Cell:
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
123456123456
123456123456FANU
123456123456FANUFANU
SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
PM12
ADAM
ANC1Inner Cell(Sector 1)
BATS(Option)
Dummy Panel
ANC3Outer Cell(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2
Outer Cell:
3 4
1 23 4 1 23 4
ANC2 and ANC3 are set to thesame sector number
The bridges are removed on ANC2 and ANC3 at installation time (on site)
PM12 PM12
Figure 70: MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on REK Use
118 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.4.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA UseThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - Extended CellConfiguration Based on RX TMA Use.
Connection Area
ANC2Outer Cell(Sector 2)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456
STAND
BBU or STASR(Option)
TRE3TRE4
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
1212
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs:− n TREs in the Inner cell,− p TREs in the Outer cell
Inner Cell:
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
TRE1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
123456123456
12345671234567FANU
123456123456FANUFANU
SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
ADAM
ANC1Inner Cell(Sector 1)
BATS(Option)
Dummy Panel
TRE1TRE2
Outer Cell:
ANC1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC2a b
TRE 1 23 4
Figure 71: MBI5 - Extended Cell Configuration Based on RX TMA Use
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 119 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5 MBI Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800 and GSM900/1900
2.5.5.1 MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE2TRE1TRE2
SUMA
Dummy Panel
ANC1a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 72: MBI3 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
120 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.2 MBI5 - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...6/1x1...6 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
ANC2(Sector 2)
ANY2
TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
1212
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678ADAM
PM1 2
SUMA
TRE2
TRE5TRE6
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
BATS(Option)
ANY 1
ANC1a b
ANY1
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
Sector 1
ANC2a b
ANY2
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
Sector 2
Dummy Panel
Empty space
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 73: MBI5 - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 121 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.3 MBI5 - 1x1...8/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...8/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
ANY2
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
PM1 2 SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANY1
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC2a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC1
TRE 1 3 4
a b
TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ADAM
2
In sector 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required.TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.
Sector 1
Sector 2
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 74: MBI5 - 1x1...8/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
122 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.4 MBI5 - 1x1...4/1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...4/1x1...8 -Multiband BTS configuration.
ANY2
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
PM1 2SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC2a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC1
TRE 1 3 4
a b
TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ADAM
2
In sector 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC.
Sector 1
Sector 2ANY1
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 75: MBI5 - 1x1...4/1x1...8 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 123 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.5 MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
ANC2(Sector 1)
TRE5TRE6TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE3
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2SUMA
TRE4TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8
Dummy Panel
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2 7 8
ANC2
a b
3 4 5 6
ANC3
a b
1 3 2 4
ANC3(Sector 2)
BATS(Option)
TRE
The configuration is based on1x3...8 Low Loss configurationextended with a 1x4 sector.
In case of 1x3...4 LL/1x1...4
On ANC1 and ANC2:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (on site), if nomore than 2 TREs are connectedto them.
Sector 1
Sector 2
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 76: MBI5 - 1x3...8LL/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
124 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.6 MBI5 - 1x1...4/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Indoor MBI5 - 1x1...4/2x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs,− Sector 3 with q TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
TRE2TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3
a b
1 3 2 4ANC3
(Sector 3)
BATS(Option)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 3 2 4
ANC2
a b
1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
ADAM
PM1 2SUMA
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 77: MBI5 - 1x1...4/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 125 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.7 MBI5 - 2x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
1234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs,− Sector 2 with p TREs,− Sector 3 with q TREs
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1(Sector 1)
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
TRE2TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3
a b
1 3 2 4ANC3
(Sector 3)
BATS(Option)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 3 2 4
ANC2
a b
1 3 2 4
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
ADAM
PM1 2SUMA
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 78: MBI5 - 2x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
126 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.8 MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE2TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 3)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 4)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
ANC2
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC3
a b
3 4TRE 1 2 TRE
ANC4
a b
1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
Sector 3 Sector 4
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 79: MBI5 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 127 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.9 MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE2TRE1TRE2
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 3)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 4)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
ANC2
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC3
a b
3 4TRE 1 2 TRE
ANC4
a b
1 2
Sector 3 Sector 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 80: MBI5 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
128 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.10 MBI5 - 2x1...4/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...4/2x1...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE4TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 3)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 4)
TRE
ANC2
a b
1 2
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
ANC1
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC4
a b
3 4TRE 1 2TRE
ANC3
a b
1 2
Sector 3 Sector 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 81: MBI5 - 2x1...4/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 129 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.5.11 MBI5 - 2x1...2/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x1...2/2x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2The BTS has 4 sectors withrespectively n, p, q and r TREs
Empty space
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE4TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 3)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 4)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
ANC2
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC3
a b
3 4TRE 1 2 TRE
ANC4
a b
1 2
Sector 3 Sector 4
Sector 1 Sector 2
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 82: MBI5 - 2x1...2/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
130 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6 MBI Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800
2.5.6.1 MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4) - MultibandCells - DC configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1
Air InletSTAND
Empty space
Connection Area
Air Inlet
The BTS has 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
TRE2TRE1TRE2
SUMA
Dummy Panel
ANC1a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC2 ANC1
ANC2a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 83: MBI3 - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 131 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.2 MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.
Connection Area
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
ANC2ANY2
TRE3TRE4TRE5TRE6
The BTS has 1 sector with:− p TREs in GSM 900 band,− n TREs in GSM 1800 band
If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
GSM 1800
1212
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
ADAM
PM1 2
SUMA
TRE2
TRE5TRE6
Dummy Panel
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
BATS(Option)
ANY 1
ANC1a b
ANY1
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
ANC2a b
ANY2
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
Dummy Panel
Empty space
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to thesame sector number.
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 84: MBI5 - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells - AC or DC Configuration
132 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.3 MBI5 - 1x(...8/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...8/...4) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.
ANY2
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Connection Area
ANC2
FANUAir Inlet
FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
SUMA
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANY 1
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC2a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
123123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC1
TRE 1 3 4
a b
TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
2
GSM 1800
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.
ANC2, If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREsADAM
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 85: MBI5 - 1x(...8/...4) - Multiband Cells - AC or DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 133 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.4 MBI5 - 1x(...4/...8)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the MBI5 - 1x(...4/...8) - MultibandCells - AC or DC configuration.
ANY2
123456123456123456123456123456123456123456
BATS(Option)
Connection Area
ANC2
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1
STAND
ANC1
12345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812345678
TRE2TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANY1
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC2a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
Modules present onlyin AC configuration
Empty space
123
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC1
TRE 1 3 4
a b
TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
2
GSM 1800
ANC 2, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required.TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC.
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number.
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
SUMA
ADAM
PM1 2 PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 86: MBI5 - 1x(...4/...8) - Multiband Cells - AC or DC Configuration
134 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.5 MBI5 - 2x(...4/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x(...4/...2) - MultibandCells - DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2 The BTS has 2 sectors.
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number.
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)SUMA
TRE4TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 2)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 2)
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
GSM 1800
TRE
ANC2
a b
1 2
ANC1
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC4
a b
3 4TRE 1 2TRE
ANC3
a b
1 2
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band
ANC3 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number.
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs
Figure 87: MBI5 - 2x(...4/...2) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 135 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.6 MBI5 - 2x(...2/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 2x(...2/...4) - MultibandCells - DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
Empty space
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
Air Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)SUMA
TRE4TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 2)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 2)
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
GSM 1800
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
ANC2
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC3
a b
3 4TRE 1 2 TRE
ANC4
a b
1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors.
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC2 are set tothe same sector number.
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band
ANC3 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number.
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
Figure 88: MBI5 - 2x(...2/...4) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration
136 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.5.6.7 MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4)- Multiband Cells - DC configuration.
Connection Area
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
The BTS has 2 sectors.
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band,− q TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC3 are set tothe same sector number.
Empty space
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
TRE3
ANC1(Sector 1)
SUMA
TRE4
TRE3TRE4
Dummy Panel
ANC3(Sector 1)
STANDAir Inlet
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC4(Sector 2)
TRE
ANC1
a b
1 2
TRE2
Dummy Panel
TRE1
FANU
GSM 1800
ANC2
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
ANC4
a b
3 4TRE 1 2
Air InletFANU FANU FANU
Sector 2:− p TREs in GSM 1800 band,− r TREs in GSM 900 band
ANC2 and ANC4 are set tothe same sector number.
TRE
ANC3
a b
1 2
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of fewer than 3 TREs.
Figure 89: MBI5 - 1x(...2/...2), 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells - DC Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 137 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Configurations with TwinTRX
2.6.1 Capacity Mode
2.6.1.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
138 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 139 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
140 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.4 MBI5 - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 141 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.5 MBI3 - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX
142 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRXConfigurations with maximum 4/4/4 TRX.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 143 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
Configurations with intended, respective more than 4/4/4 TRX.
144 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.7 MBI3 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 145 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.1.8 MBI5 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX
146 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss
2.6.2.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 147 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.2.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX
148 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 149 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.2.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
150 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.2.4 MBI5 - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 151 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.2.5 MBI5 - 3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
152 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.3 Multiband & MB Cell
2.6.3.1 MBI3 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.
Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRXin 1800 MHz.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 153 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.3.2 MBI5 - Multiband 1 + 1 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX.
Multiband cell: The BTS has one sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRXin 1800 MHz.
154 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.3.3 MBI5 - Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 TRX.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 155 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.3.4 MBI5 - Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n, q, s TRX in 900 MHz and p, r, tTRX in 1800 MHz.
Multiband cell: The BTS has 1 sector withn TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in 1800 MHzplus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHzplus 1 sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz.
156 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div.
2.6.4.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 157 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4.2 MBI5 - 1 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX
158 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4.3 MBI3 - 2 Sector TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 159 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4.4 MBI5 - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 2 RX with Twin-TRX
160 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4.5 MBI3 - 3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 161 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.4.6 MBI5 - 3 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
162 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.5 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss
2.6.5.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 163 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.5.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
164 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.5.3 MBI3 - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 165 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.5.4 MBI5 - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
166 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.5.5 MBI5 - 3 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 167 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.6 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div. Low Loss
2.6.6.1 MBI3 - 1 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
168 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.6.2 MBI5 - 1 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 169 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.6.3 MBI3 - 2 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
170 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.6.4 MBI5 - 2 Sector TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 171 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.6.5 MBI5 - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
2.6.7 Extended Cell
2.6.7.1 MBI3 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRXAC or DC configuration, with up to 4 + 4 TRX.
172 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 173 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.7.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX
174 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.8 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell
2.6.8.1 MBI3 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 175 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.6.8.2 MBI5 - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
176 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed ConfigurationsBased on Extension with Twin TRX
The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
AC
Carriesrs persector
DC
Carriesrs persector
Cabinet Number ofsectiors
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
1 4 -> 8 8 -> 12
2 2/2 -> 4/4 4/4 -> 4/6(6/6*)
MBI3
3 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4
1 n.a. 12 -> 16
2 n.a. 6/6 -> 8/8
MBI5
3 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6(6/6/6*)
4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
1 n.a. 4 -> 8
2 n.a. 2/2 -> 4/4
Mini
3 n.a. 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2
1 n.a. 12 -> 16
2 2/2 -> 4/4 6/6 -> 8/8
Medi
3 2/2/2 (4/4/4) ->4/6/6(6/6/6)
4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
* : Change of SUMA location
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 177 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.1 MBI3 - 1 sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
178 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.2 MBI3 - 2 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 179 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.3 MBI3 - 3 sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
180 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.4 MBI5 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 181 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.5 MBI5 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
182 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.7.6 MBI5 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 183 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
184 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.8 Multistandard Base Station Indoor Mixed ConfigurationsBased on Extension with Twin TRX (Only in MBI5 CabinetVariant AB)
The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
AC
Carriesrs persector
DC
Carriesrs persector
Cabinet Number ofsectiors
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
Single TRX -> TwinTRX
1 n.a. 12 -> 16
2 n.a. 6/6 -> 12/12
MBI5 (AB)
3 4/4/4 -> 4/6/6(6/6/6) 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
* : Change of SUMA location
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 185 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.8.1 MBI5 AB variant - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
186 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.8.2 MBI5 AB variant - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 187 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.8.3 MBI5 AB variant - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
188 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 189 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9 Outdoor Configurations with Single TRX
2.9.1 Outdoor Configurations - Standard BTS GSM 900/1800/1900
2.9.1.1 Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2configuration.
Figure 90: Outdoor CBO - 1x1...2 Configuration
190 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
The BTS has n TREs
TRE1 and TRE2 are directly connected to ANXIf ANY not equipped (2 TREs max.),
Empty space, no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
AIR
AIR
a bANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4SUMA
Empty space
Figure 91: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 191 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.3 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...8configuration.
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b
ANC1
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANY are required pre−equipment possible.
Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipment,TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC.
Empty space
AIR
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
FANU
SUMA ANY2 ANY1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
AIR
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
Figure 92: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...8 Configuration
192 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.4 Outdoor CBO - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 2x1configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE1
ANC1
HEAT3
The BTS has 2 sector with 1 TRE123456789012345612345678901234561234567890123456
a bANC1
TRE 1
SUMA
Empty space
BATS
PM12
ADAM2
1212 Options
ANC2 a bANC2
TRE 1
PM12
Figure 93: Outdoor CBO - 2x1 Configuration
2.9.1.5 Outdoor CBO - 2x2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CBO - 2x2configuration.
This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.
Figure 94: Outdoor CBO - 2x2 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 193 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.6 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
Empty space, no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2
ANC2(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2
SUMA
The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
Figure 95: Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 Configuration
194 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.7 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor Mini - 2x1...4configuration.
AIR
TRE4 TRE3
TRE2 TRE1
FANU
ANC2(Sector 2)
SUMA ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3
FANUFANU
AIR
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANUFANU
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2 3 4
Sector 1
Empty space
a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2 3 4
Sector 2
Figure 96: Outdoor MINI - 2x1...4 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 195 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.8 Outdoor MINI - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1configuration.
ANX
SUM
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE 1
(Sector 2)
(Sector 1)
The BTS has 3 TREs, one per sectorTRE 2TRE 3
ANX
(Sector 3)
FANU FANU FANU Empty space, no dummy panels needed
Figure 97: Outdoor MINI - 3x1 Configuration
2.9.1.9 Outdoor CBO - 3x1The following figure shows the rack layout of the CBO - 3x1 configuration.
This configuration is available only on CBO DC variant.
Figure 98: CBO 3x1 Configuration
196 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.10 Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors :
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a b
ANC1
TRE 1 2
ANC2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
SUMA
ANC3(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANUa b
ANC3
TRE 1 2
Sector 3
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE1TRE2
On each ANC, the bridges can be removed at installation (on site), if maximum power is required.
Figure 99: Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 197 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.11 Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM 1900 (ANX version)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM1900 configuration (ANX version).
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX 1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors :
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANX 1
TRE 1 2
ANX 2
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
a bANX 2
TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2
SUMA
ANX 3
( Sector 3 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
a bANX 3
TRE 1 2Sector 3
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE1TRE2
Figure 100: Outdoor MINI - 3x1...2 - GSM 1900 Configuration (ANX version)
198 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.12 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8configuration for GSM 900/1800.
SUM
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANX1ANY2ANY1ANY3
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
The BTS has n TREs
If no ANY (2 TREs max.), TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX
If ANY 2 only, ANY2 is connected to ANX1
ANY filling order:ANY2
then ANY1then ANY3
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC1ANY1ANY2
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
TRE7TRE8
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty Space
AIR
AIR
ANC1
a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANYs are required Pre−equipment possible
SUMA
TRE5TRE6TRE8 TRE7
Figure 101: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...8 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 199 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.13 Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANUTRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
ANXSUM 1
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE7TRE8
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
2
TRE5TRE6
TRE3TRE4
ANY1
ANY2
ANY3
ANY1
ANY2
ANX1 and ANX2 are set tothe same sector number
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1ANYANY2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
TRE7TRE8The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty Space
AIR
AIR
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ANC 2
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2a b
TRE
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
SUMA
TRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
910 11 12
Figure 102: Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 Configuration
200 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.14 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6configuration for GSM 900 and GSM 1800.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the followingrestriction has to be considered: 2x5...6 with 45 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...4 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE 1 to 4 are then cabled on ANC
ACSU
ADAM
AIR
TRE5 TRE6
FANU
SUMA
ANY1 ANC1(Sector 1)
AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
BBU
LPFU
PM1 2
FANU FANU FANU
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC2(Sector 2)
IDU1 IDU2 ANY2
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
a b
ANC1
ANY1
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
a bANC2
ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
Microwave IDU locations
Empty space
The BTS has 2 sectors:
PM1 2PM1 2
Figure 103: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...6 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 201 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.15 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...6configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 2x1...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXSUM(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE5TRE6
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
(Sector 2)
TRE5TRE6
TRE3TRE4
For each sector, TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max. in the sector (No ANY)
ANY1 ANY2ANY3ANY3 ANY1 ANY2
Empty space,
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC2(Sector 2)ANY3ANY4
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Empty Space
AIR
AIR
ANC1a b
ANY1 ANY2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
ANC1(Sector 1)
FANU FANU FANU
ANY1ANY2
AIR
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANC2a b
ANY3 ANY4
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
In each sector, if no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is required. TRE1 to TRE4 are then cabled on ANC
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
no dummy panels needed
Figure 104: Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...6 Configuration
202 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.16 Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TRAD/TRADE TREs, the followingrestrictions have to be considered: 3x4 with 45 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
ACSU
ADAM
PM1 2
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
BBU
LPFU
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE4 TRE3
FANU
SUMA
AIR
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC2(Sector 2)
IDU1
IDU2
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
a b
ANC1
1 2 3 4
Microwave IDU locations
Empty space
ANC3(Sector 3)
ANC2 ANC3
a b a b
TRE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PM1 2 PM1 2
Figure 105: Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...4 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 203 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.17 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4configuration. (The ANX version is only valid for GSM 900/1800).
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANY1SUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY3
TRE1TRE2
For each sector, TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANX if 2 TREs max. (no ANY)
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors:
Empty Space
AIR
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
FANUFANUAIR
(Sector 1)ANC2
(Sector 2)ANC3
(Sector 3)
TRE3TRE4
3 4
ANC2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
Figure 106: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4 Configuration
204 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.1.18 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4 GSM 1900The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4GSM 1900 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40� C
Configurations up to 3x1...3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANY1 ANX1SUMA(Sector 1)
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE4 TRE3
ANY2ANX2
ANY3 (Sector 2)ANX3
(Sector 3)
ANX2
ANY2
a b
1 2 3 4
ANX3
ANY3
a b
1 2 3 4TRE1 2 3 4
ANX1
ANY1
a b
Empty space
For each sector:ANY is required if more than 2 TREs
Pre−equipment possible
The BTS has 3 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs
− Sector 2 with p TREs
− Sector 3 with q TREs
Figure 107: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...4 GSM 1900 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 205 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.2 Outdoor Configurations - Low Losses GSM 900/1800/1900
2.9.2.1 Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 -Low Losses configuration.
SUM
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE3TRE4
ANX2ANY2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
The BTS has one sector with n TREs
TRE1TRE2TRE7TRE8
ANX1ANY1
FANUFANUFANU
ANX1 and ANX2 are set to the same sector number
TRE5TRE6
Extension from1x6 to 1x8
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
TRE5TRE6TRE7TRE8
ANC2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Empty Space
AIR
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
3 4
ANC2a b
TRE 5 6 7 8
Both ANCs are set to the same sector number (Remote Inventory)
SUMA
In case of 1x3...4:
On each ANC, the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
Figure 108: Outdoor MEDI - 1x3...8 - Low Losses Configuration
206 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.2.2 Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 1x11...12 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 1x1...10 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1
TRE4 TRE3
ANC1SUMA
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU
FANU FANU FANU
TRE8 TRE7 TRE6 TRE5
TRE12 TRE11 TRE10 TRE9
ANC2ANC3
ANC2
a b
5 6 9 10
ANC3
a b
7 8 11 12TRE1 2 3 4
ANC1
a b
Empty space
The 3 ANCs are set to the same sector number
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
Figure 109: Outdoor MEDI - 1x9...12 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 207 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.2.3 Outdoor MEDI - 2x3...6 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x3...6 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 2x6 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configurations up to 2x3...5 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX1SUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE3TRE4
ANX2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
(Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4
In each sector:− Both ANXs are set to the same sector number
ANX4(Sector 2)
ANX3
(Sector 2)
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANYANY
TRE5TRE5 TRE6TRE6
− When no ANY, TREs 3 and 4 are directly connected to ANX
Extension from 2x4 to 2x6
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors:
Empty Space
AIR
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC2ANC3
ANC4a b
3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
TRE3TRE4
ANC4
(Sector 1) (Sector 2) ANC2a b
TRE 1 2
ANC3a b
3 4
In each sector, both ANCs are set to the same sector number
TRE4
5 6
5 6
Extension from 2x4 to 2x6
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
TRE5TRE5 TRE6TRE6
On each ANC, the two bridges will be removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
The BTS has 2 sectors:
Figure 110: Outdoor MEDI - 2x3...6 - Low Losses Configuration
208 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.2.4 Outdoor MEDI - 3x3...4 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x3...4 -Low Losses configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1900 configuration using TRAP TREs, the following restrictionshave to be considered: 3x4 with 28 W at + 40� C.
Configuration 3x3 without restrictions: 45 W at + 45� C.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors:
Empty Space
AIR
ANC1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC2ANC3(Sector 2)
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
TRE3TRE4
ANC4ANC4
a b
Per sector, both ANCs are setto the same sector numberTRE4
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC, bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
− Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE 3 4
Sector 1
ANC2a b
1 2
ANC3
a b
3 4
Sector 2
ANC5
a b
1 2
ANC6
a b
3 4
Sector 3
(Sector 2)(Sector 1) (Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4ANC6
(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2ANC5
(Sector 3)
Figure 111: Outdoor MEDI - 3x3...4 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 209 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3 Outdoor Configurations - High Power GSM 1800
2.9.3.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
TRE4
TRE3
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
The BTS has 1 sector
ANC1
Empty space
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC1
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
a b
TRE4
TRE3
SUMA
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
ANC1
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
AIR
With classical HP TREs
On each ANC, bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
Figure 112: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
210 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.2 Outdoor MINI - 2x1The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1 - HighPower GSM 1800 configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1
ANX1SUM
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX2
TRE1
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
Sector 1 with 1 TRESector 2 with 1 TRE
TRDH TRDH
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE1
ANC1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors with 1 TRE each
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANC1
TRE 1ANC2
(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
a bANC2
TRE 1Sector 1 Sector 2SUMA
On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
The BTS has 2 sectors:
Figure 113: Outdoor MINI - 2x1 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 211 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.3 Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
TRE1
FANU
SUMA
FANU
FANU FANU
ANC1(Sector 1)
a b
ANC1
Empty space
ANC2(Sector 2)
TRE 1 2
AIR
FANUAIR
FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
a b
ANC2
TRE 1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each
AIR
TRE2
Sector 1 Sector 2
TRE1
FANU
SUMA
FANU
FANU FANU
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2(Sector 2)
AIR
FANU
AIR
FANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
TRE2
With classical HP TREs
On each ANC, bridges will be removed at installation (on site).
Figure 114: Outdoor MINI - 2x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
212 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.4 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...2This configuration must be considered as a sub-equipment of the OutdoorMEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 configuration. Configuration replacedby MINI configuration.
2.9.3.5 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperatureis + 38� C.
With classical HP TREs
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC1
Empty slotsNo Dummy Panels
1 2 3 4
a b
TRE4
TRE3
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
ANC1(Sector 1)
ANC2
1 2 3 4
a b
TRE4
TRE3
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
ANC2(Sector 2)
AIR AIR
TRE4
TRE3
SUMA
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
ANC1(Sector 1)
TRE4
TRE3
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
ANC2(Sector 2)
AIR AIR
On each ANC, the two bridges are removed at installation (on site), if no more than 2 TREs are connected to them
Figure 115: Outdoor MEDI- 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 213 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.6 Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For the GSM 1800 configuration using TADH TREs, the ambient temperatureis + 40� C.
ACSU
ADAM
PM12
ANC 1(Sector 1)
BBU
LPFU
PM12
PM12
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2
FANU
SUMA
AIR
FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE1 TRE2
ANC 2(Sector 2)IDU 1
IDU 2
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
1 2
Microwave IDU locations
Empty space
ANC 3(Sector 3)
1 21 2
a b
ANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
On each ANC:Bridges will be removed atinstallation time, on site
ACSU
ADAM
PM12
ANC 1(Sector 1)
TRE2 TRE1
BBU
LPFU
PM12
PM12
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2
FANU
SUMA
AIR
FANU FANUAIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
IDU 1
IDU 2
ANC 3(Sector 3)
With classical HP TREs
TRE1
TRE1TRE2
Figure 116: Outdoor CPT2 - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
214 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.7 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration.
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
ANC 2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
( Sector 2 )
TRE2
ANC 3
( Sector 3 )
ANC 1
( Sector 1 )
TRE1
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
SUMA
The BTS has 3 sectors :
ANC 1a b
1 2
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
1 2
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site)
SUM
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX 2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
(Sector 2)
TRE2
TRE1
ANX 3
(Sector 3)
ANX 1
(Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANC 2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
( Sector 2 )
TRE2
TRE1
ANC 3
( Sector 3 )
ANC 1
( Sector 1 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
SUMA
a
1
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
With classical HP TREs
Figure 117: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 215 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.3.8 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - HighPower GSM 1800 configuration. The configuration is based on the 3x1...2 -High Power GSM 1800 configuration, extended with Medium Power TREs.
AIR
TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
The BTS has 3 sectors− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty slots.No Dummy Panels
ANC 3(Sector 3)
1 2
(HP)
a bANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
On each ANC:"The bridge, where the TRE MPis connected, is removed on site"
(HP) (HP) (HP)
TRE3(MP)
TRE3(MP)
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
(MP) (HP) (HP)
SUMA
3nc
HP MP1 2 3
nc
HP MP1 2 3
nc
HP MP
AIR
TRE2
FANU FANU FANUAIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
ANC 3(Sector 3)
(HP)
(HP) (HP) (HP)
TRE3(MP)
AIR
AIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
(MP) (HP) (HP)
SUMA
With classical HP TREs
TRE3(MP)
Figure 118: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...3 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
216 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband BTS GSM 900/1800
2.9.4.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
(Sector 2)
Sector 1 has n TREsSector 2 has p TREs
GSM 1800
(Sector 1)
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANC 1
TRE 1 2ANC 2
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
a bANC 2
TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2S
UMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
GSM 1800
On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more powerat antenna output (Low Losses)(Operation to be performed during installation phase)
Figure 119: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...2/1x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 217 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4ANC 2
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
a bANC 2
Sector 1 Sector 2SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
GSM 1800
FANU FANUFANU
TRE3TRE4TRE3TRE4
TRE 1 2 3 4
Figure 120: Outdoor MINI - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
218 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.3 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE5TRE6
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
TRE5TRE6
TRE3TRE4
For each sector :
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector (no ANY)
ANY1
ANY2
ANY3
ANY ANY3 1
ANY2 (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 2ANYANY
4 3
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Empty
AIR
AIR
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANU
ANYANY2 1
AIR
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 )
TRE5TRE6
ANC 2a b
ANY 3 ANY 4
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
Space
GSM 1800
required, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC
Figure 121: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 219 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.4 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x1...4/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
1
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY3
TRE1TRE2
For each sector :
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector (no ANY)
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
FANUFANUFANU
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
3 4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
Figure 122: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
220 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.5 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -2x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
For each sector:
TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector (no ANY)
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXANYSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
1
TRE3TRE4
ANXANY3
TRE1TRE2
(Sector 3) (Sector 2) GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
FANUFANUFANU
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
3 4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
Figure 123: Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 221 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.6 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.
ACSUADAM
PM12
ANC 1(Sector 1)
TRE2 TRE1
PM12
PM12
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2
FANU
SUMA
AIR
FANU FANUAIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
IDU 1
IDU 2
Legend
The BTS has 4 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs− Sector 4 with r TREs
1 2
Microwave IDU locations
Empty space
ANC 3(Sector 3)
1 21 2
a bANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
BBU
LPFU
TRE2 TRE1
ANC 4(Sector 4)
GSM 1800
TRE
1 2
ANC 4a b
TRE1
Figure 124: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x1...2/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
222 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.7 Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 4 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
( Sector 4 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2
Figure 125: Outdoor MEDI - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 223 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.8 Outdoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 4 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
( Sector 4 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty slotsno dummy panels needed
Figure 126: Outdoor MEDI - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
224 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.9 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -2x1...4/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX
SUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY
(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 4 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
( Sector 4 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2
Figure 127: Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...4/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 225 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.10 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...2/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -2x1...2/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM (Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX(Sector 4)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY(Sector 3) (Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 4 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3TRE4
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
( Sector 4 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2
Figure 128: Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...2/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
226 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.4.11 Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...3/2x1...3The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...3/2x1...3- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 4 sectors :
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 3 )
TRE3
ANC 2a b
1 2 3
ANC 3a b
1 2 3SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
Empty Space
( Sector 4 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2
FANUFANU FANU
TRE3TRE3
3
3
Figure 129: Outdoor MEDI - 2x1...3/2x1...3 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.9.4.12 Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2/3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2/3x1...2- Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 6 sectors.
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANC 1
1 2ANC 4
( Sector 4 ) ( Sector 1 )
a bANC 2
1 2SUMA
ANC 6
( Sector 6 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU
a bANC 3
1 2
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs
a bANC 4
1 2
a bANC 5
1 2
a bANC 6
1 2
GSM 1800
GSM 900
− Sector 4 with r TREs − Sector 5 with s TREs − Sector 6 with t TREs
FANU
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
ANC 3
( Sector 3 ) ( Sector 2 )
ANC 5
( Sector 5 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
Figure 130: Outdoor MEDI - 3x1...2/3x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 227 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5 Outdoor Configurations - Multiband Cells GSM 900/1800
2.9.5.1 Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANXSUM
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
2 1
The single sector has :n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX 1 and ANX 2 are set to the same sector number
GSM 1800
Empty space,no dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
Empty space
AIR
AIR
a bANC 1
TRE 1 2
ANC 2
a bANC 2
TRE 1 2SUMA
GSM 1800
On the 2 ANCs the bridges can be removed to get more powerat the antenna output (Low Loss)(Operation to be performed during installation phase)
The single sector has :n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Figure 131: Outdoor MINI - 1x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
228 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.2 Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
Empty space
AIRa bANC 1
TRE 1 2 3 4
ANC 2
a bANC 2
SUMA
GSM 1800
The single sector has :n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band
TRE3TRE4TRE4
AIR
TRE3
FANU FANUFANU
TRE 1 2 3 4
Figure 132: Outdoor MINI - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 229 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.3 Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANXSUM 1
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
TRE5TRE6
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
2
TRE5TRE6
TRE3TRE4
For each frequency band :TRE1 and TRE2 are connected to ANXif 2 TREs max. in the sector
ANY1
ANY2
ANY3
ANY ANY3 1
ANY2
(No ANY)
The single sector has :n TREs in the GSM 1800 bandp TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANX 1 and ANX 2 are setto the same sector number
GSM 1800
Empty spaceno dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 2ANYANY4 3
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 1 sector with :
Empty
AIR
AIR
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANU
ANYANY2 1
AIR
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
TRE5TRE6
ANC 2a b
ANY 3 ANY 4
TRE 1 2 3 4 5 6
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
− n TREs in the GSM 900 band− p TREs in the GSM 1800 band
Space
GSM 1800
required, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC
Figure 133: Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells Configuration
230 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.4 Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
ACSUADAM
PM12
ANC 1(Sector 1)
TRE2 TRE1
PM12
PM12
FANU FANU FANU
AIR
TRE2
FANU
SUMA
AIR
FANU FANUAIR
AIR
FANU FANU FANUAIR
TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
IDU 1
IDU 2
Legend
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs in GSM 900 and r TREs in GSM 1800− Sector 2 with p TREs in GSM 900 and q TREs in GSM 1800
1 2
Microwave IDU locations
Empty space
ANC 3(Sector 1)
1 21 2
a bANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
BBU
LPFU
TRE2 TRE1
ANC 4(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
TRE
1 2
ANC 4a b
TRE1
Figure 134: Outdoor CPT2 - 2x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 231 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.5 Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
Sector 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 1800 bandp TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANX 3 and ANX4 are set toto the same sector number (2)
Sector 2 has:q TREs in the GSM 900 bandr TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX 1 and ANX 2 are setto the same sector number (1)
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX
SUM(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX
(Sector 2)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY4 1 23
(Sector 1)(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty spaceno dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 1 )ANC
3
( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4
SUMA
Empty Space
( Sector 2 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
The BTS has 2 sectors.
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
Sector 1
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 4a b
1 2
Sector 2
Figure 135: Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...4/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
232 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.6 Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4) -Multiband Cells configuration.
Sector 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 900 bandp TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX 3 and ANX4 are set toto the same sector number (2)
Sector 2 has:q TREs in the GSM 1800 bandr TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANX 1 and ANX 2 are setto the same sector number (1)
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX
SUM(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX
(Sector 2)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY4 1 23
(Sector 1)(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty spaceno dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 1 )ANC
3
( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4
SUMA
( Sector 2 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2GSM 1800
Empty Space
The BTS has 2 sectors
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 4a b
1 2
Sector 1
Sector 2
Figure 136: Outdoor MEDI - 2x(...2/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 233 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.7 Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layouts of the Outdoor MEDI -1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells configuration.
Setor 1 has:n TREs in the GSM 900 band
p TREs in the GSM 900 band
ANX 2 and ANX3 are setto the same sector number (2)
Setor 2 has:
q TREs in the GSM 1800 band
r TREs in the GSM 1800 band
ANX 1 and ANX 4 are setto the same sector number (1)
FANU FANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANX
SUM(Sector 1)
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2
ANX
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
OPTIONS
ANX
TRE1TRE2
ANX
(Sector 1)
ANY
TRE3TRE4 TRE3TRE4
ANY4 1 23
(Sector 2)(Sector 2)
GSM 1800
Empty spaceno dummy panels needed
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
TRE3TRE4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
GSM 1800
AIR
ANC
FANU FANU FANU
1
TRE1TRE2
AIR
( Sector 1 )ANC
2
( Sector 2 )ANC
3
( Sector 2 )
TRE3TRE4
SUMA
Empty Space
( Sector 1 )ANC
4
TRE1TRE2
The BTS has 2 sectors
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
ANC 2a b
1 2 3 4
Sector 1
ANC 3a b
1 2 3 4
ANC 4a b
1 2
Sector 2
Figure 137: Outdoor MEDI - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband CellsConfiguration
234 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.9.5.8 Outdoor MEDI - 3x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the Outdoor MEDI - 3x(...2/...2) -Multiband Cells configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 1
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
ANC 4
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )SUMA
ANC 6
( Sector 3 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1TRE2
ANC 2
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
ANC 3
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
ANC 5
( Sector 3 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
The BTS has 3 sectors.
Empty space
a bANC 1
1 2
a bANC 2
1 2
GSM 1800
GSM 900
Sector 1 :
a bANC 3
1 2
a bANC 4
1 2
Sector 2 :
a bANC 5
1 2
a bANC 6
1 2
Sector 3 :
Figure 138: Outdoor MEDI - 3x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 235 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10 Outdoor Configurations with Twin TRXThe following table gives the A9100 Compact BTS Outdoor TWIN TRXconfigurations.
TWIN Mode Number ofsectors
AC with BU5
carriers per sector
AC w/o BU5
carriers per sector
DC
carriers per sector
Capacity Mode 1 4 4 6
2 2/2 2/2 3/3 or 4/2
3 - 2/1/1 2/2/2
Capacity Mode LowLoss
1 4 4 6
2 - - 3/3
Multiband & MBCell
1 2 +2 2 +2 4 + 2
Coverage ModeTxDiv. 2Rx Div.
1 2 2 2
2 1/1 1/1 1/1
3 - - 1/1/1
Coverage ModeTxDiv. 2Rx Div LowLoss
1 2 2 2
Coverage ModeTxDiv. 4Rx Div LowLoss
1 2 2 2
236 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.1 Capacity Mode Configurations
2.10.1.1 CBO - 1 sector with Twin-TRX
2.10.1.2 CBO - 2 sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 237 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.1.3 CBO - 3 sectors with Twin-TRX
2.10.2 Capacity Mode Low Loss Configurations
2.10.2.1 CBO - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX
238 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.2.2 CBO - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
2.10.3 Multiband Configurations - CBO - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector withTwin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 239 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.4 Coverage Mode TX Diversity Configurations
2.10.4.1 CBO - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
2.10.4.2 CBO - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
240 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.4.3 CBO - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
2.10.5 Coverage Mode with TX Diversity Low Loss Configurations - CBO- 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 241 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.10.6 Coverage Mode TX-Diversity 4 RX Configurations - CBO - 1 SectorTX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
242 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
243 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.11 Outdoor Configurations Based on Extension with Twin TRXThe following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
Carriesrs per sectorCabinet Number of sectors
Single TRX -> Twin TRX
1 2 -> 4CBO
2 1/1 -> 2/2
1 n.a.
2 2/2 -> 3/3
CBO DC
3 1/1/1 -> 2/2/2
2.11.1 CBO 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
244 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.11.2 CBO 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
2.11.3 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 245 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.11.4 CBO DC 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
246 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations
2.12.1 MBO Standard Configurations - GSM 850/900/1800/1900
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.
2.12.1.1 MBO1 - 1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...8 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs.
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
a b
ANC 1
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
If more than 4 TREs, 2 ANY are requiredPre−equipment possible
Up to 4 TREs, and if no ANY pre−equipment,the TRE1 to TRE4 are directly connected to the ANC
Empty space
TRE8 TRE5
FANU
SUMA
ANY2
ANY1
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANU
AIR
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANU
TRE7 TRE6
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900, or if n>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed
123123123123123123
123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
PM12
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 139: MBO1 - 1x1...8 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 247 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.2 MBO1 - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 2x1...4 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs over the two sectors.
TRE4 TRE3
TRE2 TRE1
FANU
ANC 2(Sector 2)
SUMA
ANC 1(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3
FANUFANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANUFANU
The BTS has 2 sectors: − Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
a b
ANC 1
TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 1
a b
ANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4
Sector 2
1234123412341234123412341234
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900, or if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed
123123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 140: MBO1 - 2x1...4 Configuration
248 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.3 MBO1 - 3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 3x1...2 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2
ANC 1
The BTS has 3 sectors :
AIR
a b
ANC 1
TRE 1 2
ANC 2
( Sector 2 ) ( Sector 1 )
a b
ANC 2
TRE 1 2Sector 1 Sector 2
SUMA
ANC 3
( Sector 3 )
TRE1TRE2
FANU FANU FANU
a b
ANC 3
TRE 1 2Sector 3
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs − Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE1TRE2
On each ANC:The bridges can be removed at installationtime (on site), if maximum power is required
123123123123123123
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,otherwise: dummy panel is installed12
Dummy panels if no modules installed
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Figure 141: MBO1 - 3x1...2 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 249 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.4 MBO2 - 1x9...12The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x9...12 configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TRE
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
AIR
ANC 2
FANU FANU FANUTRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
911 10 12
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1ANYANY2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
123123123123123123ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if n>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed
123123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
PM12
Figure 142: MBO2 - 1x9...12 Configuration
250 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.5 MBO2 - 2x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO - 2x1...6 configuration.
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 2ANY
2
TRE5TRE6
AIR
AIR
The BTS has 2 sectors :
AIR
ANC 1a b
ANY 1
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANU
ANY1
AIR
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
( Sector 1 ) ( Sector 2 )
TRE5TRE6
SUMA
FANU FANU FANU
In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY isrequired. TREs 1 to TRE4 are then cabledon ANC
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC 2a b
ANY 2
TRE 1 3 2 4 5 6
123412341234123412341234
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123
123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Figure 143: MBO2 - 2x1...6 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 251 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.6 MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4configuration.
Note: Restrictions
None. for GSM 850.
The BTS has 2 sectors withrespectively n and p TREs
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TREAIR
FANU FANU FANUTRE9TRE10TRE11TRE12
911 10 12
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1(Sector 1)ANYANY
2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
ANC 2(Sector 2)
123123123123123123
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed12
12
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Figure 144: MBO2 - 1x1...8 + 1x1...4 Configuration
252 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.1.7 MBO2 - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x1...4 configuration.
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
a bANC 1
1 3 2 4
TRE2 TRE1
FANU
SUMA
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
ANC 3(Sector 3) ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
TRE4 TRE3
123123123123123
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p+q)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed
123123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Figure 145: MBO2 - 3x1...4 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 253 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.2 MBO Low Losses Configurations - GSM 900/1800/1900
2.12.2.1 MBO1 - 1x5...8 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x5...8 - Low Lossesconfiguration.
Note: Restrictions
For GSM 1900, the configuration is limited to six TREs.
The BTS has 1 sector with n TREs
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 3 2 4
ANC 2a b
TRE 5 7 6 8
Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
TRE8 TRE7
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE6 TRE5 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1ANC 2
1234123412341234123412341234
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if n>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed
1212
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Figure 146: MBO1 - 1x5...8 - Low Losses Configuration
254 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.2.2 MBO2 - 2x3...6 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x3...6 - Low Lossesconfiguration.
The BTS has 2 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 5
ANC 4a b
3 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 5
ANC 3a b
3 4
In each sector :Both ANCs are set to the samesector number
2 6
2 6
On each ANC:The two bridges will be removedat installation time (On site),if no more than 2 TREs areconnected to them, and keptotherwise.
FANU
SUMA
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
ANC 4(Sector 1)
FANU
TRE6 TRE5
FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
ANC 3(Sector 2)
FANU
123412341234123412341234
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed
12
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Figure 147: MBO2 - 2x3...6 - Low Losses Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 255 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.2.3 MBO2 - 3x3...4 Low LossesThe following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x3...4 - Low Lossesconfiguration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors :
ANC 1
a b
TRE 1 2
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC 2ANC 3(Sector 2)
SUMA
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
TRE3TRE4
ANC 4
ANC 4
a b
Per sector, both ANCs are setto the same sector number
TRE4
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
− Sector 3 with q TREs
TRE 3 4
Sector 1
ANC 2
a b
1 2
ANC 3
a b
3 4
Sector 2
ANC 5
a b
1 2
ANC 6
a b
3 4
Sector 3
(Sector 2)(Sector 1) (Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4ANC 6
(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2ANC 5
(Sector 3)
123412341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900and if (n+p+q)>6. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123
123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Figure 148: MBO2 - 3x3...4 - Low Losses Configuration
256 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.3 MBO High Power Configurations - GSM 900/1800
2.12.3.1 MBO1 - 1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...4 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.
The BTS has 1 sector
ANC 1
TRE 1 3 2 4
On site: on the ANC:Bridges can be removed if only2 TREs connected to the ANC
a b
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANU
TRE1TRE2
AIR
SUMA
TRE3
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Figure 149: MBO1 - 1x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 257 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.3.2 MBO1 - 2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 2x1...2 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.
a bANC 1
TRE 1 2
a bANC 2
TRE 1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors with up to 2 TREs each
On each ANC:Bridges will be removed atinstallation time, on site
Sector 1 Sector 2
TRE2
SUMA
FANU FANU
ANC 1(Sector 1)
ANC 2(Sector 2)
AIR
FANU
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
TRE1
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
FANU FANUFANU
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Figure 150: MBO1 - 2x1...2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
258 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.3.3 MBO1 - 3x2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 3x2 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.
TRE1
TRE1
FANU
ANC 2(Sector 2)
SUMA
ANC 1(Sector 1)
FANUFANU
AIR
TRE1
FANU FANUFANU
The BTS has 3 sectors with 2 TREs each
a b
ANC 1
TRE 1
Sector 1
a b
ANC 2
TRE 1
Sector 2
ANC 3(Sector 3)
a b
ANC 3
TRE 1
Sector 3
On each ANC:Bridges will be removed at installation time,on site
TRE2 TRE2
TRE2
2 2 2
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Figure 151: MBO1 - 3x2 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 259 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.3.4 MBO2 - 2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x1...4 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC 1
1 23 4
On site, and on each ANC:Bridges can be removed ifonly 2 TREs connected
a bANC 2
1 23 4
a b
SUMA
FANU FANU
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
TRE4
FANU FANU
ANC 2(Sector 2)
AIR
FANU
TRE2 TRE1
AIR
TRE4TRE3
FANU
TRE3
Empty space
PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed123
123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
FANU FANU FANU
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
12341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Figure 152: MBO2 - 2x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
2.12.3.5 MBO2 - 3x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x1...4 - High PowerGSM 900/1800 configuration.
The BTS has 3 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
a bANC 1 ANC 2 ANC 3
a b a b
FANU
SUMA
FANU
FANU FANU
ANC 1(Sector 1)
FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 2(Sector 2)
AIR
FANU
TRE1TRE2TRE2 TRE4 TRE3TRE1TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU FANU
ANC 3(Sector 3)
TRE4 TRE3TRE2 TRE1
TRE 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
123123123123123
Empty space
PM12 equipped if (n+p+q)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed123
123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
Available only on AC configuration
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Figure 153: MBO2 - 3x1...4 - High Power GSM 1800 Configuration
260 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4 MBO Multiband BTS Configurations - GSM 900/1800 and GSM900/1900
2.12.4.1 MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Multiband BTS:
The BTS has 2 sectors :
a bANC 1
TRE 1 3 2 4
a bANC 2
Sector 1 Sector 2
− Sector 1 with n TREs − Sector 2 with p TREs
TRE 1 3 2 4
TRE4 TRE3
TRE2 TRE1
FANU
ANC 2(Sector 2)
SUMA
ANC 1(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3
FANUFANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANUFANU
Empty space
PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed
123123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
1234123412341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 154: MBO1 - 1x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 261 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.2 MBO2 - 1x1...6/1x1...6The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...6/1x1...6 -Multiband BTS configuration.
Multiband BTS:
The BTS has 2 sectors :
ANC 1a b
ANY 1
TRE 1 23 4 5 6
In each sector :If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY is
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
required, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC
FANU
SUMA
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
ANY1
FANU
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
ANY2
ANC 2a b
ANY 2
TRE 1 23 4 5 6
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modules installed
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 155: MBO2 - 1x1...6/1x1...6 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.12.4.3 MBO2 - 1x1...8/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...8/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TREAIR
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
1 3 2 4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1(Sector 1)ANYANY
2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS:
In sector 1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 156: MBO2 - 1x1...8/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
262 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.4 MBO2 - 1x1...4/1x1...8The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...4/1x1...8 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 2 sectors:− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TREAIR
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
1 3 2 4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC 1(Sector 1)ANYANY
2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS:
In sector 1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 157: MBO2 - 1x1...4/1x1...8 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.12.4.5 MBO2 - 1x1...4/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...4/2x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 3 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 23 4
ANC 3a b
1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
Sector 1 Sector 2 Sector 3
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
Multiband BTS:
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 158: MBO2 - 1x1...4/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 263 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.6 MBO2 - 2x1...4/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x1...4/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 3 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 23 4
ANC 3a b
1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 159: MBO2 - 2x1...4/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.12.4.7 MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 4 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2ANC 4
(Sector 4)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 160: MBO2 - 1x1...4/...4,...2,...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
264 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.8 MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 4 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
Figure 161: MBO2 - ...4,...2,...2/1x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.12.4.9 MBO2 - 2x1...4/2x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x1...4/2x1...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 4 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 162: MBO2 - 2x1...4/2x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 265 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.10 MBO2 - 2x1...2/2x1...4The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x1...2/2x1...4 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 4 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4a b
1 2ANC 4(Sector 4)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 163: MBO2 - 2x1...2/2x1...4 - Multiband BTS Configuration
2.12.4.11 MBO2 - 2x1...3/2x1...3The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x1...3/2x1...3 -Multiband BTS configuration.
The BTS has 4 sectors :
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23
− Sector 1 with n TREs− Sector 2 with p TREs− Sector 3 with q TREs
FANU
SUMA
TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
Multiband BTS :
TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 3)
− Sector 4 with r TREs
ANC 4(Sector 4)
TRE3TRE3
3
ANC 4a b
1 23
FANU FANUFANU
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 164: MBO2 - 2x1...3/2x1...3 - Multiband BTS Configuration
266 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.4.12 MBO2 - 3x1...2/3x1...2The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x1...2/3x1...2 -Multiband BTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1
AIR
The BTS has 6 sectors :
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC 2ANC 4(Sector 4)
SUMA
TRE1TRE2
ANC 3
TRE2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1
ANC 2a b
1 2
Sector 2
ANC 3
a b
1 2
Sector 3
(Sector 2)(Sector 3) (Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4ANC 6
(Sector 6)
TRE1TRE2ANC 5
(Sector 5)
ANC 4a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 4
ANC 5a b
1 2
Sector 5
ANC 6
a b
1 2
Sector 6
Multiband BTS:ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
GSM 1800 / GSM 1900
Figure 165: MBO2 - 3x1...2/3x1...2 - Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 267 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.5 MBO Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM 900/1800
2.12.5.1 MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4) - MultibandCells configuration.
a bANC 1
TRE 1 3 2 4
a bANC 2
TRE 1 3 2 4
Multiband Cell:
The BTS has only 1 sector with:− n TREs in GSM 900 band− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number
TRE4 TRE3
TRE2 TRE1
FANU
ANC 2SUMA
ANC 1
TRE4 TRE3
FANUFANU
AIR
TRE2 TRE1
FANU FANUFANU
Empty space
PM12 equipped if (n+p)>6,otherwise: dummy panel is installed
123123
Dummy panels if no modules installed
GSM 1800
123412341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 166: MBO1 - 1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
268 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.5.2 MBO2 - 1x(...6/...6)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x(...6/...6) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
ANY 1
TRE 1 23 4 5 6On each ANC:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANY isrequired, TRE1 to TRE4 are thencabled on ANC
ANC 2a b
ANY 2
TRE 1 23 4 5 6
Multiband Cell:
The BTS has only 1 sector with:− p TREs in GSM 900 band− n TREs in GSM 1800 band
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number
FANU
SUMA
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1ANY1
FANU
TRE6 TRE5
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE4 TRE3 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2ANY2
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modules installed
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 167: MBO2 - 1x(...6/...6) - Multiband Cells Configuration
2.12.5.3 MBO2 - 1x(...8/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x(...8/...4) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TRE
On ANC1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC
The BTS has only 1 sector with− n TREs in GSM 900 band− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
Multiband Cell:
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number
AIR
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC1ANYANY2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
ANC 2
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
1 3 2 4
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 168: MBO2 - 1x(...8/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 269 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.5.4 MBO2 - 1x(...4/...8)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x(...4/...8) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
ANY 1 ANY 2
TRE 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 3 2 4On ANC1:If no more than 4 TREs, no ANYis required. TRE1 to 4 are thencabled on ANC
The BTS has only 1 sector with− p TREs in GSM 900 band− n TREs in GSM 1800 band
Multiband Cell:
ANC1 and ANC2 are set to the same sector number
AIR
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
FANU FANUFANU
FANUFANUFANU
TRE1TRE2TRE3TRE4
ANC1ANYANY2 1
TRE5TRE6
AIR
TRE7TRE8
SUMA
ANC 2
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 169: MBO2 - 1x(...4/...8) - Multiband Cells Configuration
2.12.5.5 MBO2 - 2x(...4/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x(...4/...2) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 4a b
1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 1800 band− p TREs in GSM 900 band
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band− r TREs in GSM 900 band
Multiband Cell:
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANUAIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 2) ANC 4
(Sector 2)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 170: MBO2 - 2x(...4/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
270 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.5.6 MBO2 - 2x(...2/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x(...2/...4) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 4a b
1 2
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 1800 band− p TREs in GSM 900 band
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band− r TREs in GSM 900 band
Multiband Cell:
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 1)
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 2) ANC 4
(Sector 2)
PM12
PM12
PM12
ADAM4
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 171: MBO2 - 2x(...2/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
2.12.5.7 MBO2 - 2x(...3/...3)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 2x(...3/...3) - MultibandCells configuration.
ANC 1a b
TRE1 23
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3a b
TRE 1 23
3
ANC 4a b
1 23
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 1800 band− p TREs in GSM 900 band
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 1800 band− r TREs in GSM 900 band
Multiband Cell:
FANU
SUMA
TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 1)
TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 2)
ANC 4(Sector 2)
TRE3TRE3
FANU FANUFANU
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 172: MBO2 - 2x(...3/...3) - Multiband Cells Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 271 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.5.8 MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4)- Multiband Cells configuration.
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 23 4
ANC 2a b
TRE 1 2
ANC 3a b
1 23 4
FANU
SUMA
TRE4 TRE3
FANU FANU
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 1(Sector 1)
AIR
FANU FANU FANU
TRE2 TRE1 TRE2 TRE1
ANC 2(Sector 2)
TRE4 TRE3
ANC 3(Sector 1) ANC 4
(Sector 2)
The BTS has 2 sectors :
Sector 1:− n TREs in GSM 900 band− p TREs in GSM 1800 band
Sector 2:− q TREs in GSM 900 band− r TREs in GSM 1800 band
Multiband Cell:
ANC 4a b
1 2
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 173: MBO2 - 1x(...2/...2),1x(...4/...4) - Multiband Cells Configuration
2.12.5.9 MBO2 - 3x(...2/...2)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x(...2/...2) - MultibandCells configuration.
On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
ANC 1a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 1
ANC 2a b
1 2
ANC 3
a b
1 2Sector 3
ANC 4a b
TRE 1 2
Sector 2
ANC 5a b
1 2
ANC 6
a b
1 2
Multiband Cell:
The BTS has 3 sectors :Sector 1: ANC1 + ANC2Sector 2: ANC3 + ANC4Sector 3: ANC5 + ANC6
Sector 2
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE1
AIR
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC 2ANC 4(Sector 2)
SUMA
TRE1TRE2
ANC 3
TRE2
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
(Sector 1)(Sector 2) (Sector 1)
TRE3TRE4ANC 6
(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE2ANC 5
(Sector 3)
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
GSM 1800
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 174: MBO2 - 3x(...2/...2) - Multiband Cells Configuration
272 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.6 MBO Multiband BTS, Multiband Cells Configurations - GSM850/1800/1900
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.
2.12.6.1 MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3 MultibandBTS configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3
AIR
The BTS has 6 sectors:
ANC 1
a b
TRE 1 3 2
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC 2ANC 4(Sector 4)
SUMA
TRE3TRE1
ANC 3
TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
Sector 1
ANC 2
a b
1 3 2
Sector 2
ANC 6
a b
1 3 2
Sector 3
(Sector 2)(Sector 3) (Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2ANC 6
(Sector 6)
TRE1TRE3ANC 5
(Sector 5)
123412341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,and if TREs (n+p+t)>3. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed123
123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
ANC 3
a b
TRE 1
Sector 4
ANC 4
a b
1
Sector 5
ANC 5
a b
1
Sector 6
GSM 850
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 175: MBO2 - 3x1/3x1...3 Multiband BTS Configuration
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 273 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.12.6.2 MBO2 - 3x(1/...3)The following figure shows the rack layout of the MBO2 - 3x(1/...3) MultibandCells configuration.
FANU FANUFANUTRE1TRE2TRE3
AIR
The BTS has 3 sectors:
ANC 1
a b
TRE 1 3 2
ANC 1
FANU FANU FANUTRE1TRE2
AIR
ANC 2ANC 4(Sector 2)
SUMA
TRE3TRE1
ANC 3
TRE1
FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU FANU
On each ANC:Bridges will be removedat installation time (on site)
Sector 1
ANC 2
a b
1 3 2
Sector 2
ANC 6
a b
1 3 2
Sector 3
(Sector 2)(Sector 1) (Sector 1)
TRE1TRE2ANC 6
(Sector 3)
TRE1TRE3ANC 5
(Sector 3)
123412341234123412341234
ADAM4
PM12
PM12
PM12
PM12
Empty space
123
Dummy panels if no modulesinstalled
ANC 3
a b
TRE 1
ANC 4
a b
1
ANC 5
a b
1
GSM 850
PM12 equipped if GSM 1900,and if TREs (n+p+t)>3. Otherwise:dummy panel is installed
The ANC can be replaced by the ANB in case of less than 3TRE s
Available only on AC configuration
Figure 176: MBO2 - 3x(1/...3) Multiband Cells Configuration
274 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Configurations Basedon Extension with Twin TRX
The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
Carriesrs per sectorCabinet Number of sectors
Single TRX -> Twin TRX
1 8 -> 12
2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)
MBO1
MBO1T
3 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4
1 12 -> 16
2 6/6 -> 8/8
MBO2
3 4/4/4 -> 6/6/6
2.13.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 275 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13.2 MBO1 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
276 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13.3 MBO1 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 277 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13.4 MBO2 - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
278 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13.5 MBO2 - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 279 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.13.6 MBO2 - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
280 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.14 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor EvolutionConfigurations with Single TRX
2.14.1 A9100 MBO1E 1 Sector
2.14.2 A9100 MBO1E 2 Sectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 281 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.14.3 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors
The following figure shows the MBO1E - 3 sectors with 3 TRE in one sector.
282 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.14.4 A9100 MBO2E 2 Sectors
2.14.5 A9100 MBO2E 3 Sectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 283 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.14.6 A9100 MBO2 4 Sectors
2.14.7 A9100 MBO2 6 Sectors
284 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.15 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor Evolution MixedConfigurations Based on Extension with Twin TRX
The following table gives the possible configuration extension based on TwinTRX modules.
Carriesrs per sectorCabinet Number of sectors
Single TRX -> Twin TRX
1 8 -> 12
2 4/4 ->4/6(6/6*)
MBO1E
3 2/2/2 -> 4/4/4
1 n.a.
2 8/6 -> 12/12
MBO2E
3 4/4/4 -> 8/8/8
2.15.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 285 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.15.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
286 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.15.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 287 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.15.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
288 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.15.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors mixed configuration Single/Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 289 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16 Multistandard Base Station Outdoor EvolutionConfigurations with Twin TRX
2.16.1 Introduction
The following table gives the Twin TRX configurations.
Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E
Carriers per sector
MBO2E
Carriers per sector
Capacity Mode 1 8 8
2 6/6 8/8
3 4/4/4 8/8/8
4 2/2/2/2 6/6/6/6
1 12 16
2 6/6 12/12
Capacity Mode Low Loss
3 - 8/8/8
1 6 + 6 12 + 12
2 2/2 + 2/2 6/6 + 6/6
Multiband & MultibandCell
3 - 4/4/4 + 4/4/4
1 4 4
2 2/2 4/4
Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div.
3 2/2/2 4/4/4
1 2 2
2 2/2 2/2
Coverage Mode TxDiv.2Rx Div. Low Loss
3 - 2/2/2
1 2 2
2 2/2 2/2
Coverage Mode TxDiv.4Rx Div.
3 - 2/2/2
290 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
Twin Mode Number of sectors MBO1E
Carriers per sector
MBO2E
Carriers per sector
Extended Cell 1 In, 1 Out 4+4 8+8
Extended Cell TxDiv,4RX Div for outer cell
1 In, 1 Out 4+2 8+2
Table 7: Twin TRX Configurations
2.16.2 Transceiver Module
TRM stands for TRansceiver Module and it can be:
Twin module (TGT09 TGT18), or
Single module (TRAG TAGH TRAD TRAP TRAL TADH)
The twin module can operate as:
One TRM for two TRE, and two TRX in capacity mode
One TRM for one TRE, and one TRX in Tx Div mode.
TRX 1a
TRX 1b
TRM TRX 1
Capacity Mode Tx Div Mode
Figure 177: Twin Module Modes
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 291 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.3 Cabling Information
2.16.3.1 Standard ConfigurationThe following symbol
is equivalent with
Figure 178: Up to 4 TREs
or
292 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
Figure 179: Up to 4 TREs
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 293 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
The following symbol
is equivalent with
Figure 180: Up to 6 TREs
294 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
The following symbol
is equivalent with
Figure 181: Up to 8 TREs
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 295 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.3.2 Tx Div 2Rx Div ConfigurationsThe following symbol
is equivalent with
296 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.3.3 Tx Div 4Rx Div ConfigurationsThe following symbol
is equivalent with
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 297 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4 Capacity Mode
2.16.4.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
298 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.2 MBO1E - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 299 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX
300 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.4 MBO1 - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 301 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.5 MBO2E - 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
302 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.6 MBO2E - 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 303 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.7 MBO2E - 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX
304 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.8 MBO1E - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 305 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.4.9 MBO2E - 4 Sectors with Twin-TRX
306 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.5 Capacity Mode Low Loss
2.16.5.1 MBO1 - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 307 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.5.2 MBO2E - 1 Sector Low Loss with Twin-TRX
308 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.5.3 MBO1E - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 309 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.5.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
310 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.5.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 311 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.6 Multiband & Multiband Cell
2.16.6.1 MBO1E - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz
312 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.6.2 MBO1E - Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 313 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.6.3 MBO2E - Multiband 1 + 1 Sector with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 2 sectors with n and p TRX
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz
314 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.6.4 MBO2E - Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 4 sectors with n and q TRX in 900 MHz plusp and r TRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1 sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz and 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 315 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.6.5 MBO2E - Multiband 3 + 3 Sectors with Twin-TRX
Multiband BTS: The BTS has 6 sectors with n,q,s TRX in 900 MHz plus p,r,tTRX in 1800 MHz
Multiband Cell: The BTS has 1sector with n TRX in 900 MHz and p TRX in1800 MHz plus 1 sector with q TRX in 900 MHz and r TRX in 1800 MHz plus 1sector with s TRX in 900 MHz and t TRX in 1800 MHz
316 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.7 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div.
2.16.7.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 317 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.7.2 MBO1E - Multiband 2 + 2 Sectors with Twin-TRX
2.16.7.3 MBO1E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
318 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.7.4 MBO2E - 1 Sector TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
2.16.7.5 MBO2E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 319 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.7.6 MBO2E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 2RX with Twin-TRX
320 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.8 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 2Rx Div. Low Loss
2.16.8.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 321 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.8.2 MBO2E - 1 Sector TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
322 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.8.3 MBO1E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 323 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.8.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
324 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.8.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity Low Loss with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 325 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.9 Coverage Mode TxDiv. 4Rx Div.
2.16.9.1 MBO1E - 1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
326 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.9.2 MBO2E - 1 Sector TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 327 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.9.3 MBO1E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
328 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.9.4 MBO2E - 2 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 329 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.9.5 MBO2E - 3 Sectors TX Diversity 4RX with Twin-TRX
330 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.10 Extended Cell
2.16.10.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 331 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.10.2 MBO2E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX
332 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
2.16.11 Extended Cell TxDiv, 4RX Div for outer cell
2.16.11.1 MBO1E - Extended Cell TX Diversity 4 RX with Twin-TRX
2.16.11.2 MBO2E - Extended Cell with Twin-TRX
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 333 / 910
2 Configurations - Rack Layouts
334 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3 Indoor Cabinets
This chapter describes the indoor cabinets used in BTS A9100 configurations.
The descriptions are supported with diagrams and illustrations, wherenecessary.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 335 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1 CIMI/CIDIThe CIMI and CIDI are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. The following figure shows the position ofthe main modules.
Air Inlet
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Interconnection Panel
Top FANUs
Air Inlet
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Interconnection Panel
CIMI CIDI
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 2
STASR 1
Figure 182: CIMI/CIDI Module Positions
Both cabinets are designed to house two STASRs.
In the CIMI, the upper subrack (STASR2) contains the SUM and may containTRE and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain TREand/or AN modules.
In the CIDI, the upper subrack (STASR2) can contain the SUM, the microwaveequipment and/or AN modules. The lower subrack (STASR1) can contain theSUM and/or TRE modules.
336 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.1 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Access and Features
The following figure shows the CIMI/CIDI equipped with the interconnectionpanel and two empty subracks.
Perforated Door Strips
Subrack
EMC Gasket (CIMI only)
Interconnection Area
Adjustable Feet
Perforated Cover contains FANUs (CIMI only).
RF Interface
Equipment Label
Dust Filter (CIDI only)
Figure 183: CIMI/CIDI Equipped with Empty Subracks
3.1.1.1 ConstructionThe CIMI/CIDI is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on itsunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet hasno side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the topof the cabinet.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment complywith IEC 297 standards.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 337 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.1.2 DoorThe CIMI/CIDI can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet. In the CIMI, the door isfitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed. Anoptional dust filter can be fitted to the CIDI door. The filter is removable forcleaning.
3.1.1.3 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnectionpanel. The external cables include the DC supply and Abis connections. Theantenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link the subracks together; see thefollowing figure. In the CIMI, the top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP(refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3)) for more information). In the CIDI, thecable terminates at the rear connector of the top subrack. The bottom endterminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) formore information).
Rear Front
Ribbon Cable
TFBP (CIMI only)
BTSRI
Subrack
Subrack
Figure 184: CIMI/CIDI Subracks Interconnection Cable
338 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.1.4 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the CIMI, showing antenna connectorsand the fan cover. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans areinstalled and removed via the front of the cabinet.
The CIDI cabinet differs in that it requires no top fans and no Top FanBackplane. The cabinet has a perforated top cover.
Antenna Connectors
Top Fan BackplaneTop Fans (x6)
Interconnection Panel
Fan Cover
Front
Ground Bolt
DC Filter Connectors
Antenna Connectors
Sector n/A
Sector n/B
Sector p/A
Sector p/B
Sector q/A
Sector q/B
Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs.A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas.
Note:
Sector r/A
Sector r/B
Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.
Figure 185: CIMI/CIDI Top View
The antennas are connected to RF connectors in a recess at the top of thecabinet. An M8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet toground. Any unequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.
3.1.1.5 CoolingThe CIMI is air cooled by fans, both inside the cabinet and at the top. Cool air isdrawn-in through perforations on the door and is then forced up, through thesubracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled through perforations atthe top of the cabinet.
The CIDI is cooled by fans inside the cabinet only, it does not require top fans.Refer to Temperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling systemhardware.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 339 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.2 CIMI/CIDI Cabinet Interconnection Panel
All the external electrical interfaces are located on a panel at the top of thecabinet; see the following figure.
Abis Interface Group
External Input/Output Interface Group
External Clock Interface Group
Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1
Abis Relays
XB
CB
XG
PS
XC
LK1
In
XC
LK2
In/O
ut
XC
LK1
Out
XIO Interface Connectors
Krone Strip
DC Filter Connectors
Equipment Labels
XR
T
XGND GND
Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area(DCBREAK)
Interconnection Area (BTSCA)
For details see below
CIMI DC Variant CIDI DC Variant
ConnectorsDC Filter
0V−48V
0
I
0
I
0
I
SR1 SR2INT
Circuit Breakers
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
Equipment Labels
Circuit Breakers
0V−48V
0
I
0
I
SR1
BTSINT
0
I
SR2
Figure 186: CIMI/CIDI Interconnection Panel
On the left-hand side (see the previous figure) is the interconnection area(BTSCA); the shaded areas identify separate groups of connectors. The powersupply input-connectors and circuit breakers are located on the right-hand side.All interfaces are overvoltage protected.
Located behind the interconnection area is an External Input/Output Board.The XIOB is connected to the interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DCconverter and interface circuitry for external alarms.
The interconnection panel provides interfaces for the:
XIO, external clock, and Abis signals
DC supplies.
340 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.3 CIMI/CIDI Signal Interfaces
The CIMI/CIDI have XIO, external clock and Abis signal interfaces. Theconnectors and functions for each of these interfaces are described, as well asthe external alarm inputs.
3.1.3.1 XIO InterfaceThe XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connectedto the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well aselectro-mechanical switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be usedon the XIO connectors. The positions of the XIO connectors are shownin Figure 186.
A detailed view of the XIO connectors is given in the following figure.
XI1
GN
DX
I2G
ND
XI3
GN
DX
I4G
ND
XI5
GN
DX
I6G
ND
XI7
GN
DX
I8G
ND
XI9
GN
DX
I10
GN
DXI
11G
ND
XI1
2G
ND
XI1
3G
ND
XI1
4G
ND
XI1
5G
ND
XI1
6G
ND
XI1
7G
ND
XI1
8G
ND
XI1
9G
ND
XI2
0G
ND
XI21
GN
DX
I22
GN
DX
I23
GN
DX
I24
GN
D
+2
4V
+2
4V
+2
4V
+2
4V
X01
X02
X03
X04
X05
X06
X07
X08
X G
ND
X G
ND
X G
ND
X G
ND
External Alarm Inputs
ExternalAlarm Outputs
XIO 1
XIO 2
XIO 3
XIO 4
Figure 187: BTS A9100 Indoor XIO Interface Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 341 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The XIO connectors are described in functional groups in the following table.
External Alarm Inputs Connectors XIO 1 to XIO 3 provide an interfacefor connecting 24 external alarm inputs. Eachinput alarm is reported to the OMC-R where itis mapped to customer-defined ASCII text. TheASCII text describes the particular alarm.
Each alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the XIO connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm isgenerated.
External Alarm Outputs Connector XIO 4 provides an interface for theSUM to control eight external alarm devices.This feature is for future use. The SUM isdescribed in Station Unit Modules (Section 8).
+ 24 VDC Supply Connector XIO 4 provides a + 24 VDC powersource for external alarm devices that require apower supply.
XGND The XGND connector is used when attachingthe external alarm 24 VDC ground to theBTS A9100 ground. If the connector pins arenot short-circuited (open loop), the input andoutput alarms are isolated from the BTS A9100ground.
Table 8: BTS A9100 Indoor XIO Interface Connectors (Functional Groups)
342 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.3.2 External Alarm InputsThe following table gives a detailed view of the external alarm inputs.
Alarm Description Alarm Connection Alarm Generation
Alarm number XIO Input Alarm Class
1 1 9 No Outside
2 2 9 Yes Outside
3 3 9 No Outside
4 4 9 No Outside
5 5 9 No Outside
6 6 9 No Outside
7 7 9 No Outside
8 8 9 Yes Outside
9 9 9 Yes Outside
10 10 9 Yes Outside
11 11 9 Yes Outside
12 12 9 Yes Outside
13 13 9 Yes Outside
14 14 9 Yes Outside
15 15 9 Yes Outside
16 16 9 Yes Outside
17 17 9 Yes Outside
18 18 9 Yes Outside
19 19 9 Yes Outside
20 20 9 Yes Outside
21 21 9 Yes Outside
22 22 9 Yes Outside
23 23 9 Yes Outside
24 24 9 Yes Outside
Table 9: BTS A9100 Indoor External Alarm Inputs
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 343 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.3.3 External Clock InterfaceThe external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions (seeFigure 186). The connectors are described in the following table.
XBCB The XBCB connector provides an external interface to the BCB.Certain external control functions can be implemented via theXBCB connector:
RI
Power supply status
Battery status
Additional Input/Output signals.
The BTS A9100 does not have to be powered up whenaccessing the Remote Inventory function.
XRT The XRT connector provides access to the BTS A9100 via anasynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conform toCCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be used forradio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rate isprogrammable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. The XRTInterface is controlled by the SUM.
XGPS The XGPS connector provides an asynchronous serial interface.This controls and supervises an external GPS receiver.The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. The data rate isprogrammable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. This interfacecan also be used to synchronize the BTS A9100 to the GPSreceiver. The synchronizing signal conforms to RS-422. TheXGPS Interface is controlled by the SUM.
XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the BTS A9100to another BTS, which can be a G1 BTS, a G2 BTS or a BTSA9100. The signaling interface conforms to RS-422. The XCLK1In and XCLK1 Out are connected together, pin-to-pin. TheXCLK2 In/Out connector provides a bi-directional clock interface.The XCLK Interface is controlled by the SUM.
Table 10: BTS A9100 External Clock Interface Connectors
344 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.3.4 Abis InterfaceThe Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions (see Figure186). The interface consists of the connectors described in the following table.
Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the BTS A9100 tothe BSC. There are four connectors, these areAbis 1, 2, 3 and 4. All the connectors provide120 and 75 impedances. The impedance isselected by the type of cable connector pluggedinto the interface. For 120 cable connectionthe CA01 cable should be used, for 75 cableconnection the CA02 cable should be used.
Note: Only Abis 1 and 2 are currently used;Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use.
Krone Strip Connector When the Krone connector is used for Abisconnection, depending on the cable impedance,the following remarks must be taken intoaccount:
If 120 cables are used the SP2M
connector must be removed from the Abisconnectors
If 75 cables are used the SP2M connector
must be plugged into the Abis connectors.
The Krone strip supports an overvoltageprotection device and an Abis monitoringdevice. The overvoltage protection device is a’make-before-break’ type. This means there isno interruption of service during insertion andremoval.
Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, arecontrolled by the SUM. The relays can be usedto:
Perform loop-back tests on the individual
Abis Interfaces.
Provide transparent routing of the Abis trafficwhen the BTS A9100 is powered down or
faulty. This ensures that the Abis connectionis not broken in multidrop configurations.
Table 11: BTS A9100 Abis Interface Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 345 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.4 CIMI/CIDI DC Supplies Interface
The external power supply inputs to the CIMI/CIDI are located at the top of thecabinet (see Figure 186). The components are listed in the following table.
DC Filters In CIMI there are two DC filter connectors; onefor the 0 V input and one for the -48/-60 VDCinput.
CIDI requires only a single filter in the -48/-60VDC line. The 0 V input connector consists ofan M8 bolt.
Circuit Breakers Three hydraulic-magnet type DC circuitbreakers protect the CIMI/CIDI equipmentfrom overload. Each subrack power supply isprotected by a separate circuit breaker. TheXIOB (which includes the interconnection area)and the top fan backplane share the thirdbreaker (see CIMI/CIDI Power Supply andGrounding (Section 3.1.5)).
Table 12: CIMI/CIDI, DC Supplies Interface
346 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.5 CIMI/CIDI Power Supply and Grounding
The CIMI/CIDI is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source. Power isdistributed to the cabinet via:
One filtered and one unfiltered input connector for CIDI
Two filtered input connectors for CIMI.
As shown in the figure below.
Top Fan Backplane
XIOB
STASR1
STASR2
0 VDC Filter −48/−60 VDC Filter
Circuit Breakers
2 1
25 A
25 A
5 A
Ground DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel(M8 Bolt)
(CIMI only)
Figure 188: CIMI/CIDI DC Power Interconnections
Each subrack has:
A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIOB and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 347 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Item Component/Rating
0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A.
Circuit Breakers 1 and 2 25 A
Circuit Breaker 3 5 A
Table 13: CIMI/CIDI Power Component Ratings
The CIMI/CIDI is EMC protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMI/CIDI is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top ofthe cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried tothe subracks via the cabinet bus bar. A functionally identical alternative to thecabinet bus bar is used in later models of CIMI. This is a branched cableform.The CIDI uses a bus bar for this purpose.
The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks andother CIMI/CIDI equipment.
348 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.6 CIMI/CIDI Cables and Cable Sets
This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 CIMI/CIDIconfigurations.
For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables see CableDescriptions (Section 17).
For some of the cables and cable sets there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet refer to its parts list.
3.1.6.1 Internal CablesThe CIMI/CIDI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable setslisted in the following table.
Table 15 lists and describes the cables that comprise the cable sets.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
BTSRIMI The BTSRIMI is a flat cable and Printed Circuit Board. It interconnectsthe subrack backplanes (and the TFBP in case of CIMI). A BTSRIboard is permanently attached to one end of the cable.
3BK 07720
BUMI The BUMI is a branched cableform. It contains cables for the DCpower connections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
3BK 07763
CA-ADCO Cable Assembly - Alarm Disable Connector disables eight alarminputs. It connects to an XIO connector on the Interconnection Panel.
3BK 07953
CIMI bus bar The CIMI bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC powerconnections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
3BK 07763
CS02 Cable Set 02 is an Antenna Network cable set. It connects an ANY toanother ANY or to an ANX/ANC.
3BK 07598
CS03 Cable Set 03 is a TRE cable set which connects a TRE to anANX/ANC or ANY.
3BK 07599
CS04 Cable Set 04 is an Antenna cable set. It connects an ANX/ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.
3BK 07600
CS05 Cable Set 05 is the BTS Connection Area to SUM cable set. Ina CIMI it interconnects the SUM and the Interconnection Panel.The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, and clock andcontrol signals to and from the SUM.
3BK 07199
Table 14: CIMI/CIDI Internal Cables
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 349 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.6.2 Cable SetsThe cable sets used in the CIMI/CIDE cabinets are described in the table below.
Cable Set Cable Description Part Number Quantity
RXRC The Receiver Radio Frequency Cableconnects an ANY RX connector to an ANX oranother ANY RX connector.
3BK 07920 2CS02
TXRC The Transmitter Radio Frequency Cableconnects an ANY TX connector to an ANX oranother ANY TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
RXRC RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to anANY, ANX or ANC RX connector.
3BK 07920 2CS03
TXRC TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to anANY, ANX or ANC TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS04 ANIC The Antenna Indoor Cable provides a duplexconnection between the ANX/ANC and acabinet antenna connector.
3BK 07921 2
CA-ABIS The Cable Assembly - Abis BTSCA-SUMCable carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces from theInterconnection Panel to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1CS05
CA-BTSCA The Cable Assembly - BTSCA-SUM FlatCable carries clock and control signalsbetween the Interconnection Panel and theSUM.
3BK 07923 1
Table 15: CIMI/CIDI Cable Sets
350 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.6.3 External CablesThe CIMI/CIDI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed anddescribed in the following table.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
Antenna Jumper Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m / 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16straight male connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antennacables.
3BK 05360
CA01 Cable Assembly 01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 andAbis2 connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Paneland the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07594
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desiredlength. The cable used is L907, an 8 pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120
PCM cable.
1AC 013280004
CA02 Cable Assembly 02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 andAbis2 connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Paneland the customer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07595
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multi-coaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.
1AC 001100011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE The Cable Assembly - Cable BTS Terminal is the BTS Terminalcable. It connects the BTS Terminal to the BTS Terminal connectoron the SUM.
3BK 07951
CA-GC35 The Cable Assembly - Ground Cable 35 mm sq. is the cabinet groundcable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt on the cabinet, and to thecustomer’s ground point.
3BK 08031
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq., yellow/green power cable.
1AC 017230003
CA-PC2W16 Cable Assembly - Power Cable Two Wires 16 mm sq. is a -48/ 0VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the DC connectors on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s DC power source.
3BK 08029
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq.black power cable.
1AC 001470001 (Blue)
1AC 001470002 (Black)
CA-PC35BK Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Black is a 0 VDCcabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDC connector on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s 0 VDC power source.
3BK 08030
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.
1AC 017230001
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 351 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
Mnemonic Description Part Number
Cable Assembly - Power Cable 35 mm sq. Blue is a -48 VDCcabinet power cable. It connects to the -48 VDC connector on theInterconnection Panel, and to the customer’s -48 VDC power source.
3BK 08032CA- PC35BL
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.
1AC 017230002
External Alarms This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.
1AC 013280001
SCG2/3 Synchronization Cable Generation 2/3 is a clock synchronizationcable. It connects a G2 BTS to the BTS A9100.
3BK 08101
SCG3 Synchronization Cable Generation 3 is a clock synchronization cable.It connects a BTS A9100 to another BTS A9100.
3BK 07950
SCM1/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. Itconnects a G1 BTS Mark1 to the BTS A9100.
3BK 08102
SCM2/3 Synchronization Cable Mark 2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. Itconnects a G1 BTS Mark2 to the BTS A9100.
3BK 08103
Table 16: CIMI/CIDI External Cables
352 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.1.7 CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables.
TFBP
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
BTSRI
BTSRIMI
CA01/02
BTSCA
CS05
SUM
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3
CA−ADCO
DC
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK, CA PC35BL
CA−CBTE
(CIMI only)
Figure 189: CIMI/CIDI Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 353 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2 CIMA/CIDEThe CIMA/CIDE are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. There are two variants, where the allowedconfigurations are determined by the type of external power supply usedby the cabinet:
DC power supply variant
AC power supply variant.
The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.
Air Inlet
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Up to 4 TREs
ANs
SUM and ANs
Connector AreaTop FANUs
Dummy Panel
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Power control modules
SUM and ANs
Connector Area
Top FANUs
Air Inlet
Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray
DC variant AC variant
STASR 5
STASR 4
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
ASIB
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
CIDE CIDE
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 4 TREs
CIMA CIMA
Air Inlet
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave
Modules
SUM, ANYs and ANCs
Connector Area
STASR 5
STASR 4
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 4 TREs or ANs
Up to 4 TREs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Connector Area
Batteries Fitted into special Battery Tray or another STASR fitted
with TREs *)
STASR 4
STASR 3
STASR 2
Up to 4 TREs
Dummy Panel
Up to 4 TREs
Air Inlet
FANUs
ADAM, 3 PM12s, SUM, ANC
STASR 1
FANUs
Air Inlet
Up to 2 ANCs and up to 2 Microwave
Modules
* ) If TREs are installed FANUs are installed under this STASR instead of over it.
Figure 190: CIMA/CIDE Module Positions
354 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.1 DC Power Supply Variant
The DC variant of the cabinet is designed to house up to five STASRs. Theodd-numbered subrack positions (1, 3 and 5) each contain up to four TREs.STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules, asrequired. STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules,as well as microwave communications modules.
Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numberedsubracks and, in the CIMA, also at the top of the cabinet.
3.2.2 AC Power Supply Variant
The AC variant of the CIMA is designed to house up to three STASRs and anASIB subrack. The odd-numbered subrack positions (1 and 3) each containup to four TREs. STASR2 contains the SUM and a mixture of ANX and ANYmodules, as required.
The battery tray in the bottom of the cabinet can contain a BU41 or a BU100,in the CIMA, Subrack 4 is an ASIB subrack containing the AC power controlmodules.
The AC variant of the CIDE uses a backup battery which can be housedinternally or externally:
If an internal battery is used, the CIDE holds four STASRs. STASR1
contains the SUM, three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR2 and 4 eachcontain up to four TREs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs, and optionally,
up to two microwave communications modules
If an external battery is used, the CIDE holds five STASRs. The battery tray
at the bottom of CIDE is replaced by a STASR which contains up to four
additional TREs. In this case FANUs are installed under this STASR.
Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subrackscontaining TREs and the power control subrack.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 355 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.3 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Access and Features
The following figure shows the CIMA/CIDE equipped with the interconnectionpanel and five empty subracks.
Top Cover
Perforated Door Strips
STASR
EMC Gasket (CIMA only)
Interconnection Area
Adjustable Feet
RF InterfaceRF Interface
Equipment Label
Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU41 or BU100.
Note that the AC variant uses an ASIB to replace the top STASR.
Figure 191: CIMA/CIDE Equipped with Empty Subracks
356 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.3.1 ConstructionThe CIMA/CIDE is a steel box construction with four adjustable feet, on itsunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinet hasno side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or the topof the cabinet.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment complywith IEC 297 standards.
3.2.3.2 DoorThe CIMA/CIDE can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet and, in the CIMA, isfitted with a copper-beryllium gasket to ensure EMC integrity when closed.
3.2.3.3 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna, are connected to the interconnectionpanel. The external cables include the AC or DC supply and Abis connections.The antenna cabling is connected at the top of the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; seethe following figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (CIMAonly - refer to Top Fan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottomend terminates on the BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5)for more information). If an internal battery is used in the AC Variant, theribbon cable also connects to the RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) formore information).
Rear Front
Ribbon Cable
TFBP
BTSRI
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Rear Front
Ribbon Cable
TFBP Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
DC variant AC variant
Subrack or Battery Tray
(CIMA only) (CIMA only)
BTSRI
RIBAT in Case of Battery (CIDE only)
Figure 192: CIMA/CIDE Subracks Interconnection Cable
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 357 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.3.4 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the CIMA, showing antenna connectorsand the fan cover. The cover is cut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans areinstalled and removed via the front of the cabinet.
Antenna Connectors
Top Fan BackplaneTop Fans (x6)
Interconnection Panel
Fan Cover
Front
Ground Bolt
AC or DC Filter Connectors, depending on CIMA variant
Antenna Connectors
Sector n/A
Sector n/B
Sector p/A
Sector p/B
Sector q/A
Sector q/B
Sector r/A
Sector r/B
Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs.A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas.
Note:
Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.
Figure 193: CIMA Top View
The following figure is a top view of the CIDE. The CIDE has no top fans,just a perforated top cover.
Interconnection Panel
Top Cover
Front
Ground Bolt
DC Filter Connectors
Antenna Connectors Antenna
Connectors
Sector n/A
Sector n/B
Sector p/A
Sector p/B
Sector q/A
Sector q/B
Sector r/A
Sector r/B
AC MainsFilterTerminals
DC Output Connector
Sector n/p/q/r means the sector with n/p/q/r TREs.A and B are numbering conventions of the antennas.
Note:
Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.
Figure 194: CIDE Top View
The antennae are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. AnM8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Anyunequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.
The CIDE AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to the antennaconnectors on the left side. The filter has terminals for connection to a 230VAC 1Ø supply.
358 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.3.5 CoolingThe CIMA/CIDE is air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and, in the CIMA,additionally at the top. Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door andis then forced up, through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air isexpelled through perforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer toTemperature Control (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware.
3.2.4 CIMA/CIDE Cabinet Interconnection Panel
All the external electrical interfaces are located on a front-facing panel at thetop of the cabinet. The following figure shows the details of the CIMA/CIDEDC and AC variants.
The exception is the CIDE AC mains input, which is located in the cabinet roof.AC mains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter. The filter is locatednext to the antenna connectors, see Figure 194.
Abis Interface Group
External Input/Output Interface Group
External Clock Interface Group
Abis 4 Abis 3 Abis 2 Abis 1
Abis Relays
XB
CB
XG
PS
XC
LK1
In
XC
LK2
In/O
ut
XC
LK1
Out
XIO Interface Connectors
Krone Strip
DC Filter Connectors
Equipment LabelsX
RT
XGND GND
External Battery
AC Input
−48V
0VL
External DC
DC Output
N
+EXT.BATTERY_
Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area(DCBREAK)
Interconnection Area (BTSCA)
For details see below
CIMA DC Variant CIMA AC Variant CIDE DC & AC Variant
DC Output (−48 V) ConnectorsDC Filter
0V−48V DC OUT 200 W max
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5INT &DC OUT
Circuit Breakers
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
I
0V−48V
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
SR1
BTSINT
Equipment Labels
Circuit Breakers
0
I
SR2
SR3
SR4
SR5
EXTERN DC
DC OUT−48 V/200 W max
Figure 195: CIMA/CIDE Interconnection Panel, DC and AC Variants
On the left-hand side of the Interconnection Panel (see the previous figure)is the interconnection area; the shaded areas identify separate groups ofconnectors. The power supply input-connectors and circuit breakers arelocated on the right-hand side.
Located behind the interconnection area is an XIOB. The XIOB is connected tothe interconnection area and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interfacecircuitry for external alarms.
The interconnection panel provides interfaces for:
XIO, external clock and Abis signals
External power supplies for both DC and AC variants.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 359 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.5 CIMA/CIDE Signal Interfaces
The three CIMA/CIDE signal interfaces are described below.
XIO Interface The XIO connectors allow various external alarm devices to beconnected to the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flooddetectors, as well as electro-mechanical switches. Crimped orclamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors. Thepositions of the XIO connectors are shown in Figure 195.
A detailed view of the XIO connectors is given in Figure 187.
The XIO connectors are described in functional groups in Table 8.
Table 9 gives a detailed view of the eternal alarm inputs.
External Clock Interface The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety offunctions; see Figure 195. The connectors are described in Table10.
Abis Interface The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions;see Figure 195. The interface consists of the connectors describedin Table 11.
360 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.6 CIMA/CIDE External Power Supply Interfaces
The external power supply interfaces for the CIMA/CIDE AC and DC variantsare described below.
3.2.6.1 CIMA DC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to theright of the interconnection area; see Figure 195. The components are listed inthe following table.
DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/-60 VDC input.
Circuit Breakers Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protectthe CIMA equipment from overload. Each subrackpower supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker.The XIOB (which includes the interconnection area)and the top fan backplane share the sixth breaker (seeFigure 196).
Table 17: CIMA, DC Power Supply Interface
3.2.6.2 CIMA AC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIMA are located on a panel to theright of the interconnection area; see Figure 195. The components are listed inthe following table.
AC Filter There is one AC filter connector, for the 230 VAC 1Øinput.
DC Filter There is one DC filter connector, for the -48/-60 VDCoutput.
Circuit Breaker One hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breaker protectsthe CIMA equipment from overload.
The CIMA power supply system for the AC variant isdescribed in Figure 197.
DC Output A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at200 W max.
Table 18: CIMA, AC Power Supply Interface
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 361 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.6.3 CIDE DC and AC Variant InterfaceThe external power supply inputs to the CIDE are located on top of an ACmains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet; see Figure 194. The componentsare listed in the following table.
AC Filter There is one AC filter connector, for the 230 VAC 1Øinput.
DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/-60 VDC input.
Circuit Breakers Six hydraulic-magnet type DC circuit breakers protectthe CIDE equipment from overload. Each subrackpower supply is protected by a separate circuit breaker.See Figures 196 and 198.
DC Output A 9-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at200 W max. to two optional Microwave CommunicationModules.
Table 19: CIDE, DC and AC Power Supply Interface
362 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.7 CIMA/CIDE Power Supply and Grounding
3.2.7.1 CIMA/CIDE DC VariantThe CIMA/CIDE is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source.Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors; see thefollowing figure.
Top Fan Backplane
XIOB
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 4
STASR 5
0 VDC Filter −48/−60 VDC Filter
Circuit Breakers
6 5 4 3 2 1
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
5 A
Ground DC Supply Part of Interconnection Panel(M8 Bolt)
(CIMA only)
DC Output−48 V / 200 Wmax (CIDE only)
Figure 196: CIMA/CIDE DC Power Interconnections
Each subrack has:
A filtered input of -48/-60 VDC
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIOB and TFBP (CIMA only) have the same inputs as the subracks.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 363 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Item Component/Rating
0 and -48/-60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A.
Circuit Breakers 1 - 5 25 A
Circuit Breaker 6 5 A
Table 20: CIMA/CIDE Power Component Ratings
The CIMA/CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMA/CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on topof the cabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carriedto the subracks via the cabinet bus bar. In the CIMA, a functionally identicalalternative to the cabinet bus bar is used in the AC variant and the later DCvariant of CIMA. This is a branched cableform.
The bus bar (or cableform) also distributes the DC voltages to the subracksand other CIMA/CIDE equipment.
364 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.7.2 CIMA AC VariantThe following figure shows the power supply distribution for the CIMA ACvariant.
ASIB
AFIP
APOD
AC Input
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
ACRI
DC Bus
AlarmsControl
BCB
To/From FANUs
* BU41 or BU100
Top Fan Backplane
XIOB
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 3
STASR 4
Circuit Breakers
6 5 4 3 2 1
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
5 A 5 A
APODGround(M8 Bolt)
ABAC
Shunt
External −48 VDC 200 W
AFIP
* External Battery
−48 VDC
0 VDC
* Only one battery possible
0 VDC −48 VDC
0 VDC (M6 Bolt)
GND
Shunt
Figure 197: CIMA AC Variant Power Supply System
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 365 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AFIP, whereit is filtered and passed to the APOD. The APOD is located in the ASIB andcontains an AC circuit breaker used to isolate the AC input supply.
The ASIB contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to APOD (Section 12.11) and
PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the APOD and the
PM08s, respectively. Up to five PM08s are used in the CIMA; these arePM08/5 to PM08/1
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Referto BCU1 (Section 12.16), ABAC (Section 12.20), BU41 (Section 12.24),
BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of BCU1 and the ABAC, and
the optional items BU41 and BU100, respectively.
The DC supply produced in the ASIB is connected to the remaining modules inthe CIMA via the circuit breakers located on the APOD.
The CIMA is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIMA is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a branched cableform. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.
366 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.7.3 CIDE AC VariantThe following figure shows the power supply distribution for the AC variant. Thepresence of the battery depends on the power supply option selected:
CIDE without backup battery
CIDE with an internal backup battery
CIDE with an external backup battery.
AC Filter
AC Input
PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1
OMU
XIOB
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 3
STASR 4
Circuit Breakers
6 5 4 3 2 1
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
10 A
DCBREAK
Ground(M8 Bolt)
0 VDC −48 VDC
0 VDC (M6 Bolt)
25 A
BU100BU41 or
RIBAT
ADAM
Optional internal or external Battery Unit
STASR 5
DC Output 200 W max
Figure 198: CIDE AC Variant Power Supply System
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 367 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AC Filter, whereit is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection toeach PM12 is via a flying socket.
The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a CIDE;these are PM12/3 to PM12/1.
Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing isprovided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitored via ashunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between the PM12s, thebatteries and the power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section12.21) for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description ofthe power supply system.
DC power is distributed in the BTS via DCBREAK and the bus bar. DCBREAKcontains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5, and one for the XIOB.
The CIDE is EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the CIDE is connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.
3.2.8 CIMA/CIDE Cables and Cable Sets
This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 CIMA/CIDEconfigurations.
For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables, see CableDescriptions (Section 17).
For some of the cables and cable sets, there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet, refer to its parts list.
368 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.8.1 Internal CablesThe CIMA/CIDE internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets.
The following table lists the cables and cable sets, Table 22 lists and describesthe cables that comprise the cable sets.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cablefor the battery temperature sensor.
3BK 25146
ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to ADAM or the interconnection area. 3BK 25139
BTSRIMA The CIMA BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MEDI is a flatcable and a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP.A BTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
3BK 07720
BUMA The Cable Assembly Maxi as used in the later variant of CIMA is abranched cableform. It contains cables for the DC power connections tothe subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
3BK 07762
CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIOconnector on the Interconnection Panel.
3BK 07953
CIMA bus bar The CIMA bus bar is a hardware module used for the DC powerconnections to the subracks, XIOB, and top fans.
3BK 07762
CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or toan ANX or ANC.
3BK 07598
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.
In a CIMA, it connects a TRE to an ANX or ANY.
In a CIDE, it connects a TRE to an ANC.
3BK 07599
CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANX or ANC to two antennacabinet connectors.
3BK 07600
CS05 CS05 is the BTSCA-to-SUM cable set. In a CIMA, it interconnects theSUM and the Interconnection Panel. The cable set carries the Abis1 andAbis2 Interfaces, and clock and control signals to and from the SUM.
3BK 07199
CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the -48 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or tothe interconnection area.
3BK 25115
CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBREAK) to ADAM or to theinterconnection area.
3BK 25114
Table 21: CIMA/CIDE Internal Cables
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 369 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.8.2 Cable SetsThe cable sets used in the CIMA/CIDE cabinets are described in the tablebelow.
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Qty
CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAMto the battery breaker.
3BK 25139 1
CA-ADABP CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM tothe battery breaker.
3BK 25138 1
CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from thebattery breaker to the battery interconnectionarea.
3BK 25141 1
CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25140 1
ADABA
CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT.
3BK 08119 1
CS02 RXRC The RXRC connects an ANY RX connectorto an ANX, ANC or another ANY RXconnector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC The TXRC connects an ANY TX connector toan ANX, ANC or another ANY TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS03 RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector toan ANY, ANX or ANC RX connector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector toan ANY, ANX or ANC TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS04 ANIC The ANIC provides a duplex connectionbetween the ANX or ANC and a cabinetantenna connector.
3BK 07921 2
CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the Interconnection Panel to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and controlsignals between the Interconnection Paneland the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
Table 22: CIMA/CIDE Cable Sets
370 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.8.3 External CablesThe CIMA/CIDE external cables consist of discrete cables that are listedand described in the following table.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a single pair, 4 mm sq. power cable.
1AC 001700012
AntennaJumper
Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straightmale connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.
3BK 05360
CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2connections between the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel and thecustomer’s 2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07594
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.
1AC 013280004
CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel and the customer’s2 Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07595
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.
1AC 001100011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal tothe BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
3BK 07951
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 groundbolt on the cabinet, and to the customer’s ground point.
3BK 08031
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.
1AC 017230003
CA-PC2W16 CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to theDC connectors on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s DCpower source.
3BK 08029
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq.black power cable.
1AC 001470001 (Blue)
1AC 001470002 (Black)
CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the 0 VDCconnector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s 0 VDCpower source.
3BK 08030CA-PC35BK
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.
1AC 017230001
CA -PC35BL CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects to the -48VDC connector on the Interconnection Panel, and to the customer’s -48VDC power source.
3BK 08032
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 371 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
Mnemonic Description Part Number
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.
1AC 017230002
ExternalAlarms
This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.
1AC 013280001
SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to theBTS A9100.
3BK 08101
SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 toanother BTS A9100.
3BK 07950
SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1to the BTS A9100.
3BK 08102
SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2to the BTS A9100.
3BK 08103
Table 23: CIMA/CIDE External Cables
372 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.2.9 CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling
The following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables.
TFBP
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
BTSRI
BTSCA
BTSRIMA
CS05
SUM
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 4 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
CA01/02
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3
CA−ADCO
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK, CA PC35BL
CA−CBTE
DC
(CIMA only)
Figure 199: CIMA/CIDE Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 373 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3 Multistandard Base Station IndoorThe MBI3/MBI5 are indoor cabinets that support both omnidirectionaland sectorized configurations. There are two variants, where the allowedconfigurations are determined by the type of external power supply usedby the cabinet:
DC power supply variant
AC power supply variant.
The following figure shows the position of the main modules for both variants.
MBI5 − DC Variant
Top FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Up to 4 TREs
SUM, ANYs and ANCs
Connector Area
STASR 5
STASR 4
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Up to 4 TREs
Up to 4 TREs
SUM, ANYs and ANCs
MBI5 − AC Variant with or w/o BATS
Top FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Connector Area
STASR 5
Up to 4 TREs
STASR 4
STASR 3
Up to 4 TREs
ADAM, 3 PM12s, SUM, ANC
BATS (option)
STASR 2
Air Inlet
FANUs
STASR 1
Dummy Panel
SUM, ANYs and ANCs,
BATS (option)
Up to 4 TREs
Top FANUs
Air Inlet
Dummy Panel
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
DC: SUM, ANYs, ANCs
Connector Area
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
DC: TREs, ANC
DC: Up to 4 TREs
AC: ADAM, 2 or 3PM12s,BATS (Option)
AC: SUM, ANCs
MBI3 − AC or DC Variant
AC: SUM, TREs
Top FANUs
Dummy Panel
Air Inlet
FANUs
Air Inlet
FANUs
Connector Area
STASR 5
Up to 4 TREs
STASR 4
STASR 3
Up to 4 TREs
ADAM, 3 PM12s, SUM, ANC
STASR 2
Large batteries fitted into special battery tray
SUM, ANYs and ANCs
FANUs
MBI5 − AC Variant with large BBU
Empty Space
Figure 200: MBI3/MBI5 Module Positions
374 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.1 DC Power Supply Variant
The DC variant of the cabinets is designed to house up to three or five STASRs.The odd-numbered subrack positions each contain up to four TREs. STASR2contains the SUM and a mixture of ANY and ANC modules, as required.STASR4 can contain only a mixture of ANY or ANC modules, as well asmicrowave communications modules.
Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the odd-numberedsubracks and also at the top of the cabinets.
3.3.2 AC Power Supply Variant
The AC variant of the MBIs uses a backup battery which can be housedinternally or externally:
If an internal battery is used, the MBI3 holds two and the MBI5 holds four
STASRs. STASR1 contains the SUM, three PM12s and the ADAM. STASR2and 4 each contain up to four TREs. STASR3 contains up to two ANCs, and
optionally, up to two microwave communications modules
If an external battery is used, the MBI3 hold three and the MBI5 holdsfive STASRs. The battery tray at the bottom of the MBI is replaced by a
STASR which contains up to four additional TREs. In this case FANUsare installed under this STASR.
Cooling is provided by FANUs situated at the base of each of the subrackscontaining TREs and the power control subrack.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 375 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.3 MBI Cabinet Access and Features
The following figures show the MBI3/MBI5 equipped with the interconnectionpanel and three or five empty subracks.
3.3.3.1 MBI3 CabinetTop Fan Unit
Perforated Door Strips
STASR
Interconnection Area
Adjustable Feet
RF InterfaceRF Interface
Equipment Label
AC Input
Figure 201: MBI3 Equipped with Empty Subracks
376 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.3.2 MBI5 CabinetTop Fan Unit
Perforated Door Strips
STASR
EMC Gasket
Interconnection Area
Adjustable Feet
RF InterfaceRF Interface
Equipment Label
Note that the AC variant may replace the bottom STASR with a battery tray containing BU101
AC Input
Figure 202: MBI5 Equipped with Empty Subracks
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 377 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.3.3 ConstructionThe MBI3/MBI5 are steel box constructions with four adjustable feet on theunderside, to compensate for any unevenness in the floor. The cabinetshave no side access; all cable interfaces are accessible from the front or thetop of the cabinets.
The structure and dimensions of the mechanical rack and equipment complywith IEC 297 standards.
3.3.3.4 DoorThe MBI3/MBI5 can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wall configurations.Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is via a door at the frontof the cabinet. The door is the full height of the cabinet.
3.3.3.5 CablesAll external cables, except for the antenna and AC supply, are connected tothe interconnection panel. The external cables include DC supply and Abisconnections. The antenna cabling and AC supply are connected at the topof the cabinet.
A ribbon cable is used within the cabinet to link the subracks together; see thefollowing figure. The top end of the cable terminates on the TFBP (refer to TopFan Unit (Section 11.1.3) for more information). The bottom end terminates onthe BTSRI board (refer to Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) for more information).If an internal battery is used in the AC variant, the ribbon cable also connects tothe RIBAT (refer to RIBAT (Section 12.29) for more information).
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
DC variant
Rear Front
RibbonCable
TFBPSubrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrackor Battery Tray
BTSRI
RIBAT in case of battery
AC variant
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
Subrack
DC variant AC variant
MBI3
MBI5
FANU in case of subrack
Subrack
Figure 203: MBI3/MBI5 Subracks Interconnection Cable
378 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.3.6 Cabinet TopThe following figure is a top view of the MBI3/MBI5, showing antennaconnectors, AC main filter terminal, fan cover and ground bolt. The cover iscut away to reveal extractor fans. The fans are installed and removed via thefront of the cabinet.
Antenna Connectors
Top Fan BackplaneTop Fans (x6)
External Input Board MultistandardXIBM
Fan Cover Ground Bolt M8
Power Supply and Circuit Breaker Area
Hole for SMAconnector GPS
AC Filter withnew Fixation Panel
BTS Connection AreaMSCA
BlindPlate
Note: Antenna connectors are not necessary completely equipped.
Q ANT A
Q ANT B
R ANT A
R ANT B
P ANT A
N ANT A
N ANT B
P ANT B
Antennalabelling
on the roof
Antennalabelling
on the roof
(*)
(*) Auxiliary 3 x 7/16 antenna blocks
Auxiliary3 x Nantenna blocks(microwave)
Figure 204: MBI3/MBI5 Top View
The antennas are connected to RF connectors at the top of the cabinet. AnM8 bolt is also located on the top for connecting the cabinet to ground. Anyunequipped holes are fitted with a blanking plate.
The MBI3/MBI5 AC variant has an AC filter set in the roof plate next to theantenna connectors on the left side. The filter has terminals for connectionto a 230 VAC 1Ø supply.
3.3.3.7 CoolingThe MBIs are air cooled by fans, inside the cabinet and additionally at the top.Cool air is drawn in through perforations on the door and is then forced up,through the subracks, by the internal fans. The warm air is expelled throughperforations at the top of the cabinet by the top fans. Refer to TemperatureControl (Section 11) for details of the cooling system hardware.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 379 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.4 MBI3/MBI5 Cabinet Interconnection Panels
All the external electrical interfaces are located on front-facing panels at thetop of the cabinet. The following figures show the details of the MBI3/MBI5interconnection panels.
The exception is the AC mains input, which is located in the cabinet roof. ACmains input terminals are part of the AC mains filter. The filter is located next tothe antenna connectors, see Figure 204.
Abis Interface Group
External Alarm Input Board MultistandardXIBM
Abis Relays
External InterfaceConnectors
Krone Strip
Equipment LabelsConnectorsDC Filter
CircuitBreakers
Equipment Labels
0V−48V
0
I
0
I
0
I
SR1 SR2INT &DC OUT
Abis 4 Abis 2
XC
LK1
In
XC
LK2
In/O
ut
XC
LK1
Out
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
Abis 3 Abis 1
XRT RS232
External ClockInterface Group
Extension Area(Blind Plate)
Multistandard Connection AreaMSCA
Power Supply andCircuit Breaker Area
DCBR3
0
I
SR3
DC Output −48 V/500 W max
DC OUT 500 W max
DC Output
XB
CB
GND+12 V
Figure 205: MBI3 Interconnection Panels
Abis Interface Group
External Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM
DC Output −48 V/500 W maxConnectors
DC Filter Equipment Labels
External ClockInterface Group
Extension Area(Blind Plate)
Multistandard Connection AreaMSCA
Power Supply andCircuit Breaker Area
DCBR5
External Interface Connectors
XB
CB
Abis 4 Abis 2
XC
LK1
In
XC
LK1
Out
Abis 4 I Abis 3 I Abis 2 I Abis1
Abis 3 Abis 1
Equipment Labels
GND+12 V
DC Output
Circuit Breakers
0V−48V DC OUT 500 W max
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
0
I
SR1 SR2 SR3 SR4 SR5INT &DC OUT
Abis RelaysKrone Strip
XC
LK2
In/O
ut
XRT RS232
Figure 206: MBI5 Interconnection Panels
380 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
On the left-hand side of the interconnection area (see figures above) is theExternal Alarm Input Board Multistandard XIBM, followed by the MultistandardInterconnection Area MSCA in the middle. An extension area is covered with ablind plate. The power supply input/output connectors and circuit breakers arelocated on DCBR3/DCBR5 on the right-hand side.
The XIBM contains a 12 V DC/DC converter and interface circuitry for externalalarms on the back side of the panel.
The interconnection panels provide interfaces for:
Signals
External alarms
External clock
Abis.
DC Power supplies.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 381 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.5 MBI Signal Interfaces
The MBI has XIBM, MSCA clock and MSCA Abis signal interfaces. Theconnectors and functions for each of these interfaces are described below.
3.3.5.1 XIBM Interface ConnectorsThe XIBM interface connectors are listed in the following table.
External Alarm Interface ’Mini Combicon’ connectors XI 1 and XI 2provide an interface for connecting 16 externalalarm inputs. Each input alarm is reported to theOMC-R where it is mapped to customer-definedASCII text. The ASCII text describes theparticular alarm.
Each alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the XI connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm isgenerated. So every unconnected input alarmis bridged by a short circuit on the plug-inconnector. For test purpose, it is possible withsoftware to pull the alarm inputs on active orinactive level in order to check them.
DC Output The DC Output Connector provides a + 12 VDCpower source for external alarm devices thatrequire a power supply.
The GND connector is used when attachingthe external alarm 12 VDC ground to theBTS A9100 ground. If the connector pins arenot short-circuited (open loop), the input andoutput alarms are isolated from the BTS A9100ground.
XBCB The XBCB connector provides an externalinterface to the internal BCB:
If the BTS is powered, the XBCB can beused to control external devices (e.g.,
AC/DC power supply, batteries or to provideadditional I/O signals)
If the BTS is not powered, the XBCB can
be externally powered. Then the directionof the interface is reversed so that it can be
used for remote inventory of the whole BTS.This feature is used only at factory level.
The signal levels are according to RS-485. AnEEPROM is used to store the remote inventorydata of the XIBM.
Table 24: XIBM Interface Connectors
382 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
The XI connectors allow various external alarm devices to be connectedto the BTS A9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well aselectro-mechanical switches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used onthe XI connectors. The positions of the XI connectors are shown in Figures205 and 206.
A detailed view of the XI connectors is given in the following figure.
XI1
GN
DX
I2G
ND
XI3
GN
DX
I4G
ND
XI5
GN
DX
I6G
ND
XI7
GN
DX
I8G
ND
XI9
GN
DX
I10
GN
DXI
11G
ND
XI1
2G
ND
XI1
3G
ND
XI1
4G
ND
XI1
5G
ND
XI1
6G
ND
XI 1
XI 2
Figure 207: MBI External Alarm Interface Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 383 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.5.2 MSCA Clock InterfaceThe MSCA external clock interface provides connectors for a variety offunctions; see Figures 205 and 206. The connectors are described in thefollowing table.
XRT The XRT connector provides access to the BTS A9100 viaan asynchronous serial interface. The signal levels conformto CCITT V.24. This allows a standard terminal to be usedfor radio supervision and loop-test purposes. The data rateis programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud. Onlytransmit and receive lines are used. Hardware flow control isnot implemented. Drivers and control of the XRT interface arelocated on the SUMA.
RS-232 The RS-232 connector provides an asynchronous serialinterface to control and supervise an external GPS receiver or anantenna tilt signal. The signal levels conform to CCITT V.24. Thedata rate is programmable between 1200 and 115,000 baud.Only transmit and receive lines are used. Hardware flow is notimplemented. This interface can also be used to synchronizethe BTS A9100 to the GPS receiver or another external clockreference. These signal lines are according to RS-422 Driversand control of the RS-232 interface are located on the SUMA.
XCLK The XCLK connectors are used to synchronize the BTS A9100to another BTS (G1 BTS, G2 BTS, BTS A9100) in time andfrequency or vice versa. The signaling interface conforms toRS-422. There are three XCLK connectors:
XCLK1IN: input
XCLK1OUT: output
XCLK2IN/OUT: bi-directional interface.
The input XCLK1IN and the output XCLK1OUT are connectedtogether, pin-to-pin. The XCLK2IN/OUT connector provides abi-directional clock interface. Bus drivers and control logic arelocated on the SUMA.
Table 25: MSCA External Clock Interface Connectors
384 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.5.3 MSCA Abis InterfaceThe MSCA Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions; seeFigures 205 and 206. The interface consists of the connectors described inthe following table.
Abis Connectors The Abis Interface connects the BTS A9100 tothe BSC. There are four connectors, these areAbis1 , 2, 3 and 4. All connectors provide 120
and 75 impedances. The impedance isselected by the type of cable connector pluggedinto the interface.
Note: Only Abis1 and 2 are currently used;Abis 3 and 4 are provided for future use.
Krone Strip Connector The Krone strip supports an overvoltageprotection device and an Abis monitoringdevice. The overvoltage protection device is a’make-before-break’ type. This means there isno interruption of service during insertion andremoval of the inserts.
Abis Relays Four relays, one for each Abis Interface, arecontrolled by the SUMA. The relays can beused to:
Perform loop-back tests on the individualAbis Interfaces
Provide transparent routing of the Abis trafficwhen the BTS A9100 is powered down or
faulty. This ensures that the Abis connection
is not broken in multidrop configurations.
Table 26: MSCA Abis Interface Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 385 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.6 MBI External Power Supply Interfaces
The external power supply inputs/outputs to/from the MBI3/MBI5 are locatedon top of the AC mains filter fitted in the roof of the cabinet or on the powersupply and circuit breaker area DCBR3/DCBR5, see Figures 201 and 202.The components are listed in the following table.
AC Filter There is one AC filter connector, for the 230 VAC 1Øinput.
DC Filters There are two DC filter connectors; one for the 0 Vinput and one for the -48/ -60 VDC input.
Circuit Breakers Four (MBI3) or six (MBI5) hydraulic-magnet typeDC circuit breakers protect the MBI equipment fromoverload. Each subrack power supply is protected by aseparate circuit breaker. See Figures 205 and 206.
DC Output A 3-pin D-type connector provides -48 VDC supply at500 W max. to two optional Microwave CommunicationModules or external transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc.
Table 27: MBI, DC and AC Power Supply Interface
386 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.7 MBI Power Supply and Grounding
3.3.7.1 MBI DC VariantThe MBI DC variants are powered from a -48/ -60 VDC external powersource. Power is distributed to the cabinet via two filtered input connectors;see the following figures.
Top Fan Backplane
XIBM
STASR2
STASR330 A
30 A
15 A
Ground(M8 Bolt)
STASR130 A
0 VDCFilter
−48/−60 VDCFilter
Circuit Breakers
SR1
DCBR3
DC Output−48 V / 500 W max
DC Input0 V
DC Input−48 V
SR3 SR2INT &DC OUT
BUS Bar BUS Bar
Clamp Panel(not onDCBR3)
Figure 208: MBI3 DC Power Interconnections
Top Fan Backplane
XIBM
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 4
STASR 5
0 VDCFilter
−48/−60 VDCFilter
CircuitBreakers
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
15 A
30 A
Ground(M8 Bolt)
DC Output−48 V / 500 W max
DC Input0 V
DC Input−48 V
SR1SR3 SR2INT &DC OUT
SR4SR5
DCBR5
BUS Bar BUS Bar
Clamp Panel(not on DCBR5)
Figure 209: MBI5 DC Power Interconnections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 387 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
Each subrack has:
A filtered input of -48/ -60 VDC
A filtered 0 V return
A ground connector
A circuit breaker.
The XIBM and TFBP have the same inputs as the subracks.
The following table shows the rated values for the power components.
Items Component/Rating
0 and -48/ -60 VDC Filters 4 µF capacitors, rated at 75 A
Circuit Breakers 1 - 3 (MBI3)
Circuit Breakers 1 - 5 (MBI5)
30 A
Circuit Breaker 4 (MBI3)
Circuit Breaker 6 (MBI5)
15 A
Table 28: MBI Power Component Ratings
The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via the cabinet bus bar.
The bus bar also distributes the DC voltages to the subracks and other MBIequipment.
388 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.7.2 MBI AC VariantThe following figures show the power supply distribution for the AC variant ofMBI5. MBI3 AC variants are similar (only fewer circuit breakers and STASRs),but it is not possible to install a large internal backup battery (no BU101possible, only BATS). The presence of the battery depends on the powersupply option selected:
MBI without backup battery
MBI with an internal backup battery
MBI with an external backup battery.
AC Filter
AC IInput
OMU
XIBM
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 3
STASR 4
Circuit Breakers
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
DCBR5
Ground(M8 Bolt)
0 VDC −48 VDC
ADAM
Top FanBackplane
0 VDCFilter
−48V/−60 VDCFilter
STASR 5 30 A
15 A
BUS BarBUS Bar
DC Output
PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1
Figure 210: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System w/o Battery
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 389 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
AC Filter
AC IInput
OMU
XIBM
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 3
STASR 4
Circuit Breakers
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
DCBR5
Ground(M8 Bolt)
0 VDC −48 VDC
ADAM
Top FanBackplane
0 VDCFilter
−48V/−60 VDCFilter
STASR 5 30 A
15 A
BUS BarBUS Bar
DC Output
Battery RIBAT
Optional internalBattery Unit
LOAD BATT
Battery Breakers
to BCB
+ −
−48 VDCFrontside
Backpanel
PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1
Figure 211: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with Internal Battery
390 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
AC Filter
AC IInput
OMU
XIBM
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 3
STASR 4
Circuit Breakers
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
DCBR5
Ground(M8 Bolt)
0 VDC −48 VDC
ADAM
Top FanBackplane
0 VDCFilter
−48V/−60 VDCFilter
STASR 5 30 A
15 A
BUS BarBUS Bar
DC Output
Battery RIBAT
Optional externalBattery Unit
LOAD BATT
Battery Breakers
XBCB
+−
−48 VDCFrontside
Backpanel
GND
PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1
Figure 212: MBI5 AC Variant Power Supply System with External Battery
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 391 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
The AC input is 230 VAC 1Ø. The AC input is connected to the AC filter, whereit is filtered and passed to three PM12s. The mains power connection toeach PM12 is via a flying socket.
The three PM12s convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section12.14) for a description of the PM12. Up to three PM12s are used in a MBI;these are PM12/1 to PM12/3.
Control of the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing isprovided by the OMU via the BCB. Charge/discharge current is monitoredvia a shunt in the ADAM. The ADAM acts as an interface between PM12s,batteries and power distribution inside the BTS. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21)for a detailed description of the ADAM and for a functional description ofthe power supply system.
In the MBI3, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR3 and the busbar. The DCBR3 contains four circuit breakers, three for STASRs 1 - 3 andone for the XIBM and top fan unit.
In the MBI5, DC power is distributed in the BTS via the DCBR5 and the busbar. The DCBR5 contains six circuit breakers, five for STASRs 1 - 5 andone for the XIBM and top fan unit.
The MBIs are EMC-protected at both cabinet and module level. At cabinetlevel, the MBIs are connected to ground via a cable terminated on top of thecabinet with an M8 bolt. At module level, ground continuity is carried to thesubracks via a bus bar system. The cables are terminated with FASTON,Mate-N-Lock and spade connectors.
392 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.8 MBI Cables and Cable Sets
This section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 MBIconfigurations.
For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables see CableDescriptions (Section 17).
For some of the cables and cable sets, there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet, refer to its parts list.
3.3.8.1 Internal CablesThe MBI internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cable sets.
The following table lists the cables and cable sets, Table 30 lists and describesthe cables that comprise the cable sets.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
ADABA ADABA connects the battery via breakers to ADAM. It includes a cablefor the battery temperature sensor.
3BK 25146
ADABM ADABM connects the -48 VDC filter to a clamp panel. In combinationwith CA-PCAN, it connects to the circuit breakers of DCBR3/DCBR5.
3BK 25139
BTSRI3 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI3 is a flat cableand a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. ABTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
3BK 025973
BTSRI5 The BTS Remote Inventory Board with Cable for MBI5 is a flat cableand a PCB. It interconnects the subrack backplanes and the TFBP. ABTSRI board is permanently attached to one end of the flat cable.
3BK 025974
CA-ADCO The CA-ADCO disables eight alarm inputs. It connects to an XIOconnector on the Interconnection Panel.
3BK 07953
CABATS CABATS connects the small battery unit BATS to ADAM. 3BK 25873
CA-PCAN CA-PCAN connects the ADAM or the -48 VDC filter (onDCBR3/DCBR5) to the DC breakers on DCBR3/DCBR5.
3BK 25115
CA-PCAP CA-PCAP connects the 0 VDC filter (on DCBR3/DCBR5) to ADAM. 3BK 25114
CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connects an ANY to another ANY or toan ANC.
3BK 07598
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set.
It connects a TRE to an ANC.
3BK 07599
CS04 CS04 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC to two antenna cabinetconnectors.
3BK 07600
CS05 CS05 is the MSCA-to-SUM cable set. It interconnects the SUM andthe MSCA. The cable set carries the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, andclock and control signals to and from the SUM.
3BK 07199
Table 29: MBI Internal Cables
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 393 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.8.2 Cable SetsThe following table describes the cables contained in each MBI cable set.
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Qty
CA-ADABM CA-ADABM connects -48 VDC from ADAMto the battery breaker.
3BK 25139 1
CA-ADABP CA-ADABP connects 0 VDC from ADAM tothe battery breaker.
3BK 25138 1
CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from thebattery breaker to the battery interconnectionarea.
3BK 25141 1
CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25140 1
ADABA
CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT.
3BK 08119 1
CS02 RXRC The RXRC connects an ANY RX connectorto an ANC or another ANY RX connector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC The TXRC connects an ANY TX connectorto an ANC or another ANY TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS03 RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector toan ANY or ANC RX connector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector toan ANY or ANC TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS04 ANIC The ANIC provides a duplex connectionbetween the ANC and a cabinet antennaconnector.
3BK 07921 2
CS05 CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the MSCA to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and controlsignals between the MSCA and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
Table 30: MBI Cable Sets
394 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.8.3 External CablesThe MBI external cables consist of discrete cables that are listed and describedin the following table.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
AC Supply This AC power supply cable can be made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a single-pair, 4 mm sq. power cable.
1AC 001700012
AntennaJumper
Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straight maleconnectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.
3BK 05360
CA01 CA01 is a 120 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07594
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.
1AC 013280004
CA02 CA02 is a 75 PCM cable. It provides the Abis1 and Abis2 connectionsbetween the BTS A9100 Interconnection Panel MSCA and the customer’s 2Mbit/s PCM distribution board.
3BK 07595
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.
1AC 001100011
A shorting plug, SP2M is used with Flex3, for impedance matching. 3BK 08949
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminal to theBTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
3BK 07951
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 ground bolt onthe cabinet, and to the customer’s ground point.
3BK 08031
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.
1AC 017230003
CA-PC2W16
CA PC2W16 is a -48/ 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the DCconnectors on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s DC power source.
3BK 08029
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecables used are a 16 mm sq. blue power cable and a 16 mm sq. blackpower cable.
1AC 001470001 (Blue)
1AC 001470002 (Black)
CA-PC35BK CA PC35BK is a 0 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the 0 VDC connectoron the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s 0 VDC power source.
3BK 08030
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. black power cable.
1AC 017230001
CA-PC35BL
CA PC35BL is a -48 VDC cabinet power cable. It connects the -48 VDCconnector on the DCBR3/DCBR5 and the customer’s -48 VDC power source.
3BK 08032
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length. Thecable used is a 35 mm sq. blue power cable.
1AC 017230002
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 395 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
Mnemonic Description Part Number
ExternalAlarms
This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable used is L907,an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCM cable.
1AC 013280001
SCG2/3 SCG2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS to the BTSA9100.
3BK 08101
SCG3 SCG3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 to anotherBTS A9100.
3BK 07950
SCM1/3 SCM1/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 1 tothe BTS A9100.
3BK 08102
SCM2/3 SCM2/3 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G1 BTS Mark 2 tothe BTS A9100.
3BK 08103
Table 31: MBI External Cables
396 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
3 Indoor Cabinets
3.3.9 MBI Data and Control Cabling
The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by data andcontrol cables.
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
BTSRI
BTSRI3
CA01/02
XIBM/MSCA
CS05
SUM
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3
CA−ADCO
DC
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK, CA PC35BL
CA−CBTE
STASR 3 Backplane
TFBP
Figure 213: MBI3 Data and Control Cabling
TFBP
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
BTSRI
XIBM/MSCA
BTSRI5
CS05
SUMA
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 4 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
CA01/02
SCG2/3, SCG3, SCM1/3, SCM2/3
CA−ADCO
CA GC35, CA PC2W16, CA PC35BK, CA PC35BL
CA−CBTE
DC
Figure 214: MBI5 Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 397 / 910
3 Indoor Cabinets
398 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4 Outdoor Cabinets
This chapter describes the outdoor cabinets used in BTS A9100 configurations.
The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations if necessary.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 399 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1 Outdoor Cabinets General InformationThere are four classes of outdoor cabinets available to house the BTS A9100equipment:
COME/CODE - three-door outdoor cabinet
COMI/CODI/CPT2/MBO2/MBO2E/MBO2EDC - two-door outdoor cabinet
COEP/MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEEDC - one-door outdoor extension cabinet
MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO1EDC - one-door outdoor cabinet
CBO - one-door outdoor cabinet.
The COEP is designed to allow the extension in the field of a COMI to aCOME and a CODI to a CODE. The MBOE/MBOEE is designed to extend anMBO1/MBO1E to an MBO2/MBO2E. The MBOEDC/MBOEEDC is designed toextend an MBO1DC/MBO2EDC to an MBO2DC/MBO2EDC.
All outdoor cabinets support both omnidirectional and sectorized configurations.The following figures show the possible positions of the main modules. Thepositions of the modules in the subracks are configuration dependent; for moreinformation, refer to Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).
COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets have two or three compartments:
Side compartment
BTS compartment 1
BTS compartment 2.
MBO1/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2E cabinets have one or two compartments:
MBO1/MBO1E
MBOE/MBOEE.
MBO1DC/MBO1EDC/MBO2DC/MBO2EDC cabinets have one or twocompartments:
MBO1DC/MBO1EDC
MBOEDC/MBOEEDC.
The MBO1T and CBO cabinets have one compartment.
400 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.1 COME/COMI/COEP with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Door Alarm Switch (installation on upper or lower position)
Flood Detector (installation on left or right position)
Document Holder
Smoke Detector
Equipment Labels
Service Light and AC Power Socket (not necessarily equipped)
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2
SRACDC or ACSR
BTSRIOUT
Interconnection Panel
COME
COMI COEP
STASR 5
STASR 4
STASR 3
STASR 2
Battery (2 BU41s or BU100)
STASR 1
Electricity Meter Option
ACSBOption
DCDP
HEAT2
HEX2
HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2 HEAT2
HEX2 HEX2
Service Light and AC Power Socket
Not necessarily equipped
Figure 215: COME/COMI/COEP Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 401 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.2 CODE/CODI/COEP with Modules
HEX2
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Door Alarm Switch
Flood Detector
Smoke Detector
Equipment Labels
Service Light and AC Power Socket
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1 BTS Compartment 2
STASR 4
BTSRIOUT
Interconnection Panel
Document Holder
CODE
CODI COEP
ACSU
STASR 7
Options or 2nd Battery
STASR 3
STASR 2
Battery STASR 1
STASR 5
STASR 6
HEAT2
LPFU
HEAT2 HEAT2
HEX2HEX2
(Bus−bar)
Figure 216: CODE/CODI/COEP Module Positions
402 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.3 CPT2 with Modules
HEX2
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Door Alarm Switch
Flood Detector
Smoke Detector
Equipment Labels
Service Light and AC Power Socket
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1
STASR 4
OUTC
Document Holder
ACSU
STASR 3
STASR 2
Battery
STASR 5
STASR 6
HEAT2
LPFU
HEAT2
HEX2
(Bus−bar)
Figure 217: CPT2 Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 403 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.4 MBO1 with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
AC Switch Unit(ACMU)
LPFM
Document Holder
Batteries
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
Smoke Detektor
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Batteries
Battery Cover
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 7
ADAM4
HEX Breaker
HEAT2
HEX4
Figure 218: MBO1 Module Positions
404 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.5 MBO1DC with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
DC Connection Unit(DCMU)
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
Smoke Detektor
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
HEX Breaker
HEATDC
HEX4
Figure 219: MBO1DC Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 405 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.6 MBO1E with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
Document Holder
Batteries
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
Smoke Detektor
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Battery Cover
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
HEX Breaker
HEAT2
HEX9
ACDUE
PM 18
Figure 220: MBO1E Module Positions
406 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.7 MBO1EDC with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
Document Holder
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
Smoke Detektor
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves) STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
HEX Breaker
HEATDC
HEX9
DCDUE
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Figure 221: MBO1EDC Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 407 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.8 MBO1T with Modules
Front View
Top View
AC Switch Unit Tropical(ACMUT)
LPFMT
Document Holder
Batteries
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Batteries
Battery Cover
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 7
ADAM 4
HEX Breaker
HEX4
Figure 222: MBO1T Module Positions
408 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.9 MBO2 with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
AC Switch Unit(ACMU)
LPFM
Document Holder
Batteries
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
MBO1 MBOE
Smoke Detektor
Batteries
Battery Cover
MBO2
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
STASR 0STASR 7
ADAM4
HEX Breaker
HEAT2
HEX4HEX3
HEAT2
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Figure 223: MBO2 Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 409 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.10 MBO2E with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
Document Holder
Batteries
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
MBO1E MBOEE
Smoke Detektor
Batteries
Battery Cover
MBO2E
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
HEX Breaker
HEAT2
HEX9HEX8
HEAT2
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
ACDUE
PM 18
Figure 224: MBO2E Module Positions
410 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.11 MBO2DC with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
DC Connection Unit(DCMU)
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
MBO1DC MBOEDC
Smoke Detektor
MBO2DC
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
HEX Breaker
HEATDC
HEX4HEX3
HEAT2
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Figure 225: MBO2DC Module Positions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 411 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.12 MBO2EDC with Modules
Front View
Top View
Door Alarms Override Key Switch
Flood Detector
Service Light
Document Holder
Door AlarmSwitch
OUTC
MBO1EDC MBOEEDC
Smoke Detektor
MBO2EDC
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
HEX Breaker
HEATDC
HEX9HEX8
HEATDC
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
DCDUE
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
Figure 226: MBO2EDC Module Positions
412 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.13 COBO with Modules
Front View
Door Switch
DCUC
ACUC
Cables Entry
LPFC
OUTC
CBO
STASR 2
STASR 1
ADAM 2
Top View
HEAT3
HEX5
Options Area(e.g. Microwaves)
External Batteries Breaker
Figure 227: CBO Module Positions
4.1.14 Side Compartment
The side compartment is designed to house AC/DC power equipment andprovide an external cables connection point. All external cables, except RFcables, enter the side compartment. The layout of the Side Compartmentdiffers for COME/COMI and CODE/CODI/CPT2 versions.
4.1.14.1 COME/COMIAt the top of the compartment is room for an optional electricity meter. AnACSB provides AC distribution and circuit breakers for the incoming AC mainssupply. The ACSB also provides lightning protection for the AC supply lines.
The SRACDC or ACSR houses the modules that convert the AC mains supplyinto a 0/-48 VDC supply.
Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the InterconnectionPanel. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 413 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.14.2 CODE/CODIAC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartmentis the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuitbreakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.There is also provision for optional microwave equipment.
Above the batteries on the floor, an additional BU41 or BU100 can be fitted.
Between the side compartment and BTS compartment 1 is the InterconnectionPanel. This provides connectors for DC supplies, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
4.1.14.3 CPT2AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the top of the side compartmentis the ACSU which provides AC distribution. The ACSU contains AC circuitbreakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Directly underneath the ACSU a STASR contains the ADAM and three PM12s.
Directly above the batteries a STASR contains up to four TREs and threeFANUs.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and providesconnectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
4.1.14.4 Common FeaturesOther equipment items include:
BOSU for power distribution. In the CODE, circuit breakers are provided
in the BOSU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX2, STASR7and the Power Distribution Units
HEAT2 on the floor in the COME and on the lower left side panel in the
CODE/CPT2
Two optional BU41s or one BU100 on the floor in the COME. The CODE
has one BU41 or one BU100 on the floor; and an additional BU41 or BU100can be fitted above (as an option)
Document holder on the side panel
Equipment labels on the side panel
HEX2 on the inside of the door
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Door alarm override key switch on the side frame (COME/COMI) or on
the bus-bar (CODE/CODI/CPT2)
Service light, AC power socket at the top.
414 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.15 BTS Compartment 1
The equipment contained in compartment 1 in the COME/COMI andCODE/CODI/CPT2 cabinets is described below.
COME/COMI A COME/COMI BTS compartment 1 holds twoSTASRs. The lower subrack (STASR1) contains upto four TREs and three FANUs. The upper subrack(STASR2) holds the SUM and a mixture of ANX orANY modules, as required.
CODE/CODI/CPT2 A CODE/CODI/CPT2 BTS Compartment 1 holdsthree STASRs. The top and bottom subrackscontain up to four TREs and three FANUs each.The middle subrack holds the SUM and a mixtureof ANC and ANY modules as required.
In addition, all BTS compartment 1s have the following common equipment:
Up to two HEAT2s on the floor for COME/COMI, one HEAT2 forCODE/CODI/CPT2
HEX2 on the inside of the door
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Flood detector on the floor
RF lightning protectors in the floor
Smoke detector on the ceiling
Service light and an AC power socket at the top.
The method used for DC supply isolation depends on the compartment type:
For the COME/COMI, there are two possibilities:
The DCDP above the upper subrack. Circuit breakers are provided for
isolating the DC supply from the STASRs, HEX2s, XIOB and optionalmicrowave link equipment. The optional equipment is housed above
the DCDP
Circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for isolating the DC supply
from the STASRs, HEX2s, XIOB and optional microwave link equipment.The optional equipment is housed above the upper subrack (STASR2).
In the CODE/CODI/CPT2, circuit breakers are provided in the BOBU for
isolating the DC supply from the STASRs and HEXxs.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 415 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.16 BTS Compartment 2
BTS compartment 2 holds three STASRs. The upper and lower subracks eachcontain up to four TREs and three FANUs. The middle subrack contains amixture of ANX, ANY or ANC modules, as required.
Other equipment includes:
For COME, up to two HEAT2s on the floor; one HEAT2 for CODE
HEX2 on the inside of the door
Door alarm switch on the side frame
RF lightning protectors in the floor
Service light and an AC power socket at the top (not necessarily equipped).
416 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.17 MBO1
MBO1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1 at roof top.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the left upper side of theMBO1 compartment. The LPFM provides lightning protection for the AC supplylines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper back sideof the compartment is the ACMU which provides AC distribution. The ACMUcontains AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associated power relays.
Underneath the ACMU optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.
The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and twobatteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4 andtwo, three or four PM12s.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and providesconnectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1/MBOE. Circuit breakers
are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB,
HEX3/HEX4, STASRs and the Power Distribution Units
HEX4 on the inside of the door
HEAT2 at the back of the front door underneath HEX4
Document holder in the cover of the battery box
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU)
Service light, AC power socket, and smoke detector at the top
Flood detector on the floor.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 417 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.18 MBO1DC
MBO1DC is designed to house DC power equipment. All external cables enterthe MBO1DC at roof top.
DC mains power is applied to the DCMU located at the left upper side ofthe MBO1DC compartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution inside thecabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associatedpower relays.
Underneath the DCMU optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.
Directly underneath these optional modules is an empty area.
To the right of the empty area and the optional modules, a rack frame isinstalled which contains three STASRs.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectorsfor DC supplies, temperature sensor plug SENSP, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMU for power and alarm distribution in MBO1DC/MBOEDC. Circuit
breakers are provided in the BOMU for isolating the DC supply from theXIOB, HEX3/HEX4, STASRs and the Power Distribution Units
HEX4 on the inside of the door
HEATDC at the back of the front door underneath HEX4
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMU)
Service light DC and smoke detector at the top
Flood detector on the floor.
4.1.19 MBO1T
MBO1T is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1T at roof top.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the left upper side of theMBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides lightning protection for the ACsupply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. At the left upper backside of the compartment is the ACMUT which provides AC distribution. TheACMUT contains an AC circuit breaker.
Underneath the ACMUT optional modules (e.g., microwaves) are installed.
The batteries (BU101) are located directly underneath these optional modules.There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper and twobatteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series.
418 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains four STASRs. The top STASR (STASR7) contains ADAM4and two or three PM12s.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and providesconnectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMUT for power and alarm distribution in MBO1T. Circuit breakers are
provided in the BOMUT for isolating the DC supply from the XIOB, HEX4,STASRs and one Power Distribution Units
HEX4 on the inside of the door
Document holder in the cover of the battery box
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the right bottom side.
4.1.20 MBO1E
MBOE1 is designed to house AC/DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1E at bottom plate.
AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the left lower side ofthe MBO1E compartment. The ACDUE provides lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. The ACDUEprovides also AC distribution, AC circuit breakers and a thermostat with theassociated power relays.
Behind the ACDUE optional modules (e.g., microwaves) or batteries areinstalled.
There is a specific battery box which contains two batteries in an upper andtwo batteries in a lower block. All batteries are connected in series. A secongbattery branch can be installed on top of the first one.
To the right of the batteries and the optional modules, a rack frame is installedwhich contains three STASRs and the power supply subrack.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions and providesconnectors for DC supplies, temperature sensor, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 419 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
BOMUE for power and alarm distribution in MBO1E/MBOEE. Circuitbreakers are provided in the BOMUE for isolating the DC supply from the
XIOB, HEX8/HEX9 or DAC8/DAC9, STASRs and the Power Distribution Unit
HEX9/DAC9 on the inside of the door
HEAT2 on the bottom plate of MBO1E rack
Document holder in the cover of the battery box
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMUE)
Service light, AC power socket, and smoke detector at the top
Flood detector on the floor.
4.1.21 MBO1EDC
MBO1EDC is designed to house DC power equipment. All external cablesenter the MBO1EDC at bottom of the rack.
DC mains power is applied to the DCDUE located at the left lower side of theMBO1EDC compartment. The DCDUE provides DC distribution inside thecabinets. It contains DC circuit breakers and a thermostat with the associatedpower relays.
Behind DCDUE optional modules (e.g., microwaves) can be installed.
To the right of the empty area and the optional modules, a rack frame isinstalled which contains three STASRs.
STASR1 (bottom) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 abovecontains a mixture of SUMA, ANY and ANC modules as required. STASR3above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC).It contains the XIOB, BTSRI and COAR functions and provides connectorsfor DC supplies, temperature sensor plug SENSP, and for the external Abis,alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
BOMUE for power and alarm distribution in MBO1EDC/MBOEEDC. Circuitbreakers are provided in the BOMUE for isolating the DC supply from the
XIOB, HEX8/HEX9, STASRs and the Power Distribution Unit
HEX9 on the inside of the door
HEATDC on the bottom plate of MBO1EDC rack
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Door alarm override key switch (part of BOMUE)
Service light DC and smoke detector at the top
Flood detector on the floor.
420 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.22 MBOE
An MBOE holds four STASRs. The top subrack (STASR0) can be used foroptional 19” units. The bottom subrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREsand three FANUs each. STASR5 above contains a mixture of ANC and ANYmodules as required. STASR6 above contains up to four TREs or a mixture ofTREs and an ANC and three FANUs each.
Other equipment includes:
HEX3 on the inside of the door
HEAT2 at the bottom on the right side frame
Door alarm switch on the side frame
RF lightning protectors in the roof
Service light and an AC power socket at the top.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 421 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.23 MBOEDC
An MBOE holds three STASRs. STASR0 use was cancelled. In the freespace above STASR6, optional 19“ equipment can be fitted. The bottomsubrack (STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5above contains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6above contains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and threeFANUs each.
Other equipment includes:
HEX3 on the inside of the door
HEATDC at the bottom on the right side frame
Door alarm switch on the side frame
RF lightning protectors in the roof
Service light at the top.
4.1.24 MBOEE
An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. The bottom subrack(STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5 abovecontains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6 abovecontains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUseach.
Other equipment includes:
HEX8/DAC8 on the inside of the door
HEAT2 on the bottom plate on MBOEE
Door alarm switch on the side frame
RF lightning protectors in the bottom plate.
4.1.25 MBOEEDC
An MBOEE holds three STASRs and optional equipment. The bottom subrack(STASR4) contains up to four TREs and three FANUs each. STASR5 abovecontains a mixture of ANC and ANY modules as required. STASR6 abovecontains up to four TREs or a mixture of TREs and an ANC and three FANUseach.
Other equipment includes:
HEX8 on the inside of the door
HEATDC at the bottom on the right side frame
Door alarm switch on the side frame
RF lightning protectors in the bottom plate
Service light at the top.
422 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.26 CBO
4.1.26.1 CBO AC VariantCBO is designed to house two TREs with up to two ANCs and an optionalBATS module. Above the STASRs, up to three 19” units can be installed.All external cables enter the CBO at the right side of the cabinet where thecables entry is located.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cable entry of theCBO cabinet. The LPFC provides lightning protection for the AC supply linesand HF filtering for the incoming AC supply. Above the LPFC is the ACUCwhich provides AC distribution. The ACUC contains AC circuit breakers, athermostat and an AC power socket.
The DCUC, which provides DC distribution, is located above the ACUC.
At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. A maximumof three MW units can be installed.
The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the ADAM2, two PM12s, SUMA and upto two TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above contains the BATS and up totwo ANC modules.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). Itcontains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions, temperature sensor,and for the external Abis, alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
HEX5 on the inside of the door
HEAT3 under the STASR1
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Degasing filtered holes are foreseen at the top and the bottom of the cabinet
Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 423 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.1.26.2 CBO DC VariantCBO is designed to house four TREs with up to three ANBs. When three ANBsare used only three TREs can be equipped. Above the STASRs, up to three19” units can be installed. All external cables enter the CBO at the right sideof the cabinet where the cables entry is located.
DC mains power is applied to the DC filter located at the cable entry of theCBO cabinet.
The DCUC, which provides DC distribution, is located above the cables entry.
At the top of the rack space is foreseen for options installation. A maximumof three MW units can be installed.
The bottom STASR (STASR1) contains the SUMA and up to three TREs, or upto four TREs and three FANUs. STASR2 above contains the SUMA and up totwo ANBs or up to three ANB modules.
At the right side of the compartment is the Outdoor Control Board (OUTC). Itcontains the XIOB, BTSRI, RIBAT and COAR functions, temperature sensor,and for the external Abis, alarm and clock cables.
Other equipment includes:
HEX5 on the inside of the door
HEAT4 under the STASR1
Equipment labels on the side panel
Door alarm switch on the side frame
Two holes are foreseen at the bottom of the door for water outlet from HEX5.
424 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2 Outdoor Cabinet Access and FeaturesThe following figures show the BTS A9100 outdoor cabinets without subracks.
4.2.1 COME/COMI/CODI/CODE Cabinet Access
Side Compartment
BTS Compartment 1
BTS Compartment 2
Cable Entry Plate
Removable Panel
Side Panel
Subrack Mounting Rail
Plinth
Cabinet Joining Brackets
Bolt and Washer
Hinged Outer Roof
Lifting Ring
Interconnection Panel
Inner Roof (flat on CODE/CODI)
Antenna Connectors
COME/COMI: Perforated Panel, carries COAR CODE/CODI: Part of Panel, carries COAR and RIBATs
Alternative Door Style
Cabinets joined by four M8 Bolts. Guiding Channel used for tool access from side of cabinet
Guiding Channel
RIBAT (CODE/CODI only)
Figure 228: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabinet Construction
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 425 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.2 CPT2 Cabinet Access
Outdoor Control Board (OUTC)Side panel
Hinged Outer Roof
Figure 229: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabinet Construction CPT2
426 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E Cabinet Access
Figure 230: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet ConstructionMBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T
Figure 231: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO1E
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 427 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.4 MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E Cabinet Access
Figure 232: Multistandard BTS Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2/MBO2DC
428 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Figure 233: Multistandard BTS Evolution Outdoor Cabinet Construction MBO2E
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 429 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.5 CBO Cabinet Access
Figure 234: Compact BTS Outdoor Construction CBO
4.2.6 Outdoor Cabinet Features
The main design features of the outdoor cabinets are listed below:
Cabinet extensibility on site
Cabinet dismountable on site for easier manual transportation
Front access to BTS equipment only
Side walls removable - thus extended cabinet without partition wall inside
Easy removable roof, socle panels (except for MBO1/MBO2/CBO) and
heat exchanger
Double-skinned wall (except for CBO) and roof
Cooling by air/air heat exchanger (generic)
Environmental- and EMC-protected.
430 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.6.1 ConstructionEach BTS A9100 compartment consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to aplinth. Other components are added to this basic construction, asrequired. Two or three compartments are bolted together. Themethod of joining the cabinets is different for each variant. OneCOME/COMI variant uses joining brackets fixed to the sides andbottom of the cabinet frame. Another COME/COMI variant andCODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2Euse four M8 bolts in the corners of the cabinet with guiding channels at the rearof the cabinet to help locate the fixing tool and bolts.
The COME/COMI side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 are separatedby perforated panels which prevents RF interference from entering the sidecompartment. Similar panels are used in CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 butonly as a structural element and support for COAR and RIBATs (CODE/CODI)or OUTC (CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E). Thespace between BTS Compartments 1 and 2 is open.
Each compartment has a separate rear panel. In the COME/CODE, theside compartment and BTS Compartment 2 each have a side panel. In theCOMI/CODI/CPT2, the side compartment and BTS Compartment 1 each havea side panel. In the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T, the compartment has two sidepanels. In the MBO2/MBO2DC, MBO1/MBO1DC and MBOE/MBOEDC havea side panel each.
4.2.6.2 RoofThe outer roof of each compartment can be raised at the front andunhinged at the rear for removal. This reveals an inner roof (flat onCODE/CODI/CPT2/MBOx/MBOxDC/MBOxE) and four lifting rings. Each outerroof must be removed, in turn, from right to left.
On MBOx/MBOxDC roofs, a label warns to lift the top cover with care inwindy conditions.
4.2.6.3 DoorAll the BTS A9100 cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wallconfigurations. Access to each compartment is via a door at the front. Thedoor provides both an environmental and EMC seal when closed. Mountedon the inside of the door is a HEXx. Above (COME/COMI/CBO) or under(CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E) theHEXx is a latch mechanism for keeping the door open during maintenance.
Each door contains a door lock opened by a key. Each door presses anelectronic switch. All door switches are serially connected. In the sidecompartment or MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E compartment, there is anothermounted electronic switch, the so-called door alarm override switch, which usesthe same key as the side compartment or MBO/MBODC compartment doorlock. It ensures that non-authorized opening of the doors leads to an alarm.
Not less than 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors, and0.1 or 0.2 m at the side and back.
4.2.6.4 SubracksThe subracks are secured to two vertical mounting rails. The rails arepositioned on the left and right sides of each compartment.
Refer to Standard Telecommunications Subrack (Section 6) and AC PowerSubracks (Section 7) for detailed information on STASR, SRACDC, andACSR, respectively.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 431 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.6.5 External Cable EntryAll external cables, including antenna cables, enter the cabinet via the cableentry plate or from below the plinth. The plate can be fitted to the front or leftside of the side compartment plinth. The outward-facing sides of the plinthsare covered by removable panels.
For the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC, the side panel has avariable notch on the bottom or top so that all external cables can be passedthrough. If the external cables come directly from the BTS socket, the notch isnot needed and can be closed. There is a space between the side panel andinternal rack construction to take in the cables. The cables are fixed at the sideof the internal rack and led to the top where they enter the cabinet.
For the CBO, the cables entry has an adjustable cover plate that must beremoved so that the cables can be passed through it.
4.2.6.6 Internal InterconnectionsInternal power and signal connections between the side compartmentand BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel or theoutdoor control board (CPT2). Internal signal connections between MBO1and MBOE are made via the outdoor control board. The interconnectionpanel also contains a PCB. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection PanelCOMI/COME/CODI/CODE (Section 4.3) for detailed information on theinterconnection panel. The outdoor control board performs the functions of fourboards: the COAR, XIOB, BTSRI, and RIBAT. Refer to Outdoor Cabinet SignalInterfaces (Section 4.4) for detailed information.
BTS compartments 1 and 2 have RF connectors fitted to the floor. These arefor antenna cabling.
4.2.6.7 STASR Ribbon CableIn the COME/CODE only, a ribbon cable is used in the cabinet to link theSTASRs together. The ribbon cable is in two parts, joined by the BTSRIOUTboard between them. One cable part connects to the subracks in BTScompartment 1, and the other to the subracks in BTS compartment 2. Referto Remote Inventory (Section 8.5) for information on the Remote Inventoryfunction.
4.2.6.8 Heating and CoolingHeating is provided by HEAT2/HEAT3/HEATDC if the internal air temperature isbelow 10� C. Above this temperature, module cooling is provided by FANUs.If the temperature increases above 20� C, the HEXxs switch on. As thetemperature rises further, the HEXx fan speed increases. HEXxs transfer heatfrom the cabinet interior to the outside air environment.
Refer to HEX2 (Section 11.2), HEX3/HEX4 (Section 11.3), HEX5 (Section11.4), HEX8/HEX9 (Section 11.5), HEAT2 (Section 11.7), HEAT3 (Section 11.8)and HEATDC (Section 11.10) for detailed information.
4.2.6.9 Cabinet InstallationAll the BTS A9100 cabinets can be installed in back-to-back or back-to-wallconfigurations. Access to the subracks and the interconnection panel is viaa door at the front of the cabinet.
Not less than 0.8 m free space must be left in front of the cabinet doors.
4.2.6.10 Additional Outdoor Cabinet FeaturesThe outdoor cabinets include the following additional features.
432 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.2.6.11 Adjustable FeetAdjustable feet are provided in each corner of the compartment(MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC) or compartment plinth for levelling thecabinet.
4.2.6.12 Wind LoadThe cabinet is designed to withstand a wind load of 180 km/h.
4.2.6.13 Smoke DetectorAn optical smoke detector is fitted to the inner roof plate of theMBO1, on the right side wall of MBO1E or BTS compartment 1(COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2). In case of smoke inside the BTS, analarm is raised.
4.2.6.14 Flood DetectorA flood detector is fitted to the bottom plate of the MBO1 or BTS compartment1 (COME/COMI/CODE/CODI/CPT2). If water enters the BTS above the bottomplate, an alarm is raised.
4.2.6.15 Service Light/AC Power SocketIn each compartment a service light with an integral 230 VAC power socket isfitted (not necessarily equipped in BTS compartment 2). If needed, the servicelight can be switched on by the service staff.
4.2.6.16 Document HolderAt the left side wall inside of the side compartment and MBO1E a documentbox is mounted to store A4 documents. In MBO1 the document holder isfitted on the cover of the battery box.
4.2.6.17 ExtensibilityThe BTS cabinet COMI can be extended on site to COME by adding anadditional BTS cabinet COEP at the right hand side. The same applies to extenda CODI to a CODE by adding a COEP. An MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1E/MBO1EDCcabinet can be extended on site to MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/MBO2EDCby adding an MBOE/MBOEDC/MBOEE/MBOEEDC. MBO1T cabinet is notextendible.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 433 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.3 Outdoor Cabinet Interconnection PanelCOMI/COME/CODI/CODE
All the power and signal connections between the side compartmentand BTS compartment 1 are made via the interconnection panel forCOME/COMI/CODE/CODI (via OUTC for CPT2). The following figure showsthe details when viewed from the side compartment.
AC Connectors
COAR
Light
0 V (Red)−48 V (Blue)
Ground
(Viewed from Side Compartment)
DC Connectors
Heater
0 V (Black)−48 V (Blue)
(Viewed from Side Compartment)
COME/COMI CODE/CODI
RIBAT1
RIBAT2
COAR
Figure 235: BTS A9100 Outdoor, Interconnection Panel
The interconnection panel carries the components listed in the following table.
ComponentsCOME/COMI
CODE/CODI
Two filter connectors to provide 230 VAC power for HEAT2, service light and ACpower socket in BTS compartment 1.
X -
0/ -48 V power distribution Two filters with M6 bolt connectors forDC power distribution by the DCDP or
One filter with one M6 bolt connector(-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) forDC power distribution by the BOBU.
X -
One Feed through terminal HDFKV25(-48 VDC) and one M6 bolt (0 VDC) forDC power distribution.
- X
M8 ground bolt. X -
Connectors for RIBAT1 and RIBAT2. - X
Status and control signals via the COAR. X X
Table 32: BTS A9100 Outdoor, Interconnection Panel Components
434 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.3.1 Interconnection Panel - COME/COMI COAR Front View
The following figure shows the COME/COMI COAR, viewed from the sidecompartment.
Abis Interface
Group
External Input/
Output Interface
Group
External Clock
Interface Group
Abis 4
Abis 3
Abis 2
Abis 1
Abis Relays
XBCB
XGPS
XCLK1 In
XCLK2 In/Out
XCLK1 Out
Ext−Alarms
AlarmsSide Comp
X303
Krone Strip
XRT
XGND
XI17−24
HEX Power
Equipment Labels
Surge Protectors
Figure 236: COME/COMI COAR Front View
The shaded areas in the above figure identify separate external interfacegroups. All these interfaces are overvoltage protected.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 435 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.3.2 Interconnection Panel - CODE/CODI COAR Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the CODE/CODI COAR.
Abis Interface
Group
External Input/
Output Interface
Group
External Clock
Interface Group Abis 4
Abis 3
Abis 2
Abis 1
Abis Relays
XBCB
XGPS
XCLK1 In
XCLK2 In/Out
XCLK1 Out
Ext−Alarms Alarms Side Comp
X303
Krone Strip
XRT
XGND
XI17−24
EBCB
Equipment Labels
Surge Protectors
Figure 237: CODE/CODI COAR Front View
436 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.3.3 Interconnection Panel - BTS A9100 Outdoor Rear View
The following figure shows the rear view of the COME/COMI and CODE/CODICOAR.
SUM
ALA
RM
BT
S2
HEX Power
COME/COMI only
ALA
RM
BTS
1
AB
IS1
AB
IS2
AB
IS 1
+2
AB
IS 3
+4
Figure 238: BTS A9100 Outdoor COAR Rear View
Located behind the COAR (BTS compartment 1 side) is the XIOB. The XIOB isconnected to the COAR and contains a 24 V DC/DC converter and interfacecircuitry for external alarms.
The COAR provides interfaces for:
XIO
External clock
Abis
Miscellaneous connections.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 437 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.4 Outdoor Cabinet Signal InterfacesThe outdoor cabinet has XIO, external clock and Abis signal interfaces. It alsohas a miscellaneous connections interface. The connectors and functions foreach of these interfaces are described below.
4.4.1 XIO
The XIO connectors allow various alarm devices to be connected to the BTSA9100. These include smoke and flood detectors, as well as electro-mechanicalswitches. Crimped or clamp strip contacts can be used on the XIO connectors.The positions of the XIO connectors are shown in Figures 236, 237 and 239.
The XIO interface connectors are described in the following table.
External AlarmInputs
The Ext-Alarms connector provides an interface forthree external alarms. These are alarms that areexternal to the cabinet (for example, an antennalamp failure alarm) and the inputs are protected bysurge arresters. The three external alarms are partof a group of 16 alarms which includes the pre-wiredsmoke detector, door switches, etc. The 16 alarms arereported to the OMC-R via the SUM. At the OMC-R, thealarms are mapped to predefined and customer-definedASCII text. The ASCII text describes the particularalarm. Each external alarm input has two adjacent pinsassociated with it on the Ext-Alarms connector. If thesepins are open-circuit (open loop), an alarm is generated.
Additional AlarmInputs
Connector XI17-24 provides an interface for connectingeight additional non-BTS alarm inputs. Each additionalalarm is reported to the OMC-R via the SUM. Atthe OMC-R, the additional alarms are mapped tocustomer-defined ASCII text. The ASCII text describesthe particular alarm. Each additional alarm input hastwo adjacent pins associated with it on the XI17-24connector. If these pins are open circuit (open loop), analarm is generated.
External AlarmOutputs
Connector X300 provides an interface for the SUM tocontrol eight external alarm devices. This feature isfor future use. The SUM is described in Station UnitModules (Section 8).
+ 24 VDC Supply Connector X303 provides a + 24 VDC power source forexternal alarm devices that require a power supply.
+ 5 VDC Supply Connector X112 provides a + 5 VDC power source forRIBAT.
XGND The XGND connector is used when referencing theexternal alarm 24 VDC ground to the BTS A9100ground. If the connector pins are not short-circuited(open loop), the input and output alarms are isolatedfrom the BTS A9100 ground.
Table 33: BTS A9100 Outdoor Interface Connectors
438 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.4.1.1 Pre-Wired Internal AlarmsThe following table shows a list of the pre-wired internal alarms. These alarmsare not configurable.
Pre-wiredInternal Alarm
SideCompartment
BTSCompartment1
BTSCompartment2
Door alarm* X X X
Door alarmover-ride
X - -
Smoke detectoralarm
X*** X -
Float detectoralarm
X*** X -
Heat exchange.alarm*
X ** X X
Table 34: BTS A9100 Outdoor Pre-wired Internal Alarms
* These alarms are serially linked and reported as only one alarm in caseof multi-failure.
** When equipped (more than six TREs).
*** For MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC only.
4.4.1.2 Ext-Alarms ConnectorThe following table shows the pin assignment of the Ext-Alarms connector.The inputs of the Ext-alarms connector are protected by surge arrestorsand are configurable.
Pin Description
1 GND (braid earthing clamp)
2 ALM 1 (GND)
3 ALM 1 (ext. alarm no 10)
4 ALM 2 (GND)
5 ALM 2 (ext. alarm no 13)
6 ALM 3 (GND)
7 ALM 3 (ext. alarm no 14)
8 GND (braid earthing clamp)
Table 35: BTS A9100 Outdoor Ext-Alarms Connector
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 439 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.4.1.3 External Alarm InputsTo enhance the capabilities of the BTS A9100 outdoor in terms of coverage,the REK feature may be used (not for CPT2). The REK is composed of twomodules, a Masthead Amplification Box and a Power Distribution Unit, but onlyPower Distribution Unit ensures the alarm interface with the BTS. Up to sevenalarms can be reported to the BTS (taking into account that the maximumconfiguration is six TREs, and that in an outdoor BTS only eight externalalarms are available for that purpose).
The BTS A9100 outdoor can handle up to 24 external alarms but 8 inputsare not realized so not usable. The remaining 16 external alarms are usedas follows:
5 external alarms are connected to internal sensors, not configurable
3 external alarms have protected inputs on dedicated connector and areconfigurable
8 external alarms on dedicated connector, configurable.
The following table gives detailed view of the external alarm inputs.
Alarm Description
AlarmNumber XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation
1 1 9 Not used -
2 2 9 Not used -
3 3 9 Yes Inside
4 4 9 Yes Inside
5 5 9 Yes Inside
6 6 9 Yes Inside
7 7 9 Yes Inside
8 8 9 Not used -
9 9 9 Not used -
10 10 9 Yes Outside
11 11 9 Not used -
12 12 9 Not used -
13 13 9 Yes Outside
14 14 9 Yes Outside
15 15 9 Not used -
16 16 9 Not used -
17 17 9 Yes Inside (*)
440 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Alarm Description
AlarmNumber XIO Input Alarm Class Alarm Connection Alarm Generation
18 18 9 Yes Inside (*)
19 19 9 Yes Inside (*)
20 20 9 Yes Inside (*)
21 21 9 Yes Inside (*)
22 22 9 Yes Inside (*)
23 23 9 Yes Inside (*)
24 24 9 Yes Inside
Table 36: BTS A9100 Outdoor External Alarm Inputs
(*) Provisions for REK: Masthead Amplification Box and Power DistributionUnit alarms (not for CPT2).
4.4.2 External Clock Interface
The external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions; seeFigures 236, 237 and 239. The connectors are described in Table 10.
4.4.3 Abis Interface
The Abis Interface provides components for a variety of functions; see FiguresCOME/COMI COAR Front View (236), CODE/CODI COAR Front View (237)and OUTC, Front View (239). The interface consists of the connectorsdescribed in Table BTS A9100 Abis Interface Connectors (11).
4.4.4 Miscellaneous Connections Interface
Connectors are provided for the side compartment, see the following table.
Alarms This includes the door alarm switch and the HEXx alarm.
HEX2(COME/COMIonly)
This is the 0/ -48 VDC power supply from the DCDP or BOBU(depending on COME/COMI variant).
Table 37: BTS A9100 Outdoor Miscellaneous Connections Interface
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 441 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5 Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E/CBO
The Outdoor Control Board (OUTC) performs the functions of the followingfour separate boards:
COAR
XIOB
BTSRI
RIBAT
The figure below shows the front part of the OUTC.
TEMP. SENSOR
ABIS 2ABIS 1
RIBATPort
Abis
Interface
Group
External
Input/
Output
Interface
Group
External
Input/
Output
Interface
Group
External
Clock
Interface
Group
FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1
FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT
ABIS1
ABIS2
ABIS3
ABIS4
AB
IS 1
&2
KR
ON
E C
ON
NE
CT
AB
IS 3
&4
XGPS
XBCB
XRT
XCLK 1 OUT
XCLK 1 IN
XCLK 2 IN/ OUT
ALARMSCOMPARTMENT 1
ALARMSSIDE COMPARTMENT
Remote
Inventory
Part
Abis
Interface
Group
EXT − ALARMS
SU
N C
ON
NE
CT
ION
ALA
RM
OU
TP
UT
S
ALA
RM
INP
UT
S
DC IN
EBCB (optional)
Figure 239: OUTC, Front View
442 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
All the functions of these four boards are kept except for the following:
The output voltage provided on the external output connector is 12 V instead
of 24 V. The current per output is limited to 50 mA instead of 100 mA.
No galvanic isolation between external inputs/outputs and the BTS.
The ’Power Architecture’ of the OUTC is different from that of the earlier
boards (see the following figure). Each part of the board is powered by the
power supply of the OUTC, even the BTSRI, RIBAT and BCB parts ofthe XIOB. On the earlier boards, these parts are only supplied via the
BCB_VCC.
DC
DC
LinearRegulator
LinearRegulator
ExternalPower Supply
TempSensor
NGTSL
NGTSL
SUM
ALARMINPUTS
XBCB
ALARMOutputs
Driver
NGTSL1...2...3
XIOB Part
VCC
RIBAT Part
BTSRI Part
VCC_BRI
VCC_BRI
VCC5.5
VCC125V XBCB_VCC
−48/60V
BCB_VCC
BCB_VCC_BP
BCB_VCC
VDD
Figure 240: OUTC, Power Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 443 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5.1 Connection Area (COAR)
The Connection Area is part of the OUTC. It provides external BTS interfaceswhich are grouped in three different functional parts:
Abis
External Clock Interface
External Inputs/Outputs.
4.5.1.1 AbisThe Abis part provides the external interfaces for four separate Abis links(Abis 1 ... Abis 4). The interface consists of the connectors described in BTSA9100 Abis Interface Connectors (11).
The KRONE Strip Connector also provides the possibility to monitor the Abislinks. Therefore the overvoltage insert has to be pulled out and has to bereplaced by a special monitor insert.
The interconnection between the SUMA and the OUTC consists of the followingcables:
Abis 1, 2cable
The Abis cable is a four pair, RF shielded cable. It is a 120cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120or 75 .
The needed impedance conversion is realized on the OUTCitself.
Abis 3, 4cable
The Abis cable is a four pair, RF shielded cable. It is a 120cable which is used if the external Abis cables have 120or 75 .
The needed impedance conversion is realized on the OUTCitself.
OUTC-SUMcable
The OUTC-SUM cable is a flat cable with 37 wires. It isequipped on the SUMA side with a Sub-D connector of37-pins/male, on the OUTC side with a Sub-D connector of37-pins/female.
Table 38: Interconnection OUTC - SUMA
4.5.1.2 External Clock InterfaceThe external clock interface provides connectors for a variety of functions.The connectors are described in Table BTS A9100 External Clock InterfaceConnectors (10).
444 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5.1.3 External Inputs/OutputsThe external Input/Output part of the OUTC provides the interfaces for 16 BTSalarm inputs and eight alarm outputs. ’Open’ alarm inputs are interpreted bythe BTS as ’alarm on’. Therefore any unconnected input alarm has to bebridged by a short circuit on the plug-in connector.
The following table described the external inputs/outputs.
On-boardConnectors
These are two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors, one Sub-D 9and one Sub-D 15 connector (to connect five internal BTSalarms, e.g., heat exchanger, door, fire, key, water) and oneconnector with screws for special protected alarm inputs(three alarms).
One of the two ’Mini Combicon’ connectors provides eightalarm inputs; the other one provides the alarm outputs and+ 12 VDC voltage.
Plug inConnectors
The insert in these connectors have either clamp stripcontacts or crimp contacts.
The version with a clamp strip is used for customer withno common interface where no pre-equipped cable canbe used. The version with crimp contacts is the solution ifthe customer has a common interface and pre-equippedcables can be used.
Every unconnected input alarm has to be bridged by ashort circuit on the plug-in connector.
Alarm DisableConnector
The alarm disable insert consists of a connector with crimpcontacts which provides the short circuits for eight alarminputs.
It is inserted in the alarm input connectors which are notconnected by an external alarm cable to suppress alarmsbased on open inputs.
OvervoltageProtection
The OUTC additionally provides surge arrestors for threealarms to protect the circuitry of these inputs. These are onthe ’EXT-ALARMS’ connector for external alarm numbers10, 13, and 14.
Alarms 17 to 24 are not protected by special transient orovervoltage components but these inputs have to withstanda 1.2/ 50 1500 V wave.
The alarm outputs are protected by bi-directionalsuppressor diodes.
Table 39: External Inputs/Outputs
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 445 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5.2 BTSRI
The BTS Remote Inventory part of the OUTC is used to store basic informationabout a BTS in non-volatile memory.
Flat cables from compartment 1 and side compartment or MBO1/MBO2 areconnected to the BTSRI.
The mounting position of the flat cables are located on the bottom of theOUTC (see Figure 239).
The following figure shows the block diagram of the BTSRI.
BCB
plus
BCBDriver NGTSL EEPROM
Flat CableSide Compartment
or MBO1
BCB
plus
Overcurrent
Protection
ResetCircuit
BCB_VCC_BP
Flat CableBTS Compartment 1
or MBOE
Figure 241: Block Diagram of BTSRI
The heart of the BTSRI is an NGTSL-ASIC. An EEPROM is used as memory(256 x 16 bits). A reset circuit (MAX 811) is used to reset the ASIC at power on.
The BTSRI is either powered via the flat cable (BCB_VCC_BP, providedby the SUMA) or via the power supply of the OUTC board. An overcurrentprotection protects the BCB_VCC_BP line.
The access to this board can be established via the BCB bus. There are twopossibilities to establish a link to the BTSRI:
If the BTS is in traffic, the SUM can use the BCB bus as the interfaceto the BTSRI
If the BTS is unpowered, the BTSRI can be accessed by an external tool via
the XBCB- (and BCB-) bus. Then the external tool provides the necessarypower supply. This feature is used only at factory level.
The subrack number is coded on the flat cable with holes. Five wires arereserved on the cable for that purpose. Up to six subracks can be coded whichcorresponds to the large outdoor configuration.
446 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5.3 XIOB
The External Alarm Input and Output Board (XIOB) is used as the interfacebetween the external environment and the BTS. The board provides 16 BTSalarm inputs and eight alarm outputs. These alarms are described in the tablesBTS A9100 Outdoor Interface Connectors (33) to BTS A9100 Outdoor ExternalAlarm Inputs (36). The XIOB functions are integrated in the OUTC.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the XIOB.
NGTSL 1
NGTSL 2
NGTSL 3
AlarmInputs
AlarmInputs
AlarmInputs
Outputs
12 VDC5 VDC
12 VDCEEPROM
OvercurrentProtection
Bus
Driver
BCB BUS
BCB VCC
TTL/RS485conversion
EBCB_VCC
EBCB_SP
XBCB_BUS
XBCB_VCC
GND
48V in 12V out
Figure 242: Block Diagram of the XIOB
Three NGTSLs are used; each NGTSL handles eight alarm inputs. The firstNGTSL also controls eight outputs and the EEPROM, which is used to storethe remote inventory data of the XIOB. The third NGTSL can be used to pull thealarm inputs to the active or inactive status for test purposes. It is possible topull the alarm inputs with software on active or inactive level in order to checkthem. Alarm test 0 pulls all inputs to the inactive status and alarm test 1pulls all inputs to the active status.
The alarm inputs use comparators to detect an alarm. Open alarm inputs areregarded as active. A current of approximately 1 mA flows from the alarm inputto ground if the alarm input is pulled to ground. An alarm line must stay longerthan 1 ms in the active status in order to be detected as active.
The alarm outputs use Darlington transistor arrays with open collectors.
No galvanic isolation is provided between inputs/outputs to the BTS. Onecommon ground (GND) is used within the BTS including inputs and outputs.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 447 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
The DC/DC converter is switched on if the BCB_VCC (powered by the SUMA)is available. An overcurrent protection protects the BCB_VCC line. A 12 VDCpower supply is used to supply input and output circuitry. This power supplycan be used to supply relays that can be switched with the outputs.
An XBCB interface provides access to the internal base station control bus(BCB):
If the BTS is powered, then the interface can be used to control externaldevices
If the BTS is unpowered, the XBCB can be powered externally. Then the
direction of the interface is changed so that it can be used for remoteinventory of the BTS. This feature is used only at factory level.
The signal levels are according to RS-485. An ABTE 16246 is used as theinternal BCB driver.
448 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.5.4 RIBAT
The RIBAT board is part of the battery, but physically integrated in the OUTC.Its task is to measure the battery temperature and to provide the OMU withthe temperature value and the battery Remote Inventory information whichincludes the information of the battery type. Knowledge of the temperaturevalue is necessary for charging. The board contains a BCB interface to transferthe information.
The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS not from the batteries. The powerconsumption is about 30 mA. The operating temperature range of the board is0� C to 70� C.
The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. The followingfigure shows the RIBAT block diagram.
Remote SupplyVoltage Input
BCB
NGTSL
Fixed address0000 0011 1100 0001(JC1 hqx )
D
A
TemperatureSensor
RIEEPROM
Figure 243: RIBAT Block Diagram
The board consists of an NGTSL which is the terminal for the ISL data link,the Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information,and the analog part for temperature measuring.
The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize thetemperature value. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connectedto the analog part. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSLalarm inputs.
Power supply is provided remotely either via the BCB_VCC_BP or the internalpower supply of the OUTC.
The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.The RIBAT is connected to the BCB via a flat band cable coming from thebackplane.
The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10� C and70� C. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of thebatteries (0� C to 50� C) and the minimum operating temperature range of theRIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The measurement resolutionis 0.5� C. Values below -10� C means a short cut at the temperature sensor.Values above 70� C means a not-connected or interrupted sensor.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 449 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6 Outdoor Cabinet Power Supply and GroundingThere are different power supply systems for the COME/COMI,CODE/CODI/CPT2/MBO1/MBO2 and MBO1DC/MBO2DC. These aredescribed in the following sections.
4.6.1 COME/COMI
For the COME/COMI there exist two different power supply systems, one basedon PM08s with BCU1 and another one based on PM11s with BCU2.
Certain elements are common for both variants.
The AC input is connected to the ACSB via the optional electricity meter. TheACSB contains lightning overvoltage protectors, input supply fuses, and circuitbreakers for AC power distribution. The AC input can be 230 VAC 1Ø or 415VAC 3Ø. The switched outputs from the ACSB are 230 VAC 1Ø.
These are used for:
HEAT2s
Service light and AC power sockets
SRACDC or ACSR.
The COME/COMI is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to anM8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.
450 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.1.1 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM08s and BCU1The COME/COMI power supply system with PM08s and BCU1 is shown inthe following figure.
SRACDC
ACSB
ACIB
AC Input
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
ACRI
BACO
DC Bus
Shunt
AlarmsControl
Shunt
XBCB
To/From FANUs
BU41
−48 VDC
0 VDC
Electricity Meter
AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets
Figure 244: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM08s and BCU1
The SRACDC contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to ACIB (Section 12.1) and
PM08 (Section 12.12) for detailed descriptions of the ACIB and the PM08s,respectively. Three PM08s are used in the COMI; five PM08s are used
in the COME.
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer toBCU1 (Section 12.16), BACO (Section 12.18) and BU41 (Section 12.24)
for detailed descriptions of the BCU1, and the optional BACO and BU41,respectively.
The DC supply produced in the SRACDC is connected to the DCDP via theinterconnection panel. Refer to DCDP (Section 12.30) for a detailed descriptionof the DCDP.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 451 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.1.2 COME/COMI Power Supply with PM11s and BCU2The COME/COMI power supply system with PM11s and BCU2 is shown inthe following figure.
ACSR
ACSBAC Input
PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2
BAC2
DC Bus
Shunt
AlarmsControl
Shunt
To/From FANUs
BU41 or BU100
−48 VDC
0 VDC
Electricity Meter
AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets
XBCB
Figure 245: COME/COMI AC/DC Power Supply System with PM11s and BCU2
The ACSR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM11 (Section 12.13) for a
detailed description of the PM11s. Three PM11s are used in the COMI;four PM11s are used in the COME
Control the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Refer
to BCU2 (Section 12.17), BAC2 (Section 12.19), BU41 (Section 12.24),and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions of the BCU2, and the
optional BAC2 and BU41 or BU100, respectively.
The DC supply produced in the ACSR is connected to the BOBU via theinterconnection panel.
The ACSB used in combination with PM11s is slightly different from theACSB used in combination with PM08s. In Figure 245 the ACSB distributesthe AC input directly to the PM11s and the ACSB executes the functionsnormally performed by the ACIB.
452 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.2 CODE/CODI/CPT2
The CODE/CODI/CPT2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.
The following figures show the power supply system for the CODE/CODI/CPT2.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFU located at the bottom of the sidecompartment. The LPFU provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFU, refer to LPFU (Section 12.5)). The AC input canbe 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.
AC power is then passed to the ACSU located at the top of the sidecompartment. The ACSU provides AC distribution via seven AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACSU are used for:
Two or three PM12s
HEAT2s and optional air conditioning
Service Light and AC power sockets.
For a detailed description of the ACSU, refer to ACSU (Section 12.9).
The CODE/CODI/CPT2 are grounded by connecting an external ground cableto an M8 bolt fitted to the side compartment plinth. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.
STASR
ACSUAC Input
PM12/3 PM12/2 PM12/1
DC Bus
BU41 or BU100
−48 VDC
0 VDC
LPFU AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets
ADAM
OMU RIBAT
Figure 246: CODE/CODI/CPT2 AC/DC Power Supply System
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 453 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
The STASR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14)
for a detailed description of the PM12s. Three PM12s are used in theCODE/CODI/CPT2. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software
running in the OMU
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21), BU41
(Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section 12.25) for detailed descriptions ofADAM and the batteries BU41, BU100 and BU101.
The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOSU and BOBUvia the interconnection panel.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
454 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.3 MBO1/MBO2
The MBO1/MBO2 power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFM located at the upper side of the MBO1compartment. The LPFM provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFM, refer to LPFM (Section 12.4)). The AC input canbe 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.
AC power is then passed to the ACMU located at the top of the MBO1compartment. The ACMU provides AC distribution via five AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACMU are used for:
Two to four PM12s in combination with ADAM4
HEAT2s and optional air conditioning
Service Light and AC power sockets.
For a detailed description of the ACMU, refer to ACMU (Section 12.7).
The MBO1/MBOE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable toan M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1 (near LPFM). From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.
STASR
AC Input
PM12/4* PM12/3*
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
LPFMAC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets
ADAM4
OMUBU101
RIBAT
PM12/2 PM12/1
ACMU
* not necessarily equipped
Figure 247: MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 455 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
The STASR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for a
detailed description of the PM12s. Two or three PM12s are used in theMBO1; three or four PM12s are used in the MBO2. The operation of the
PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM4 (Section 12.23) and
BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM4 and the BU101battery.
The DC supply produced in the STASR is connected to the BOMU via ADAM4.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
4.6.4 MBO1DC/MBO2DC
The MBO1DC/MBO2DC power supply system differs from that of COME/COMIbecause it is completely integrated in the BTS. The system control functionsare performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1 and MBO2.
DC mains power is applied to the DC In filters located at the upper side ofthe MBO1DC compartment.
DC power is then passed to the DCMU located at the top of the MBO1DCcompartment. The DCMU provides DC distribution via four DC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for:
BTS compartments
HEATDCs and optional air conditioning
Service Light.
For a detailed description of the DCMU, refer to DCMU (Section 12.33).
The MBO1DC/MBOEDC are grounded by connecting an external groundcable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.
DC Input
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
DC FilterDC to Heaters andService Light DCMU
Figure 248: MBO1DC/MBO2DC Power Supply System
The DC supply is connected to the BOMU via the DCMU.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
456 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.5 MBO1T
MBO1T is derived from MBO1 by reducing the used equipment.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1T.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFMT located at the upper side of theMBO1T compartment. The LPFMT provides overvoltage lightning protectionfor the AC supply line and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for adetailed description of the LPFMT, refer to LPFMT (Section 12.3)). The ACinput is 230 VAC 1Ø.
AC power is then passed to the ACMUT located at the top of the MBO1T1compartment. The ACMUT provides AC distribution via one AC circuit breaker.
The switched outputs from the ACMUT are used for two to three PM12s incombination with ADAM4.
For a detailed description of the ACMUT, refer to ACMUT (Section 12.8).
The MBO1T is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1T (near LPFMT). From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.
STASR
AC Input
PM12/3*
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
LPFCT
ADAM
OMUBU101
RIBAT
PM12/2 PM12/1
ACMUT
* not necessarily equipped
Figure 249: MBO1T AC/DC Power Supply System
The STASR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for a
detailed description of the PM12s. Two or three PM12s are used in theMBO1T. The operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in
the OMU
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM (Section 12.21) and
BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of ADAM and the BU101battery.
The DC supply produced in the PM12 and is connected to the BOMUT viaADAM4.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 457 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.6 MBO1E/MBO2E
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1E and MBO2E.
AC mains power is applied to the ACDUE located at the lower side of theMBO1E compartment (for a detailed description of the ACDUE, refer to ACDUE(Section 12.6)). The AC input can be 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3 Ø.
AC power is then passed to the switching block located at the middle partof ACDUE. The switching block provides AC distribution via five AC circuitbreakers.
The switched outputs are used for:
One to three PM18 rectifiers supervised by PM18 controller
HEAT2s
Service Light and AC power socket.
The MBO1E/MBOEE are grounded by connecting an external ground cable toan M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1E (near the front left fixingpoint). From there, separate ground straps are used to ground the majorequipment modules in each compartment.
AC Input
PM18/3
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
ACDUELP Filter
AC to Heaters, Service Light and AC Power Sockets
PM18SR
PM18CBU101
RIBAT
PM18/2 PM18/1
ACDUESwitching
Figure 250: MBO1E/MBO2E AC/DC Power Supply System
458 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
The PM18SR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/ -48 VDC. Refer to PM18 (Section 12.15) for a
detailed description of the PM18s. One or two PM18s are used in theMBO1E; two or three PM18s are used in the MBO2E. The operation of the
PM18s is controlled by the PM18 controller
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the controller. Refer to PM18 (Section 12.15)
and BU101 (Section 12.26) for detailed descriptions of PM18 and theBU101 battery.
The DC supply produced in the PM18 power supply subrack and is connectedto the BOMUE.
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
4.6.7 MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC
The MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC power supply system is completely integrated inthe BTS. The system control functions are performed by the OMU which ispart of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply systems for MBO1EDC andMBO2DC.
DC mains power is applied to the DC In clamps located in the DCDUE at thelower side of the MBO1EDC compartment.
DC power is then passed to the DC In filter located at the bottom of theMBO1EDC compartment. The DCDUE provides DC distribution via fourDC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the DCMU are used for:
BTS compartments
Service Light
HEATDCs and optional air conditioning.
For a detailed description of the DCDUE, refer to DCDUE (Section 12.32).
The MBO1EDC/MBOEEDC are grounded by connecting an external groundcable to an M8 bolt fitted to the left lower side of the MBO1EDC. From there,separate ground straps are used to ground the major equipment modules ineach compartment.
DC Input
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
DC FilterDC to Heaters andService Light DCDUE
Figure 251: MBO1EDC/MBO2EDC Power Supply System
The DC supply is connected to the BOMUE via the DCDUE.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 459 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
A specific installation set can be used to connect the DC power of the bus barvia external cable entry to external loads like transmission equipment, pylonlightning, etc...
4.6.8 CBO
4.6.8.1 CBO AC VariantThe CBO power supply system is completely integrated in the BTS. The systemcontrol functions are performed by the OMU which is part of the SUMA.
The following figure shows the power supply system for the CBO.
AC mains power is applied to the LPFC located above the cables entrycompartment. The LPFC provides overvoltage lightning protection for theAC supply lines and HF filtering for the incoming AC supply (for a detaileddescription of the LPFC, refer to LPFC (Section 12.2)). The AC input is 230VAC 1Ø.
AC power is then passed to the ACUC located above the LPFC. The ACUCprovides AC distribution via two AC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the ACUC are used for:
Two PM12s in combination with ADAM2
HEAT3
AC power socket.
For a detailed description of the ACUC, refer to ACUC (Section 12.10).
The CBO is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to an M8 socketfitted to the right upper side of the cables entry. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground all equipment modules.
STASR
PM12/2
DC Bus −48 VDC0 VDCADAM2
OMU
BATS orExternalBatteries RIBAT
PM12/1
AC InputLPFC AC to Heater
and AC Power SocketsACUC
Figure 252: CBO AC Variant Power Supply System
The STASR contains the modules that:
Convert the AC input to 0/-48 VDC. Refer to PM12 (Section 12.14) for adetailed description of the PM12s. Two PM12s are used in the CBO. The
operation of the PM12s is controlled by software running in the OMU.
Sense the output DC voltage level for battery charging and testing. Thesense data is passed to the OMU. Refer to ADAM2 (Section 12.22) and
BATS (Section 12.28) for detailed descriptions of ADAM2 and the BATSbattery.
The DC supply produced in the PM12 is connected to the DCUC via ADAM2.Refer to DCUC (Section 12.34) for a detailed description of DCUC.
460 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.8.2 CBO DC VariantThe CBO DC variant DC power supply distribution differs from that of CBOAC variant.
The following figure shows the power supply distribution for CBO DC variant.
DC mains power is applied to the DC In filter located above the cables entrycompartment.
DC power is then passed to the DCDU located at the top of the CBO DCcompartment. The DCDU provides DC distribution via five DC circuit breakers.
The switched outputs from the DCDU are used for:
BTS compartments
Optional equipments
Heater HEAT4
Heat exchanger HEX5.
For a detailed description of the DCDU, refer to DCDU (Section 12.31).
The CBO DC varinat is grounded by connecting an external ground cable to anM8 bolt fitted to the left upper side of the MBO1DC. From there, separate groundstraps are used to ground the major equipment modules in each compartment.
DC Input
DC Bus−48 VDC
0 VDC
DC FilterDC to Heater andHeat Exchanger DCDU
Figure 253: CBO DC Variant Power Supply System
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 461 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.6.9 Temperature Control
How the temperature is controlled in the different cabinets is described in thefollowing sections.
4.6.9.1 COMI, COME, CODI, CODE, MBO, MBOxEThe ACSB/ACSU/ACMU contain a relay which is controlled by a thermostat.When the temperature is above -20� C, the AC supply is connected to theAC/DC converters.
If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC supply to the AC/DC converters. This means that the 0/ -48VDC supply is not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. AC power isavailable only on the HEAT2 to warm-up the cabinet.
When the HEAT2 raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, the powerrelay is activated and the AC supplies are passed to the AC/DC converters. TheHEAT2 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.
4.6.9.2 CBOFor CBO AC variant with the ACUC, a permanent connection is maintained upto -33� C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT3 and AC/DCare powered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0� C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEAT3 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.
4.6.9.3 CBO DCFor CBO DC variant with theDCUC, a permanent connection is maintained upto -33� C. When switched on at minus temperature, both the HEAT4 and DC arepowered in time in order to warm up the cabinet to above 0� C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEAT4 prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below 0� C.
4.6.9.4 MBO1TAs MBO1T is designed to be used in tropical areas only cooling facilities areimplemented by HEX4 unit.
4.6.9.5 MBODC/MBOxEDCWith the DCMU/DCDUE, a permanent connection is maintained up to -33� C.When switched on at minus temperature, the HEATDC is powered in order towarm up the cabinet to above 0� C.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUM switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.The HEATDC prevents the internal cabinet temperature from dropping below0� C.
462 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.7 Outdoor Cabinet Lightning ProtectionProtection against the effects of lightning strikes is provided for external cables,see the following table.
External Cable Lightning Protection
AC Mains Supply Two types of lightning protectors can be fitted:
Medium stage protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6,
Class C) are installed in the ACSB for supplylines L1, L2, L3 and N
Coarse protectors (DIN VDE 0675-6, ClassB) are installed externally if the cabinet is
sited in exposed locations. Such locations
are, for example, building tops and openfields.
Abis Interface Medium-stage spark gap overvoltage protectionis provided by the Krone strip on the COAR orOUTC.
Three External Alarms Combined medium stage and fine overvoltageprotection is provided by the COAR or OUTCsurge protectors. Additional external coarseprotection is unnecessary.
Antenna Connectors Quarter wave (λ/4) lightning protectors are fittedat the bottom of BTS compartment 1 and 2. Fordetailed information on the lightning protectors,refer to Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors(Section 14).
Table 40: BTS A9100 Outdoor Lightning Protection
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 463 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8 Outdoor Cabinet Cables and Cable SetsThis section lists the cables and cable sets for all BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations.
4.8.1 Internal Cables
The BTS A9100 outdoor internal cables consist of the discrete cables and cablesets listed in the tables COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables (41) toCPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables (43).
Table BTS A9100 Outdoor Cable Sets (46) lists and describes the cablesthat comprise the cable sets.
For the physical and electrical descriptions of the discrete cables, see CableDescriptions (Section 17).
For some of the cables and cable sets there exist different variants. For thevariants used in a specific cabinet refer to its accompanying cable list.
4.8.1.1 COMI/COME/COEP Internal Cables
COME
Mnemonic Description Part Number COMI COEP
BTSRIOUT BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to a BTSRIboard. It interconnects the BTScompartment 1 STASR backplanesand the BTSRI.
3BK 08126 X -
CA-ACSC CA-ACSC gathers alarms from theside compartment. This consistsof the key switch, door switch andHEX2 alarms. The cable connectsto the Alarms Side Comp connectoron the COAR.
3BK 08078 X -
CA-ADCO CA-ADCO disables eight alarminputs. It connects to the XI17 - 24connector on the COAR.
3BK 07953 X -
CA-APC2 CA-APC2 gathers BTS compartment1 alarms from the door switch, smokedetector, flood detector and HEX2.
3BK 08215 X -
CA-ASMC CA-ASMC is an AC power cable. Itconnects 230 VAC from the ACSB tothe ACIB.
3BK 08807 X -
464 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
COME
Mnemonic Description Part Number COMI COEP
CA-ONCCx CA-ONCCx carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar
TX/RX from the Connection Area
Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM.
The cable connects to the customerequipment in BTS compartment 1.
- X -
CA-OSCP1 CA-OSCP1 short circuits the HEX2P1 connector of CA-ACSC. Thissuppresses the side compartmentHEX2 alarm. The side compartmentHEX2 is only fitted in the COMEwhen there are more than six TREs.
3BK 08095 X -
CA-OSCP2 CA-OSCP2 short circuits the AlarmsBTS2 connector on the COAR. Thissuppresses the BTS compartment 2HEX2 and door switch alarms. BTScompartment 2 is part of COME.
3BK 08096 X -
CS02 CS02 is an AN cable set. It connectsan ANY to another ANY or to anANX/ANC.
3BK 07598 X X
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY.
3BK 07599 X X
CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. Itconnects an ANX/ANC to twoantenna cabinet connectors.
3BK 07964 X X
CS08 CS08 is the customer equipmentcable set. It connects a BTS to themicrowave equipment and othercustomer equipment.
3BK 08036 X -
CS09 CS09 is a BTS compartment 1 basiccable set. It contains cables for:
DC power connections to theSTASRs, HEX2 and XIOB
Signal connections to the SUM.
This includes the Abis1 andAbis2 Interfaces, clock, control
and alarm signals.
3BK 08037 X -
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 465 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
COME
Mnemonic Description Part Number COMI COEP
CS10 CS10 is an optional cable set. Itprovides the 0/ -48 VDC supply forthe side compartment HEX2. Theside compartment HEX2 is onlyfitted in the COME when there aremore than six TREs.
3BK 08042 - X
CS11 CS11 is the BTS compartment 2basic cable set. It contains cablesfor:
DC power connections to theSTASRs and HEX2
Signal connections between the
STASRs.
3BK 08040 - X
CS12 CS12 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to ANY.
3BK 08041 X -
Table 41: COMI/COME/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables
466 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8.1.2 CODI/CODE/COEP Internal Cables
CODE
Mnemonic Description Part Number CODI COEP
BATCO BATCO connects the battery viabreakers to the interconnection area.It includes a cable for the batterytemperature sensor.
3BK 25156 X -
BTSRIOUT BTSRIOUT is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to a BTSRIboard. It interconnects the BTScompartment 1 STASR backplanesand the BTSRI.
3BK 08126 X -
CA-ADCO CA-ADCO disables eight alarminputs. It connects to the XI17 - 24connector on the COAR.
3BK 07953 X -
CA-ONCCx CA-ONCCx carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar
TX/RX from the Connection Area
Abis 1/2 Interfaces from the SUM.
The cable connects to the customerequipment in BTS compartment 1.
- X -
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connectsa TRE to an ANX/ANC or an ANY.
3BK 07599 X X
CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connectsan ANX/ANC to two antenna cabinetconnectors.
3BK 07964 X X
CS08 CS08 is the customer equipmentcable set. It connects a BTS to themicrowave equipment and othercustomer equipment.
3BK 08036 X -
CS11 CS11 is the BTS compartment 2basic cable set. It contains cables for:
DC power connections to the
STASRs and HEX2
Signal connections between theSTASRs.
3BK 08040 - X
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 467 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
CODE
Mnemonic Description Part Number CODI COEP
CS15 CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basiccable set. It contains cables for:
DC power connections to theSTASRs, HEX2 and XIOB
Signal connections to the SUM.
This includes the Abis1 and Abis2Interfaces, clock, control and
alarm signals.
3BK 08719 X -
CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basiccable set. It contains cables for:
DC power connections to the
HEX2
Signal connections to the SUM.This includes control and alarm
signals.
3BK 08775 X -
Table 42: CODI/CODE/COEP Outdoor Internal Cables
468 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8.1.3 CPT2 Internal Cables
Mnemonic Description Part Number
BATCO Version AA BATCO AA connects the battery via breakers to theinterconnection area. It includes a cable for thebattery temperature sensor.
3BK 25156
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE to anANC or an ANY.
3BK 07599
CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.
3BK 07964
CS15 CS15 is a BTS compartment 1 basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:
DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX2
and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includesthe Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control
and alarm signals.
3BK 08719
CS16 CS16 is a side compartment basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:
DC power connections to the HEX2
Signal connections to the SUM. This includes
control and alarm signals.
3BK 08775
Table 43: CPT2 Outdoor Internal Cables
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 469 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8.1.4 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC Internal Cables
Mnemonic Description Part Number MBO1 MBO2
BATCO VersionBA
BATCO BA connects the battery via breakers tothe interconnection area. It includes a cable forthe battery temperature sensor.
3BK 25156 X X
CM01 CM01 is an MBO1 basic cable set. It containscables for:
DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX4and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includes
the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, controland alarm signals
Remote inventory data.
3BK 25818 X X
CMO1E CM01E is an MBO1E basic cable set. It containscables for:
DC power connections to the STASRs,
HEX9/DAC9 and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includesthe Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control
and alarm signals
Remote inventory data.
3BK 27268 X X
CM02 CM02 is an MBOE compartment basic cableset. It contains cables for:
DC power connections and alarms to the
HEX3
DC power connections to the STASRs
Remote inventory data.
3BK 25819 - X
CM02E CM02E is an MBOEE compartment basic cableset. It contains cables for:
DC power connections and alarms to theHEX8/DAC8
DC power connections to the STASRs
Remote inventory data.
3BK 27269 - X
470 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Mnemonic Description Part Number MBO1 MBO2
CMO11* CM011 is an MBO1DC basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:
DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX4and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includes
the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, controland alarm signals
SENSP
Remote inventory data.
3BK 26621 X X
CMO1T** CMO1T is an MBO1T basic cable set. Itcontains cables for:
DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX4
and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includes
the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control
and alarm signals
Remote inventory data.
3BK 27142 X -
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE toan ANC or an ANY.
3BK 07599 X X
CS07 CS07 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANCto two antenna cabinet connectors.
3BK 07964 X X
* : Available only for MBODC
** : Available only for MBO1T
Table 44: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC Outdoor Internal Cables
4.8.1.5 CBO Internal Cables
Mnemonic Description Part Number
CBOA CBOA is an CBO basic cable set. It contains cablesfor:
DC power connections to the STASRs, HEX5
and OUTC
Signal connections to the SUM. This includes
the Abis1 and Abis2 Interfaces, clock, control
and alarm signals
Remote inventory data.
3BK 26346
BATSC BATSC connects the battery to the ADAM boardand the 0 V bolt.
3BK 26354
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 471 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Mnemonic Description Part Number
CS03 CS03 is a TRE cable set. It connects a TRE to anANC or an ANY.
3BK 07599
CS26 CS26 is an ANT cable set. It connects an ANC totwo antenna cabinet connectors.
3BK 26351
Table 45: CBO Outdoor Internal Cables
472 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8.1.6 BTS A9100 Outdoor Internal Cable Sets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CA-BABRM CA-BABRM connects -48 VDC from the batteryto the battery breaker.
3BK 25141 1
CA-BABRP CA-BABRP connects 0 VDC from the batteryto the battery breakers.
3BK 25140 1
CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25246 1
CA-BRCP CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to battery interconnection area.
3BK 25245 1
BATCOVersion AA
CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT or OUTC.
3BK 08119 1
CA-CBRM CA-CBRM connects -48 VDC from the batteryto the battery breaker.
3BK 25868 1
CA-CBRP CA-CBRP connects 0 VDC from the battery tothe battery breakers.
3BK 25869 1
CA-BRCM CA-BRCM connects -48 VDC from the batterybreaker to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25246 1
CA-BRCP CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to battery interconnection area.
3BK 25245 1
BATCOVersion AB
CA-BSENS CA-BSENS connects the battery temperaturesensor to RIBAT or OUTC.
3BK 08119 1
BATSC CA-PDCP CA-PDCP connects the 0 VDC from the batteryto the ground bolt.
3BK 25231 1
CA-ADACM CA-ADACM connects the -48 VDC from thebattery to the ADAM2 board.
3BK 25248 1
CM01 BOMU Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit.
Carries AC and DC power supplies to theSTASRs, XIOB, HEX3/ HEX4, HEAT2, servicelights, customer and microwave equipment.
Transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe OUTC.
3BK 25672 1
CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.
RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1modules to OUTC.
3BK 25822 1
CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects LPFM to a ground bolt.
3BK 25182 1
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 473 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CA-BRCP CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to battery interconnection area.
3BK 25245 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
CMO1T CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.
RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1modules to OUTC.
3BK 25822 1
CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects LPFM to a ground bolt.
3BK 25182 1
CA-BRCP CA-BRCP connects 0 VDC from the batterybreaker to battery interconnection area.
3BK 25245 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
CA-OSCP4 The CA-OSCP4 short circuits the Alarms BTS2connector on the OUTC. This suppresses theMBO2 HEX3 and door switch alarms.
3BK 272003 1
CM01E CA-RIC1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Evolution Outcable.
RIC1 transfers remote inventory data of MBO1Emodules to OUTC.
3BK 27319 1
CA-XBCBPS CA-XBCBPS carries alarm and RemoteInventory information from the PM18C to theOUTC.
3BK 27318 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
CM02 CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks (MBO2). 3BK 08809AA
2
CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for bottom subrack (MBO2). 3BK 08809BA
1
CA-HOAP HEX outdoor alarm and power cable.
The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMUtransferring DC power and alarms.
3BK 25820 1
474 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CA-RIMO2 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.
CA-RIMO2 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO2 modules to OUTC.
3BK 25823 1
CM02E CA-PCOS Power cable outdoor for upper subracks(MBO2E).
3BK 08809BB
3
CA-HOAP HEX outdoor alarm and power cable.
The CA-HOAP connects HEX3 and BOMUtransferring DC power and alarms.
3BK 25820 1
CA-RIC2 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out Evolutioncable.
CA-RIC2 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO2E modules to OUTC.
3BK 27320 1
CMO11 BOMU Bus bar Outdoor Multistandard Unit.
BOBU carries DC power supplies to theSTASRs, XIOB, HEX3/ HEX4, HEATDC, servicelights, customer and microwave equipment.
BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX3/ HEX4,smoke detector, flood detector, and doorswitches to the OUTC.
3BK 25672 1
CA-RIMO1 Remote Inventory Multistandard Out cable.
RIMO1 transfers remote inventory data ofMBO1DC modules to OUTC.
3BK 25822 1
CA-SENSP Temperature sensor plug. 3BK 26147 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR (OUTC) to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR (OUTC) and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
CS02 RXRC RXRC connects an ANY RX connector to anANX/ANC or another ANY RX connector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC TXRC connects an ANY TX connector to anANX/ANC or another ANY TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS03 RXRC RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to an ANYor ANX/ANC RX connector.
3BK 07920 2
TXRC TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to an ANYor ANX/ANC TX connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS07 ANOC ANOC provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.
3BK 07965 2
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 475 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CS08 VariantBA
CA-DFUX CA-DFUX carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces to theSUM.
3BK 08503 1
CS08 VariantCA
CA-GCMW CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the microwave equipment to ground.
3BK 07934 1
CA-MXBP CA-MXBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar.The cable connects to the microwave equipmentin BTS compartment 1.
3BK 08886 1
CA-RFMW CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottomplate of the BTS.
3BK 07931 1
CS08 VariantBB
CA-2MMC2 CA-2MMC2 carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces tothe SUM.
3BK 08289 1
CA-GCMW CA-GCMW is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the microwave equipment to ground.
3BK 07934 1
CA-MLBP CA-MLBP carries 0/ -48 VDC from the bus bar.The cable connects to the microwave equipmentin BTS compartment 1.
3BK 08887 1
CA-RFMW CA-RFMW carries the TX/RX to the bottomplate of the BTS.
3BK 07931 1
CS09 CA-ABIS CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfaces fromthe COAR to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
CA-H2PC1 H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP.The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.
3BK 08077 1
CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto an STASR.
3BK 08079 2
CA-XBCBO CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventoryinformation from the ACRI to the COAR.
3BK 08205 1
CA-XIOPC CA-XIOPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto the XIOB.
3BK 08087 1
CS10 CA-H2PC2 Cable Assembly - HEX2 Power Cable 2 carries0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP. The cable connectsto the COAR.
3BK 08092 1
CA-H2PC3 Cable Assembly - HEX2 Power Cable 3 carries0/ -48 VDC from the HEX Power connectoron the COAR. The cable connects to the sidecompartment HEX2.
3BK 08093 1
476 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CS11 VariantAA
CA12 Cable Assembly 12 is a flat cable thatinterconnects the BTS compartment 2 STASRbackplanes and the BTSRIOUT.
3BK 08086 1
CA-ACB2 Cable Assembly - Alarm Cable BTS2 gathersalarms from BTS compartment 2. This consistsof the door switch and HEX2 alarms. The cableconnects to the Alarms BTS2 connector on theCOAR.
3BK 08091 1
CA-H2PC1 CA-H2PC1 carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDP.The cable connects to the BTS compartment2 HEX2.
3BK 08077 1
CA-OSPC CA-OSPC carries 0/ -48 VDC from the DCDPto an STASR.
3BK 08079 1 of AA,2 of AB
CS11 VariantBA
CA12 CA12 is a flat cable that interconnects the BTScompartment 2 STASR backplanes and theBTSRIOUT.
3BK 08086 1
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU.
The cable connects to the BTS compartment2 HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
CA-PCOS Cable Assembly - Power Cable Outdoor Subrackcarries 0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU to theSTASR.
3BK 08809 3
RXRC The RXRC connects a TRE RX connector to anANY connector.
3BK 07920 2CS12
TXRC The TXRC connects a TRE TX connector to anANY connector.
3BK 07919 1
CS15 VariantCA
BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies tothe STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,customer and microwave equipment.
BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe COAR.
3BK 08742 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the COAR to the SUM.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the COAR and the SUM.
3BK 07923 1
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 477 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU.
The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
CS15 VariantDA
BOBU BOBU carries AC and DC power supplies tothe STASRs, XIOB, HEX2, HEAT, service lights,customer and microwave equipment.
BOBU transfers alarms from the HEX2, smokedetector, flood detector, and door switches tothe OUTC.
3BK 08742 1
CA-RICPT2 The CA-RICPT2 is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to the OUTC board. Itinterconnects the BTS compartment 1 STASRbackplanes and the OUTC.
3BK 25538 1
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU.
The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 (CPT2) HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
CS16
Variant AA
BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ASCB/ACSU.
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the COAR.
3BK 08741 1
CA-Ground1 CA-Ground1 is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the ACSB to a ground bolt.
3BK 08118 1
CA-Ground2 CA-Ground2 is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects between two ground bolts.
3BK 08117 1
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU.
The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
CA-XBCBO CA-XBCBO carries alarm and Remote Inventoryinformation from the BCU2 to the COAR.
3BK 08205 1
478 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CS16
Variant CA
BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSB/ACSU.
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the COAR.
3BK 08741 1
CA-CSTR CA-CSTR connects the COAR with RIBAT 1,RIBAT 2 and STASR7.
3BK 25178 1
CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottomplate.
3BK 25182 1
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU.
The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to theside wall interconnection area.
3BK 25232 1
CA-PDCP CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to the sidewall interconnection area.
3BK 25231 1
CA-ADACM CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM to thebattery interconnection area.
3BK 25248 1
CA-ADACP CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM to thebattery interconnection area.
3BK 25247 1
CS16
Variant DA
BOSU BOSU carries AC and DC power supplies to theHEX2, HEAT, service lights, and ACSU.
BOSU transfers alarms from the HEX2, key anddoor switch to the OUTC.
3BK 08741 1
CA-Ground CA-Ground is a cabinet ground cable. Itconnects the LPFU grounding bolt to the bottomplate.
3BK 25182 1
CA-RICPT1 The CA-RICPT1 is a flat cable which ispermanently attached to the OUTC board. Itinterconnects the side compartment STASRbackplanes and the OUTC.
3BK 25537 1
CA-OHAC CA-OHAC carries:
0/ -48 VDC from the BOBU
Alarms to the BOBU
The cable connects to the BTS compartment1 HEX2.
3BK 08810 1
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 479 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Cable Sets Mnemonic Description Part Number Quantity
CA-PDCM CA-PDCM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the side wall interconnection area.
3BK 25232 1
CA-PDCP CA-PDCP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2 tothe side wall interconnection area.
3BK 25231 1
CA-ADACM CA-ADACM carries -48 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25248 1
CA-ADACP CA-ADACP carries 0 VDC from ADAM/ADAM2to the battery interconnection area.
3BK 25247 1
CA-ABIS The CA-ABIS carries the Abis1 /2 Interfacesfrom the OUTC to the SUMA.
3BK 07922 1
CA-BTSCA The CA-BTSCA carries clock and control signalsbetween the OUTC and the SUMA.
3BK 07923 1
CS25 ANCO ANCO provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.
3BK26151 2
CS26 ANLC ANLC provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.
3BK 26349 2
CS27 ANCO ANCO provides a duplex connection betweenthe ANX/ANC and a cabinet antenna connector.
3BK26151 2
Table 46: BTS A9100 Outdoor Cable Sets
480 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.8.2 External Cables
The BTS A9100 outdoor external cables consist of the discrete cables listedin the following table. They belong to COME/COMI and CODE/CODI. Thereare no COEP external cables, because COEP is used to extend COMI toCOME and CODI to CODE.
Mnemonic Description Part Number
AC Supply This cable can be made on-site to the desired length. The cable usedis a five-core, 6 mm sq. power cable.
1AC 00468 0003
AntennaJumper
Antenna jumpers, 1 m/ 2 m/ 3 m/ 5 m length, HCF1/ 2, 2 x 7/ 16 straightmale connectors. They connect the BTS to the main antenna cables.
3BK 05360
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is L907, an 8-pair, shielded, 2 Mbit/s, 120 PCMcable.
1AC 01328 0004
This cable can be replaced by one made on site to the desired length.The cable used is Flex3, a multicoaxial, 2 Mbit/s, 75 PCM cable.
1AC 00110 0011
CA-CBTE CA-CBTE is the BTS Terminal cable. It connects the BTS Terminalto the BTS Terminal connector on the SUM.
3BK 07951
CA-GC35 CA-GC35 is the cabinet ground cable. It connects to the M8 groundbolt on the side compartment floor, and to the customer’s ground point.
3BK 08031
This cable can be replaced by one made on-site to the desired length.The cable used is a 50 mm sq. yellow/green power cable.
1AC 00465 0003
OCC23 OCC23 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a G2 BTS tothe BTS A9100.
3BK 08303
OCC33 OCC33 is a clock synchronization cable. It connects a BTS A9100 toanother BTS A9100.
3BK 08304
Table 47: BTS A9100 Outdoor External Cables List
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 481 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9 Outdoor Cabinet CablingThe various types of cabling used in outdoor cabinets is described in thefollowing sections. This includes DC power and alarm cabling, as well as dataand control cabling. The cabling descriptions are group by outdoor cabinettypes.
4.9.1 Outdoor Cabinet DC Power and Alarm Cabling
The DC power and alarm cabling for the COME/COMI/CODE/CODI, CPT2,MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO2/MBO2DC, and CBO cabinets are described separately.The descriptions are supported by diagrams.
4.9.1.1 COME/COMI/CODE/CODIThere are two variants of cable sets used to distribute DC power and alarmswithin the BTS A9100 outdoor cabinets:
One variant is used for COME/COMI AXXX
One variant is used for COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI.
The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe COME/COMI AXXX.
CA−H2PC1 AB
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1
DCDPXIOB
X1
Alarm
HEX2
Power
Door Switch
CA−ACSC
Key Switch
AlarmsSide Comp
Door Switch
Smoke Detector
Flood Detector
X7
CA−APC2
X9/X10
To STASRs
CA−OSPC
CA−XIOPC
CA−H2PC1 AA
AlarmsBTS1
AlarmsBTS2
CA−ADCO
Alarm
HEX2
Power
CA−H2PC3 HEX Power
HEX Power
BTS Compartment
Alarm
HEX2
Power
Door Switch
CA−H2PC2
X6 X8
CA−OSPCTo STASRsX12−X14
CA−ACB2 for COME
(COME only)
(COME only)
(COME only)
(COME only)
CA−OSCP2 for COMI
(COME only)
(optional)
COAR
Figure 254: COME/COMI AXXX, DC Power and Alarm Cabling
482 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI. Note that, althoughthe bus bars carry AC power, this is not shown in the following figure.
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1
BOBU
XIOB
Alarm
HEX2
Power
Door Switch
Key Switch
AlarmsSide Comp
Door Switch
Smoke Detector
Flood Detector
STASR 1
AlarmsBTS
CA−ADCO
BOSU
STASR 3
STASR 2
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
Optional Power Supplies
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
BTS Compartment 2
Alarm
HEX2
Power
STASR 4
STASR 6
STASR 5
Door Switch
Alarm
HEX2
Power
(COME only)
Optional Power Supplies (CODE only)
STASR 7 (CODE only)
(optional)(CODE/COME only)
(CODE/COME only)
COAR
Figure 255: COME/COMI BXXX and CODE/CODI, DC Power and AlarmCabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 483 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.1.2 CPT2The following figure shows the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the CPT2. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, thisis not shown in the figures.
Side Compartment BTS Compartment 1
BOBU
Alarm
HEX2
Power
Door Switch
Key Switch
AlarmsSide Comp
Door Switch
Smoke Detector
Flood Detector
STASR 4
AlarmsBTS
CA−ADCO
BOSU
STASR 6
STASR 5
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
Alarm
HEX2
Power
(optional)
OUTC
STASR 2
STASR 3
XIOBFunction
Figure 256: CPT2 DC Power and Alarm Cabling
484 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.1.3 MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DCThe following figure show the cables and bus bars that carry DCpower and alarms within the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E andMBO2/MBO2DC/MBO2E.
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 7
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Door Switch
Key Switch
SmokeDetector
WaterDetector
HEX4
BOMU
X901
X910
OUTC
Figure 257: MBO1/MBO1DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 7
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Door Switch
HEX4
BOMUT
X901
X910
OUTC
Figure 258: MBO1T DC Power and Alarm Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 485 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 7
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Door Switch
Key Switch
SmokeDetector
WaterDetector
HEX4
BOMU
X901
X910
OUTC
STASR 0 (not used)
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
Door Switch
HEX3
MBO1 MBOE
Figure 259: MBO2/MBO2DC DC Power and Alarm Cabling
4.9.1.4 MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MBO2E/MBO2EDCThe following figure show the cables and bus bars that carry DC power andalarms within the MBO1E/MBO1EDC and MBO2E/MBO2EDC.
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Door Switch
Key Switch
SmokeDetector
WaterDetector
HEX9
BOMUE
X901
X910
OUTC
Figure 260: MBO1E/MBO1EDC Power and Alarm Cabling
486 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 3
STASR 2
STASR 1
Door Switch
Key Switch
SmokeDetector
WaterDetector
HEX9
BOMUE
X901
X910
OUTC
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 4
Door Switch
HEX8
MBO1E MBOEE
Figure 261: MBO2E/MBO2EDC Power and Alarm Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 487 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.1.5 CBO
CBO AC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe CBO AC variant. Note that, although the bus bars carry AC power, thisare not shown in the figures.
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 2
STASR 1
Optional Equipment
HEX5
DCUC
X901
X910
OUTC
CBO
Figure 262: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling
CBO DC Variant The following figure shows the cables that carry DC power and alarms withinthe CBO AC variant.
Alarms
CA−ADCO
−48 VDC
GND
0 VDC
XIOBFunction
STASR 2
STASR 1
Optional Equipment
HEX5
DCDU
X901
X910
OUTC
CBO
HEAT4
Figure 263: CBO DC Power and Alarm Cabling
488 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2 Outdoor Cabinet Data and Control Cabling
The following sections described the data and control cabling used in thedifferent types of outdoor cabinets.
4.9.2.1 COME/COMIThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the COME/COMI.
STASR3 Backplane
STASR4 Backplane
STASR5 Backplane
STASR2 Backplane
STASR1 Backplane
BTSRI
BTSRIOUTCA12
COAR
SUM
OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS
COEP
Figure 264: COME/COMI Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 489 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2.2 CODE/CODIThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CODE/CODI.
STASR 4 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
STASR 6 Backplane
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
BTSRI
BTSRIOUTCA12
COAR
SUMA
OCC23/OCC33 CA−ABIS
COEP
STASR 7 Backplane
RIBAT 1
RIBAT 2
STASR 3 Backplane
Figure 265: CODE/CODI Data and Control Cabling
490 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2.3 CPT2The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CPT2.
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
STASR 4 Backplane
OUTCSUMA
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
STASR 6 Backplane
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−RICPT1 CA−RICPT2
Figure 266: CPT2 Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 491 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2.4 MBO1/MBO2The following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO2/MBO2DC. TheSTASR7 is equipped only in MBO1 and MBO2.
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
OUTC
SUMA
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
CA−RIMO1
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 7 Backplane
Figure 267: MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T Data and Control Cabling
OUTC
SUMA
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
CA−RIMO1
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 7 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
STASR 6 Backplane
STASR 0 Backplane(not equipped)
STASR 4 Backplane
CA−RIMO2
MBO1 MBOE
Figure 268: MBO2/MBO2DC Data and Control Cabling
492 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2.5 MBO1E/MBO2EThe following figures show the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the MBO1E/MBO1EDC/MMBO2E/MBO2EDC. ThePM18SR is equipped only in MBO1E and MBO2E AC variants.
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
OUTC
SUMA
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
CA−RIC1
STASR 3 Backplane
PM18SR
PM18C
XBCBPS
Figure 269: MBO1E Data and Control Cabling
OUTC
SUMA
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
CA−RIC1
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
STASR 3 Backplane
STASR 5 Backplane
STASR 6 Backplane
STASR 4 Backplane
CA−RIC2
MBO1E MBOEE
PM18SR
PM18C
XBCBPS
Figure 270: MBO2E Data and Control Cabling
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 493 / 910
4 Outdoor Cabinets
4.9.2.6 CBOThe following figure shows the logical interconnections provided by the dataand control cables for the CBO.
STASR 2 Backplane
STASR 1 Backplane
OUTC
SUMA
Option:OCC23/OCC33
CA−ABIS
CA−BTSCA
CA−RIBCO
Figure 271: CBO Data and Control Cabling
494 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
5 External Battery Cabinets
The sections describe mechanical design of battery cabinets and cablingbetween the battery cabinets and the BTS.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 495 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.1 External Indoor Battery CabinetThe external indoor battery cabinet is used to house a large backup battery. Inthis case it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration with an internal batteryin parallel. As required up to three battery units (48 V) can be installedinside the cabinet.
The following figures show block diagrams illustrating the principle. If batteryunits are connected to different BTSs, each battery unit is connected withseparate DC connectors and can be switched on/off by a separate circuit switch(block diagram 1). Battery units can also be connected in parallel. Then DCoutput connectors of BTS1 are used. DC battery voltage can be switched on/offby using the common circuit switch.
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
Breaker F1
Breaker F2
Breaker F3
DC Output Connectors
BTS1 BTS2 BTS3
RIBAT 2
RIBAT 3
RIBAT 1
XBCB
3 2 1
Battery Unit 3
Battery Unit 2
Battery Unit 1
Temperature Sensor
Figure 272: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 3x1 Battery Units
496 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
Breaker F1
Breaker F2
Breaker F3
DC Output Connectors
BTS1 BTS2 BTS3
CommonBreaker F4
RIBAT 2
RIBAT 3
RIBAT 1
XBCB
3 2 1
− +
12 V
Battery Unit 3
Battery Unit 2
Battery Unit 1
Temperature Sensor
Figure 273: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x2 + 1x1Battery Units
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
Breaker F1
Breaker F2
Breaker F3
DC Output ConnectorsBTS1 BTS2 BTS3
CommonBreaker F4
Battery Unit 3
Battery Unit 2
Battery Unit 1
RIBAT 2
RIBAT 3
RIBAT 1
XBCB
3 2 1
Temperature Sensor
Figure 274: External Indoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram 1x3 Battery Units
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 497 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.1.1 Mechanical Design
The external indoor battery is built by using the housing of the MBI3 cabinet(see MBI Cabinet Access and Features (Section 3.3.3)). For environmentalconditions and electromagnetic compatibility, see Environment (Section 18).
The following figure shows that the battery units are mounted in three shelves,one unit per shelf. Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V)connected in line. Battery units can be connected to separate circuit switches(placed at the left side of each unit) and separate connectors (placed at theconnection area at the top) for different BTSs. Battery units can also beconnected in parallel with a common circuit switch (connection area at the top)and a common connector for one BTS.
Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf for positioning of the batteryunit. The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacerssupplied with the battery.
Battery units are covered with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.
Common Circuit Switch
Circuit Switchfor one Battery Unit
Different types ofBattery Units justshown fordemonstration(cabinet must beequipped withidentical batteries)
Circuit Switchfor one Battery Unit
DC Output Connectors(to BTS)
XBCB Connectors for RIBAT Cable
Cover Plate
Figure 275: External Indoor Battery Cabinet
498 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
One battery terminal of each unit is connected with a temperature sensor, whichmonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.First this sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards, which areplaced behind each battery unit at the rear side of the shelves. RIBAT boardsare powered by a BTS via RIBAT cable(s).
RIBAT boards (for more information see RIBAT (Section 12.29) ) are connectedwith the XBCB connectors placed at the connection area on the top. Ifbattery units are connected in parallel, corresponding RIBAT boards are alsoconnected together producing a common result of monitoring.
RIBAT and DC battery cables are connected to the BTS(s) passing through thebattery cabinet on the top.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 499 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.1.2 External Battery
The battery type used in the external indoor battery cabinet is BU101. This typeis also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and external outdoor battery cabinets.
A detailed description, including charging, discharging and storage parameters,is given in BU101 (Section 12.26). Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line(contrary to the installation in an MBO cabinet) as shown in the following figure.
Jumper
Top View
To BUS Bar viaCircuit Breaker
Battery Battery
Front View
Battery Battery
TemperatureSensor Cable(to RIBAT)
To BUS Bar
Figure 276: External Indoor Battery Unit
5.1.3 Battery Cabinet External Cabling
There are following cables used for connection of an external battery cabinetindoor with a BTS and ground:
CA-PCEBP, 3BK 25259 AAAA, Power Cable external Battery 0 V
CA-PCEBM, 3BK 25260 AAAA, Power Cable external Battery -48 V
CA-GND, 3BK 25349 AAAA, Ground Cable for external Battery
CA-RIBEB, 3BK 25258 AAAA, RIBAT Cable for external indoor Battery.
Mechanical design of cables can be found in External Cables (Section 17.2).
500 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2 External Battery Cabinet OutdoorThe external battery cabinet outdoor battery cabinet is used to house a largebackup battery. In this case it is not allowed to use a BTS configuration withan internal battery in parallel. As required, up to three battery units (48 V)can be installed inside the cabinet.
The following figure shows a block diagram illustrating the principle. All batteryunits are connected in parallel via two bus bars. Each battery branch can beswitched on/off separately by a single pole circuit switch. Complete DC batteryvoltage can be switched on/off by using the common circuit switch. Connectionto the BTS is made via terminal blocks.
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
− +
12 V
Battery Unit 3
Battery Unit 2
Battery Unit 1
Single PoleCircuit Switch
BTS+VE BUS Bar
−VE BUS Bar
CommonCircuit Switch
Terminal Block
Single PoleCircuit Switch
Single PoleCircuit Switch
Figure 277: External Outdoor Battery Cabinet, Block Diagram
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 501 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.1 Mechanical Design
5.2.1.1 Dimensions and WeightThe external outdoor battery cabinet has the following dimensions and weight.
Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA 3BK 26004 AAAB
Total Height 1500 mm 1312 mm
Width 700 mm 680 mm
Depth 800 mm 830 mm
Table 48: Dimensions
Cabinet pre-equipped with ACU but without batteries. < 180 kg
Cabinet with three battery units. < 600 kg
Table 49: Weight
5.2.1.2 CabinetThe external outdoor battery cabinet consists of a box-shaped frame bolted to aplinth. Four clearance long holes in the bottom (one in each edge) allow to fixthe cabinet to the fundament using M12 anchor bolts. Other components areadded to this basic construction. The cabinet has foam-insulated walls and roof.
The following figures show the internal arrangement of the different variants ofcabinets. The battery units are mounted in three shelves, one unit per shelf.Each unit consists of four separate battery blocks (12 V) connected in line.The minus line of each battery unit is connected to a separate single-polecircuit switch placed at the DC breaker box above the battery floors in cabinetversion 3BK 26004 AAAA and at the AC/DC distribution box in cabinet verion3BK 26004 AAAB. From that circuit switch the minus line is connected to a busbar. Plus lines of all battery units are connected to another bus bar. Both busbars are connected with a double pole main circuit switch (placed at the DCbreaker box) and then with terminal blocks placed at the bottom of the right sidewall for further connection to BTS. An exhausting tube for each battery unit isconnected to the roof or bottom plate.
Adjustable brackets are at both sides of each shelf to position the battery unit.The distance between battery blocks is maintained by means of spacerssupplied with the battery.
502 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
Battery units are covered in front with a small cover plate to secure the batteries.
DC Breaker Box
Door Switch
Smoke Detector
Airconditionerwith integrated heater
RIBAT Plate
Battery Units
Front View
ExternalCable Entry
TransmissionBlocks
Top View A(Bottom Floor)
InternalCable Entry
InternalCable Entry
AC Box(behind frame)
A
Battery Unit
Jumper
Door SwitchSmoke Detector
Airconditionerwith integrated heater
RIBAT Plate
Battery Units
Front View
ExternalCable Entry
Top View A(Bottom Floor)
InternalCable Entry
AC/DC Box andTransmission Blocks
(behind frame)
A
Battery Unit
Jumper
ExhaustingHoles
Figure 278: External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Variant 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left) and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)
Main (+) battery terminal of each unit is connected to a temperature sensor,which monitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is usedby the SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus to prevent batteryoverheating. This sensor information is collected and stored in RIBAT boards,which are placed above the DC breaker box.
RIBAT boards (for more information see RIBAT (Section 12.29)) are poweredby the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 503 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.1.3 DoorAccess to the external outdoor battery cabinet is via a door at the front. Thedoor provides both an environmental seal and EMI protection when closed.Mounted on the inside of the door is an air conditioner with an integrated heater.
Above the air conditioner is a latch mechanism for keeping the door openduring maintenance. Restrainers allow fixing the door open at 90� and 135�.
The door has a 3-point latching system with a Eurocylinder barrel locatedcentrally, opened by a key.
The door presses an electronic switch. This switch causes an alarm, if the dooris open. The switch can be switched off during maintenance.
5.2.1.4 Cable Entry and TerminalsAC, DC, RIBAT (CA-RIBEO) and Alarm cables enter the cabinet via the cableentry plate at the bottom of back, the left or right side wall. Internally, cablesare passed through cable glands at the ground floor. For cabinet version 3BK26004 AAAA the cables are connected to the DC and alarm terminals (placedat the right inner side wall), the AC distribution box (placed at the left inner sidewall), or to the first RIBAT board. For cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB thecables are connected to the AC/DC power connection box (placed at the leftinner side wall) or to the first RIBAT board.
The AC distribution box is shown in the figure 279 for cabinet version 3BK26004 AAAA (left) and for cabinet version 3BK 26004 AAAB (right). It containsan 1-pole AC main switch (L), a residual current breaker (RCB) for the servicelight and socket, and a switch for the air conditioner and integrated heater.
Lightning protectors for AC leads (L, N) are placed at the right and wiredto the earthing strip.
AC Main EntryBottom Plate
ACDistributionBox
ToAirconditioner/Heater
ToService Light/Socket
Residual Current Breaker’Service Light/Socket’
Switch’Airconditioner/Heater’
SurgeProtections
ACMain Switch
Cable EntryBottom Plate
AC/DCDistributionBox
To Service Light/ SocketAir Conditioner/HeaterSmoke Detector
Residual Current Breaker’Service Light/Socket’
Switch’Air conditioner/Heater’
SurgeProtections
ACMain Switch
BatteryStrings 1,2,3
DC Disconnector
To BatteryStrings
Figure 279: AC Distribution Box for Cabinet Version 3BK 26004 AAAA (Left)and 3BK 26004 AAAB (Right)
504 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.1.5 Environmental ConditionsThe external battery cabinet equipment housings provide the necessaryenvironmental and safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019-1-4 class 4.1, for outdoor equipment.
The minimum ambient temperature is -33� C, exceptional ambient temperatureis up to +50� C. Shock and vibration according to class 4M3; earthquakeaccording to Bellcore 3.
Storage conditions are according to ETS 300 019-1-1 class 1.2.
Transportation conditions (packed) are either according to ETS 300 019-1-2class 2.3 (public transportation, cabinet without batteries fitted) or to ETS 300019-1-2 class 2.2 (careful transportation, cabinet with battery fitted). Transportand crane lifting with batteries is possible.
5.2.1.6 Electromagnetic CompatibilityConducted emission on AC (air conditioner/heater) are according to EN55022 class B.
Harmonic current emissions on AC lines are according to EN 61000-3-2.
5.2.2 External Battery
The battery type used in the external outdoor battery cabinet is BU101. Thistype is also used in indoor and outdoor BTSs and internal indoor battery cabinet.
A detailed description, including charging, discharging and storage parameters,is given in BU101 (Section 12.26). Battery blocks of one unit are installed in line(contrary to the installation in the MBO cabinet) as shown in the following figure.
ExhaustingHoses
Jumper
Top View
To BUS Bar viaCircuit Breaker
Battery Battery
Front View
Battery Battery
TemperatureSensor Cable(to RIBAT)
To BUS Bar
Figure 280: External Outdoor Battery Unit
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 505 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.3 Auxiliary Equipment
The auxiliary equipment installed in the external battery cabinets is describedbelow.
5.2.3.1 Air ConditionerThe air conditioner is used to maintain the temperature of the battery in rangeof about 20 - 25� C at ambient temperature up to 45� C, solar load included.
The air conditioner is fixed to the door via 2x5 M5 studs placed on the door.The unit is supplied by 230 VAC; cooling capacity is 350 W.
The following figure shows the internal and external air paths.
Door Side
Door Side
Top
Rear Side
Rear Side
Air Inlet
Air Outlet
Air PathsSide View
InternalAir Path
ExternalAir Path
Figure 281: Air Conditioner Unit, Air Paths
The internal warmer air is taken into the internal fan at the top of the unit andis forced through the evaporator coil and supplied back to the bottom of thecabinet. The heater element is located in front of the fan intake area.
The external cooler air is taken into the external fan positioned in the bottomof the unit and is forced through the coil and exhausted back to the externalenvironment at the top.
Supervision of the air conditioner produces one sum alarm if the unit fails. Thealarm line is wired to signal terminals for further connection to BTS.
5.2.3.2 HeaterThe heater is used for a warm-up period from -33� C and to maintaintemperature inside the cabinet above 10� C. The heater is integrated in the airconditioner. The heater element (1 kW) is located in the upper internal part ofthe air conditioner just before the internal fan intake.
The heater is controlled by a control board and is supplied by 230 VDC. Forprotection, two thermal switches are placed close to the heater elements. Bothhave a setting of 40� C for cut off and 25� C for resetting.
506 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.3.3 Overcurrent ProtectionsThe breakers for the AC lines are fitted in a box in the left side wall of the cabinet:
Breaker Type Description
1x 1-pole C16 A MCB in L line Incoming mains line
1x 2-pole 6A/ 30 mA RCB in L and Nlines
Interior light and servicesocket
1x 1-pole C10 A MVB in L line Air conditioner and heater
Table 50: Overcurrent Protection AC Lines
The breakers for the DC lines are fitted in the distribution box at the topof the cabinet:
Breaker Type Description
1x 2-pole 80 A MCB fast acting in 0 Vand -48 V main DC lines
Main DC Outgoing
3x 1-pole 80 A MCB in -48 V line Separate battery branch
1x 1-pole 2 A fuse or MCB in 12 V line Smoke detector
Note: The 0 V lead (+ pole of battery) is connected to PE inside of BTS.
Note: The 0 V and -48 V main DC lines can also be switched off/on by a2-pole circuit switch inside the BTS.
Table 51: Overcurrent Protection DC Lines
5.2.3.4 Lightning ProtectionLightning protection is equipped for AC lines only. It is fitted in the left side wallof the cabinet close to cable entry and wired to the earthing strip. There aremedium stage protectors (category c) for L and N leads.
5.2.3.5 Door SwitchThe cabinet is equipped with an electromechanical door switch. If the door isopened, an alarm is raised and sent to the BTS. The alarm line is wired tosignal terminals. The alarm can be cancelled manually if an open door isrequired for maintenance operations etc...
5.2.3.6 Smoke DetectorAn optical smoke detector is fitted on the top of the right inner side wall of thecabinet. In case of smoke inside the cabinet, an alarm is raised and sent to theBTS. The smoke detector is powered by + 12 VDC provided from the BTS.Alarm and DC power lines are wired to signal terminals.
5.2.3.7 Service Light and AC Power SocketA service light and integral 230 VAC power socket are fitted at the top of thecabinet, both protected by one common 6 A MCB.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 507 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.3.8 RIBATThe RIBAT is a printed circuit board for remote inventory and temperaturesupervision of the battery. Up to three RIBAT boards (one for each battery unit)can be fitted in one cabinet. The boards are placed on a 19” panel and fittedabove the distribution box on the top. Each RIBAT reports the supervision resultat a dedicated address (for more information, see RIBAT (Section 12.29)).RIBAT boards are powered by + 5 VDC provided from the BTS. RIBATs areconnected to the XBCB bus in the BTS via the CA-RIBEO cable.
5.2.3.9 Document HolderThe document holder is attached to the inner side of the door or side wall tostore A4 documents.
5.2.4 External Battery Cabinet Outdoor Interfaces
5.2.4.1 A9100 MBS Outdoor InterfacesThe following intrerfaces are available for A9100 MBS Outdoor and olderBTS cabinets:
AC 230VTN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltagerange is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed ineach BTS cabinet
External DC 48V (charging voltage)AC/DC rectifiers PM12 are designed for permanent connection to DCload and backup battery (DC bus)
Nominal voltage: -48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in BTS cabinet)
Voltage range Ufloat: -52.5 to –57V temperature regulated
2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery.
Voltage setting
Cell voltage at 20�C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode
Cell voltage range 2.20V to 2.35V in step 0.01V
Default setting 2.29 V/cell.
Charge current limitation
Maximum charge current can be set by means of Local Terminal in acommissioning mode:
Limitation range: 0A to 15.5A in step 0.5A
Default setting: 8A.
Boost chargeNot applicable.Temperature regulationSee XBCB Interface.Overvoltage protectionDC bus is not overvoltage protected. It is strongly requested to route DCwires between BTS cabinet and external battery in a metallic cable trayconnected to site common bonding network (CBN).DC wiring
508 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
Maximum length of wires 10 m Wire cross section must be chosen to be inline with (in general 16 or 25 mm2):
Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V
Used MCB 70A inside BTS cabinet
Wire load capability.
XBCBNeeded for temperature regulation of charging voltage. XBCB is an externalconnection to BTS Control Bus with BTS specific requirements. Next toexternal battery PBA RIBAT 3BK 25133 AAAA must be placed.
The RIBAT connections are:
Temperature sensor
XBCB cable to BTS
RIBAT termination.
AlarmOptional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervisedby BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smokedetector etc., if any).Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicatedovervoltage protected terminals inside of BTS.
External alarm interface characteristics:
Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating
Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).
GroundingAll collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, externalequipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site commonbonding network (CBN) in shortest possible way.
5.2.4.2 A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoor InterfacesThe following intrerfaces are available for A9100 MBS Evolution Outdoorcabinet:
AC 230VTN-S, TN-C, TT power systems are used, 3- or 5-wire (L,N,PE). Voltagerange is -150 - 280 V AC and overvoltage protection class II installed ineach BTS cabinet.
External DC 48V (charging voltage)AC/DC rectifiers PM18 used in MBO Evolution cabinet are designed forpermanent connection to DC load and backup battery.
Nominal voltage- 48V DC (0V pole connected to PE in BTS cabinet)
Voltage range Ufloat = -52.5 to -57V temperature regulated
2-wire system (floating) connection to external battery.
Voltage setting
Cell voltage at 20�C (battery manufacturer’s recommendation) can be set bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode.
Cell voltage range 2.20V to 2.35V in step 0.01V
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 509 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
Default setting 2.29 V/cell.
Charge current limitationMaximum charge current can be set by means of Local Terminal in acommissioning mode.Limitation range 1A to 31A in step of 1A.Default setting 8A.Boost chargeBoost charge mode (charging with elevated voltage) can be selected bymeans of Local Terminal in a commissioning mode. Boost charge returnsto float charge mode automatically after 5h time period or on demand byappropriate selection in Local Terminal in a commissioning mode.Temperature regulationPM18 temperture sensor must be connected to external battery. Connectionto PM18 is done by means of an extension cord. For routing the extensioncord same rules apply as for DC wires.Overvoltage protectionDC bus is not overvoltage protected. It is strongly requested to route DCwires between BTS cabinet and external battery in a metallic cable trayconnected to site common bonding network (CBN).DC wiring
Maximum length of wires 10 m. Wire cross section must be chosen to be inline with (in general 16 or 25 mm2):
Maximum allowed DC voltage drop 2V
Used MCB 80A inside PM18
Wire load capability.
XBCBNot applicable.
AlarmOptional interface used when an external equipment has to be supervisedby BTS OMC (e.g. door of ext. enclosure, cooling equipment, smokedetector etc., if any).Up to three external alarm inputs can be connected using dedicatedovervoltage protected terminals inside of BTS.
External alarm interface characteristics:
Electromechanical contacts or optocoupler, floating
Normal closed - alarm loop conductive in normal status (no alarm).
GroundingAll collocated equipment, antenna pole and feeders, BTS cabinet, externalequipment, cable trays, must be properly connected to the site commonbonding network (CBN) in shortest possible way.
510 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
5 External Battery Cabinets
5.2.4.3 External Battery Cabinet CablingThere following cables are used to connect an external outdoor battery cabinetwith a BTS and ground:
PC05B5, 3BK 25561 AAAA, AC Power Cable, 3x2.5 mm² in 100 m roll
PC25BL1D, 3BK 25995 AAAA, Power Cable (-48 V), 1x25 mm² bluein 100 m roll
PC25B1D, 3BK 08963 BAAA, Power Cable (0 V), 1x25 mm² black in 100
m roll
PC50YG1D, 3BK 08961 BAAA, Ground Cable, 50 mm² green/yellow
in 100 m roll
CA12058, 3BK 08965 AAAA, Alarm Cable, L907, 4 quads, 120 Ohmsin 100 m roll
CA-RIBEO, 3BK 26138 AAAA, RIBAT Cable external Battery outdoor.
All external cables listed above are fixed installation cables connected toterminals at both sides. Cable lengths depend on the local distance betweenthe battery cabinet and the BTS.
The CA-RIBEO cable is connected to the first RIBAT board at the batterycabinet side. At the BTS side, the cable is connected to the OUTC board via anXBCB connector. The mechanical design of the CA-RIBEO cable/connector isfound in External Cables (Section 17.2).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 511 / 910
5 External Battery Cabinets
512 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack
The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations, where necessary.An illustration of the subrack is also included.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 513 / 910
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack
6.1 STASR General InformationThe STASR is the standard telecommunications subrack for all BTS A9100configurations. The number of subracks used, and the types of plug-in modulesfitted into the subracks, is configuration dependent.
Each STASR plug-in module has a unique number which identifies its positionwithin the cabinet.
The number consists of:
Subrack number - coded on the subrack interconnecting ribbon cable
Slot position within subrack - coded on the subrack backplane PCB.
The possible plug-in modules can be:
TRE
SUMA/SUMP
Antenna Network modules: ANC, ANX, ANY
Power Supply equipment: ADAM, ADAM4, PM12
Microwave modules.
6.2 STASR Mechanical CharacteristicsThe following figure shows the STASR with no modules fitted.
Module Guide Rail
FANU Guide RailSubrack Fixing Lug
Hole for Camloc Fastener
Power Connector
Inter−subrack Connector
Backplane
Ground Connector
Module Connector
Module Connector
Figure 282: STASR Construction
For common information and dimensions refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).
The STASR has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane has nine connectors for theplug-in modules and three for the FANUs. An inter-subrack cable connector atthe top of the backplane is provided for multiple subrack configurations. Thepower connection consists of three FASTON connectors.
Refer to the STASR Electrical Description (Section 6.3) for a description of thesubrack backplane.
514 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack
6.3 STASR Electrical DescriptionThe STASR is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.
6.3.1 Power Supplies and Grounding
The STASR receives its -48/ -60 VDC supply from the cabinet DC distributionpanel, via the cabinet bus bar. Each module fitted within the STASR has its ownon-board DC/DC converter, except the ANY which is a passive RF module.
Ground continuity, between the subrack and the equipment rack, is ensured byusing earth linking straps. The straps are attached to the equipment rack busbar at one end and terminated on the subrack with a FASTON connector. Thesubrack is also fixed to the equipment rack with conductive self-tapping screws.
6.3.2 Backplane
The backplane is a multi-layer PCB. It distributes the -48/ -60 VDC, to powerthe subrack equipment, and the digital signals between the various plug-inmodules. The following figure shows a front view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.
FANU Connectors
Module Connectors
Ribbon Cable Connector
Power Connectors
FACB Connectors
0 V −48 VGND
Equipment Label
FACB
X101 X102 X103 X104 X105 X106 X107 X108 X109
Connector Identity
X110 X111 X112
X116
X117
X113X100
Pin 1, Row A
Figure 283: STASR Backplane Connector Layout, Front View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 515 / 910
6 Standard Telecommunications Subrack
6.3.3 Connectors and Cables
The following table lists and describes the STASR cables and connectors. Forconnector locations, see Figure 283.
Name Quantity Type and Description
ModuleConnectors
9 Millipacs Type 1.
FACBConnectors
2 2 x 6-pin male Header type connector.
2 x 16-pin male Header type connector.
The FACB connectors are linked to the FANU connectors via the backplaneprinted wiring.
FANUConnectors
3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.
Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrack backplane(see Figure 283).
Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.
The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks (see Figure CIMI/CIDISubracks Interconnection Cable (184) and Figure 192). It is pre-equipped withthe correct number of connectors for the number of subracks deployed.
Power Cable 1 Three-core twin and earth, terminated with a three-in-one FASTON connector.
Table 52: STASR Connectors and Cables
The following table lists the module connectors and the associated modules.The symbol shows that the particular connector is a possible plug-in positionfor the associated module.
ConnectorSUMA SUMP ANC ANX ANY TRETREHP IDU
X101 - -
X102 - - - - - - -
X103 - - - - - -
X104 - - - - -
X105 - - - - - -
X106 - - -
X107 - - - - - -
X108 - - - - -
X109 - - - - - -
Table 53: STASR Module Connectors and Associated Modules
516 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7 AC Power Subracks
The sections are supported with diagrams and illustrations, where necessary.An illustration of each subrack is also included.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 517 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
7.1 SRACDCThe SRACDC is the power subrack used for all BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations with the PM08 power supply modules. It contains plug-inmodules which convert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-inmodules are fitted in predefined slots within the subrack.
SRACDC contains the following modules:
ACIB
ACRI
BACO
BCU1
Up to five PM08s
FANUs.
7.1.1 SRACDC Mechanical Characteristics
The following figure shows the SRACDC subrack with no modules fitted.
FANU Guide Rail
Subrack Fixing Lug
Hole for Camloc Fastener
Backplane
FANU Connector
Module Connectors
Module Guide Rail
X106
X200 X201 X202
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
Connector Identity
Pin 1, Row A
Figure 284: SRACDC Subrack Front View
For common information and dimensions refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).
The SRACDC has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane contains nine connectorsfor the plug-in modules and three for the FANUs.
518 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7.1.2 SRACDC Subrack Layout
Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure.
ACIBACRI
PM08/5
BACO
PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
Figure 285: SRACDC Module Positions
There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 5, as shown.
7.1.3 SRACDC Electrical Description
The SRACDC is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.
7.1.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe SRACDC power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rackwith conductive self-tapping screws. Ground continuity is maintained by themetal fittings and securing brackets.
The SRACDC is isolated from the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supplyfrom the ACSB connects directly to the AC IN connector on the front of ACIB(see the following figure). From there it connects to the front of the PM08swhere it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.
The DC is connected to the SRACDC backplane for distribution to:
BACO for charging the optional batteries
DCDP for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 519 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
7.1.3.2 BackplaneThe SRACDC backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipmentthat requires it. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment externalto the SRACDC. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane andthe positions of the various connectors.
FANU Connector
0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors
Module Connector
X203
X204R
211
X203
−48V
0V
X204
R201
Figure 286: SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View
7.1.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the SRACDC subrack cables andconnectors. For connector locations, see Figures SRACDC Subrack Front View(284) and SRACDC Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (286).
Name Quantity Type and Description
Module Connectors 6 H15-F (DIN 41612).
The connectors are used by the PM08s and the BACO.
Module Connectors 3 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612).
The connectors are used by the ACRI, BACO and BCU1.
FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.
Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrackbackplane (see Figure 286).
Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.
The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It is pre-equippedwith the correct number of connectors for the number of subracksdeployed.
Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.
The cables carry the 0/-48 VDC to the interconnection panel.
Table 54: SRACDC Connectors and Cables
520 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7.2 ACSRThe ACSR is the power subrack used for BTS A9100 outdoor configurationswith PM11 power supply modules. ACSR contains plug-in modules whichconvert the AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules arefitted in predefined slots within the subrack.
ACSR contains the following modules:
BAC2
BCU2
Up to four PM11s
FANUs.
7.2.1 ACSR Mechanical Characteristics
The following figure shows the ACSR subrack with no modules fitted.
FANU Guide Rail
Hole for Camloc Fastener
FANU Connector
Module Connectors
Subrack Fixing Lug
Backplane
Module Guide Rail
Pin 1, Row A
Figure 287: ACSR Subrack Front View
For common information and dimensions refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).
The ACSR has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical andsignaling interface for the modules. The backplane contains six connectors forthe plug-in modules and two for the FANUs.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 521 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
7.2.2 ACSR Subrack Layout
Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure.
PM11/1 BCU2BAC2 PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2
Figure 288: ACSR Module Positions
There are four PM11 slots. The PM11s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 4, as shown.
7.2.3 ACSR Electrical Description
The ACSR is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.
7.2.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe ACSR power supply system subrack is fixed to the equipment rack withconductive self-tapping screws. Ground continuity is maintained by the metalfittings and securing brackets.
The ACSR is connected to the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supply fromthe ACSB connects to the ACSR backplane. From there it connects to thePM11s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.
The DC is connected to the ACSR backplane for distribution to:
BAC2 for charging the optional batteries
BOBU for further distribution to the STASR subracks, XIOB and HEX2s.
522 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7.2.3.2 BackplaneThe ACSR backplane distributes the 230 VAC supply from the ACSB tothe PM11s. The backplane also distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrackequipment that requires it.
One five-wire power cable carries the AC power from the ACSB to thebackplane. Two power cables carry the DC power to the equipment external tothe ACSR. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.
FANU Connector 0/−48 VDC Power Out Connectors
Module Connector
GND(M5 Bolt)
230 VACPower In
Connectors
L1 L3NL2
Figure 289: ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 523 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
7.2.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the ACSR subrack cables andconnectors. For connector locations, see Figures ACSR Subrack Front View(287) and ACSR Backplane Connector Layout Rear View (289).
Name Quantity Type and Description
Module Connectors 5 H15-F (DIN 41612).
The connectors are used by the PM11s and BAC2.
Module Connectors 1 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612).
The connector is used by BCU2.
FANU Connectors 2 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.
Two FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of thesubrack backplane (see Figure 289).
Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.
The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It ispre-equipped with the correct number of connectors for thenumber of subracks deployed.
AC Power Cables 1 Four FASTON connectors and one M5 x 8 terminal.
The cables carry the 230 VAC (L1, L2, L3, N, and GND) fromthe ACSB.
DC Power Cables 2 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.
The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel.
Table 55: ACSR Connectors and Cables
524 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7.3 ASIBThe ASIB is the power subrack for the BTS A9100 indoor configurationspowered from an AC mains supply. It contains plug-in modules which convertthe AC mains supply into a 48 VDC supply. The plug-in modules are fitted inpredefined slots within the subrack.
7.3.1 ASIB Mechanical Characteristics
The following figure shows the ASIB subrack with no modules fitted.
FANU Guide Rail
Subrack Fixing Lug
Hole for Camloc Fastener
Backplane
FANU Connector
Module Connectors
Module Guide Rail
X106
X202X201 X250
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
Connector Identity
Pin 1, Row A
X300
Figure 290: ASIB Front View
For common information and dimensions, refer to Subracks (Section 1.3).
The ASIB has an integral backplane, which provides the electrical and signalinginterface for the modules. The backplane has nine connectors for the plug-inmodules and three for the FANUs.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 525 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
7.3.2 ASIB Layout
Modules are fitted at the predefined positions shown in the following figure.
APOD ACRI
PM08/5
ABAC
PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
Figure 291: ASIB Module Positions
There are five PM08 slots. The PM08s are identified by numbers in the range 1to 5, as shown.
7.3.3 ASIB Electrical Description
The ASIB is described below in terms of power supplies and grounding, thebackplane, and connectors and cables.
7.3.3.1 Power Supplies and GroundingThe ASIB is isolated from the AC supply voltage. The 230 VAC supply from theAFIP connects via the backplane to the APOD. From there it connects to thefront of the PM08s where it is converted to 0/ -48 VDC.
The DC is connected to the ASIB backplane for distribution to:
ABAC for charging the optional batteries
Cabinet cable trunk for further distribution to the STASR subracks.
The subrack is fixed to the equipment rack with conductive M6 screws. Groundcontinuity is maintained by the metal fittings and securing brackets.
526 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
7 AC Power Subracks
7.3.3.2 BackplaneThe backplane distributes the 0/ -48 VDC to the subrack equipment thatrequires it. Four power cables carry DC power to the equipment external tothe ASIB. The following figure shows a rear view of the backplane and thepositions of the various connectors.
FANU Connector
Module Connector
Figure 292: ASIB Backplane Connector Layout Rear View
7.3.3.3 Connectors and CablesThe following table lists and describes the ASIB subrack cables and connectors.For connector locations, see Figures ASIB Front View (290) and ASIBBackplane Connector Layout Rear View (292).
Name Quantity Type and Description
Module Connectors 6 H15-F (DIN 41612).
The connectors are used by the PM08s and the ABAC.
Module Connectors 3 R64-M-a-c (DIN 41612).
The connectors are used by the ACRI, ABAC and BCU1.
FANU Connectors 3 Type R 1/3 30-M connectors.
Three FANU connectors are positioned at the bottom of the subrackbackplane (see Figure 292).
Ribbon Cable 1 C 64 M (DIN 41612) connector.
The cable is used to interconnect multiple subracks. It is pre-equippedwith the correct number of connectors for the number of subracksdeployed.
Power Cables 4 60 A power terminals M5 x 8.
The cables carry the 0/ -48 VDC to the interconnection panel.
Table 56: ASIB Connectors and Cables
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 527 / 910
7 AC Power Subracks
528 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
8 Station Unit Modules
The sections are supported with diagrams, where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 529 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.1 Introduction to Station Unit ModulesThe SUMP/SUMA provides the central management and control of all theBTS A9100 modules.
It is responsible for the following functional areas:
Digital transmission
Timing and clock generation
Management of the BTS internal digital interfaces
O and M functions
RI
Control of the AC/DC converters and check of the batteries (SUMA only).
The following figure gives an overview of all the interfaces connected to theSUMP/SUMA.
Other Abis flows(6)
Qmux(4) SUMA/
OML(1)
CLKI (13)
TRE
FAN
:BTS Terminal
BCB(11)
RSLi(7), TCHi(8)
IOM(10), IOM−CONF(9)
Externaltool
XGPS (15)
RSL(2),TCH(3)
TSC
IOM(10), IOM_CONF(9)
RCB(5)
CA
REL_CON(18)
BSC
GPS
EBCB(12)
AC/DC
XCLK(14)
XBCB(12)
AN
Battery
MMI(17)
InternalGPS
receiver
IGPS (16)
Battery
BTSBTS
G1/G2/A9100EXT CLK ref
SUMP
BTS A9100
*)
*) for SUMA only
*)
Figure 293: The SUMP/SUMA in its Environment
The following table provides information relative to the links mentioned in thefigure above. All external links connected to the CA in Figure 293 are routedthrough the CA to the SUMA/SUMP.
Note: The AN, ANX, ANY, ANC modules are connected to the BCB, but only the ANXand ANC are connected to IOM and IOM_CONF.
530 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
Link 1 Comment
OML L The link carries O and M messages between the BSC and BTS. The link is routedby the SUMP/SUMA from/to Abis to/from BSII.
RSL L These links are transparently routed by the SUMP/SUMA from/to Abis
TCH L To/from the BSII.
Qmux L This link is used for the remote transmission O and M between the TSC and theTransmission part of the BTS.
RCB L This link is used to control the ring functions between the BIEs by managing F, S,R, FEA, AIS bits.
Other Abisflows
L All the other flows carried by the Abis are transparently routed in Abis ring or dropthrough the SUMP/SUMA.
RSLi L The Radio signaling Link is for TRE telecom function.
TCHi L The Traffic Channel is for TRE telecom function.
IOM_CONF L It is used to broadcast the IOM configuration by the SUMP/SUMA.
IOM L This link carries O and M messages exchanged between the SUMP/SUMA andother BTS modules connected on the IOM.
These links are used for BTS internal O and M between SUMP/SUMA and otherBTS equipment.
BCB P The link is connected to other BTS modules and allows the BTS Remote Inventorysupported by SUMP/SUMA.
XBCB(EBCB)
P The link is connected to the external tool for Remote Inventory. XBCB is changedinto EBCB in between SUMP/SUMA and CA.
When the SUMP/SUMA is powered off, the BTS module Remote Inventoryinformation is reported to the external tool through the EBCB. This feature is usedonly at factory level.
When the SUMP/SUMA is powered on, the alarms from XIOB are reported toSUMP/SUMA through the EBCB.
CLKI P This link distributes BTS internal synchronizing signals to TRE and AN.
XCLK P The link carries BTS external clock synchronization signals for either the masteror slave configuration.
XGPS P These flows are used in order to communicate with the GPS system.
It is External GPS when the GPS system is outside the BTS and Internal GPSwhen it is plugged inside the SUMP/SUMA.
These flows carry the supervision interface of the GPS system (Configuration,Fault).
IGPS P These flows carry the GPS CLK reference.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 531 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
Link 1 Comment
MMI L This link is connected to a PC used as a BTS Terminal which includes the localBTS O and M application. it includes:
The download of software for SUMP/SUMA and other BTS downloadable
modules
The BTS commissioning tests
The O and M commands for the Transmission part of the SUMP/SUMA
The O and M commands for the Clock part of the SUMP/SUMA (for OCXO
calibration and OCXO tuning).
REL_CON P This relay command flow is used to control Abis relays. This flow has its ownphysical interface.
Table 57: SUMP/SUMA Interfaces
1) This column indicates for each link if it is a logical link (L) or a physical link (P).
The following figure shows the functional block diagram of the SUMP/SUMA.
XCLK
Abis 1
Abis 2
BSII Switch
and Timing
Transmission & Clock
XGPS CLK CLKI
External Interfaces
System Master Clock, TDMA Frame Clock and Frame Number Distribution to TRE and AN
BSII 0
BSII 1
O&MXRT
MMI
XBCB BCB
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
XGPS
HFFI
RI
2 Mbit/s2 Mbit/s
Internal Interfaces
2 Mbit/s
HFFI Hook for Future Interface: It consists of 4 Lines which are in the backplane and
2 Mbit/sBSII 2
(SUMA only)
which are free for future evolution.
Figure 294: SUMP/SUMA Basic Architecture
532 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
The SUMP/SUMA provides a switchable 2 Mbit/s duplex connection betweenthe Abis Interface and the BSII. The BSII is used to transfer TCH information tothe TRE module, and O and M information to the OMU/SUM microprocessor.SUMA has an additional BSII 2 interface. This is used exclusively to carryTCH information.
The SUMP/SUMA comprises the following functional blocks:
Transmission and Clock
BSII
OMU
RI.
The SUMP uses two microprocessors, the SUMA only one to run thesoftware/firmware for the O and M and Transmission and Clock functions.
8.2 Transmission and Clock FunctionsThe SUMP/SUMA Transmission and Clock functions provide:
Clock selection and generation
Two 2 Mbit/s interfaces to the BSC, via a PCM link.
The following figure shows the Transmission and Clock architecture.
XCLK
Abis 1
Abis 2
CLK Framer
Time Slot Switch
CLK Framer
Abis 3
Abis 4
CLK
CLK
Optional with Piggy−back Board
XGPS CLK CGU
Time Slot Switch
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
Framer
Framer
XGPS
TMMI
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
Transmission & Clock Micropro−
cessor (*)
BSII 0
BSII 1
CLKI
BSII 2
(SUMAonly)(*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor
Figure 295: SUMP/SUMA Transmission and Clock Architecture
The principal functional components and interfaces of the Transmission andClock are as follows:
Abis Interface
Transmission and Clock microprocessor
CGU
Q1 link.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 533 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.2.1 Abis Interface
The Abis Interface is the digital interface to the BSC. The SUMP/SUMAprovides two G.703 Abis Interfaces.
They support the following communications links:
TCH, which carries speech and/or data
OML, which uses a LAPD protocol
RSL, which carries signaling data for the telecommunications functions
Q1 Link, which carries transmission management data.
Relays, mounted on the cabinet interconnection panel, are used to route theAbis links transparently if the SUMP/SUMA is switched off.
The Abis Interface consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.
Clock Recovery The Clock circuit recovers timing from the PCMlink.
Framer Device The Framer is responsible for:
Insertion of frame/multiframe synchronizationpatterns
Monitoring frame and multiframe
synchronization
HDB3 coding/decoding for PCM
AIS detection
Frame and CRC error detection.
The Framer can be configured for CRC by theTransmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor, viathe Time Slot Switch.
Time Slot Switch The Time Slot Switch is responsible for mappingthe 64 kbit/s time slots onto the TCH. The switchis configured by the Transmission and Clock/SUMmicroprocessor.
Loop-back Relays Relays on the SUMP/SUMA provide a loop-backon the Abis Interface for testing the Abis links.
Table 58: SUMP/SUMA, Abis Interface Functional Entities
Two additional Abis Interfaces can be implemented with a ’Piggy-back’ board(SUMA only). This is an optional feature of the BTS A9100.
534 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
8.2.2 Transmission and Clock Microprocessor
In case of SUMA the Transmission and Clock functions run on the only SUMmicroprocessor.
The Transmission and Clock microprocessor controls the transmission andclock functions on the SUMP/SUMA. It consists of a QUICC (SUMP) orPowerQUICC (SUMA), with access to the RAM and to the EEPROM.
The external signal connected to the microprocessor is the XGPS, forcontrolling a GPS receiver.
8.2.3 Station Unit Module Clock Generation Unit
The functions of the clock generation unit consist of the:
Generation of the GSM clock by an internal OCXO for TRE and ANmodules in the BTS
Possibility to synchronize the OCXO:
On an external clock reference coming from (Slave synchronization -
Slave BTS) another BTS (G1, G2, BTS A9100)
On the Abis clock (PCM synchronization - Master BTS)
On the GPS CLOCK receiver (GPS synchronization - Master BTS)
No synchronization (OCXO in free run mode) (OCXO free running -
Master BTS).
Generation of both frame clock and frame number for TRE and AN modules
in the BTS:
For the Master BTS, it is a local generation
For Slave BTS, both frame clock and frame number are aligned on
those provided by the Master BTS.
Distribution through the CLKI of GSM clock, frame clock and frame number
OCXO calibration (which is done on time in the factory and consists of the
measurement of the OCXO curve and is stored in the SUM EEPROM)
OCXO tuning (which consists of the change of the OCXO tuning value)
Possibility to synchronize other BTSs (G1 BTS, G2 BTS, BTS A9100).
In the case of ’OCXO free running’, an on-site periodic electronic tuning isnecessary. (For further information, refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110Corrective Maintenance Handbook).Regarding ’GPS synchronization’, the SUMA hardware is ready to have aGPS receiver plugged in.’GPS synchronization’ concerns frequency synchronization and timesynchronization (so that all BTSs have the same Frame Number).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 535 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.2.4 Q1 Link
The Q1 link is a logical link routed via the Abis Interface, the Time Slot Switch,the BSII switch and the BSII to the OandM functions. The OandM functionsare performed remotely by the BSC TSC, via the Q1 link, or locally via aBTS Terminal.
All BTS A9100 transmission equipment have Q1 addresses, which identifythem to the TSC. The transmission equipment is supervised by the TSCusing the Q1 protocol.
The TSC, or a local BTS Terminal, can interrogate the SUMP/SUMA for thefollowing data:
Performance measurement
Alarms
Abis clock source
Loop request
Firmware version
Hardware version.
The Q1 link is also used for software downloads, for configuration purposes.
536 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
8.3 Base Station Internal InterfaceThe BSII is an internal digital interface to the TRE module.
The BSII bus consists of three 2 Mbit/s full duplex links:
BSII 0
BSII 1
BSII 2.
The BSII basically consists of the following two functional components:
BSII PLLThe BSII PLL is logically a part of the CGU. It locks the BSII CLK to a fixedfrequency of 2.048 MHz. The clock is then distributed to the Transmissionand Clock/SUM microprocessor, and an NGISL device. Distribution isvia the SUMP/SUMA Glue Logic.The NGISL device is an ASIC, providing an internal serial link to the RemoteInventory EEPROM. It also performs serial-to-parallel conversion, to allowthe OMU microprocessor access to the EEPROM.
BSII Switch
The BSII switch performs the following functions:
Distribution of the system clock, TDMA frame clock and FN
64 kbit/s time slot mapping
Q1 message routing.
The BSII switch is implemented with a CPLD, which is a part of the GlueLogic. Its main function is to select between BSII 0, BSII 1 and BSII 2,which are the internal interfaces for O and M data distribution and uplinkand downlink TCH.The data is multiplexed, via line drivers, onto the internal interfaces undercontrol of the Transmission and Clock/SUM microprocessor. The Glue logicmonitors the status of the BSII PLL via a lock detect signal. The drivers aredisabled if the PLL is not locked to the BSII clock.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 537 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.4 Operations and Maintenance FunctionsThe O and M functions include:
Starting the BTS A9100
Configuring the BTS A9100, under control of the BSC
Executing maintenance commands
Filtering and correlating faults
Reporting, and acting on, the status of the modules
Controlling the PM12s, depending on the battery status (SUMA only).
The OMU/SUM microprocessor performs the following O and M functions:
Configuration management
Fault management
Performance management
Configuration and supervision of the BSII
Routing MMI messages to the Transmission and Clock microprocessor
(SUMP only)
Test facilities.
The O and M architecture is shown in the following figure. It consists of thefollowing functional entities:
OMU microprocessor for SUMP and for SUMA as part of the SUM processor
SDRAM
Flash EEPROM
NGISL ASIC
Glue logic.
MMI
Control Bus
XRT
Address & Data Bus
BSII
Reset
Flash EEPROM
SDRAM
NGISLGlue Logic
LEDs
External Interfaces
Remote Inventory
OMUMicroprocessor
(*)
BCB
(*) for SUMA part of the SUM processor
Figure 296: SUMP/SUMA, O and M Architecture
538 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
8.4.1 BTS Control Bus
Most of the internal control functions are managed via the BCB. The BCB alsointerfaces to an EEPROM which holds inventory information on the BTSA9100 modules.
The BCB is used for the following functions:
Accessing the RI
Detecting module insertion/extraction
Collecting alarm/data
Controlling the battery and PM12s (SUMA only).
The BCB is also used for:
Remote bit settingRemote bit setting consists of setting memory bits to control, disable orreset certain hardware. There are eight such BCB bits available, one ofwhich is reserved for power supply control
Boundary scanningBoundary scanning allows remote access to a particular module, via aboundary scan path. This facility can be used to reprogram the module’sinitialization sequence. For example, by downloading fresh data to anon-board Flash EEPROM.
8.4.2 OMU Microprocessor
In the SUMA, the O and M functions only run on the SUM processor.
The OMU microprocessor controls the O and M functions on the SUMP.
It is a Power QUICC device, with access to the following memory devices:
SDRAM, organized as 32 bits wide and accessible in 8, 16 or 32 bit words
Flash EPROM providing memory that is 32 bits wide.
The external signals connected to the microprocessor are:
MMI - for connecting a BTS terminal
XRT - for radio supervision and loop tests.
8.4.3 Glue Logic
Glue logic, implemented as a PLA, supports the CPU and connects the variousfunctional blocks together.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 539 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.5 Remote InventoryThe Remote Inventory is related to an Alcatel standard. It consists of storingin non-volatile memory the basic information related to a module from thehardware (and possibly software) point of view. This information is availableout of the module even for unpowered modules.
The range of information goes from module manufacturing (serial number,manufacturing and repair history, ...) to module design (part number, hardwarecapability, firmware release...).
One part of the Remote Inventory is mandatory, while another is optional.
Access to the inventory information is ’remote’ because it is managedexternally to the module.
However, this access can be requested from different levels:
Module accessInventory of the unplugged (and so unpowered) modules through adedicated module connector
Internal BTS accessInventory of all BTS modules from a central node internal to the BTS(SUMP/SUMA). Only the SUMP/SUMA has to be powered.
External BTS accessInventory of all BTS modules from a central node external to the BTS(XBCB-connected tool). It is used at factory level when the complete BTS isunpowered (including the SUMP/SUMA).
For both internal and external BTS accesses, the BCB is used.
540 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
8.6 Station Unit Module Power SupplyThe SUMP is powered by two identical DC/DC converters. The DC/DCconverters work in parallel to provide all the voltages required by the SUMPcircuitry. This parallel mode of operation provides redundancy. If one DC/DCconverter fails, the other is capable of supplying all the necessary SUMPvoltages.
The SUMA is powered by a single, highly reliable DC/DC converter.
The SUMP/SUMA DC/DC converters’ input/output voltages are shown inthe following table.
Voltage Value
V in -38.4 VDC min.
-72 VDC max.
-48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.
V out SUMP + 3.3 VDC ±3 %
+ 5.1 VDC ±3 %
+ 12 VDC ±10 %
V out SUMA + 3.3 VDC ±2 %
+ 5.1 VDC ±2 %
Table 59: SUMP/SUMA Input/Output Voltages
Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange -10o C to 70o C.
The power supply also has the elements described below.
Fuse The inputs of the power supply are protected by an on-boardfuse, located on the SUMP/SUMA board.
Protection The SUMP/SUMA power supply circuitry is protected againstshort circuit and accidental polarity inversion on its inputs.
Grounding Ground continuity for the module is achieved with groundpins on the subrack backplane which connect to the bus barground.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 541 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.7 Station Unit Module LEDsThere are eight LEDs on the SUMP front panel or six LEDs on the SUMAfront panel, which provide a visual indication of the operational status of theSUMP/SUMA module (see Figure 297). The following table describes eachLED and provides a definition of the various operational states.
LED Color Status Description SUMP SUMA
OML Yellow Status of the OML. X X
On Link connected.
Blinking Connecting link.
Off Link disconnected.
ABIS 1 Yellow Status of Abis1 forTransmission and Clock.
X X
On Abis 1 serviceable.
Blinking Failure detected on Abis1 .
Off Not configured or not used.
O and M Yellow O and M status for the OMU. X X
On Operational.
Blinking In a transient state, beforereaching the operationalstate.
Off Not used.
ABIS 2 Yellow Status of Abis2 forTransmission and Clock.
X X
On Abis 2 serviceable.
Blinking Failure detected on Abis2 .
Off Not configured or not used.
OMU (forSUMP)
Red OMU alarm status. X X
FAULT (forSUMA)
On Fatal alarm or module isunserviceable.
Blinking Non-fatal alarm.
Off No alarm.
542 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
LED Color Status Description SUMP SUMA
Transmission and Clockalarm status.
X -
On Fatal alarm or module isunserviceable.
Blinking Non-fatal alarm.
TransFAULT
Off No alarms.
PS1 (forSUMP)
Green Converter 1 status. X X
ON (forSUMA)
On Converter 1 serviceable.
Off Converter 1 faulty.
PS2 Green(SUMP only)
Converter 2 status. X -
On Converter 2 serviceable.
Off Converter 2 faulty.
ABIS 3 Yellow Status of Abis 3 forTransmission and Clock.
- (X)
On Abis 3 serviceable.
Blinking Failure detected on Abis 3.
Off Not configured or not used.
ABIS 4 Yellow Status of Abis 4 forTransmission and Clock.
- (X)
On Abis 4 serviceable.
Blinking Failure detected on Abis 4.
Off Not configured or not used.
Table 60: SUMP/SUMA LED Descriptions
(X) Optional, if piggy-back board is connected on the SUMA board.
Note: During a reset of the OMU microprocessor, all the red and yellow LEDs arelit for approximately 100 ms. This is a test of the LEDs to make sure theyare all working.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 543 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
8.8 Station Unit Module Front PanelThe following figure shows the SUMP and SUMA front panels.
ABIS1
ABIS2
Trans FAULT
PS2
OML
O&M
PS1
OMU
Abis 1/2Connector
BTS Connection Area Connector
BTS Terminal Connector
TestConnector
ModuleExtractors
Camloc Fasteners
LEDs
Equipment Label
Abis 3/4Connector
Optional Piggy−back Board
LEDs
GPSConnector
LEDs
SUMP SUMA
USB Connector
Figure 297: SUMP/SUMA Front Panel
544 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
8 Station Unit Modules
The following table describes the SUMP/SUMA front panel connectors.
Connector Type Description SUMP SUMA
Abis 1/2 9-pinSub-Dfemale
Provides two Abis Interfaces. The connector ispre-equipped for both 75 and 120 impedancecables. The impedance is selected by the type of cableconnector used.
Two more Abis Interfaces are possible with a piggy-backboard.
X X
Abis 3/4 9-pinSub-Dfemale
Provides two Abis Interfaces on SUMA piggy-backboard. The connector is pre-equipped for both 75 and120 impedance cables. The impedance is selectedby the type of cable connector used.
- X
BTSConnectionArea
37-pinSub-Dfemale
Provides the following digital interfaces:
XBCB
XRT
XGPS
XGPS CLKX
CLK1
Abis relay control.
X X
BTSTerminal
9-pinSub-Dfemale
For connecting a computer terminal. It provides aV.24 asynchronous serial interface, which can be usedfor local maintenance and configuration purposes.Presence of a terminal is automatically detected.
X X
BTSTerminal
USBport
For connecting a computer terminal. It provides ahigh-speed serial interface, which can be used for localmaintenance and configuration purposes. Either theV.24 interface or the USB interface can be connected toa BTS Terminal, but not both. Presence of a terminalis automatically detected.
- X
Test 9-pinSub-Dmale
Provides remote access to the OMU and Transmissionand Clock microprocessors (in case of SUMP) and tothe SUM processor (in case of SUMA) for factory testpurposes.
X X
GPS SMAfemale
Provides a synchronization output from an optionalon-board GPS receiver.
- X
Table 61: SUMP/SUMA Front Panel Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 545 / 910
8 Station Unit Modules
546 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9 Transceiver Equipment
The sections are supported with diagrams showing the functional blocksand their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 547 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1 Single Transceiver Equipment
9.1.1 Introduction to Transceiver Equipment
The TRE combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in one module.
The architecture is split into three functional blocks:
Digital part TRED
Analog part TREA with the power amplifier TEPAxx (forTADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP),
TEPADHE (for TADHE) or TREPAxx (for TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)
Power supply TREP (for TRDH, TRDM, TRGM,TRPM), TREPS (for TRAG/TRAD), or TREPSH (for
TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP).
In the TADH/TRADE/TADHE/TAGH/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAPTRE variants TRED and TREA are implemented in one submodule (TREDAx).
The TRE basic architecture is shown in the following figure.
TREA
TREPxx
TRED
T(R)EPAxx to
from
ANCx
TREDAx (for TADH/TRAD/TRAG/TRAL/TRAP)TREDAxE (for TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE)
Figure 298: TRE Basic Architecture
The TRE performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and the analogfunctions interface to the AN module. The TRE contains its own integratedpower supply.
548 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
The following types of TRE modules are available for the different BTS A9100variants:
TADH, TRE high power module for GSM 1800
TAGH, TRE high power module for GSM 900
TRAD, TRE medium power module for GSM 1800
TRADE, TRE module medium power for GSM 1800, enhanced 8-PSK power
TADHE, TRE high power module for GSM 1800 GMSK and 8-PSK
TRAG, TRE medium power module for GSM 900
TRAGE, TRE module medium power for GSM 900, enhanced 8-PSK power
TAGHE, TRE high power module for GSM 900 GMSK and 8-PSK
TRAL, TRE medium power module for GSM 850
TRAP, TRE medium power module for GSM 1900
TRDH, TRE high power module for GSM 1800
TRDM, TRE medium power module for GSM 1800
TRGM, TRE medium power module for GSM 900
TRPM, TRE medium power module for GSM 1900.
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.
9.1.2 Digital Functions
The following figures show a block diagram of the TRED hardware architecture.They show the functional blocks, relative to each other, and the interfaces tothe TRED. The shaded areas identify separate functional blocks, which areimplemented on the same hardware device.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 549 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.1 TRED Architecture of TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM
DEC
SCP
DEM
Debug 2
CLKI
BCBT
FHL
ECPL
BSII 0
ETIMMI/Debug 1
CGU
DEM
BED
TXP
MUX CUL
ENCT
MBED
ETA
RI
LEDs
CUI
I2C
RCD RPI Power Switch/Reset
ENC
BSII 1
HFFI
ADR
Figure 299: TRED Architecture (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)
The TRED (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM) consists of the following functionalentities (refer to the figure above):
Entity Control Parallel Link (ECPL)
signaling and Control Processor (SCP)
Decoder (DEC)
Demodulator (DEM)
Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and Decryption (MBED)
Encoder and Transmitter Processor (ENCT)
Carrier Unit Logic (CUL)
Clock Generation Unit (CGU)
External Test Adapter (ETA)
Remote Inventory (RI).
550 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.2 TRED Architecture of TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE,TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP
DEC
ENC
IRDM
DCOP
ECPL
DRCS
SCP
BBTX
ASIC
on TREAENCT
HFFI
FHL
IRDMC
TXP
DEM
DEM
BCB
ADR
CLKI
BSII0BSII1BSII2
CGU
RI
RCD RPI Power USB : MMISwit/Reset
ET
Debug
LEDs
I2C
FromIFFilter
To
I/QModulator
MUX BED
MBEDUBEL
Figure 300: TRED Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 551 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
The TRED (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TADHE, TRADE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,TRAL, TRAP) consists of the following functional entities (refer to the figureabove):
ECPL
SCP
DEC
DEM
Incremental Redundancy Data Memory (IRDM)
MBED, part of the UBEL
Decoder Co-processor (DCOP), part of the UBEL
IRDM Controller (IRDMC), part of the UBEL
United Baseband Logic (UBEL), containing the MBED, DCOP, and IRDMC
ENCT
CGU
RI
Baseband ASIC for Transmitter (BBTX), located on the TREA
Diversity Receiver Chip Set (DRCS), located on the TREA.
9.1.2.3 TRED System InterfacesThe TRED provides a number of system interfaces. The following table brieflydescribes each of them (see also Figures 299 and 300).
ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to set BCB physicalBCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.
BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controlling andsupervision of the power supply.
CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the Evolium BTS A9100 master clock and the frame clockmultiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.
BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling) and internalO and M data. TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP: threelinks, TRDH/TRDM/TRGM/TRPM: two links.
HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.
FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.
RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TREA receiver inputs.
RPI Remote power interface: consists of:
Power lines for TRED and TREA DC supply
On/off control of the power supply
Alarm handling for the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH DC input and DC output signals.
552 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
MMI/Debug1
Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only).
Debug2
Debug interface: for TRE (development and validation only).
PSwitch/Reset
Manual front panel power switch: disables the TREP/TREPS/TREPSH for TRE maintenance(security function for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset(PB_SRST) with fast off/on sequence.
LEDs Front panel LED control.
ETI Used to trace the ECPL, or access it with a test tool.
I2C Interface to the TREA EEPROM which stores the calibration and adjustment data.
CUI Transfers uplink and downlink TCH data, and configuration/control data between TRED andTREA.
USB Universal serial bus as known from the personal computer domain. It is used to channel the toolinterfaces ET/ISA, MMI, ALFS and Debug which are all targets for communication with a PC.
Table 62: TRED Interface Descriptions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 553 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.4 Entity Control Parallel LinkThe ECPL is the main internal control bus. It provides a parallel interfacebetween the SCP and the other functional blocks in the TRED.
9.1.2.5 Signaling and Control ProcessorThe SCP performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 central processing for signaling and Oand M functions. Layer 2 performs O and M functions using LAPD protocols.Layer 3 performs general traffic management functions for the Air Interface.
The SCP consists of a Power QUICC device, supported by SDRAM andFlash Memory. The following figure shows a block diagram of the SCP and itsperipheral memory and logic devices.
LEDs
TRED Glue Logic
Data Bus
ETI
Address & Control Bus
I2CA
BSII
ECPL
MMI
Chip Select
Only TRGM, TRDM, TRDH, TRPMPower Switch/Reset
(only TRAx/TADH)USB
SDRAMFlash
Memory
ETA
SCPMicroprocessor
RI
Figure 301: TRED, SCP Functional Blocks
9.1.2.6 DecoderThe decoder performs uplink channel decoding, and interfaces the TRAUframes to the BSII. The hardware consists of a DSP and an SRAM.
The functions performed by the decoder are:
Soft-decision bit combining for antenna diversity (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM,TRPM)
Decryption and decryption process control
On the terrestrial link side:
Rate adaptation
TRAU frame adaptation.
On the radio channel side:
Channel decoding
Speech, data and signal de-interleaving.
Measurements preprocessing
In-band control of the demodulator.
554 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the decoder.
Coded Uplink Data
Interrupt/Reset
Decoded Uplink Data
ECPL
To/From MBED
ECPL
DCOP
IRDMC
UBEL
IRDM
only TRAx/TADH
DSP and Memory
Figure 302: TRED, Decoder
Decoder DSP The decoder consists of a DSP and its associated SRAM.
The input to the decoder consists of a serial interface. The interface carriesclock, frame signals and the demodulated data from eight RF time slots.The DSP decodes and transmits eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16half-rate) TCHs to the BSII, via the MBED. Each full-rate channel can bereplaced by a GPRS channel.
The ECPL interface is used mostly for booting code during resets. Theinterrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode, and later provides frame andtime slot interrupts.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 555 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.7 Incremental Redundancy Data MemoryThe IRDM is required by the EGPRS feature to store demodulated packet datablocks for incremental redundancy function.
9.1.2.8 IRDM ControllerHardware and access control function for the IRDM. The IRDMC function isimplemented in the UBEL FPGA.
9.1.2.9 Decoder Co-processorThe DCOP is a slave of the DEC used to enhance signal processing functionswhich are more efficiently implemented in a FPGA than in a DSP. Theintroduction of the DCOP is linked to the EGPRS feature. The DCOP function isimplemented in the UBEL FPGA.
9.1.2.10 DemodulatorThe demodulator demodulates the uplink channels.
The functions performed are:
Antenna diversity combining
(TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP)
Radio link measurements on a burst basis
Using control information provided by the decoder:
Preprocessing
Channel demodulation
Equalization of the received signals.
DC offset compensation.
Block Diagram The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the demodulator.
DSP and Memory
DSP and Memory
Modulated Input from CUL/DRCS
Interrupt/Reset
Demodulated Output to MBED
ECPL
Figure 303: TRED Demodulator
Demodulator DSPs The demodulator consists of two DSPs, each of which has its own SRAM.
The inputs to the demodulator consist of two serial interfaces. The interfacescarry clock, frame signals and the data from eight RF time slots. Each DSPdemodulates eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16 half-rate) TCHs forone antenna path.
It demodulates either access or normal bursts (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM). Itcombines and demodulates either access or normal burst for both antenna paths(TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP).
556 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
The ECPL interface is used almost exclusively for booting code during resets.The interrupt/reset interface sets the boot mode, and later provides frame andtime slot interrupts.
9.1.2.11 Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and DecryptionThe MBED functions are combined in a single FPGA.
The functions performed by the MBED are:
Multiplexing of baseband data
Baseband encryption
Baseband decryption
Interfacing digital processing functions on the TCH.
The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the MBED.
Timing Control
Frequency Hopping Link Block
BSII
Uplink and Downlink Multiplexer
Encoder Interface
Decoder Interface Demodulator
Interface
Ciphering
CLKI ECPL
FHLBSIIMultiplexer
To Encoder
To Decoder
To Demodulator
Figure 304: TRED, Multiplexer, Baseband, Encryption and Decryption
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 557 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
The following table gives a short description of each block.
Control The Control block is the main controlling function of the MBED. It contains several statusand control registers that are updated via the ECPL interface.
Timing The Timing block is connected to CLKI which carries the master clock, frame clock andframe number. The main role of the timing block is to:
Provide clocks for the DSPs
Retrieve the frame number and transfer it to the ECPL.
Ciphering The Ciphering block performs pattern generation according to the configurationinformation, that is:
A5 type
Encryption/decryption key
Frame number.
The configuration information is sent in band from the encoder/decoder. This means that itis possible to change the A5 algorithm and key on a call-by-call basis.
BSIIMultiplexer
The BSII Multiplexer selects between the BSII links for the uplink and downlink directions.The selection of the correct bits to be sent downlink, and the insertion of bits at the correctposition in uplink, is done by the DSPs.
Uplink andDownlinkMultiplexer
The Uplink Multiplexer handles two data flows:
Data from the decoder. Additionally, the uplink cipher key is forwarded to the cipheringblock
TCH data from the demodulator is forwarded to the decoder. The deciphering bits
coming from the ciphering block are added to this data stream.
The Downlink Multiplexer splits the data stream coming from the encoder:
In-band signaling from the TXP is forwarded to the demodulator, together with the
ARFCN
The downlink ciphering key is extracted and forwarded to the ciphering block. Theciphering bits from the ciphering block are sent back to the ENCT
The FHL data stream is forwarded to the FHL Interface.
FrequencyHoppingLink Block
The Frequency Hopping Link Block provides the interface to the FHL. If the FHL isconfigured and used, the data is sent to, and received from, the FHL. If the FHL is notconfigured, the downlink data is forwarded to the TXP.
DemodulatorInterface
The Demodulator Interface provides clock and frame signals for the demodulator DSPs.
DecoderInterface
The Decoder Interface provides the connection to and from the decoder. It also providesclock and frame signals to the decoder DSP.
EncoderInterface
The Encoder Interface provides the connection to and from the encoder and TXP. It alsoprovides clock and frame signals to the encoder DSP.
Table 63: TRE, MBED Functional Entities
558 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.12 Encoder and TransmitterThe ENCT receives the downlink TRAU frames from the BSII, performs channelencoding on them and transmits them to the TREA block. The hardwareconsists of a DSP and an SRAM.
The functions performed by the ENCT are:
On the terrestrial link side:
Rate adaptation
TRAU frames management
Transcoder time alignment.
On the radio channel side:
Channel coding
Speech, data and signaling interleaving.
Radio frequency hopping law computation for downlink and uplink
TREA control, including transmitter and receiver parts
FHL interface management if baseband hopping
Encryption and encryption process control.
The following figure shows a functional block diagram of the ENCT.
Encoder TXP
MBED CUL or BBTX
BSII MUX Uplink/Downlink MUX
DSP
Figure 305: TRED, ENCT Functional Block
Encoder The Encoder encodes the data for eight full-rate or enhanced full-rate (or 16half-rate) TCHs. Each full-rate channel can be replaced by a GPRS channel.This data is received from the MBED. The encoded data, ciphering configurationand the frequency number for the RF transmission, are sent to the MBED.
TXP The MBED sends the encoded data to the TXP for transmission on the AirInterface. It also sends the cipher bits coming from the ciphering block. TheTXP processes the data and extracts all additional information coming from theEncoder or FHL. The resulting data stream is sent to the CUL or BBTX.
9.1.2.13 Carrier Unit LogicFor TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM only, the CUL adapts the ENCT DSP signalsto provide the various data and control lines required for the TREA. The CULconsists of an FPGA and some external drivers and registers.
9.1.2.14 Clock Generation UnitThe CGU consists of two PLLs: one for the BSII clock and one for the CLKIclock. It also provides an internal clock distribution function.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 559 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.2.15 External Test AdapterFor TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM only, the ETA device contains its own internallogic and drivers which enables external test equipment to be connectedto the ECPL.
9.1.2.16 TRE Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the TRE module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCB.
9.1.2.17 Baseband Transmitter ModuleFor TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAPonly, the BBTX adapts ENCT DSP signals to provide various data and controllines required for the TREA.
The BBTX consists of a mixed signal ASIC.
9.1.2.18 Diversity Receiver Chip SetFor TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAPonly: DRCS performs IF A/D conversion and digital filtering and decimation forboth antenna paths.
560 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.3 Analog Functions
The TRE analog part performs the analog functions within the TRE.
These functions are split between the two functional parts:
TRE analog part TREA
TRE power amplifier TREPAxx or TEPAxx.
For GSM 1900, the TRE analog part is called TREAP.
Depending on the frequency for the TRE power amplifier, there are differentvariants available:
TEPAD for GSM 1800, medium power
TEPADE for GSM 1800, medium power, enhanced 8-PSK power
TEPADH for GSM 1800, high power
TEPADHE for GSM 1800, high power GMSK and 8-PSK
TEPAG for GSM 900, medium power
TEPAGE for GSM 900, medium/high power, enhanced 8-PSK power
TEPAGH for GSM 900, high power
TEPAL for GSM 850, medium power
TEPAP for GSM 1900, medium power
TREPAGM for GSM 900, medium power
TREPADM for GSM 1800, medium power
TREPAPM for GSM 1900, medium power
TREPADH for GSM 1800, high power.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 561 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.3.1 Analog Architecture -TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPMThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, and TRPM. It shows the functionalblocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded areas define the TREAand TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts.
RF Loop
TXSynthesizer
1
TXSynthesizer
2
TX Power Regulation
Clean−up Oscillator
TX Power Amplifier
TX Driver Amplifier
FromENCTviaCUL(CUI)
To Combiner/Duplexer
TREA
TREPAxx
RX1
RX0
From Antenna Network
RF Mixer
RF Mixer
LNA
LNAIFFilter
Loop Coupling
To DEMon TRED
I/QDemodulator
I/QDemodulator
IFFilter
1ADC
BasebandFilter
BasebandFilter
ADC
RXSynthesizer
2
RXSynthesizer
TXMixer
Modulator&
Up−converter
IFFilter
BasebandModulator
I/Q
Q
I
viaCUL(CUI)
IFSynthesizer
Figure 306: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)
562 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.3.2 Analog Architecture -TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAPThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, and TRAP. It shows thefunctional blocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded areas define theTREA and TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) parts.
LoopCoupling
RFLoop
Clean−upOscillator
RXSynth.
RXSynth.
RFMixer
IFFilter
IFFilter
Modulator&
Up−converter
IFSynthesizer
TX PowerRegulation
TX Synthesizer
2
TXSynthesizer
1
Mixer
LNA RX0
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX1
TX DriverAmplifier
TX PowerAmplifier
BasebandModulator
DDC DRCS
BBTX
ADC
ADC
I
Q
To combiner
Duplexer
From AntennaNetwork
1
2
TEPAxx
To DEMon TRED
FromENCT
TREA
Digital part (positioned at analog module)
Transmitter part
Reveiver part
Figure 307: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG,TRAL, TRAP)
9.1.3.3 Analog Architecture - TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHEThe following figure shows a block diagram of the TRE analog part hardwarearchitecture for the TRADE/TADHE/TRAGE/TAGHE. It shows the functionalblocks and the interfaces to the TRED. The shaded area defines the digital partpositioned on the analog module.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 563 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
Clean−upOscillator
RXSynth.
RXSynth.
RFMixer
IFFilter
Modulator&
Up−converter
TX PowerRegulation
TX Synthesizer
2
TXSynthesizer
1
LNA RX0
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX1
TX DriverAmplifier
TX PowerAmplifier
BasebandModulator
DDC DRCS
BBTX
ADC
ADC
I
Q
To combiner
Duplexer
From AntennaNetwork
1
2
TEPAxx/TEPADHE
To DEMon TRED
FromENCT
TREA
Digital part (positioned at analog module)
Transmitter part
Reveiver part
Figure 308: TRE Analog Part Architecture (TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE)
564 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.3.4 TRE Analog Functional EntitiesThe following table gives a short description of each of the TRE analogfunctional entities.
Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into twobaseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE*.
* for TADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP
I/Q Modulator andUp-converter
The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. Then they aretransformed into the IF frequency band (211 MHz).
For TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE the I/Q baseband signals are directlytransformed into the RF frequency band.
Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TREA and TEPAxx(or TREPAxx) sections (see Figure 306, Figure307 or Figure 308). The stagescomprise the following three components:
TX Driver AmplifierThe TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TREA. It consists of apreamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier. An isolatorprovides output impedance matching and protection for a low voltage FETon the output
Power RegulationThe Power Regulation stage is located on the TREA. It consists of a controlpath and a multiplexing detection path. An EEPROM is used to store datafor calibrating the transmitter output power.The control path consists of a 12-bit DAC. The detectionpath consists of a 12-bit ADC and a low-pass filter. (ForTADH/TAGH/TRAD/TRADE/TADHE/TRAG/TRAGE/TAGHE/TRAL/TRAP it isimplemented on the BBTX).
TX Power Amplifier.The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TEPAxx (or TREPAxx) part ofthe module. It provides the final amplification stage for the transmit RFsignal, from the TREA. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module,as required.
Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required forsynchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.
Transmitter HoppingSynthesizers
The Transmitter Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thetransmitter. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While onesynthesizer is active, the other selects the next transmission frequency.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 565 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
Receivers Two receivers are physically located on the TREA. The main functions of thereceivers for TRGM, TRDM, TRDH, TRPM are:
Low noise amplification
Down conversion
IF filtering
IQ demodulation
Baseband filtering
Baseband digitizing.
The main functions of the receivers for TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE,TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP are:
Low noise amplification
Down conversion
IF filtering
IF sampling
Digital I/Q demodulation
Digital Baseband filtering
Digital Decimation.
Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thereceiver. There are two hopping synthesizers working in parallel. While onesynthesizer is active, the other selects the next receive frequency.
RF Loop The RF Loop provides an analog test loop between the transmitter andreceivers. It performs analog self-tests, mainly for start-up test purposes. TheRF Loop circuitry generates a frequency of 45 MHz (GSM 850/GSM 900), 95MHz (GSM 1800), or 80 MHz (GSM 1900) and converts the transmitter outputsignals to the receiver frequency.
The RF Loop functionality is physically split between the:
TREA, which contains the RF loop itself
TEPAxx (or TREPAxx), which contains the RF loop coupling function (see
Figure 306 and Figure 307).The RF Loop is removed in case of TRAGE/TAGHE/TRADE/TADHE (seeFigure 308).
Table 64: TRE Analog Part Functional Entities
566 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.4 TRE Power Supply
The TREP, TREPS, TREPSH are on-board power supplies, providing all thenecessary voltages and currents for the TRE analog and digital functions.
In the case of medium-power TREs, the power supply consists of one DC/DCconverter. For high-power TREs, the power supply contains an additionalDC/DC converter which provides a + 26 V supply for the high-power analogcircuits.
9.1.4.1 VoltagesFor normal operational requirements, the DC input voltage V in can be anyvalue between -38.4 VDC and -72 VDC. If the input is too low, the power supplyswitches off automatically. When the input voltage is restored, the power supplyswitches back on. If the input voltage falls below -38.4 VDC, the output ismaintained within the specified values, until the TRE power supply switches off.
The following table provides the TRE power supply output voltage parameters.
OutputVoltage Tolerance Min. Value Max. Value
TRE Version(1)
TRE Version(2)
TRE Version(3)
+ 3.3 V ±3 % 3.2 V 3.4 V X X X
+ 5.1 V ±3 % 4.95 V 5.25 V X -
-5.1 V ±3 % -4.95 V -5.25 V - X
+ 5.3 V ±3 % 5.14 V 5.46 V - X X
+ 12 V ±3 % 11.64 V 12.36 V X -
-12 V ±5 % -11.4 V -12.6 V X -
+ 26 V ±2 % 25.48 V 26.52 V X X X
(1): TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM
(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAP
(3): TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHE
Table 65: Output Voltage Parameters
9.1.4.2 FuseThe TRE power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breakingcapacity (15 A).
9.1.4.3 ON/OFF SwitchThe TRE module is equipped with an on/off power switch. It is a rocker typeswitch, fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to prevent accidentalswitching.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 567 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.4.4 Remote SwitchingThe TREPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.
9.1.4.5 Low Voltage AlarmsIf an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value, an alarm is raised. Thefollowing table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values. The valuesare measured across the output connector pins.
OutputVoltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.
TRE Version(1)
TRE Version(2)
TRE Version(3)
+ 3.3 V 2.7 V 3.0 V X X X
+ 5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V X -
-5.1 V -4.2 V -4.6 V - X
+ 5.3 V 4.4 V 4.8 V - X X
+ 12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V X -
-12 V -10.0 V -11.0 V X -
+ 26 V 22.0 V 24.0 V X X X
(1): TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM
(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRAG, TRAL, TRAP
(3): TRAGE, TAGHE, TRADE, TADHE
Table 66: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds
568 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.5 Transceiver Equipment LEDs
There are eight LEDs (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM) or six LEDs (TADH,TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP) on thefront panel, which provide a visual indication of the operational status of theTRE module (see Figures 309 and 310). The following table describes eachLED their various operational states.
LED Color Status DescriptionTREVersion (1)
TREVersion (2)
RSL Yellow RSL connection status X X
On Link connected - -
Blinking Connecting link - -
Off Link disconnected - -
TX Yellow Transmission status (not BCCH) X X
On Transmitting on SDCCH, CBCH orTCH
- -
Blinking Emitting (normal operation) - -
Off Not transmitting - -
OP Yellow TRE operational status X X
On Fully operational - -
Blinking Initializing - -
Off Not operational - -
BCCH Yellow BCCH transmission status X X
On Transmitting - -
Off Not transmitting - -
FAULT Red Alarm status
(1): two LEDs connected in parallel
(2): one LED
X X
On Fatal alarm - -
Blinking Non-fatal alarm - -
Off No alarm - -
5 V POWER Green Status of the + 5 V power supply X
On + 5 V present - -
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 569 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
LED Color Status DescriptionTREVersion (1)
TREVersion (2)
Off + 5 V faulty - -
3.3 VPOWER
Green Status of the + 3.3 V power supply X -
On + 3.3 V present - -
Off + 3.3 V faulty - -
PWR Green Status of the TRE power supplyoutput voltages
- X
On Output voltages present - -
Off Output voltages faulty - -
(1): TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM
(2): TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP
Table 67: TRE LED Descriptions
570 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.6 Transceiver Equipment Front Panel
The following figures show the TRE front panels.
9.1.6.1 Front Panel - TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, and TRPM
TX
BCCH
FAULT
3.3V POWER
TX
POWER
ENABLE
OFF
TEST
RX 0
RX 1
Transmitter Connector
On/OffRocker Switch
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TestConnector
LEDs
Receiver Connectors
Equipment Label
RSL
OP
5V
Figure 309: TRE Front Panel (TRDH, TRDM, TRGM, TRPM)
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 571 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.1.6.2 Front Panel - TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG, TRAGE, TAGHE,TRAL, and TRAP
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterConnector
On/OffRocker Switch
USB TestConnector
Module Extractor
ReceiverConnectors
LEDs
TX
BCCH
FAULT
RSL
0P
PWR
POWER
ENABLE
OFF
TESTEquipment
Labels
TX
RX0
RX1
Figure 310: TRE Front Panel (TADH, TAGH, TRAD, TRADE, TADHE, TRAG,TRAGE, TAGHE, TRAL, TRAP)
9.1.6.3 ConnectorsThe following table describes the TRE front panel connectors.
Connector Description
Test Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes.
572 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
Connector Description
TX Provides the transmit RF Interface to the AN module.
RX 0, RX 1 Provides two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module.
Table 68: TRE Front Panel Connectors
9.2 TWIN Transceiver Equipment
9.2.1 Introduction to TWIN TRA
The TWIN TRA combines digital baseband and analog RF functions in onemodule.
The architecture is split into three functional blocks:
Digital part TRA-D
Analog part TRA-A with two power amplifiers TGPA
Power supply TGPS.
The TRA-D and TRA-A are implemented in one submodule TGDA.
The TWIN TRA basic architecture is shown in the following figure.
TRA−A
TGPS
TRA−D
TGPAMx to
from
AGCx
TGDAx
TGPAMx
from
to
AGCx
TGTx
Figure 311: TWIN TRA Basic Architecture
The TWIN TRA performs the digital functions interface to the SUM and theanalog functions interface to the AN module. The TWIN TRA contains itsown integrated power supply.
The following types of TWIN TRA modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
TGT09, TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 900
TGT18, TWIN TRA medium power module for GSM 1800
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 573 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.2 Digital Functions
9.2.2.1 TRA-D Architecture
FLASH SDRAM
SDRAM
SDRAM
FPGA
CPLD
FPGA
ECPL
SCP
DSP1
DSP2
IQMUX
RX Synth.
TX Synth.
TX DAC
Ramp DAC
BIAS DAC
DRC1
DRC2
ADC
DSA
CLKI
BSII
HFFI
FHL
To/from LALE
DEM ctrl.
Monitoring
Modulator/Filter / Bufferfor GSM, EDGE,enh. EDGE
Level & Bias
Ramping
TX Synth.Module
RX Synth.Module
SYS TXP
ENC
DEM
HPI
SYS
DEM
DEC
HPI
Figure 312: TRA-D Architecture
The TRA-D consists of the following functional entities:
Signalling and Control Processor (SCP)
Digital Signal Processor 1 (DSP1)
Digital Signal Processor 2 (DSP2)
Field Programable GateArray (FPGA)
Flash Memory
SDRAM
Glue Logic (CPLD)
Diversity Receiver Chip (DRC).
574 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.2.2 TRA-D System Interfaces
Interface Description
BCB Base station control bus: used for Remote Inventory (RI) read write and for controllingand supervision of the power supply.
ADR Module address: provides a unique address to each module in the BTS. Used to setBCB physical BCB terminal address and BSII HDLC address.
RCD Remote cabling detection: detects DC voltage variations on the TRA-A receiver inputs.
BSII Base station internal interface: transfers all TCH-related data (traffic and signaling)and internal O&M data.
FHL Frequency hopping link: used for downlink baseband frequency hopping.
HFFI Hook for future interface, is a spare interface and can be used for future extensions.
CLKI Clock interface: used to distribute the Evolium BTS A9100 master clock and the frameclock multiplexed on the same line with the frame number in a serial format.
TDTI Proprietary interface used as debug and test interface.
MMI Debug interface: for TGTx (development and validation only).
RPI Remote power interface: consists of:
Power lines for TGD-A DC supply TGPS
ON/OFF control of the power supply
Alarm handling for the TGPS DC input and DC output signals.
LEDs Front panel LED control.
PSwitch/ Reset Manual front panel power switch: disables the TGPS for TRA maintenance (securityfunction for actions on RF cables). Also used to generate the push button reset(PB_SRST) with fast OFF/ON sequence.
Table 69: TRED Interface Descriptions
9.2.2.3 Signalling and Control ProcessorThe SCP is responsible for the basic initialisation including the boot of theDSPs and signalling processing. It communicates with the O&M and performsthe needed actions.
9.2.2.4 Digital Signal Processor 1The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the TXP, ENC and DEM.
9.2.2.5 Digital Signal Processor 2The DSP1 performs the telecom Layer 1 functions of the DEC and DEM.
9.2.2.6 Field Programable Gate ArrayThe FPGA integrates the following functions:
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 575 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
TX Data ModuleBuffer, modulator tables, filter, gain and offset adjust.
Ramping ModuleRamping control interface to ramping DAC.
Level and BIAS ModuleBIAC control interface to BIAS DAC.
Power Switch ModuleSwitches power supply with exact timing.
TX Synthesizer ModuleInterface to TX synthesizers.
RX Synthesizer ModuleInterface to RX synthesizers.
GTA ModuleInterface to GTA’s.
Monitoring ModuleReceives monitoring data. Perform demultiplexing and storing of themonitoring data in corresponding registers.
9.2.2.7 Flash MemoryFlash Memory is used to store the TWIN TRA origin software and the softwarepackages.
9.2.2.8 SDRAMSDRAM dedicated working memory for SCP and DSP.
9.2.2.9 CPLDContains the necessary glue logic for the SCP.
9.2.2.10 DRCDiversity Receiver Chip integrates the interface between the digital and analogbaseband part in receive direction.
576 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.3 Analog Functions
9.2.3.1 TGTx Analog Architecture
Clean−upOscillator
RXSynth.
RFMixer
IFFilter
Modulator&
Up−converter
TX PowerRegulation
TXSynthesizer
1
LNA RX1_0
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX1_1
TX DriverAmplifier
TX PowerAmplifier
BasebandModulator
DDC
ADC
ADC
I
Q
To combiner
Duplexer
From Antenna
Network1
To DEMon TRED
FromENCT
Transmitter part
Reveiver part
Modulator&
Up−converter
TX PowerRegulation
TX Synthesizer
2
TX DriverAmplifier
TX PowerAmplifier
BasebandModulator
I
Q
To combiner
Duplexer
FromENCT
TX1
TX2
RXSynth.
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX2_0
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX2_1
DDC
ADC
ADC
From Antenna
Network2
To DEMon TRED
TGPAM1
TGPAM2
90
X
MUX
X
90
X
MUX
X
90
X
MUX
X
90
X
MUX
X
DRC
DRC
Figure 313: TGTx Analog Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 577 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.3.2 TGTx Analog Functional EntitiesThe following table gives a short description of each of the TWIN TRA analogfunctional entities.
Baseband Modulator The baseband modulator transforms the incoming digital data stream into twobaseband signals: I and Q. These baseband signals are fed to the up-converter.The modulation is GSMK modulation or EDGE.
I/Q Modulator andUp-converter
The I/Q baseband signals are fed to the up-converter. Then they aretransformed into the RF frequency band.
Transmitter Amplifiers The TX amplification stages are physically split between the TGDAx andTGPAMx sections (see Figure 313). The stages comprise the following threecomponents:
TX Driver AmplifierThe TX Driver Amplifier stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of apreamplifier, power control circuitry, and a main amplifier.
Power RegulationThe Power Regulation stage is located on the TGDAx. It consists of acontrol path and a multiplexing detection path. An Flash is used to storedata for calibrating the transmitter output power.
TX Power Amplifier.The TX Power Amplifier is located on the TGPAMx part of the module. Itprovides the final amplification stage for the transmit RF signal, from theTGDAx. It feeds the amplified RF signal to the AN module, as required.
Clean-up Oscillator The Clean-up Oscillator provides spectrally pure reference clocks required forsynchronization of the transmitters, receivers and synthesizers.
Transmitter FastHopping Synthesizers
The Transmitter Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies forthe transmitter.
578 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
Receivers The main functions of the receivers are:
Low noise amplification
Down conversion
IF filtering
BB sampling
Digital I/Q demodulation
Digital Baseband filtering
Digital Decimation.
Receiver Synthesizers The Receiver Fast Hopping Synthesizers generate the RF frequencies for thereceiver.
Table 70: TWIN TRA Analog Part Functional Entities
9.2.4 TWIN TRA Power Supply
The TGPS is an on-board power supply, providing all the necessary voltagesand currents for the TWIN TRA analog and digital functions.
9.2.4.1 VoltagesFor normal operational requirements, the DC input voltage V in can be anyvalue between -38.4 VDC and -72 VDC. If the input is too low, the power supplyswitches OFF automatically. When the input voltage is restored, the powersupply switches back ON. If the input voltage falls below -38.4 VDC, the output ismaintained within the specified values, until the TRA power supply switches off.
The following table provides the TRA power supply output voltage parameters.
Output Voltage Tolerance Min. Value Max. Value
+ 1.2 V ±3 % + 1.164 V + 1.236 V
+ 3.3 V ±3 % + 3.2 V + 3.4 V
+ 5.3 V ±3 % + 5.14 V + 5.46 V
+ 6.5 V ±2 % + 6.37 V + 6.63 V
+ 24 V ±2 % + 23.52 V + 24.48 V
+.30 V ±2 % + 29.4 V + 30.6 V
Table 71: Output Voltage Parameters
9.2.4.2 FuseThe TWIN TRA power supply input is protected by a fuse with a high-breakingcapacity (25 A).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 579 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.4.3 ON/OFF SwitchThe TWIN TRA module is equipped with an ON/OFF power switch. It is arocker type switch, fitted slightly below the front panel’s profile to preventaccidental switching.
9.2.4.4 Remote SwitchingThe TGPS can be remotely switched ON and OFF by the OMU, via the BCB.This feature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated ON/OFFswitch.
9.2.4.5 Low Voltage AlarmsIf an output voltage falls below a preset threshold value, an alarm is raised. Thefollowing table gives the minimum and maximum threshold values. The valuesare measured across the output connector pins.
Output Voltage Treshold Min. Treshold Max.
+ 1.2 V + 0.984 V + 1.116 V
+ 3.3 V + 2.7 V + 3.0 V
+ 5.3 V + 4.4 V + 4.8 V
+ 6.5 V + 5.3 V + 6.0 V
+ 24 V + 20.4 V + 22.3 V
+30 V + 25.5 V + 27.9 V
Table 72: Low Voltage Alarm Thresholds
580 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.5 Transceiver Equipments Front Panel
The following figures show the TWIN TRA front panel.
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterConnector
ON/OFFRocker Switch
USB TestConnector
Module Extractor
ReceiverConnectors
LEDs
TX2
BCH2
OP2
TX1
BCH1
OP1
POWER
ENABLE
OFF
TEST
Equipment
Labels
TX1
RX20
RX21
RX10
RX11
FAULTPWR
TX2
TransmitterConnector
Figure 314: TWIN TRA Front Panel
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 581 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.6 Transceiver Equipments LEDs
There are 8 LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the TWIN TRA module (see Figure 314).
The green “Power” and the red “FAULT” LED are common for both TRX.
For the yellow LEDs, each column represents one TRX.
The following table describes the LEDs and their various operational states.
LED Color Status Description
TX1, TX2 Yellow Transmission status (not BCCH)
ON At least one dedicated channel is activated on the TRX (x)(CS-traffic onTCH or signalling on SDCCH)
Blinking No dedicated channel (TCH/SDCCH) is activated on theTRX (x), but the TRX (x) may be emitting Dummy Bursts orGPRS-bursts
OFF The TRX (x) is not emitting RF for TCH
OP1, OP2 Yellow TRE operational status
ON The TRX (x) is fully operational with telecom parameters
Blinking
Normal
The TRX (x) has received the Configure Request, configurationis ongoing
Blinking
Fast
The TRX (x) is O&M operational with RSL established, waitingfor Telecom-configuration
OFF Not operational
BCH1, BCH2 Yellow BCCH transmission status
ON The TRX (x) is configured as BCCH-TRX and emitting the BCCH
OFF The TRX (x) is configured as TCH-TRX
PWR Green Status of the TRE power supply output voltages
ON The module is powered ON
OFF The module is powered OFF
FAULT Red Alarm status
ON The TRA has entered the ‘Out-of-order’ state
Blinking At least one non-fatal alarm is active
OFF All alarms are ‘OFF’, the ‘Alarms-in-force-lists’ (AIFL) of bothTRX are empty
Table 73: TWIN TRA LED Descriptions
582 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
9 Transceiver Equipment
9.2.7 Transceiver Equipments Connectors
The following table describes the TWIN TRA front panel connectors.
Connector Description
Test Provides an interface to the TRE for factory test purposes.
TX1, TX2 Provide two transmit RF Interface to the AN module.
RX10, RX20 Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN modulevia the normal path.
RX11, RX21 Provide two receive RF Interfaces from the AN module viathe antenna diversity path.
Table 74: TWIN TRA Front Panel Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 583 / 910
9 Transceiver Equipment
584 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10 Antenna Networks
The sections are supported with diagrams where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.
Drawings of the physical appearance of the modules are also included, showingLED indicators, connectors and controls.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 585 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1 ANXThe ANX provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna. The following figure shows the basic architecture.
Duplexer
Splitter
Duplexer
Splitter
ANT A
ANT B
TXA
TXB
RX0ARX1A
RX1BRX0B
Figure 315: ANX Basic Architecture
On the downlink, the ANX connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.
The following types of ANX modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
ANXG, ANX module for GSM 900
ANXD, ANX module for GSM 1800
ANXP, ANX module for GSM 1900.
The following figure shows the ANX in more detail. The shaded areas identifythe uplink functions.
Duplexer
ANMicroprocessor
BCBInterface
DC/DC Converter
Duplexer
FilterLNA
LNA
−48 VDC
BCB
ANT A
ANT B
Power Splitter A
Power Splitter B
BSII
TXA In
TXB In
RX1B Out
RX0B Out
LEDs
Rotary Switch
RX0A Out
RX1A Out
DC Feed
Gain Control VSWR Receiver
Directional Coupler
Directional Coupler
Remote Switching
Uplink Functions
Uplink Functions
TRE
TRE
Figure 316: ANX Architecture
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The ANX also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
586 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,remote DC feed and power splitters.
10.1.1 AN Downlink Functions
The downlink functions are performed by the components shown in thefollowing table.
No. of ComponentsDownlinkComponent Description ANX ANC ANB AGC
Combiner The combiner is used to connect two TXinputs to the single antenna. Connectionbetween the combiner output TX..OUT andthe input to the duplexer TX..IN is made bya link on the front panel of the AN.
- 2 - 2
Duplexer The duplexer provides the coupling functionfor the transmitted and received RF signals.The duplexer provides a bi-directional signalpath. Thus a single antenna can be usedfor the transmission and reception of bothdownlink and uplink channels.
The downlink path functions of the duplexerare provided by a transmit filter, which:
Provides a transmitter path to the
antenna
Suppresses unwanted emissions outsidethe downlink band, especially emissions
that fall into the uplink band
Prevents downlink signals from blocking
the receiver
Prevents noise or spurious emissionsin the downlink signal from causing
interference in the receive band.
2 2 2 2
DirectionalCoupler
The antenna directional coupler comprisesa dual directional coupler. It monitors theVSWR forward and reflected power at theantenna connector. These values are usedto measure the return loss of the antenna(refer also to Antenna Network Controller(Section 10.1.4) for a description of theVSWR receiver).
2 2 2 2
Bias T The interface provides the DC supply for theoptional Tower Mounte Amplifier
- - - 2
Table 75: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 587 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.2 AN Uplink Functions
The uplink functions are performed by the components shown in the followingtable.
No. of ComponentsUplinkComponent Description ANX ANC ANB AGC
Duplexer The duplexer provides the coupling functionfor the transmitted and received RF signals.The duplexer provides a bi-directional signalpath. Thus a single antenna can be usedfor the transmission and reception of bothdownlink and uplink channels. The uplinkpath functions of the duplexer are providedby a receive filter, which:
Provides an RF path from the antennato the receiver
Suppresses unwanted signals outside
the uplink band
Prevents downlink signals from entering
the receiver.
2 2 2 2
LNA The LNA amplifies the received RF signals.The LNA consists of a balanced amplifierconfiguration, designed to provide goodVSWR values, noise compression and goodreliability.
The LNA contains a digital step-attenuatorfor controlling the overall gain of the antennanetwork. The attenuator compensates forany losses in the connecting cables, forexample, when an ANY module is used.
2 2 2 2
Remote DC Feed The remote DC feed is used for feeding a +5 V TTL signal to the receiver output ports.This is used to provide an indication of thestatus of the antenna cable connections.
1 1 1 1
Power Splitter A power splitter distributes the receivedsignals to two separate outputs. It alsosupports the correct grouping of theconnectors, which simplifies the externalcable interconnections for the BTS A9100modules.
2 2 2 2
Table 76: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components
588 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.3 BTS Control Bus Interface
The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfaces the data andcontrol signals to the BCB as listed in the following table.
Signal Description
RI The Remote Inventory stores data such asthe RIT name, module type, frequency band,diversity and duplexer type.
Power Supply Control The BCB Interface supports remote on/offswitching of the DC/DC converters. They areswitched with an optically-isolated switch on thepower supply.
DC Line Supervision The BCB Interface delivers a TTL level signalwhich is used by the remote DC feed. A circuitin the TRE detects the signal and feeds back astatus message to the BCB (refer to AN UplinkFunctions (Section 10.1.2) for information aboutthe remote DC feed).
Rotary Switch The BCB Interface is connected to a rotaryswitch on the ANX front panel. The switchposition is associated with the antenna sector,in sectorized configurations. The switch positionis read via coded address lines.
Table 77: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 589 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.4 Antenna Network Controller
The ANCON is responsible for maintaining the operation of the ANX.
Its principal functions are:
Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver
Supervising LNA alarms
Measuring antenna VSWR
Reporting VSWR alarms
Selecting the antenna sector
Detecting RF cabling status
RI, via the BCB Interface
Remote power on/off, via the BCB Interface
Status display, via front panel LEDs.
The following figure shows the ANCON architecture. The shaded areasrepresent hardware shared by different functions.
ANMicroprocessor
VSWR Receiver
BSII PLL
CLKII PLL
DC/DC Converter
BCB ASIC
FlashEEPROM
SRAM
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
TXA
TXB
LocalSynthesizer
Alarms
On/Off
DC Input
BSIIInterface
2048 MHz
CLKIInterface
BCBInterface
−48 VDC
LNA 1
LNA 2
DC Feed & Rotary Switch
To LNAs
LNA ControlSignals & Alarms
Backplane
Subrack Address
Control Signals
MixerBaseband
ADC
Glue Logic
Input MUX
RIEEPROM
RI
Figure 317: ANCON Architecture
The ANCON functional entities are described in the sections below.
590 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.4.1 VSWR ReceiverThe VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forwardand reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters. The VSWR is measured atthe output of the duplexer couplers, and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver(see Figure 317).
The VSWR receiver consists of:
Local synthesizer
Input MUX.
A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the basebandfrequency with the ARFCN. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCNfrequency by the AN microprocessor.
The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver. It provides aselective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. Theinput MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor.
10.1.4.2 BSII Frame Clock PLLThe BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane.The clock outputs are used for BSII communications, the AN microprocessorand the PLL lock-detect signal.
PLL Switch
Loop Filter
Glue Logic
BSII Comms
BSII PLL Lock Detect
Microprocessor
BSII Frame CLK
Clock Edge Control Signal
VCXO
Figure 318: ANCON, BSII Frame Clock PLL
10.1.4.3 CLKII Clock PLLThe CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane. Theclock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock, the ’startconversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal.
PLL Switch
Loop Filter
Glue Logic
Local Synthesizer
CLKII Lock Detect
Start Conversion
BSII Master CLK
Clock Edge Control Signal
VCXO
Figure 319: ANCON, CLKII Clock PLL
10.1.4.4 AN MicroprocessorThe AN microprocessor performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting, andcontrol of the status LEDs. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC inthe VSWR receiver (see Figure 317).
The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. If theVSWR exceeds predefined thresholds, an alarm is raised (refer to Table ANXLED Descriptions (80)). If the reflected power is very high, the transmitters areshut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. High reflected power canbe caused by, for example, a break in the antenna coupling.
The AN microprocessor hardware consists of a QUICC microprocessorsupported by two memory devices, a Flash EEPROM and an SRAM.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 591 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.4.5 Glue LogicGlue logic consists of a number of registers, implemented on a single CPLDdevice. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3.3 V, required by the Power QUICCmicroprocessor.
The Glue logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions:
AN microprocessor to the BSII
Board/module address register
Baseband ADC
LNA error register
LNA gain adjustment register.
The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII masterclock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 318 and Figure 319).
10.1.4.6 Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the ANX module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCBInterface.
10.1.5 AN Power Supply
The ANPS is a DC/DC converter, providing all the necessary voltages forthe ANX/ANC components.
10.1.5.1 VoltagesThe following table provides ANPS input/output voltage parameters.
Voltage Value
V in -38.4 VDC min.
-72 VDC max.
-48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.
V out + 5.1 VDC ±3 %
+ 12 VDC ±3 %
Table 78: ANPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters
Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange -10o C to 70o C.
10.1.5.2 FuseThe input of the ANPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity(15 A).
592 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.5.3 ProtectionThe ANPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarityinversion on its inputs.
10.1.5.4 GroundingGround continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrackbackplane which connect to the bus bar ground.
10.1.5.5 Remote SwitchingThe ANPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.
10.1.5.6 Low Voltage AlarmsAlarms are raised if the voltage level is too low. The following table provides thelow voltage threshold tolerances for ANPS alarms.
Voltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.
Vin 30.4 V 38.4 V
5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V
12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V
Table 79: ANPS Alarm Thresholds
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 593 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.6 ANX LEDs and Alarms
This section provides information on the ANX’s LEDs and Alarms.
10.1.6.1 LEDsThere are eight LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the ANX module. The following table describes each LEDand their various operational states.
LED Color Status Description
VSWR A Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 1.
On Good VSWR.
Slow Blinking Threshold 1 reached.
Fast Blinking Threshold 2 reached.
Off VSWR not supervised.
VSWR B Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 2.
On Good VSWR.
Slow Blinking Threshold 1 reached.
Fast Blinking Threshold 2 reached.
Off VSWR not supervised.
O and M Yellow - O and M status.
On IOM link operational.
Off IOM link not established.
ALARM Red - Alarm status (both LEDs areconnected in parallel)
On IOM link operational
Blinking Non-urgent alarm.
Off IOM link not established.
5 V Green - Status of + 5 V power supply.
On + 5 V present.
Off + 5 V faulty.
12 V Green - Status of + 12 V power supply.
On + 12 V present.
Off + 12 V faulty.
Table 80: ANX LED Descriptions
594 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.6.2 AlarmsThe ANX detects the alarm conditions shown in the following table.
VSWR The AN microprocessor can raise four alarmswhen VSWR values exceed certain presetthresholds. The values are downloaded fromthe OMU software. There is a non-urgent andan urgent alarm for each antenna.
Amplifier There are two amplifier alarms for each LNA.One indicates degraded amplifier performance,and the other a total failure. A total failure isregarded as performance that is below a usableoutput.
DC line supervision The remote + 5 V TTL DC feed signal is usedfor supervision of the RF cabling continuity. Acircuit in the TREA receiver detects the signaland a message is fed back, via the BCB.
Table 81: ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB Alarm Conditions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 595 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.7 ANX Performance Characteristics
The performance characteristics of the ANXs/ANCs are shown in the followingtable.
Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Transmit band. 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
Receive band. 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
Power for each transmitter channelinput.
45 W maximum 63 W maximum 45 W maximum
Number of channels. 174 374 299
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Return loss at receive port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB
Return loss at transmit port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB
Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB 1) > 18 dB > 18 dB
Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≥ 18 dB
Group delay distortion in transmitband.
≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns
Isolation between receive port andantenna port.
>30 dB >30 dB > 30 dB
Isolation between receive ports. 22 dB 22 dB > 22 dB
Isolation between transmit ports (Ato B/ 1 to 2).
>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
Insertion loss in transmit pass band. 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB
Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 20 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in receive band.
<-103 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm
Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 20 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in transmit band.
<-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc
RF input impedance. 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50
1) For ANX with bridge: >16 dB.
Table 82: ANX Performance Characteristics
596 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.1.8 ANX Front Panel
The following figure shows the layout and O and M features of the ANX’sfront panel.
VSWRA
VSWRB
ALARM
12V
O&M
ALARM
5V
RX1BOUT
RX0BOUT
RX0AOUT
RX1AOUT
TXBIN
ANTB
TXAIN
ANTA
Receiver Connectors
Transmitter Connectors
Antenna Connectors
LEDs
Camloc Fasteners
Rotary Switch
Module Extractors
Equipment Label
Figure 320: ANX Front Panel
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 597 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
The ANX has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANX module can be interfacedto two TRE modules, or an ANY module if used.
The following table describes the ANX front panel connectors.
Connector Description
TXAIN
TXBIN
Provides the RF transmitter interfaces from twoTRE modules, or an ANY module if used.
RX0AOUT
RX1AOUT
Provides the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the first TRE receiver connectorsRX0 and RX1, or an ANY module if used.
RX0BOUT
RX1BOUT
Provides the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the second TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1, or an ANY moduleif used.
ANTA
ANTB
Provides the RF interface to/ from two antennas,A and B.
Table 83: ANX Front Panel Connectors
598 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.2 ANYThe ANY is a passive RF module, having neither a controller nor a powersupply. It is an optional RF distribution device, which is used to expand thecapacity of the ANX/ANC. Therefore, it is basically an extension unit to theANX/ANC module.
The following types of ANY modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
ANYD, ANY module for GSM 1800
ANYDH, ANY module for GSM 1800 high power
ANYG, ANY module for GSM 900
ANYGH, ANY module for GSM 900 high power
ANYL, ANY module for GSM 850
ANYP, ANY module for GSM 1900.
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.
The following figure shows the logical position of the ANY in relation to theTREs and the ANX. The signal paths are also indicated.
TRE
TRE
TRE
TRE
Antenna
TRE
TRE
TRE
TRE
ANYANX/ANC
Antenna
Downlink Path
Uplink Path
ANX/ANC
ANY
Figure 321: ANY Relationships
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 599 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
The ANY performs functions for both the:
Downlink pathThe RF signals coming from the TREs enter the ANY at four TX connectorson the front panel. They are combined in pairs by RF combiners and fed totwo TX output connectors. The ANY performs a 4:2 reduction of the TREtransmitter outputs. The two concentrated outputs are coupled to theANX/ANC inputs, via external RF cables.
Uplink path.Each of the four RF signals from the ANX/ANC passes through a 1:2RF splitter. These signals are distributed in four groups to the TREs, viaexternal RF cables. Each group provides a path for antenna diversityand non-diversity.
10.2.1 ANY Functions
The following figure shows the method of combining the transmitter outputsand distributing the receiver inputs.
TXA In1
RX0A Out1
RX1A Out1
TXA In2
RX0A Out2
RX1A Out2
TXB In1
RX0B Out1
RX1B Out1
TXB In2
RX0B Out2
RX1B Out2
TXA Out
RX0A In
RX1A In
TXB Out
RX0B In
RX1B In
BCB InterfaceRF Interfaces to/from Four TRE Modules
ANX/ANC
Combiner
Combiner
Power Divider
Power Divider
ANX/ANC
ANYRI
Figure 322: ANY Architecture
600 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
The ANY consists of the functional entities shown in the following table.
Combiner The Combiner consists of two hybrid devices.Each device concentrates two transmitteroutputs into one, thus halving the number ofantennas required. The combiner takes the TXoutputs from four TREs, via external cabling,and feeds them to the TXIN connectors on theANX/ANC.
Power Dividers The Power Dividers split and distribute thereceived RF signals, from the ANX module,to four outputs. The outputs are connected,via external cabling, to the inputs of the TREmodule. There are two Power Dividers in eachANY module, each consisting of two splitters,providing diversity and non-diversity paths.
BCB Interface The BCB interface is located on the subrackbackplane. It interfaces the following ANYRIdata to the BCB Bus:
Inventory
Subrack position of the ANY
Subrack number.
ANY Remote Inventory The ANYRI is specifically designed to holdRemote Inventory data for the ANY module. Itis functionally and physically separate from theRF part of the ANY.
The ANYRI consists of three components:
BCB Interface driver
BCB ASIC
Serial EEPROM.
The inventory data, which is held in a serialEEPROM, is transferred via the BCB ASIC andthe BCB Interface. The ANYRI components arepowered from a DC supply, which is present onthe backplane.
Table 84: ANY, Functional Entities
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 601 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.2.2 ANY Performance Characteristics
The performance characteristics of the ANY are shown in the following table.
Parameter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880MHz
1930 - 1990MHz
Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785MHz
1850 - 1910MHz
Power for each transmitterchannel input for:
Medium power ANY - ANYx.
45 W maximum 45 W maximum 45 W maximum 45 W maximum
High power ANY - ANYHx. - 63 W maximum 63 W maximum -
Number of channels. 124 174 374 299
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Insertion loss at transmit band. 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB
Insertion loss at receive band. 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB 3.3 ± 0.2 dB
Return loss at receive port. > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB
Return loss at transmit port. > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB > 21 dB
Isolation between transmit andreceive ports.
> 85 dB > 90 dB ≤ 90 dB ≤ 90 dB
Isolation between receiveoutput ports of same coupler.
> 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB
Isolation between receive portsof different networks.
> 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB
Isolation between transmitinput ports of same network.
> 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB > 25 dB
Isolation between transmitinput ports of differentnetworks.
> 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB
Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM1900) signals at one transmitport and 50 on receive portin receive band.
< -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm < -108 dBm
602 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
Parameter GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2 x 40 W (2 x30 W for GSM 1800 and GSM1900) signals at one transmitport and 50 on receive portin transmit band.
< -75 dBc < -75 dBc < - 75 dBc < - 75 dBc
RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50
Table 85: ANY Performance Characteristics
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 603 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.2.3 ANY Front Panel
The following figure shows the layout of the ANY front panel.
RX0AIN
RX1AINTXAOUT
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1TXAIN1
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2TXAIN2
RX0BIN
RX1BINTXBOUT
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1TXBIN1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2TXBIN2
Receiver Connectors
Transmitter Connectors
Camloc Fasteners
Module ExtractorMnemonic or
Serial NumberLabel
Module Extractor
Mnemonic orSerial NumberLabel
Figure 323: ANY Front Panel
604 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.2.3.1 Transmitter ConnectorsThe ANY has four transmitter input connectors and two transmitter outputconnectors on its front panel.
The following table describes the ANY transmitter connectors.
Connector Description
TXAOUT
TXBOUT
Provide two RF interfaces to the transmitterinputs of an ANX/ANC module.
TXAIN1, TXAIN2
TXBIN1, TXBIN2
Provide four RF interfaces from four TREtransmitter outputs.
Table 86: ANY Transmitter Connectors
10.2.3.2 Receiver ConnectorsThe ANY has four receiver input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel.
The following table describes the ANY receiver connectors.
Connector Description
RX0AIN
RX1AIN
Provide two RF receiver interfaces from theANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0AOUT andRX1AOUT.
RX0BIN
RX1BIN
Provide two RF receiver interfaces from theANX/ANC receiver outputs RX0BOUT andRX1BOUT.
RX0AOUT1, RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT2, RX1AOUT2
RX0BOUT1, RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT2, RX1BOUT2
Each pair of connectors provide two RF receiverinterfaces to the TRE receiver inputs RX0 andRX1.
Table 87: ANY Receiver Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 605 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.3 ANCThe ANC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.
Its tasks are to:
Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the
signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer)
Provide filtering for the TX- and RX-path
Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.
10.3.1 ANC Basic Architecture
The following figure shows the basic architecture.
Duplexer
Splitter
Duplexer
Splitter
ANT A
ANT B
TXAIN1
ANCC
Combiner
CombinerTXBIN1TXBIN2
TXAIN2
RX0AOUT1RX0AOUT2RX1AOUT1RX1AOUT2
RX0BOUT1RX0BOUT2RX1BOUT1RX1BOUT2
Figure 324: ANC Basic Architecture
606 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.2 ANC Detailed Architecture
The following figure shows the ANC in more detail.
Directional Coupler B
Duplexer B
ANMicroprocessor
BCBInterface
DC/DC Converter
Duplexer A
FilterLNA
LNA
−48 VDC
BCB
ANTA
ANTB
Power Splitter A
Power Splitter B
BSII
TXAIN
TXBIN
RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT1
LEDs
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
DC Feed
Gain Control VSWR Receiver
Directional Coupler A
Remote Switching
Uplink Functions
Uplink Functions
TRE
TRE
ANCC
TX Combiner ALoad 60 W*)
TX Combiner BLoad 60 W*)
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
TXAOUT
External Bridge A
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT2
TXBOUT
TXBIN1
TXBIN2
External Bridge B
*) 150 W for ANCD/ANCP
Figure 325: ANC Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 607 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.3 ANC Description
On the downlink, the ANC connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.
The following types of ANC modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
ANCD, ANC module for GSM 1800
ANCG, ANC module for GSM 900
ANCGP, ANC module for PGSM 900
ANCL, ANC module for GSM 850
ANCP, ANC module for GSM 1900.
GSM 850 is not supported by all BSS software releases. If you are in doubt,contact Alcatel support.
If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass theduplexers before feeding the antennas.
If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of theduplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The ANC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,remote DC feed and power splitters.
The ANC functions; interface, controller and power supply are given below.
DownlinkFunctions
The downlink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).
UplinkFunctions
The uplink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components(76).
BTS ControlBus Interface
The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfacesthe data and control signals to the BCB as listed in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface (77).
AntennaNetworkController
From a functional point of view the ANCC is the sameas the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DCconverter). Therefore for a description of the ANCC, seeAntenna Network Controller (Section 10.1.4).
Power Supply As part of the ANCC there is a DC/DC converter, providingall the necessary voltages for the ANC components. As theDC/DC is functionally the same as the one used in the ANX,refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5) for its description.
608 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.4 ANC LEDs and Alarms
This section provides information on the ANC’s LEDs and Alarms.
10.3.4.1 LEDsThere are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication ofthe operational status of the ANC module. The following table describes eachLED and defines their various operational states.
LED Color Status Description
VSWR A Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 2
On VSWR OK
Slow Blinking Low threshold reached
Fast Blinking High threshold reached
Off VSWR not supervised
VSWR B Yellow VSWR status of Antenna 1
On VSWR OK
Slow Blinking Low threshold reached
Fast Blinking High threshold reached
Off VSWR not supervised
O and M Yellow/Red
O and M status
Yellow On ANC is in O and M operational mode
Red On Not used. (Only active during startupLED test in case of LNA cablingerror)
Off ANC is not operational
ALARM Yellow/Red
Alarm status
Yellow On Normal situation (FS/SW running, noalarms present, module is powered)
Red Blinking Non-fatal alarm present
Off No Power presence or LED failure
Red On Fatal alarm for the module or modulein out-of-order state
Table 88: ANC/ANB LED Descriptions
10.3.4.2 AlarmsThe ANC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 609 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.5 ANC Performance Characteristics
The performance characteristics of the ANCs are shown in the following table.
Parameter GSM 850 1) GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Transmit band. 869 - 894 MHz 925 - 960 MHz
935 - 960 MHz 4)
1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
Receive band. 824 - 849 MHz 880 - 915 MHz
890 - 915 MHz 4)
1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
Power for each transmitterchannel input.
63 W maximum 63 W maximum 63 W maximum 63 W maximum
Number of channels. 124 174 374 299
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB 2) > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB > 18 dB 3) > 18 dB > 18 dB
Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB ≥ 18 dB
Group delay distortion intransmit band.
≤100 ns ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns
Isolation between receive portand antenna port.
>30 dB >30 dB >30 dB > 30 dB
Isolation between receiveports.
>20 dB 22 dB 22 dB > 22 dB
Isolation between transmitports (A to B/ 1 to 2).
>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
Insertion loss in transmit passband without combiner.
0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB
Insertion loss in transmit passband with combiner.
3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB
Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit portand 50 on receive port inreceive band.
<-101 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm <-103 dBm
Intermodulation products atantenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit portand 50 on receive port intransmit band.
-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc <-75 dBc
RF input impedance. 50 50 50 50
610 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
Parameter GSM 850 1) GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
RF output impedance. 50 50 50 50
1) Valid for ANCL only.
2) For ANC with bridge: >18 dB.
3) For ANC with bridge: >16 dB.
4) For ANCGP
Table 89: ANC Performance Characteristics
10.3.6 ANC Front Panel
The following figures show the layout and O and M features of the threeversions of the ANC front panel.
10.3.6.1 ANC Front Panel - Version 1
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
TXAIN
TXAOUTANTB
ANTA
TXBOUT
TXBIN
TXBIN2
TXBIN1
O&M
VSWRA
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Receiver Connectors
LEDs
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connectors
AntennaConnector
CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RF bridge(if TXAIN1and/or TXAIN2 used)
High VoltageWarning
Figure 326: ANC Front Panel Version 1
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 611 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.6.2 ANC Front Panel - Version 2
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
TXAIN
TXAOUT
ANTBANTA
TXBOUT
TXBIN
TXBIN2
TXBIN1
O&M
VSWRA
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Receiver Connectors
LEDs
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connectors
AntennaConnector
CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RF bridge(if TXBIN1and/or TXBIN2 used)
High VoltageWarning
Figure 327: ANC Front Panel Version 2
612 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.6.3 ANC Front Panel - Version 3
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
TXAIN
TXAOUT
ANTBANTA
TXBOUT
TXBIN
TXBIN2
TXBIN1
O&M
VSWRA
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Receiver Connectors
LEDs
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connectors
AntennaConnector
CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RF bridge(if TXAIN1 and/orTXAIN2 used)
High VoltageWarning
Figure 328: ANC Front Panel Version 3
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 613 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.3.6.4 ConnectorsThe ANC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANC module can be interfaced tofour TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the ANC front panel connectors.
Connector Description
TXAIN1,TXAIN2
TXBIN1,TXBIN2
Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules,or two ANY modules if used.
TXAIN,TXAOUT
A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch A.
TXBIN,TXBOUT
A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch B.
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna Band the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B andthe fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.
ANTA
ANTB
Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B.
Table 90: ANC Front Panel Connectors
The front panel connector types are described in the following table.
ANC Version 1 ANC Versions 2 and 3
ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16 7/ 16
TXAOUT, TXBOUT N female SMA female
All other TXnn N female N female
All RXnn SMB SMB
Table 91: ANC, Front Panel Connector Types
614 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4 AGCThe AGC provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.
Its functions are to:
Combine the output signals of up to four transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where the
signals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer)
Provide filtering for the TX- and RX-path
Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.
10.4.1 AGC Basic Architecture
The following figure shows the basic architecture.
ANT A
ANT B
TXAIN1
LNAVSWRMUXBiasT
UC
CombinerTXBIN1TXBIN2
TXAIN2
RX0AOUT1RX0AOUT2RX1AOUT1RX1AOUT2
RX0BOUT1RX0BOUT2RX1BOUT1RX1BOUT2
AGCC+AGCPS
Splitter
Splitter
Duplexer
DuplexerCombiner
Figure 329: AGC Basic Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 615 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.2 AGC Detailed Architecture
The following figure shows the AGC in more detail.
Directional Coupler B
Duplexer B
ANMicroprocessor
BCBInterface
DC/DC Converter
Duplexer A
FilterLNA
LNA
−48 VDC
BCB
ANTA
ANTB
Power Splitter A
Power Splitter B
BSII
TXAIN
TXBIN
RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT1
LEDs
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
DC Feed
Gain Control VSWR Receiver
Directional Coupler A
Remote Switching
Uplink Functions
Uplink Functions
TRE
TRE
AGCC
TX Combiner ALoad 150 W
TX Combiner BLoad 150 W
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
TXAOUT
External Bridge A
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT2
TXBOUT
TXBIN1
TXBIN2
External Bridge B
Figure 330: AGC Architecture
616 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.3 AGC Description
On the downlink, the AGC connects four TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.
The following types of AGC modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
AGC18, AGC module for GSM 1800
AGC9E, AGC module for GSM 900.
If one transmitter is used in each branch A and B, the RF signals pass theduplexers before feeding the antennas.
If two transmitters are used in a branch, the coupler will be used in front of theduplexer. This coupler is connected by an RF cable bridge.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The AGC also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,remote DC feed and power splitters.
The AGC functions, interface, controller and power supply are given below.
DownlinkFunctions
The downlink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).
UplinkFunctions
The uplink functions are performed by the componentsshown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components(76).
BTS ControlBus Interface
The BCB Interface is located on the backplane. It interfacesthe data and control signals to the BCB as listed in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, BCB Interface (77).
AntennaNetworkController
From a functional point of view the AGCC is the sameas the ANCON used in the ANX (but without the DC/DCconverter). Therefore for a description of the AGCC, seeAntenna Network Controller (Section 10.1.4).
Power Supply As part of the AGCC there is a DC/DC converter, providingall the necessary voltages for the AGC components. Referto AGC Power Supply (Section 10.4.5) for its description.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 617 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.4 Antenna Network Geran Combiner Controller
The AGCC is responsible for maintaining the operation of the AGC.
Its principal functions are:
Setting the LNA gain for the assigned TREA receiver
Supervising LNA alarms
Measuring antenna VSWR
Reporting VSWR alarms
Selecting the antenna sector
Detecting RF cabling status
RI, via the BCB Interface
Remote power on/off, via the BCB Interface
Status display, via front panel LEDs.
Measurement of the antenna output power
Reporting the antenna output power
Tower mounted amplifier (TMA) current supervision.
618 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
The following figure shows the AGCC architecture.
IO
I2C
SCP
HFFIHFFI
BSII0BSII1
12V
RF
ANLU
Power Module SDRAM FLASH
LNA/RXMUX
Receiver
X
Synthesizer
ADC
Current Sense+
SwitchRI
ADC
5V 3.3V
DEBUG1
DEBUG2
38−78V
BCB
DC Ant A
DC Ant B
ANT SEL
12V TMA A
12V TMA B
For RevRES
I2C
ACU
HDLCUBSIIMUX
Figure 331: AGCC Architecture
The AGCC interfaces provides the following interfaces:
On backpanel connector
BCB
BSII
CLKI
DEBUG1
DEBUG2.
On LNA/RXMUX connector
LNAC
RCD
RF
TMAFD.
The AGCC functional entities are described in the following sections.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 619 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.4.1 VSWR ReceiverThe VSWR receiver is a selective VSWR meter which measures the forwardand reflected (reverse) power of the transmitters. The VSWR is measured atthe output of the duplexer couplers, and fed to an RF MUX in the receiver(see Figure 331).
The VSWR receiver consists of:
Local synthesizer
Input MUX.
A local synthesizer generates a signal which is used to compare the basebandfrequency with the ARFCN. The local synthesizer is set to the ARFCNfrequency by the AN microprocessor.
The input MUX provides the RF inputs to the VSWR receiver. It provides aselective input of the forward and reverse power from transmitters A and B. Theinput MUX operates under the control of the AN microprocessor.
10.4.4.2 BSII Frame Clock PLLThe BSII frame clock PLL recovers the BSII frame clock from the backplane.The clock outputs are used for BSII communications, the AN microprocessorand the PLL lock-detect signal.
PLL Switch
Loop Filter
Glue Logic
BSII Comms
BSII PLL Lock Detect
Microprocessor
BSII Frame CLK
Clock Edge Control Signal
VCXO
Figure 332: AGCC, BSII Frame Clock PLL
10.4.4.3 CLKII Clock PLLThe CLKII clock PLL recovers the BSII master clock from the backplane. Theclock outputs are used for the local synthesizer reference clock, the ’startconversion’ signal for the baseband ADC and the CLKII lock-detect signal.
PLL Switch
Loop Filter
Glue Logic
Local Synthesizer
CLKII Lock Detect
Start Conversion
BSII Master CLK
Clock Edge Control Signal
VCXO
Figure 333: AGCC, CLKII Clock PLL
10.4.4.4 Signal Control ProcessorThe SCP performs LNA alarm supervision and gain setting, and control of thestatus LEDs. It also provides an interface to the baseband ADC in the VSWRreceiver (see Figure 331).
The microprocessor compares the ADC output with known VSWR values. Ifthe VSWR exceeds predefined thresholds, an alarm is raised (refer to TableAGC LEDs and Alarms (Section 10.4.6)). If the reflected power is very high,the transmitters are shut down to avoid possible damage to equipment. Highreflected power can be caused by, for example, a break in the antenna coupling.
The SCP hardware consists of a microprocessor supported by two memorydevices, a Flash EEPROM and an SDRAM.
620 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.4.5 Antenna Network Logic UnitThe Antenna Network Logic Unit (ANLU) contains the follwing blocks:
Clock and Reset Control Unit (CRCU)
MicroBlaze Systeem
HDLC Unit
BSII Multiplexer
HFFI Unit
Register Unit
I2C Unit
Analog Control CIrcuit (ACU).
ACU
IO
I2C
REGU
CRCU
MikroBlaze System
HDLCU
HFFI
BSIIMUX
HFFI
BSII0BSII1
IO
ACU
BSII_WIN_PLL
CLKII_WIN_PLL
UP
DOWN
CLK_SDRAM
CLK−CLK2x/Fx
CLK_SDRAMIN
CLKII_CLK26M
CLK25M6
BSII_CLK40M96
Figure 334: ANLU Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 621 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.4.6 ReceiverThe front-end receiver is realized by one device, which includes a directconversion QPSK demodulator, the PLL and synthesizer. The downconvertercan handle receive frequency in the GSM, DCS or PCS band. Control data willbe entered by means of an I2C interface.
The RF signal from the LNA board is fed directly into the downconverter. The I/Qbaseband output signal of the downconverter is sampled and converted using adual sigma-delta ADC. The data output is serial at a word rate of 270.83kHz foreach I and Q. The ADC is interfaced by the Analog Control Unit (ACU),
10.4.4.7 TMA Feeding and Current SupervisionThe power for the two TMA will be switched on and off by means of anANLU GPIO signal and a MOSFET. The current supervision is done withan Overcurrent Protection Circuit, which includes a current sense amplifier,a comparator and an internal voltage reference.
The current sense amplifier output is converted by a 10 bit ADC and the SCPcan read the actual current value via the I2C bus. Additional the current senseIC has a comparator with a latched output. It gives an over current alarm if thecurrent is higher than 300mA. This latched alarm signal is used to switch off the12V directly by hardware to prevent a DC/DC converter shot down.
10.4.4.8 BCB and RIThe main functions are:
ISL, provides access via BCN on the ISL interface to RI ASIC
RI EEPROM, is a serial EEPROM that stores information about AGCC
module
RPI, Remote Power Interface controls the AGCC power supply andsupervises the signals of input and output voltages
RCD, Radio Cabling Detection allows an automatic uplink RF cablingdetection and supervision
BCB_Vdd, BCB bus powered if DC/DC converter is off or self powered
if DC/DC converter is on
ADR, Physical address from backpanel for RI ASIC address setting and forSCP BSII address setting.
622 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.4.9 Glue LogicGlue logic consists of a number of registers, implemented on a single CPLDdevice. It also converts 5 V TTL signals to 3.3 V, required by the microprocessor.
The Glue logic maintains the following interfaces and/or functions:
AN microprocessor to the BSII
Board/module address register
Baseband ADC
LNA error register
LNA gain adjustment register.
The Glue logic also controls the BSII frame clock PLL and the CLKII masterclock PLL with a clock edge control signal (see Figure 332 and Figure 333).
10.4.4.10 Remote InventoryRemote Inventory is used to store information about the AGC module (partnumber, name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROM which isconnected to the BCB ASIC. The stored information is read via the BCBInterface.
10.4.5 AGC Power Supply
The AGCPS is a DC/DC converter, providing all the necessary voltages for theAGC components.
10.4.5.1 VoltagesThe following table provides AGCPS input/output voltage parameters.
Voltage Value
V in -38.4 VDC min.
-72 VDC max.
-48 VDC to -60 VDC nom.
V out +3.3 VDC ±3 %
+ 5.1 VDC ±3 %
+ 12 VDC ±3 %
Table 92: AGCPS Input/Output Voltage Parameters
Normal operation of V out is unaffected by temperature fluctuations in therange 0o C to 70o C.
10.4.5.2 FuseThe input of the AGCPS is protected by a fuse with a high-breaking capacity.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 623 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.5.3 ProtectionThe AGCPS circuitry is protected against short circuit and accidental polarityinversion on its inputs.
10.4.5.4 GroundingGround continuity for the module is achieved with ground pins on the subrackbackplane which connect to the bus bar ground.
10.4.5.5 Remote SwitchingThe AGCPS can be remotely switched on and off by the OMU, via the BCB. Thisfeature is implemented on the module with an optically isolated on/off switch.
10.4.5.6 Low Voltage AlarmsAlarms are raised if the voltage level is too low. The following table provides thelow voltage threshold tolerances for AGCPS alarms.
Voltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.
Vin 30.4 V 38.4 V
3.3 V 2.7 V 3.0 V
5.1 V 4.2 V 4.6 V
12 V 10.0 V 11.0 V
Table 93: AGCPS Alarm Thresholds
624 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.6 AGC LEDs and Alarms
This section provides information on the AGC’s LEDs and Alarms.
10.4.6.1 LEDsThere are two LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication ofthe operational status of the AGC module. The following table describes eachLED and defines their various operational states.
LED Color Status Description
ON Green Power status
On Module is switched on
Off Module is switched off
OM /ALARM
Yellow/Red
Alarm status
Yellow On OM operational status (normaloperation)
Yellow Blinking Not defined
Red Blinking Not defined
Red On LNA, TMA or VSWR alarm on portA or B
Table 94: AGC LED Descriptions
10.4.6.2 AlarmsThe AGC detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 625 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.7 AGC Performance Characteristics
10.4.7.1 General Performance CharacteristicsThe performance characteristics of the AGCs are shown in the following table.
Parameter GSM 900 P GSM 900 E GSM 1800
Transmit band. 935 - 960 MHz 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz
Receive band. 890 - 915 MHz 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz
Power for each transmitter channelinput.
80 W maximum 80 W maximum 80 W maximum
Number of channels. 124 174 374
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz
Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at antenna port. > 18 dB > 18 dB > 18 dB
Group delay distortion in transmitband.
≤100 ns ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns
Isolation between receive port andantenna port.
>30 dB >30 dB >30 dB
Isolation between receive ports. >20 dB >20 dB >20 dB
Isolation between transmit ports (A toB/ 1 to 2).
>50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
Insertion loss in transmit pass bandwithout combiner.
0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB 0.3 - 1.6 dB
Insertion loss in transmit pass bandwith combiner.
3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.3 dB 3.4 - 5.2 dB
Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 28 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in receive band.
<-100 dBm <-100 dBm <-100 dBm
Intermodulation products at antennaport with 2x 28 W signals at onetransmit port and 50 on receiveport in transmit band.
<-36 dBm <-36 dBm <-36 dBm
RF input impedance. 50 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50 50
Table 95: AGC Performance Characteristics
626 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RXgain
Atten (dB) withoutRX gain
A14 890 915 > 64 > 79
ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Attenuation (dBc)
A20 (Out of bandrejection)
816 880 > 30
A21 (RX passband) 890 915 LNA Passband gain
10.4.7.2 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant’B’
Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant ’B’ has thefollowing specific values:
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RXgain
Atten (dB) withoutRX gain
A14 896 915 > 64 > 79
ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Attenuation (dBc)
A20 (Out of bandrejection)
816 888 > 30
A21 (RX passband) 896 915 LNA Passband gain
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 627 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.7.3 Performance Characteristics with AGC GSM 900P Module Functional Variant’C’
Compared to general perfomrance characteristics, the variant ’C’ has thefollowing specific values:
TX to RX isolation:
TXAIN -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
TXBIN -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Atten (dB) with RXgain
Atten (dB) withoutRX gain
A14 902 915 > 64 > 79
ANTA -> RX1AOUT1 / RX1AOUT2 / RX1BOUT1 / RX1BOUT2
ANTB -> RX0AOUT1 / RX0AOUT2 / RX0BOUT1 / RX0BOUT2
No. Start Freq (MHz) Stop Freq (MHz) Attenuation (dBc)
A20 (Out of bandrejection)
816 888 > 50
A21 (RX passband) 902 915 LNA Passband gain
628 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.8 AGC Front Panel
The following figures show the layout and O& M features of the three versionsof the AGC front panel.
10.4.8.1 AGC Front Panel - Version 1
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
OM/ALARM
ON
TXAIN
TXAOUT
ANTB
ANTA
TXBOUT
TXBIN
TXBIN2
TXBIN1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
ReceiverConnectors
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connectors
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
AntennaConnector
CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RF bridge(if TXAIN1 and/orTXAIN2 used)
High VoltageWarning
LEDs
Hot SurfaceWarning
Figure 335: AGC Front Panel - Version 1
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 629 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.8.2 AGC Front Panel - Version 2
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT2
RX0AOUT2
OM/ALARM
ON
TXAIN
TXAOUT
ANTB
ANTA
TXBOUT
TXBIN
TXBIN2
TXBIN1
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
ReceiverConnectors
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connectors
TXAIN1
TXAIN2
AntennaConnector
CombinedTransmitterOutput Connector(TXAIN1 + TXAIN2)
RF bridge(if TXAIN1 and/orTXAIN2 used)
High VoltageWarning
LEDs
Hot SurfaceWarning
Figure 336: AGC Front Panel - Version 2
630 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.4.8.3 ConnectorsThe AGC has four transmitter input connectors and eight receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one AGC module can be interfaced tofour TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the AGC front panel connectors.
Connector Description
TXAIN1,TXAIN2
TXBIN1,TXBIN2
Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from four TRE modules,or two ANY modules if used.
TXAIN,TXAOUT
A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch A.
TXBIN,TXBOUT
A bridge between both connectors provides the interfacebetween two combined RF transmitter signals and theduplexer of branch B.
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe first TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna A andthe second TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or a firstANY module if used.
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna Band the third TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces between antenna B andthe fourth TRE receiver connectors RX0 and RX1, or asecond ANY module if used.
ANTA
ANTB
Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas, A and B.
Table 96: AGC Front Panel Connectors
The front panel connector types are described in the following table.
Connector Type
ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16 female
TXAOUT, TXBOUT N female or SnapN
All other TXnn N female or SnapN
All RXnn SMB male
Table 97: AGC, Front Panel Connector Types
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 631 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.5 ANBThe ANB provides the intermediate RF stage between the TREs and theantenna.
Its tasks are to:
Combine the output signals of up to two transmitters and to connect them toup to two antennas
Feed the received signals from the antenna to the radio front end, where thesignals are amplified and distributed to up to eight receivers
Allow simultaneous transmission and receiving on antennas (duplexer)
Provide filtering for the TX- and RX-path
Supervise the VSWR of the antennas.
10.5.1 ANB Basic Architecture
The following figure shows the basic architecture.
Duplexer
Splitter
Duplexer
Splitter
ANT A
ANT B
TXAIN
ANCC
TXBIN
RX0AOUT1RX0AOUT2RX1AOUT1RX1AOUT2
RX0BOUT1RX0BOUT2RX1BOUT1RX1BOUT2
Figure 337: ANB Basic Architecture
632 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.2 ANB Detailed Architecture
The following figure shows the ANB in more detail.
Directional Coupler B
Duplexer B
ANMicroprocessor
BCBInterface
DC/DC Converter
Duplexer A
FilterLNA
LNA
−48 VDC
BCB
ANTA
ANTB
Power Splitter A
Power Splitter B
BSII
TXAIN
TXBIN
RX1BOUT1
RX0BOUT1
LEDs
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
DC Feed
Gain Control VSWR Receiver
Directional Coupler A
Remote Switching
Uplink Functions
Uplink Functions
TRE
TRE
ANCC
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
RX1BOUT2
RX0BOUT2
Figure 338: ANB Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 633 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.3 ANB Description
On the downlink, the ANB connects two TRE transmitters to two antennas. Onthe uplink, it splits the received signals and passes them to the TRE receivers.
The following types of ANB modules are available for the different BTSA9100 variants:
ANBD, ANB module for GSM 1800
ANBG, ANB module for GSM 900.
In each branch A and B, the RF signals pass the duplexers before feedingthe antennas.
The duplexers provide coupling of the transmitted and received signals,allowing a single antenna to be used for both downlink and uplink channels.
The ANB also allows the return loss of the transmitted signals to be measured,at the antenna connector, using VSWR techniques.
The uplink channel comprises amplifiers, with remotely-adjustable gain control,remote DC feed and power splitters.
The table below describes the downlink and uplink functions, the interface,the controller and the power supply for the ANB.
Downlink Functions The downlink functions are performedby the components shown in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Downlink Components(75).
Uplink Functions The uplink functions are performedby the components shown in TableANX/ANC/AGC/ANB, Uplink Components (76).
BTS Control Bus Interface The BCB Interface is located on the backplane.It interfaces the data and control signals to theBCB as listed in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANB,BCB Interface (77).
Antenna Network Controller From a functional point of view the ANCC isthe same as the ANCON used in the ANX(but without the DC/DC converter). There,forefor the description of the ANCC, see AntennaNetwork Controller (Section 10.1.4).
Power Supply As part of the ANCC there is a DC/DCconverter, providing all the necessary voltagesfor the ANB components. As the DC/DC isfunctionally the same as the one used in theANX refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5)for its description.
634 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.4 ANB LEDs and Alarms
This section provides information on the ANB’s LEDs and Alarms.
There are four LEDs on the front panel, which provide a visual indication of theoperational status of the ANB module. As the LEDs functionality is the same asin ANC refer to ANC/ANB LED Descriptions for its description.
The ANB detects the alarm conditions shown in Table ANX/ANC/AGC/ANBAlarm Conditions (81).
10.5.5 ANB Performance Characteristics
The performance characteristics of the ANBs are shown in the following table.
Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800
Transmit band. 925 - 960 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz
Receive band. 880 - 915 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz
Power for each transmitter channel input. 63 W maximum 63 W maximum
Number of channels. 174 374
Bandwidth for each channel. 200 kHz 200 kHz
Return loss at receive port. > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at transmit port. > 16 dB > 16 dB
Return loss at antenna port. > 16 dB 1) > 16 dB
Return loss at coupler port. > 18 dB ≥ 18 dB
Group delay distortion in transmit band. ≤100 ns ≤ 100 ns
Isolation between receive port and antenna port. >30 dB >30 dB
Isolation between receive ports. >20 dB >20 dB
Isolation between transmit ports (A to B/ 1 to 2). >50 dB/ 22 dB >50 dB/ 22 dB
Insertion loss in transmit pass band. 0.3 - 1.6 dB < 0.3 - 1.6 dB
Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit port and 50 on receive portin receive band.
<-101 dBm <-101 dBm
Intermodulation products at antenna port with 2x 20 Wsignals at one transmit port and 50 on receive portin transmit band.
<-75 dBc <-75 dBc
RF input impedance. 50 50
RF output impedance. 50 50
1) For ANB with bridge: >16 dB.
Table 98: ANB Performance Characteristics
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 635 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.6 ANB Front Panel
The following figures show the layout and O and M features of the two versionsof the ANB front panel.
10.5.6.1 ANB Front Panel - Version 1
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN
ANTB
ANTA
TXBIN
O&M
VSWRA
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Receiver Connectors
LEDs
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connector
AntennaConnector
High VoltageWarning
Figure 339: ANB Front Panel Version 1
636 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.6.2 ANB Front Panel - Version 2
RX1AOUT1
RX0AOUT1
VSWRB
ALARM
TXAIN
ANTBANTA
TXBIN
O&M
VSWRA
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Receiver Connectors
LEDs
Module Extractor
Camloc Fasteners
TransmitterInput Connector
AntennaConnector
High VoltageWarning
TransmitterInput Connector
Figure 340: ANB Front Panel Version 2
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 637 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.5.6.3 ConnectorsThe ANB has two transmitter input connectors and four receiver outputconnectors on its front panel. Therefore, one ANB module can be interfaced totwo TRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
The following table describes the ANB front panel connectors.
Connector Description
TXAIN
TXBIN
Provide the RF transmitter interfaces from twoTRE modules or two ANY modules, if used.
RX0AOUT1
RX1AOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the first TRE receiver connectorsRX0 and RX1.
RX0AOUT2
RX1AOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna A and the second TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.
RX0BOUT1
RX1BOUT1
Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the third TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.
RX0BOUT2
RX1BOUT2
Provide the RF receiver interfaces betweenantenna B and the fourth TRE receiverconnectors RX0 and RX1.
ANTA
ANTB
Provide the RF interface to/ from two antennas,A and B.
Table 99: ANB Front Panel Connectors
The front panel connector types are described in the following table.
ANTA, ANTB 7/ 16
TXAIN, TXBIN N female
All RXnnOUT SMB male
Table 100: ANB, Front Panel Connector Types
638 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
10.6 GSM/UMTS Co-SitingGSM cabinets and UMTS cabinets can be installed at the same site. Normallyall antenna feeder cables between antennas (A and B) and BTSs have to beinstalled separately for GSM and UMTS as shown in the following figure.
BTSGSM
850/900/1800
Node BUMTS
GSMAntennas
A + B
Separate Antenna Feeders A + Bfor GSM and UMTS
UMTSAntennas
A + B
ANCx ANRU
A B A B
Figure 341: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting
With the help of diplexer filters at both ends of the feeder cables, the GSM(850/900/1800) band and the UMTS band can be decoupled in order to use thesame feeder cable for both services. The following figure shows the principle.
BTS Node BGSM
850/900/1800UMTS
DiplexerDouble−Diplexer
Antennas A + BGSM
Antennas A + BUMTS
Common Antenna Feeders
Double−Diplexer
ANRUANCx
A B A B
Diplexer A
Diplexer B
Figure 342: GSM/UMTS Co-Siting with Diplexers and Common Feeders
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 639 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.6.1 Diplexer Functional Description
The following figure shows the block diagram of the diplexer. The base stationfeeder cable of the GSM and UMTS part is connected to the according BTSport of the diplexer. The signal passes the bandpath filter of the diplexer and isavailable at the antenna connector.
GSM BTS
GSMBandpath
UMTSBandpath
TMABIAS
Circuit
UMTS BTS
Antenna
Diplexer
Figure 343: Diplexer, Block Diagram
The insertion losses of the filters are as low as possible to achieve the bestnoise figures in the uplink and low attenuation in the TX downlink.
GSM and UMTS bandpath filters provide following features:
Suppression of spurious and noise signals from the transmitter(s) out of
band
Suppression of intermodulation product(s)
Rejection of harmonics of the transmitter(s)
Isolation of the UMTS branch (GSM part) or GSM branch (UMTS part).
The following table shows the out-of-band attenuations of the diplexer filters.
Filter Frequency (MHz) Attenuation Remark
GSM 850
GSM 900
GSM 1800
1920 - 2170 >60 dB UMTS Band
UMTS 824 - 960 >60 dB GSM 850 Band
GSM 900 Band
UMTS 1710 - 1880 >60 dB GSM 1800 Band
Table 101: Diplexer Filters Out-of-Band Attenuations
640 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
10 Antenna Networks
The UMTS branch is additionally equipped with a Tower Mounted Amplifier(TMA) BIAS circuit. This BIAS circuit allows the DC power supply (12 VDC)of a TMA using the RF feeder cable. The appropriate power distribution unit(PDU) is part of the ANRU module.
The GSM part of the diplexer is decoupled from the UMTS BIAS circuit part. Ifboth branches (GSM and UMTS) are equipped with a tower mounted amplifier,this external diplexer cannot be used. Then all necessary equipment of a TMA(inclusive of feeders) has to be installed twice.
10.6.2 Diplexer Mechanical Design
The external diplexers are designed for indoor and outdoor applications. Theyare fully purchased items. Therefore mechanical design, dimensions andweight depend on the selected manufacturer and cannot be described herein detail. Moreover there are additional differences in dimensions betweenGSM 850/900/UMTS and GSM 1800/UMTS diplexers, depending on thefrequencies used.
The following figure shows a GSM 1800 (DCS)/UMTS double-diplexer (forantennas A and B) as an example.
DCS ANT UMTS
DCS
ANT
UMTS
Bottom View
Side View
RF Connector
Ground Connector
Mounting Flanges(with holes)
Figure 344: Diplexer, Mechanical Design (Example)
The diplexer has six RF connectors (7/16 female) for connecting GSM BTS,UMTS BTS and antennas. A ground connector is available to connect thediplexer to ground. Two mounting flanges are used to fix the diplexer toimmobile equipment near the BTSs.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 641 / 910
10 Antenna Networks
10.6.3 Environmental Conditions
The external diplexer housings provide the necessary environmental and safetyprotection according to the standard ETS 300 019 -1-4 class 4.1E.
The minimum ambient temperature is -45� C, humidity up to 100 % at + 38� C.Earthquake is according to ETS 300 019 -2-3.
10.6.4 EMC Requirements
The EMC requirements are derived from ETS 300 342-3/phase 2, TS 25.104and EN 55022.
642 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11 Temperature Control
The sections are supported with diagrams, if necessary. Illustrations of theFANU and FACB are also included.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 643 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.1 Cooling SystemThe BTS A9100 is equipped with a forced-air cooling system. Depending onthe BTS A9100 variant the cooling system may consist of up to three RITs; seethe following figure.
The three RITs are:
FANU
FACB
TFBP.
FANU
FANU
TFBP
FACB
Subrack Backplane
FACB
Ribbon Cable Connectors
Figure 345: Cooling System Components
A FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame containing two fan blowers (seeFigure 347). The FANU is connected to the TFBP or subrack backplane.
Three FANUs are controlled by one FACB. The FACB monitors the fans andprovides power and digital speed control of the FANUs. The FACB is fittedon a TFBP or a subrack backplane, as required.
A special case exists where two FANUs are fitted as a pair below the ACSRused in BTS A9100 outdoor configurations. These two FANUs are controlled bythe BCU2 contained in the ACSR. The BCU2 monitors the fans and providespower and digital speed control of the FANUs.
A feature of the cooling system is its ability to control the front and back rowsof fans, independently of each other (see Figure 348). This enables thetemperature inside the cabinet to be regulated more precisely. It also extendsthe life of the fans and keeps noise levels to a minimum.
644 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.1.1 Fan Units
The FANUs are usually installed in groups of three. The exception is wherethey are fitted as a pair below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the BTS A9100outdoor configurations.
The FANUs are normally situated below the subracks containing TREs.Additional FANUs can be installed at the top of the equipment rack; see thefollowing figure.
TEMP. SENSOR
ABIS 2ABIS 1
RIBATPort
Abis
Interface
Group
External
Input/
Output
Interface
Group
External
Input/
Output
Interface
Group
External
Clock
Interface
Group
FLAT CABLE COMPARTMENT 1
FLAT CABLE SIDE COMPARTMENT
ABIS1
ABIS2
ABIS3
ABIS4
AB
IS 1
&2
KR
ON
E C
ON
NE
CT
AB
IS 3
&4
XGPS
XBCB
XRT
XCLK 1 OUT
XCLK 1 IN
XCLK 2 IN/ OUT
ALARMSCOMPARTMENT 1
ALARMSSIDE COMPARTMENT
Remote
Inventory
Part
Abis
Interface
Group
EXT − ALARMS
SU
N C
ON
NE
CT
ION
ALA
RM
OU
TP
UT
S
ALA
RM
INP
UT
S
DC IN
EBCB (optional)
Figure 346: Subrack Air Circulation
The fan blowers are driven by electronically-commutated motors. Theseare protected against reverse polarity and blocking due to an obstruction inthe fan blades.
Air is taken from the front of the cabinet and forced through the subracks. Thefans force the air in an upwards direction to dissipate the heat generated bythe subrack modules (mainly the TREs). The FANUs at the top of the rackassist air flow by pulling the air through the rack and expelling it throughgrills at the top of the cabinet.
Dummy panels are used to fill the FANU positions that are not equipped (indoorracks). These provide an air outlet at the back of the subrack.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 645 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.1.1.1 FANU AppearanceThe FANU consists of a moulded-plastic frame for mounting the two fanblowers. The fan blowers are manufactured from fiberglass reinforced plastic.They are fixed in the moulded-plastic frame with a simple snap-in mechanism.
The FANUs are inserted in guide rails, at the bottom of the subrack, and lockedin position with a latch. The electrical connection is achieved with a connector,fitted to the rear of the FANU, which plugs-in to the subrack backplane. Thefollowing figure shows a three-dimensional image of the FANU.
Blowers
Handle
Latch
Guide Rails
Power Connector
Figure 347: FANU
11.1.1.2 Fan Blower Operational ParametersThe following table lists the operational parameters for the fan blowers.
Parameter Description
Type: PAPST 4318/2, version 113
Max. air flow: 170 m3/ h
Acoustic noise: <45 dB
Operating voltage: 20 VDC to 40 VDC
Table 102: Fan Blower Unit Operating Parameters
646 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.1.2 Fan Control
The principal function of the FACB is to control the fan speed of the frontand back rows of fans, independently of each other. Each FACB controlsthree FANUs.
The BCU2 performs the functions of the FACB in the special case of a pairof FANUs fitted below the ACSR used in variant 2 of the BTS A9100 outdoorconfigurations.
The FACB has the following functionality:
Performs control and supervision of the fans
Detects the fan module and its date of manufacture
Supplies power to the fans
Provides an interface to the BCB.
The following figure shows the FACB architecture in block diagram form.
FANUs
Filtering and Surge
Limiting
Fuse−38 VDC to −72 VDC
DC/DC Converter (Front Row)
20 VDC to 40 VDC
DC/DC Converter (Back Row)
20 VDC to 40 VDC
FACB Controller
BackplaneAddress
BCBInterface
RIEEPROM
InputVoltage
Monitoring
Regulator
Regulator
Voltage Monitor and
Limiter
Fan Speed
Front Row Fans
Back Row Fans
Figure 348: FACB Architecture
The FACB activates the fans within the temperature range: -40� C to + 70�
C. However, at very low temperatures, in the range -40� C to -10� C, the fansoperate without digital speed control.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 647 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.1.2.1 FACE Functional EntitiesThe FACB consists of the functional entities described in the following table.
FACB Controller The controller is responsible for the followinginterfaces:
I/O for the BCB
Backplane address
Date of FANU manufacture
Fan speed control output
Remote on/off switching
RI EEPROM.
BCB Interface All OMU messages, such as fan alarms, arecommunicated via the BCB interface. TheBCB also provides an interface to the RemoteInventory EEPROM, via the FACB controller.
RI EEPROM The Remote Inventory EEPROM storesinformation about the FACB.
Power Supply The FANU power supply consist of two on-boardDC/DC converters. These provide powerindependently for the front and back rows offans. The DC/DC converters operate on aninput voltage in the range -38 VDC to -72 VDC.This is converted to a variable output in therange + 20 VDC to + 40 VDC.
The input to the FACB DC/DC converters isprotected from accidental reverse polarity,transient voltages and surges.
Fan Speed Control The output of the DC/DC converters ismonitored and dynamically regulated by theFACB controller PWM techniques. A squarewave output signal from the fans indicatesrotational speed of the fans. The PWM signal isused to control the fan speed.
Table 103: FACB Functional Entities
11.1.2.2 FuseThe input of the FACB is protected by a fuse with a high breaking capacity(3.5 A).
11.1.2.3 Date CodingThree pins on the FANU connector are hard-wired to provide a fixed code forthe year of manufacture. The code is read from the FACB controller.
648 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.1.2.4 Remote SwitchingThe front and back row DC/DC converters can be remotely switched on and off,independently of each other. The fan speeds for each row can also be adjusted.This function is implemented by the OMU, via the BCB Interface to the FACB.
11.1.2.5 FACB AppearanceThe FACB is a small PCB which is fitted to the STASR backplane between thethird and fourth module connectors (see Figure 283).
The following figure shows the layout of the FACB; only the principlecomponents are marked. The layout is shown so that the FACB can be easilyidentified.
Controller
Connector
Connector
Figure 349: FACB Component Layout
11.1.2.6 AlarmsTwo independent fan alarms, for the front and back rows, can be raised underthe control of the FACB. An alarm is raised when a fan-related output voltageis out of tolerance. The following table lists the voltage threshold-tolerancesbefore an alarm is raised.
Voltage Threshold Min. Threshold Max.
U Front 13 V 20 V
U Back 13 V 20 V
Table 104: Alarm Threshold Voltages
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 649 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.1.3 Top Fan Unit
In some BTS A9100 variants, additional FANUs at the top of the cabinetassist the air circulation. They are connected to the TFBP, which provides theelectrical and signaling interface between the FANUs and the FACB. The TFBPis mounted at the top of the cabinet, on the rear wall. It is powered from a -48/-60 VDC external power source, via the cabinet bus bar.
The following figure shows the TFBP connector layout.
FANU Connectors
FACB
Ribbon Cable ConnectorGround
0 V
−48 VDC
X110 X111 X112
X117X116
X113
Equipment Label
Connector Identity
X100
Pin 1, Row A
Figure 350: TFBP Connector Layout
The following table lists and describes the TFBP connectors.
Connector Type Description
X110, X111,X112
R 1/3, male FANU Connectors
X116
X117
2 x 6-pin Header, male
2 x 16-pin Header, male
The FACB connectorsare linked to the FANUconnectors via the TFBPprinted wiring.
X100 C 64 M DIN 41612, male Ribbon Cable
X113 3 x FASTON Power
Table 105: TFBP Connectors
650 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.2 HEX2HEX2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It maintains the correct airenvironment within the cabinets. The airflow within the cabinets is isolated fromthe outside environment.
HEX2 is mounted on the inside of the compartment door. It cools the internalair by transferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure showsthe main components of HEX2.
Cool Air Outlet
Warm Air Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Door
Air Inlet
Inner Fans
Subrack
HEX2 Control Box
Outer FansFANU
Heat Sink Cassette
Outer Compartment
Inner Compartment
Temperature Sensor
Cool Air Outlet
Warm Air Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Air Inlet
Subrack
FANU
HEX2 Mounting on Alternative Cabinet Door
Figure 351: HEX2 Main Components
HEX2 is a box which is divided into inner and outer compartments by aheat sink cassette. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fans. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fans.
The fan controller is contained in a control box. When the internal temperaturereaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on and operate at minimum speed.When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, the outer fans switch on andalso operate at minimum speed. As the temperature rises further, fan speedincreases for both the inner and outer fans.
If the temperature sensor fails or is disconnected, all fans operate at maximumspeed and an alarm is raised.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 651 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.2.1 LED(s)
There are three versions of HEX2, two with only one LED and another onewith four LEDs, where the reason for the alarm is shown in more detail (butonly on the module itself):
Versions with one LED (versions ADAC, ADCA)There is one LED on the front of the control box. It illuminates whenthere is an alarm
Version with four LEDs (version ADBA)
There are the following four LEDs on the module:
High/Low Temp: Temperature sensor failure, inside temperature above
70� C or below -60� C
Heater: Heater failure (not used; not correlated to HEAT2)
Ext. Fan: External fan failure
Int. Fan: Internal fan failure.
But the alarm raised by HEX2 is only an accumulative alarm.
11.2.2 Alarms
HEX2 raises an alarm when:
A fan fails
The temperature sensor is disconnected
The controller is faulty
The internal temperature reaches 70� C.
652 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.2.3 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the two possible rear views of HEX2.
Door Side Rear Side (Version ADCA) *)
Air Outlet
Fan
Equipment Labels
Control Box
Fan Cables
DC Connector
Alarm Connector
LED
TemperatureSensor Connector
High/Low Temp
Heater
Int. Fan
Ext. Fan
Rear Side (Version ADBA)
LEDs:
*) Version ADCA has only the left fan and internal cabling
Figure 352: HEX2 Appearance
11.2.4 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX2 control box connectors.
Connector Type Description
DC Connector 9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in.
Alarm Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Alarm out.
Table 106: HEX2 Front Panel Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 653 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.3 HEX3/HEX4HEX3 and HEX4 are used in Multistandard BTS outdoor versions. Theymaintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling isnot allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets isisolated from the outside environment.
HEX4 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1 door, HEX3 is mounted on theinside of the MBOE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof HEX3 and HEX4.
Cool Air Outlet
Warm Air Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Air Inlet
Subrack
FANU
HEX3/4
Door
Inner Fan
Outer Fan
Heat Sink Cassette
Outer Compartment
Inner Compartment
Temperature Sensor
Figure 353: HEX3/HEX4 Main Components
HEX3 and HEX4 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by aheat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive materialallowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by oneblower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
654 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.3.1 Blower Rotation Control
The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.
When the internal temperature reaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on andoperate at minimum speed. When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, theouter fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans.
After switch-on, the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximumspecified rotation. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp.
11.3.2 Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof the inner circuit.
Failure of the temperature sensor (e.g., sensor disconnected or short circuited)causes the following response:
All blowers are rotating at full specified speed
Alarm occurs, red LED is lit.
The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.3.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
At least one blower fails
Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited
The controller is faulty
Temperature exceeds 70� C
Temperature drops below -60� C (sensor failure).
The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.3.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.3.5 Test Port
The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator(variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operationdepending on the temperature.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 655 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.3.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX3/HEX4.Note that the HEX3 and HEX4 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side
Air Outlet*
Fan
Equipment Labels
DCand AlarmConnector
LED
WaterOutlet
Air Inlet*
* Grid not necessary
Fan
Air Inlet(Protected with grid)
Test Connector
Front Side
Air Outlet(Protected with gridif necessary)
Guiding tubesfor fixing bolts
Figure 354: HEX3/HEX4 Appearance
11.3.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX3/HEX4 connectors.
Connector Type Description
DC and AlarmConnector
9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A)Alarm out.
Test Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.
Table 107: HEX3/HEX4 Connectors
656 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.3.8 Mechanical Parameters
The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.
Parameter HEX3 HEX4
Height (mm) 1150 1150
Width (mm) 450 600
Depth (mm) 150 150
Weight (kg) 24 28
Table 108: HEX3/HEX4 Mechanical Parameters
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 657 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.4 HEX5HEX5 is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) versions. It maintains thecorrect air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air cooling is not allowed inthe outdoor BTSs. Therefore the air flow within the cabinets is isolated fromthe outside environment.
HEX5 is mounted on the inside of the CBO door. It cools the internal air bytransferring heat to the outside environment. The following figure shows themain components of HEX5.
Cool Air Outlet
Warm Air Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Air Inlet
Subrack
FANU
HEX5
Door
Inner Fan
Outer Fan
Cooling Core
Outer Compartment
Inner Compartment
Temperature Sensor
1234123412341234123412341234123412341234
Figure 355: HEX5 Main Components
HEX5 is a box which is divided into inner and outer circuits by a heat sinkcassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive material allowing heatexchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by one blower in eachcircuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the inner compartmentby the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette and returnedto the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
658 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.4.1 Blower Rotation Control
The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained within acontrol unit which is assembled inside the inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of the blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.
When the internal temperature reaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on andoperate at minimum speed. When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, theouter fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans.
After switch-on, the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximumspecified rotation. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp.
11.4.2 Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof inner circuit.
Failure of the temperature sensor (e.g., sensor disconnected or short circuited)causes the following response:
All blowers are rotating at full specified speed
Alarm occurs, red LED is lit flashing.
The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. after the failure occurs.
11.4.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
At least one blower fails
Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited
The controller is faulty
Temperature exceeds 70� C
Temperature drops below -60� C (sensor failure).
The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds. after the failure occurs.
11.4.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side):
The red LED is lit flashing in case of a temperature/temperature sensor
alarm
The red LED is lit continuously in case of a fan alarm.
11.4.5 Test Port
The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator(variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operationdepending on the temperature.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 659 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.4.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of HEX5.
Air Outlet
Air Intlet
Water Outlet
Door Side
DC and AlarmConnector
Test Connector
EquipmentLabels
Grill Guard
Rear Side
Air Outlet
Air Intlet
Figure 356: HEX5 Appearance
11.4.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX5 connectors.
Connector Type Description
DC and AlarmConnector
9-pin Sub-Dmale
48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A) Alarmout.
Test Connector 9-pin Sub-Dfemale
Connection of external temperaturesimulator.
Table 109: HEX5 Connectors
660 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.4.8 Mechanical Parameters
The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX5.
Parameter HEX5
Height (mm) 800
Width (mm) 450
Depth (mm) 130
Weight (kg) 13
Table 110: HEX5 Mechanical Parameters
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 661 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.5 HEX8/HEX9HEX8 and HEX9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets. Fresh air coolingis not allowed in the outdoor BTSs. Therefore the airflow within the cabinets isisolated from the outside environment.
HEX9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door, HEX8 is mounted on theinside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof HEX8 and HEX9.
Cool Air Outlet
Warm Air Inlet
HEX2
Air Outlet
Air Inlet
Subrack
FANU
HEX8/9
Door
Inner Fan
Outer Fan
Heat Sink Cassette
Outer Compartment
Inner Compartment
Temperature Sensor
Figure 357: HEX8/HEX9 Main Components
HEX8 and HEX9 are boxes which are divided into inner and outer circuits by aheat sink cassette (core). The core consists of thermal conductive materialallowing heat exchange between both circuits. The air is circulated by oneblower in each circuit. Warm air from inside the cabinet is drawn into the innercompartment by the inner fan. It is then blown past the heat sink cassette andreturned to the cabinet as cool air.
The heat gathered in the heat sink cassette is transferred to the outsideenvironment by the air stream in the outer compartment. The outside air isdrawn into the outer compartment by the outer fan.
662 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.5.1 Blower Rotation Control
The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The inner and outerblower are independent of each other. The control of blowers is an internalfunction of the heat exchanger.
When the internal temperature reaches 20� C, the inner fans switch on andoperate at minimum speed. When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, theouter fans switch on and also operate at minimum speed. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases for both the inner and outer fans.
After switch-on, the blower speed accelerates continuously up to the maximumspecified rotation. Then the speed is regulated down to the specified ramp.
11.5.2 Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is mounted in the heat exchanger at the air inletof the inner circuit.
Failure of the temperature sensor (e.g., sensor disconnected or short circuited)causes the following response:
All blowers are rotating at full specified speed
Alarm occurs, red LED is lit.
The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.5.3 Alarm
There is one alarm output per heat exchanger. An alarm is raised when:
At least one blower fails
Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited
The controller is faulty
Temperature exceeds 70� C
Temperature drops below -60� C (sensor failure).
The response can be delayed up to 5 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.5.4 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.5.5 Test Port
The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator(variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operationdepending on the temperature.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 663 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.5.6 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the HEX8/HEX9.Note that the HEX8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side
Air Outlet*
Fan
Equipment Labels
DCand AlarmConnector
LED
WaterOutlet
Air Inlet*
* Grid not necessary
Fan
Air Inlet(Protected with grid)
Test Connector
Front Side
Air Outlet(Protected with gridif necessary)
Guiding tubesfor fixing bolts
Figure 358: HEX8/HEX9 Appearance
11.5.7 Connectors
The following table describes the HEX8/HEX9 connectors.
Connector Type Description
DC and AlarmConnector
9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A)Alarm out.
Test Connector 9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.
Table 111: HEX8/HEX9 Connectors
664 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.5.8 Mechanical Parameters
The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the HEX3/HEX4.
Parameter HEX8 HEX9
Height (mm) 1250 1250
Width (mm) 450 600
Depth (mm) 150 150
Weight (kg) 24 28
Table 112: HEX8/HEX9 Mechanical Parameters
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 665 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.6 DAC8/DAC9DAC8 and DAC9 are used in Multistandard BTS Evolution outdoor versions.They maintain the correct air environment within the cabinets using freshair cooling.
DAC9 is mounted on the inside of the MBO1E door, DAC8 is mounted on theinside of the MBOEE door. They cool the internal air by transferring heat tothe outside environment. The following figure shows the main componentsof DAC8 and DAC9.
Air Outlet
Air Inlet
DAC8/9
Door
Fan
Fan
Subrack
FANU FANU
Subrack
FANU
Subrack
FANU FANU
FANU
Air Outlet with Filter Matand Grid
Air Inlet withFilter Mat
Fresh AirChannel
Figure 359: DAC8/DAC9 Main Components
The DAC8 and DAC9 consists of metal boxes with an air inlet and an air outlet inthe front side as shown in Figure 359. In these cut-outs filter mats are mounted.
Compared to HEX system, where the air inside of the cabinet is separatedfrom ambient air, the DAC system uses fresh air to cool the equipment insideof the cabinet.
The ambient air is drawn by fans through the hydrophobic filter mat and blowninto the BTS through cut-outs directly below the subracks. There it arises to thetop of the BTS and leaves it by the air outlet. The air outlet is protected againstintrusion of water and insects by a filter mat and an additional fly screen.
666 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.6.1 Blower Rotation Control
The temperature-controlled regulation of blower rotation is contained in acontrol unit which is assembled inside an inner circuit. The control of blowers isan internal function of the direct air cooling module.
When the internal temperature reaches 30� C, the fans switch ON and operateat 1500 rpm speed. When the internal temperature reaches 35� C and is below55 � C the fan speed increases linearly up to 2500 rpm. As the temperaturerises further, fan speed increases up to maximum speed of 2900 rpm.
11.6.2 Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is mounted on the controller PBA.
Failure of the temperature sensor (e.g., sensor disconnected or short circuited)causes the following response:
All blowers are rotating at full specified speed
Alarm occurs, red LED is lit.
The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.6.3 Filter Mats
The inlet filter is a cassette consisting of a frame mounted on the door containinga filter mat. The filter mat is made of hydrophobic material but not gas proof.
The outlet fleece filter mat is additional protected by a fly screen.
11.6.4 Alarm
There is one alarm output per cooling unit. An alarm is raised when:
At least one blower fails
Temperature sensor/plug disconnected or short circuited
The controller is faulty
Temperature exceeds 70� C
Temperature drops below -60� C (sensor failure).
The response can be delayed up to 15 seconds after the failure occurs.
11.6.5 LED
An alarm indication is implemented by means of a visible red LED located onthe lid (inner circuit side).
The red LED is lit in case of an alarm.
11.6.6 Test Port
The test port allows the connection of an external temperature simulator(variable resistor) setting a temperature value to check the blower operationdepending on the temperature.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 667 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.6.7 RS232
The RS232 port allows the connection of an external terminal to readoutthe fan speed..
11.6.8 Appearance
The following figure shows the front and the rear views of the DAC8/DAC9.Note that the DAC8 and HEX9 only differ in width and weight.
Door Side Front Side
Fan
Fan
Air Outlet
Air Barrier
Air Outlet
Air Outlet
Air Outlet
Air Outlet with Filter Matand Grid
Air Inlet withFilter Mat
Equipment Labels
LED
DC and Alarm Connector
Test Connector
RS232
Figure 360: DAC8/DAC9 Appearance
668 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.6.9 Connectors
The following table describes the DAC8/DAC9 connectors.
Connector Type Description
DC and AlarmConnector
9-pin Sub-D male 48 VDC power in (fuse T6.3 A)Alarm out.
Temperature andTest Connector
9-pin Sub-D female Connection of externaltemperature simulator.
RS232 RJ45 For readout the fan speed.
Table 113: DAC8/DAC9 Connectors
11.6.10 Mechanical Parameters
The following table lists the mechanical parameters of the DAC8/DAC9.
Parameter DAC8 DAC9
Height (mm) 1229 1229
Width (mm) 449 600
Depth (mm) 150 150
Weight (kg) 18 22
Table 114: DAC8/DAC9 Mechanical Parameters
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 669 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.7 HEAT2HEAT2 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. Itswitches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.
HEAT2 is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the floor, the side wall orbeneath the HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the outdoor BTS A9100.The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
X1 X2 (Variant AA only)
10
External Thermostat
Heater
Fan
Internal Thermostat
AA Variant: 600 W
CA Variant: 950 W
Figure 361: HEAT2 Circuit Schematic
The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there it is routedto the heater and fan (via connector X2 in case of variant AA). If, in case ofvariant AA, another HEAT2 is fitted, its AC supply is provided by the socketwhich is part of connector X2.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater and fan. Thefan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 90� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements.
670 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.7.1 Appearance
The HEAT2 has two variants: variant AA and variant CA. Each variant isshown separately.
11.7.1.1 Variant AAThe following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT2 variant AA.
Heater Assembly
Fan
Temperature Adjuster
External Thermostat
Connector X2
Connector X1
Side View
Top View
Grille
Screw
Figure 362: HEAT2 Variant AA Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 671 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.7.1.2 Variant CAThe following figure shows the side and top view of HEAT2 variant CA.
Thermostat
GridConnector X1
Heater
Fan
(Thermostat fixed at 10 oC with safety varnish)
Angle
Connection Area
Label High Voltage DIN/ISO 3864 (Size 20 mm)
Equipment Labels
Connection Cable L = 800 m
Side View
Top View
Figure 363: HEAT2 Variant CA
11.7.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT2 connectors.
Connector Description
X1 Provides the 230 VAC input.
X2 (Variant AAonly)
Provides the 230 VAC source for a second, optionalHEAT2.
Table 115: HEAT2 Connectors
672 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.8 HEAT3HEAT3 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.
HEAT3 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of theCompact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure showsthe circuit schematic.
X1
10 °C
External Thermostat
Heater
Integral TemperatureLimiter
500 W
L
PE
N
Figure 364: HEAT3 Circuit Schematic
The 230 VAC supply enters HEAT3 at connector X1.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the AC supply to the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 70� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the AC circuit to the heater elements.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 673 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.8.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT3.
Connector X1
Labels
Heating Mat
Heater Plate
Figure 365: HEAT3 Appearance
11.8.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT3 connectors.
Connector Description
X1 Provides the 230 VAC input.
Table 116: HEAT3 Connectors
674 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.9 HEAT4HEAT4 is an electrical air heater used in outdoor BTS Compact versions.It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature falls belowa predefined value.
HEAT4 is an electrical assembly fitted between the bottom plate of theCompact BTS Outdoor and the lowest subrack. The following figure showsthe circuit schematic.
Figure 366: HEAT4 Circuit Schematic
The -48 VDC supply enters HEAT4 at power connector.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal thermostat. If the temperature of theheater assembly exceeds 70� C, the thermostat within the heater assemblyopens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 675 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.9.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEAT4.
Heater Plate
Heating Mat
Labels
PowerConnector
Figure 367: HEAT4 Appearance
11.9.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEAT4 connectors.
Connector Description
Power connector Provides the -48 VDC input.
Table 117: HEAT4 Connectors
676 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
11 Temperature Control
11.10 HEATDCHEAT DC is an electrical air heater used in DC A9100 MBS GSM outdoorversions. It switches on automatically when the internal air temperature fallsbelow + 10� C.
HEAT DC is an electro-mechanical assembly fitted to the side wall or beneaththe HEX4 (MBO1) of each compartment in the DC A9100 MBS GSM outdoor.The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
Figure 368: HEAT DC Circuit Schematic
The - 48 VDC supply enters HEAT2 at connector X1. From there it is routed tothe heater and fan.
The external thermostat closes a switch when the temperature is below 10� C.The switch completes the circuit for the DC supply to the heater and fan. Thefan blows air through the heating elements of the heater.
The heater is protected by an internal temperature limiter in case of fan failure.If the temperature of the heater assembly exceeds 110� C, the temperaturelimiter opens a switch. This breaks the DC circuit to the heater elements.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 677 / 910
11 Temperature Control
11.10.1 Appearance
The following figure shows the side and top views of HEATDC.
Grid
Heater
Air
flow
Fan
Angle
Label Hot SurfaceDIN/ISO 3864(Size 20 mm)
Connector X1
Side View
Top View
Figure 369: HEATDC Appearance
11.10.2 Connectors
The following table describes the HEATDC connectors.
Connector Description
X1 Provides the - 48 VDC input.
Table 118: HEATDC Connectors
678 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The sections are supported with diagrams, where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingthe connectors and controls.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 679 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.1 ACIBThe ACIB is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It distributes its AC inputto five output connectors. The five output connectors provide the AC powersource for the PM08s.
The ACIB is housed in the SRACDC. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s.If the temperature in the ACIB falls below a predefined level, the AC supplyto the PM08s is automatically switched off. The following figure shows thecircuit schematic.
PE
N
L1/L3
PE
N
L1/L3
PE
N
L1/L2
PE
N
L1/L2
PE
N
L1/L1
Relay
L1/L1
L1/L2
L1/L3
N
PE
Temperature Sensor
Input1 /3
−20
Output1 /3
PM08/1
PM08/2
PM08/3
PM08/4
PM08/5
PE = Permanent Earth
Figure 370: ACIB Circuit Schematic
The ACIB input connector is connected to the ACSB where provision is madefor 1Ø or 3Ø operation.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
230 VAC 1Ø - each of the three live wires in the input connector receives thesame, single phase L1. The PM08s connected to the output connectors
also receive the phase L1.
400 VAC 3Ø - each of the three live wires in the input connector receivesa different phase, L1, L2 or L3. The PM08s connected to the output
connectors share the L1, L2 and L3 phases, as shown in the above figure.
The AC input is connected to the five AC outputs via a relay which is controlledby a temperature sensor. When the temperature is above -20� C, the AC inputis connected to the five AC output connectors.
If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC supply to the PM08s. This means that the 0/ -48 VDC supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2s.
When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, therelay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. The HEAT2s prevent theinternal cabinet temperature from falling to -20� C thereafter.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMP switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 becomes operational.
680 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.1.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the ACIB.
AC In
AC Out
5
4
3
2 1
Equipment Labels
Warning Label
Camloc Fastener
Figure 371: ACIB Front Panel
12.1.2 Connectors
The following table describes the ACIB front panel connectors.
Connector Description
AC In Provides a 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø input.
AC Out 1- 5 Provides 230 VAC 1Ø outputs for the five PM08s.
Table 119: ACIB Front Panel Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 681 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.2 LPFCThe LPFC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor cabinets.
Its functions are:
Connection of AC mains to the BTS
Lightning protection of the AC mains In
Line filtering.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFC.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
L
N
PE
L
N
PE
AC in Terminals
Metal Box
Bolt M6
Figure 372: LPFC Block Diagram
The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1 Ø.
The LPFC is mounted above the cables entry compartment. The cover of theLPFC has a window which allows checking the lightning protection moduleswithout removing the cover.
682 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the LPFC top view.
AC Out to ACUC
AC Mains In
Bolt M8for GND
Handle
Recess in cover
EquipmentLabels
LPFC Cover
Figure 373: LPFC Top View
12.3 LPFMTThe LPFMT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical cabinets.
Its functions are:
Connection of AC mains to the BTS
Lightning protection of the AC mains In
Line filtering.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFMT.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
L
N
PE
L
N
PE
AC in Terminals
Metal Box
Bolt M6
Figure 374: LPFMT Block Diagram
The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet is supplied with 230 VAC 1phase.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 683 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The LPFMT is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1T cabinet. The coverof the LPFMT has a window which allows checking the lightning protectionmodules without removing the cover.
The following figure shows the LPFMT top view.
Bolt M6for GND
LIN
DIC
AT
ION
LIG
HT
N. P
RO
TE
CT
.
ACout to ACMUTLPFCTCover
Recessin cover
Information,Equipmentand WarningLables
Figure 375: LPFMT Top View
12.4 LPFMThe LPFM is used in multistandard BTS outdoor cabinets.
Its functions are:
Connection of AC mains to the BTS
Lightning protection of the AC mains In
Line filtering.
The following figure shows the block diagram of the LPFM.
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
L3
L2
L1
N
PE
L3
L2
L1
N
PE
AC in Terminals
Metal Box
Bolt M6
Figure 376: LPFM Block Diagram
The multistandard BTS outdoor cabinet can be supplied with 230 VAC 1Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
230 VAC 1 Ø - the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge, i.e.,each of the three live wires receives the same, single phase L1.
684 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
400 VAC 3 Ø - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives adifferent phase, L1, L2 or L3.
The LPFM is mounted on the left upper side of the MBO1 cabinet. The coverof the LPFM has a window which allows checking the lightning protectionmodules without removing the cover.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 685 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the LPFM top view.
Bolt M6for GND
L1
L2
L3
IND
ICA
TIO
N L
IGH
TN
. PR
OT
EC
T.
ACout to ACMULPFMCover
Recessin cover
Information,Equipmentand WarningLables
Figure 377: LPFM Top View
12.5 LPFUThe LPFU is used in outdoor BTS A9100 configurations.
Its functions are:
Connection of AC mains to the BTS
Lightning protection of the AC mains In
Line filtering.
The following figure shows the block diagram of version AA (three phases).
Lightning Protectors
AC Line Filter
L3
L2
L1
N
PE
L3
L2
L1
N
PE
AC in Terminals
Metal Box
Bolt M6
Figure 378: LPFU Version AA, Block Diagram
The outdoor BTS can be supplied with 230 VAC 1 Ø or 400 VAC 3Ø.
If the cabinet AC supply is:
230 VAC 1 Ø - the three AC In terminals are connected by a bridge, i.e.,
each of the three live wires receives the same, single phase L1
400 VAC 3 Ø - each of the three live wires at the AC In terminals receives a
different phase, L1, L2 or L3.
686 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the LPFU top view with its cover removed.
AC Filter3 phases
Glands
PG29 PG16
AC in Terminals
Lightning Protectors
Bolt M6
L1
L2
L3
N
3
2
1
N
PE
Figure 379: LPFU Version AA, Top View (with Cover Removed)
12.6 ACDUEThe AC Distribution Unit is used for MBO1E cabinets.
The ACDUE contains:
AC cable access in bottom inside the Filter/OVP part
3-phase input (L1, L2, L3, N, PE)
AC line filtering
Surge protectors
Overcurrent protection devices
Thermostat.
The ACDUE box is divided in two parts:
Filter and OVP function in bottom
AC-distribution and MCB above.
12.6.1 Technical Charateristics
Parameter ACDUE
Line filtering, rated current 3 x 12 A
Line filtering, leakage current Max. 4 mA/phase at 230 V
Line filteri damping 30 db at 1 MHz, 70 dB at 10 MHz to1 GHz
Overcurrent protection devices 4 x 16 A (3 for rectifiers, 1 for heaters)
1 x 10 A (for light and service socket)
AC power switch thermostat Closed at temperature above -20� C,open below -20� C, hysteresis max.10 K
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 687 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.6.2 ACDUE Views
Figure 380: ACDUE Views
12.7 ACMUThe ACMU is used in multistandard BTS outdoor configurations.
Its functions are:
Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioning
and Service Lights (with AC power sockets)
Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.
The following figure shows the block diagram.
L1
L2
L3
L2
L3
to PM12/1
to PM12/2
to PM12/3
to Heat2/Airc.
to Service Light and AC Power Socket
PE
Circuit Breakers
Temperature Sensor
N
L1
L2
L3
−20
distributed toall modules
N
distributed toall modules
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
N
PE
AC Mains In
3 PhaseAC−Mains−Connection
K1
Figure 381: ACMU Block Diagram
688 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. Whenthe temperature is above -20� C, the AC input is connected to the three ACoutput connectors.
If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. This means that the 0/ -48 V supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2.
When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, therelay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. The HEAT2s prevent theinternal cabinet temperature from falling to -20� C thereafter.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 become operational.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 689 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the ACMU front panel.
Warning Label
F4F5 F3 F2 F1
BTS HEATING SERVICE + LIGHTL2 L3L1
Warning Label
Equipment Label
Figure 382: ACMU Front Panel
12.8 ACMUTThe ACMUT is used in multistandard BTS outdoor tropical configurations.
Its functions are:
Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters and air conditioning
Switching the AC line to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.
The following figure shows the block diagram.
Lup to three PM12/1
PE
Circuit Breaker
N
L
distributed toall modules
distributed toall modules
F5
N
PE
AC Mains In
1 PhaseAC−Mains−Connection
Figure 383: ACMUT Block Diagram
The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters.
The following figure shows the ACMUT front panel.
L1
F5
WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COMPLETE SYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC MAINS
AND BATTERY BREAKER
Figure 384: ACMUT Front Panel
12.9 ACSUThe ACSU is used in outdoor BTS A9100 configurations.
Its functions are:
690 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioningand Service Lights (with AC power sockets)
Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.
The following figure shows the block diagram for CODI/CODE/CPT2.
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
to PM12/1
to PM12/2
to PM12/3
to Heat2/Airc.
to Heat2/Airc.
to Heat2/Airc.
to Service Light and AC Power Socket
PE
Circuit Breakers
Temperature Sensor
N
L1
L2
L3
−20
distributed to all modules
distributed to all modules
AC Mains In
3 PhaseAC−Mains−Connection
PE
N
Figure 385: CODI/CODE/CPT2, ASCU Block Diagram
The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the three AC/DCconverters via a relay which is controlled by a temperature sensor. When thetemperature is above -20� C, the AC input is connected to the two or three ACoutput connectors.
If the temperature is below -20� C when the BTS A9100 is first switched on,there is no AC Supply to the PM12s. This means that the 0/ -48 V supplyis not available and the BTS A9100 cannot operate. However, AC poweris available to the HEAT2.
When the HEAT2s raise the internal cabinet temperature above -20� C, therelay is activated and the DC supplies are produced. The HEAT2s prevent theinternal cabinet temperature from falling to -20� C thereafter.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the BTS A9100 become operational.
The following figure shows the ACSU front panel of CODI/CODE/CPT2.
F6F7 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
L2L1 L3 L1 L2 L3
BTS HEATING SERVICE + LIGHTWarning Label
Figure 386: ACSU Front Panel CODI/CODE/CPT2
12.10 ACUCThe ACUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor (CBO) configurations.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 691 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
Its functions are:
Distribution of the AC input to AC/DC converters, heaters/air conditioning
and AC power socket
Switching the AC lines to the connected modules by using circuit breakers.
The following figure shows the block diagram.
1
X1
2
X2
3
X3
7
X7
8
X8
9
X9
4
X4
5
X5
6
X6
L PE N L PEN
X21
1
2
F4
PE
N L
LNPE F1 F2 F3
L
L
N
N
V=10 C
LPEN LPEN
TO PM12
LPEN
TO HEAT3
PE
N
L
AC Mains In1 PhaseAC MainsConnection
Figure 387: ACUC Block Diagram
The AC input controlled by circuit breakers is connected to the two AC/DCconverters. From -33� C the AC power is applied to the PM12 modules, FANunits and to HEAT3.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 0� C, the SUMA switches onthe telecommunications modules and the CBO become operational.
When the internal cabinet temperature rises above 10� C, the HEAT3 isswitched off.
692 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the ACUC front panel.
WARNING: TO ISOLATE THE COPMPLETESYSTEM SWITCH OFF THE AC−MAINS AND BATTERY BREAKER
HEATINGF2
BTSF1
RCB SERVICEF3
SERVICE SOCKETS1
Figure 388: ACUC Front Panel
12.11 APODThe APOD is used in indoor BTS A9100 versions that use an AC power supply.It distributes its AC input to five output connectors. The five output connectorsprovide the AC power source for the PM08s. The DC output from the PM08s isthen distributed to the subracks and other equipment by the APOD.
The APOD is housed in the ASIB. It distributes 230 VAC to the five PM08s. TheDC supply produced by the PM08s is connected to the remaining modulesin the cabinet via the circuit breakers located on the APOD, as shown inthe following figure.
APOD
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1
DC Bus
DC Circuit Breakers
6
5
4
3
2
1
L
N
PE
Input 1
AC Circuit Breaker
INT
Subrack 3
Subrack 4
Subrack 2
EXT
Subrack 1
PE
−48 VDC
0 VDC
Figure 389: APOD Circuit Schematic
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 693 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.11.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the APOD.
AC Output Cables to PM08s
5
4
3
2
1
Equipment Labels
Warning Label
Camloc Fastener
DC Output Circuit Breakers AC Input
Circuit Breaker
Figure 390: APOD Front Panel
12.11.2 Connectors
The following table describes the APOD front panel connectors.
Connector Description
AC Input AC Input Circuit Breaker.
INT, SR1, SR2, SR3, SR4, EXT DC Output Circuit Breakers.
AC Out 1- 5 Provides 230 VAC 1Ø outputs for the fivePM08s.
Table 120: APOD Front Panel Connectors
694 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.12 PM08PM08 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It converts the AC input voltageto provide DC power for the cabinet equipment.
12.12.1 PM08 Functional Description
PM08 is housed in the SRACDC. It is an 800 W AC/DC power supply modulewhich converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom. Five PM08s (PM08/1 - PM08/5) arefitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy, with load sharing. The followingfigure shows the arrangement.
ACIB
PM08/5 PM08/4 PM08/3 PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
DC Bus
Control
Alarms
AC Input
−48 VDC
0 VDC
Figure 391: PM08 Load-Sharing
The BCU1 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM08s.
Control PM08 outputs are connected to the SRACDCbackplane DC Bus and monitored by BCU1. Whenthe output voltage changes because of a changedload, the PM08s automatically compensate for thechange.
BCU1 controls the overall output voltage of thePM08s. The nominal -48 V output is typically-54.5 V at 20� C. During battery charging, BCU1changes the output voltage within the range -52 Vto -57 V. During battery testing, the output voltagecan be reduced to -44 V.
The DC Bus provides DC power to the DCDP andthe BU41, via the BACO.
Alarm Collection The PM08 raises alarms for both Mains powerfailure and power module failure.
The alarm is collected by the BCU1. For moreinformation on alarms, refer to PM08 ElectricalCharacteristics (Section 12.12.2).
Table 121: BCU1 Functions for PM08
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 695 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.12.2 PM08 Electrical Characteristics
The electrical characteristics for the PM08 are described in terms of input andoutput voltages, fuses, output current and protection and alarms.
12.12.2.1 Input VoltageThe following table shows the PM08 input voltage parameters.
Input Parameter
Input voltage 220 VAC to 230 VAC (±15 %)
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Number of phases Single phase
Table 122: PM08 Input Voltage Parameters
Note: The PM08 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.
12.12.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM08 are protected by fast acting10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on themodule’s front panel.
12.12.2.3 Output VoltageThe following table shows the PM08 output voltage parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal output voltage at 20o C. -54.5 VDC
Output voltage range. -50 VDC to -58 VDC
Line regulation. U in ±15 %
Dynamic load regulation. 5 % of output voltage
Static load regulation. 0.2 %
Dynamic response. 2 ms
Voltage ripple. < 400 mV p-p
Table 123: PM08 Output Voltage Parameters
Note: If the BCU1 fails or is not fitted, the PM08 produces an output of -52 VDC(±0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.
696 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.12.2.4 Output CurrentThe following table shows the PM08 output current parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal I out at -54.6 VDC 15 A
Minimum I out 0 A
Maximum I out 19 A
Current limitation (I max). 16 A to 19 A
Derating. 3 % of I out (at > 60 oC)
Shared load current. <10 % of I out (of single module).
Table 124: PM08 Output Current Parameters
12.12.2.5 Protection and AlarmsThe PM08’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down thePM08 for:
Mains power failure
Under voltage: output voltage below -40.5 VDC
Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC
Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)
Over temperature: PM08 heat sink temperature in range + 85� C to + 100� C.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 697 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.12.3 PM08 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the PM08.
Handle
Status LED
AC In Connector
Camloc Fastener
Fuses
Labels
Figure 392: PM08 Front Panel
12.12.3.1 PM08 LEDsThe PM08 has a single LED on its front panel. The type of LED fitted dependson the part number of the PM08. The following table shows the PM08 partnumbers and associated LED states.
PM08 Part Number LED State Description
3BK 06783 BAAA Green Normal operating conditions.
Off Fault.
3BK 06783 BBAA Green Normal operating conditions.
Orange Power limitation mode (maximum powerof 800 W reached).
Red Fault.
Table 125: PM08 LED States
12.12.3.2 ConnectorsThe only PM08 front panel connector is AC In, an IEC 320 connector for codedconditions, where the 230 VAC input cable from the ACIB is plugged in.
698 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.13 PM11The PM11 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions where the ACSR isemployed. PM11 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for thecabinet equipment.
12.13.1 PM11 Functional Description
The PM11 is housed in the ACSR. It is an 1100 W AC/DC power supplymodule which converts 230 VAC to 0/ -48 VDC nom. Four PM11s (PM11/1 -PM11/4) are fitted in parallel to provide n + 1 redundancy, with load sharing.The following figure shows the arrangement.
ACSBAC Input
PM11/4 PM11/3 PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2
DC Bus
AlarmsControl
−48 VDC
0 VDC
Figure 393: PM11 Load-Sharing
The BCU2 performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM11s.
Control PM11 outputs are connected to the ACSR backplane DC Bus andmonitored by the BCU2. When the output voltage changes because ofa changed load, the PM11s automatically compensate for the change.
The BCU2 controls the overall output voltage of the PM11s. Thenominal -48 V output is typically -54.5 V at 20� C. During batterycharging, the BCU2 changes the output voltage within the range -52V to -57 V. During battery testing, the output voltage can be reducedto -44 V.
The DC Bus provides DC power to the BOBU and the BU41 or BU100,via the BAC2.
Alarm Collection The PM11 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and powermodule failure. The alarm is collected by the BCU2.
For more information on alarms, refer to PM11 Electrical Characteristics(Section 12.13.2).
Table 126: BCU2 Functions for PM11
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 699 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.13.2 PM11 Electrical Characteristics
The electrical characteristics of the PM11 are described in terms of input andoutput voltages, fuses, output current, and protection and alarms.
12.13.2.1 Input VoltageThe following table shows the PM11 input voltage parameters.
Input Parameter
Input voltage 220 VAC to 230 VAC (±15 %)
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Number of phases Single phase
Table 127: PM11 Input Voltage Parameters
Note: The PM11 can be operated at 110 VAC if the output power is limited to 500 W.
12.13.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM11 are protected by fast acting10 A fuses. The fuses are accessed by removing protective caps on themodule’s front panel.
12.13.2.3 Output VoltageThe following table shows the PM11 output voltage parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal output voltage at 20o C. -54.6 VDC
Output voltage range. -50 VDC to -57 VDC
Line regulation. U in ±15 %
Dynamic load regulation. 5 % of output voltage
Static load regulation. 0.2 %
Dynamic response. 2 ms
Voltage ripple. < 400 mV p-p
Table 128: PM11 Output Voltage Parameters
Note: If the BCU2 fails or is not fitted, the PM11 produces an output of -52 VDC(±0.25 V). If batteries are not fitted, the default voltage is produced at all times.
700 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.13.2.4 Output CurrentThe following table shows the PM11 output current parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal I out at -54.6 VDC 20 A
Minimum I out 0 A
Maximum I out 24 A
Current limitation (I max) 21 A to 24 A
Derating 3 % of I out (at > 60 oC)
Shared load current <10 % of I out (of single module)
Table 129: PM11 Output Current Parameters
12.13.2.5 Protection and AlarmsThe PM11’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down thePM11 for:
Mains power failure
Under voltage: output voltage below -40.5 VDC
Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC
Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)
Over temperature: PM11 heat sink temperature in range + 85� C to + 100� C.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 701 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.13.3 PM11 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the PM11.
Handle
Status LED
Camloc Fastener
Fuses
Labels
Figure 394: PM11 Front Panel
12.13.4 PM11 LED
The PM11 has a single LED on its front panel. The following table showsthe LED states.
LEDState Description
Green Normal operating conditions.
Off Fault.
Table 130: PM11 LED States
702 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.14 PM12The PM12 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinetequipment. The PM12 is used in indoor and outdoor BTS A9100 versionswhere the SUMA is employed.
12.14.1 PM12 Functional Description
Up to three PM12s and an ADAM or up to four PM12s and an ADAM4 areput together in one-half or two-thirds of a STASR (see Figure 408 or 414).The ADAM/ADAM4 is connected to the DC distribution of the BTS. EachPM12 is controlled from the OMU (part of SUMA) via the BCB. Batteriesfitted to a BTS have a temperature sensor which is controlled by the RIBAT(see RIBAT (Section 12.29)) or the OUTC (see Outdoor Control BoardCPT2/MBO1/MBO1DC/MBO1T/MBO1E/MBO2/MBO2DC/ MBO2E/CBO(Section 4.5). The OMU reads the stored battery size/charge current and thetemperature out of the RIBAT or OUTC and sets the PM12s according tothese values.
PM12 is an AC/DC power supply module which converts 230 VAC to 0/-48 VDCnom. The output power of the PM12 module depends on the input voltagerange and temperature range as listed in the following table.
Output Power Input Voltage Temperature
900W* 150V...187V -25�C...70�C
1200W 187V...264V -25�C...70�C
900W* 264V...280V -25�C...70�C
100W 150V...280V -40�C...-25�C
* : Available only on PM12 module version 3BK25024 ABxx
Table 131: PM12 Output Power Values
Two to four PM12s (PM12/1 - PM12/4) are fitted in parallel with load sharing(see Figure 246 or MBO1/MBO2 AC/DC Power Supply System (247))controlled by a local sharing bus.
The OMU performs the functions listed in the following table for the PM12s.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 703 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
Control PM12 outputs are connected via ADAM/ADAM4 to the STASRbackplane DC Bus and monitored by the OMU. When the outputvoltage changes because of a changed load, the PM12s automaticallycompensate for the change.
OMU controls the overall output voltage of the PM12s. Default outputvoltage without OMU control is 52.2V. Depending on battery cellvoltage set in RIBAT/OUTC, OMU sets the output voltage of PM12in range 52.2-57V.
The DC Bus provides DC power to the:
BOBU/BOMU/BOSU
BU41, BU100 or BU101, via the ADAM/ADAM4.
Alarm Collection The PM12 raises alarms for both Mains power failure and powermodule failure. The alarm is collected by the OMU.
For more information on alarms, refer to PM12 Electrical Characteristics(Section 12.14.2).
Table 132: OMU Functions for PM12
704 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.14.2 PM12 Electrical Characteristics
The electrical characteristics of the PM12 are described in terms of input andoutput voltage, fuses, output current, and protections and alarms.
12.14.2.1 Input VoltageThe following table shows the PM12 input voltage parameters.
Input Parameter
Nominal input voltage 230/ 240 VAC
Input voltage range 187 VAC to 264 VAC
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Number of phases Single phase
Table 133: PM12 Input Voltage Parameters
12.14.2.2 FusesBoth the live and neutral inputs of the PM12 are protected by fast acting 10 Afuses. The fuses are accessed by removing the cover of the module.
12.14.2.3 Output VoltageThe following table shows the PM12 output voltage parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal output voltage at 20o C -54.5 VDC (in case of Ucell=2.27V)
Output voltage range -50 VDC to -57 VDC
Line regulation U in ±15 %
Dynamic load regulation 5 % of output voltage
Static load regulation 0.2 %
Dynamic response 2 ms
Voltage ripple < 400 mV p-p
Table 134: PM12 Output Voltage Parameters
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 705 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.14.2.4 Output CurrentThe following table shows the PM12 output current parameters.
Output Parameter
Nominal I out at -54.6 VDC 20 A
Minimum I out 0 A
Maximum I out 24 A
Current limitation (I max) 21 A to 24 A
Derating 3 % of I out (at > 60� C)
Shared load current <10 % of I out (of single module)
Table 135: PM12 Output Current Parameters
12.14.2.5 Protection and AlarmsThe PM12’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down thePM12 for:
Mains power failure
Under voltage: output voltage below -40.5 VDC
Over voltage: output voltage exceeds -60 VDC
Over current: output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)
Over temperature: PM12 heat sink temperature in range + 85� C to + 100� C.
706 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.14.3 PM12 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the PM12.
Handle
Status LED
AC In Connector
Camloc Fastener
Equipment Labels
ON
Figure 395: PM12 Front Panel
12.14.4 PM12 LED
The PM12 has a single LED on its front panel. The following table showsthe LED states.
LEDState Description
Green Normal operating conditions.
Off Fault.
Table 136: PM12 LED States
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 707 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.15 PM18The PM18 converts the AC input voltage to provide DC power for the cabinetequipment. PM18 are used in outdoor BTS or MBS.
The consists of the subrack PM18SR which contains a control unit PM18C, upto 3 rectifier PM18R and a temperature sensor.
Each rectifier has an output power of 1800 W. The PM18C controls the thepower modules and handles the alarm reporting to the SUMU via XBCB andRS232. The battery management is done by the PM18C internally of the powersupply without any control functions of the SUMA.
12.15.1 Performance Characteristics
12.15.1.1 Input Voltage ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 input voltage parameters.
Input PM18
Nominal input voltage 230 VAC
Input voltage range 150 VAC to 280 VAC
Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Number of phases Single or three phase
12.15.1.2 Output Voltage ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 output voltage parameters.
Output PM18
Nominal output voltage at 20o C -52.5 VDC … -54VDC
Output voltage range -42 … -57 VDC
Line regulation +/-10 %
Dynamic load regulation +/-10 %
Dynamic response 50 ms
Voltage ripple < 200 mV p-p
708 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.15.1.3 Output Power ParametersThe following table shows the PM18 output power parameters.
Output PM18 per module
Nominal output voltage UN 52.5 - 54 V
Output voltage range UR 48 - 57 V
Nominal power at UR 1800 W
Maximum I out 40 A (limitation mode)
Output power de-rating 2 % of I out/ K (at > 55�C)
12.15.2 LEDs
12.15.2.1 PM18SRThe PM18SR from Cherokee has a single LED on it.
LED Color State Description
ON Battery connectedLVD (Low VoltageDisconnection)
Green
OFF Battery not connected
12.15.2.2 PM18C LEDsThe PM18C from Cherokee has a single LED on its front panel.
The following table shows the LED states for the Cherokee PM18C.
LED Color State Description
ON Normal operational conditions.Monitoring OK
Blinking Monitoring start-up
ON Green
OFF Monitoring fail
The PM18C from H+S has two LEDs on its front panel.
The following table shows the LED states for the H+S PM18C.
LED Color Status Description
ON Normal operational conditionsON Green
OFF Module not operational
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 709 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
LED Color Status Description
ON FaultAlarm Red
OFF Normal operational conditions
12.15.2.3 PM18R LEDsThe Cherokee PM18R has four LEDs on its front panel.
The following table shows the LED states.
LED Color State Description
ON AC voltage OKAC OK Green
OFF Module not operational
ON DC voltage OKDC OK Green
OFF Module not operational
ON Output overvoltageOVP Red
OFF Normal operational conditions
ON Excessive temperatureOTP Red
OFF Normal operational conditions
The H+S PM18R has two LEDs on its front panel.
The following table shows the LED states.
LED Color State Description
ON Normal operational conditionsON Green
OFF Module not operational
ON FaultFault Red
OFF Normal operational conditions
710 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.15.3 Fuses
Both the live and neutral inputs of the PM18 are protected by fuses.
PM Fuses
PM18 12.5 A, medium delay
The fuses are accessed by removing the protective caps on the module’sfront panel.
12.15.4 Protection and Alarms
The PM’s internal protection feature raises an alarm and shuts down the PMfor the following reasons:
Mains power failure
Under-voltage: Output voltage below -40.5 VDC
Over-voltage: Output voltage exceeds -60 VDC
Over-current: Output voltage at 0 V (short circuit)
Over-temperature: PM12 heat sink temperature in the range of +85�C to
+100�C.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 711 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.15.5 PM18 Front View
The PM18 consists of the subrack PM18SR, which contains a control unitPM18C, up to 3 rectifiers PM18R and a temperature sensor.
Ala
rmO
N
Fault ON
Fault ON
Fault ON
XB
CB
RS
232
+T
emp.
Sen
sor
BatteryConnectors
LoadConnectors
MainsConnectors
Battery Breaker
Figure 396: PM18 H+S Front View
Battery Breaker
Batt −
Batt +
OUT −
OUT −
MainsConnectors
ON
AC DC OVP OTP AC DC OVP OTP AC DC OVP OTP
LVD
Figure 397: PM18 Cherokee Front View
712 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.15.6 Weight
PM Weight
PM18 Rectifier 3 kg / module
PM18 Subrack H+S 5 kg
PM18 Subrack Cherokee 7,5 kg
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 713 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.16 BCU1The BCU1 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It controls the DC outputvoltage and battery operation.
12.16.1 BCU1 Functional Description
The BCU1 is housed in the SRACDC. It performs control functions for thebatteries and some of the modules within the SRACDC. The following figureshows the arrangement. For simplicity, only two of the five PM08s are shown.
PM08/2 PM08/1 BCU1
ACRI
BACO
DC Bus
Shunt
AlarmsControl
Shunt
XBCB
BU41
−48 VDC
0 VDC
SRACDC
V
V
Figure 398: BCU1 Interconnections
The BCU1 connects to the PM08s, ACRI and BACO via the SRACDCbackplane. The voltages across the shunt resistors provide the BCU1 with ameasurement of the currents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groupswhich are referred to as branches. Each branch provides -48 VDC.
The functions performed are:
PM08 control
Alarm supervision
Battery management.
12.16.1.1 PM08 ControlThe BCU1 controls the PM08 output voltage and collects any alarms that areproduced. For more information on the PM08, refer to PM08 (Section 12.12).
714 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.16.1.2 Alarm SupervisionThe BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI.
The alarms are:
AC power failure
PM08 failure
Battery malfunction
BCU1 fault.
For more details of the alarm information, refer to BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarmsand Buttons (Section 12.16.2).
12.16.1.3 Battery ManagementThe BCU1 provides the battery management functions described in thefollowing table.
Deep DischargeProtection
During normal operation, a trickle charge currentensures that the batteries remain fully charged. Whenan AC mains failure occurs, the batteries supply DCpower to the BTS A9100. This discharges the batteriescausing their output voltage to fall.
If the output voltage falls below -42 VDC (±0.5 V), theBCU1/BCU2 disconnects the batteries by deactivatingrelays in the BACO/BAC2. This prevents deepdischarge of the batteries which shortens their life.
Charging CurrentRegulation
When charging the batteries, BCU1/BCU2 regulatesthe charging current so that battery life is notshortened. Charging current is adjusted by changingthe PM08/PM11 output voltages.
Charging current regulation:
Limits the maximum charging current, depending
on battery type and the number of battery branches.For more details of the charging current limits,
refer to BU41 (Section 12.24) and BU100 (Section12.25).
Adjusts the charging current to avoid overheating
the batteries. A temperature sensor, fitted to onebattery branch, is connected to BCU1 via the BACO.
The charging voltage, at an ambient temperature of20o C, is typically -54.6 VDC. If the temperature sensorfails, or is not fitted, the PM08/PM11 output voltage isset to -52 VDC.
Table 137: BCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 715 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.16.2 BCU1 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons
The different LEDs, the LCD, alarms, buttons and the special menu for theBCU1 are described separately below.
12.16.2.1 LEDsThe following table describes the front panel LEDs.
LED Color State Description
On Green On Normal state - BCU1 internal referencevoltage is available.
Off BCU1 faulty.
Bat. Red On Battery backup in operation (batterydischarging) or battery malfunction.
Off Normal state.
Test Yellow On n/a
Off Normal state.
Table 138: BCU1 LED Descriptions
12.16.2.2 LCDThe BCU1 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 399). Information isviewed using the front panel Function and Status buttons to scroll throughseveral display options.
The LCD provides two rows of alphanumeric information where each rowconsists of eight characters. The first row displays a message and the secondrow displays associated parameters or choices.
12.16.2.3 AlarmsThe BCU1 collects alarms and reports them to the ACRI. The alarms aredescribed in the following table.
Alarm Type Description
BCU1 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU1 hasfailed.
PM08 Failure The alarm information specifies the identity number ofthe failed module and the number of modules fitted.
AC Failure The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off.
Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed isreported. A battery malfunction occurs if:
The battery was automatically disconnectedbecause of a malfunction during charging
Deep discharge protection occurred.
Table 139: BCU1 Alarms
716 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.16.2.4 Function ButtonUsing the Function button, the following information can be displayed:
PM08s output voltage (Uload)
Battery voltage (Ubatt)
Output current (Iload)
Battery current (Ibatt), where:
+ = charging
- = discharging.
Battery temperature.
12.16.2.5 Status ButtonUsing the Status button, the following information can be displayed:
Alarm type, where the character:
V represents BCU1 failure
R represents a rectifier (PM08) failure
M represents an AC mains failure
B represents a battery malfunction.
Status of the PM08s, represented by a five-character sequence. Eachcharacter position represents a physical PM08 slot position, where:
N - slot not occupied
F - PM08 failed
Y - PM08 serviceable.
Battery type and number of battery branches.
12.16.2.6 Special MenuThe special menu is activated by pressing the Function and Status buttonssimultaneously, for five seconds. Selections in the special menu are then madeusing the Function and Status buttons individually.
Using the special menu, the following tasks can be performed:
Set battery type
Set number of branches in use.
Refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbookfor details of how to use the special menu facility.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 717 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.16.3 BCU1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU1.
Test
Function
Bat.
Control Buttons
LCD Display
Status LEDs
On
Camloc Fastener
Connector RS−232 (For factory service and test only.)
Handle
Status
RS−232
Labels
Figure 399: BCU1 Front Panel
12.17 BCU2The BCU2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions where the ACSR isemployed. It:
Controls the DC output voltage and battery operation
Collects alarms from the ACSR modules
Controls the ACSR FANUs
Provides the interface to the BTS Remote Inventory function.
12.17.1 BCU2 Functional Description
The BCU2 is housed in the ACSR. It performs control functions for the batteriesand some of the modules within the ACSR. The following figure shows thearrangement. For simplicity, only two of the four PM11s are shown.
ACSR
PM11/2 PM11/1 BCU2
BAC2
DC Bus
Shunt
AlarmsControl
Shunt
BU41 or BU100
−48 VDC
0 VDC
XBCB
V
V
Figure 400: BCU2 Interconnections
718 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
BCU2 connects to the PM11s and BAC2 via the ACSR backplane. Thevoltages across the shunt resistors provide BCU2 with a measurement of thecurrents drawn. BU41 contains up to two battery groups and BU100 containsone battery group. These battery groups are referred to as branches. Eachbranch provides -48 VDC.
The functions performed are:
PM11 control
Alarm supervision
Battery management
ACRI system functions.
12.17.1.1 PM11 ControlThe BCU2 controls the PM11 output voltage and collects any alarms that areproduced. For more information on the PM11, refer to PM11 (Section 12.13).
12.17.1.2 Alarm SupervisionThe BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP.
The alarms are:
AC power failure
PM11 failure
Battery malfunction
BCU2 fault.
For more details of the alarm information, refer to BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarmsand Buttons (Section 12.17.2).
12.17.1.3 Battery ManagementThe BCU2 provides the battery management functions described in TableBCU1/BCU2 Battery Management Functions (137).
12.17.1.4 ACRI System FunctionsThe ACRI system implemented on the BCU2 consists of the functions listed inthe following table.
ANPS The BCU2 contains an ANPS which converts the -48VDC input supply to the DC voltages required by theother components. For more information on the ANPS,refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5).
Modified FACB The BCU2 contains a modified FACB which reportsfan faults and controls the two FANUs that cool theACSR modules. For more information on the FACBand FANUs, refer to Fan Control (Section 11.1.2).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 719 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
XBCB The BCU2 contains a BCB ASIC that transfersinformation to the OMU in the SUMP via the XBCB.This consists of:
Alarms from modified FACB
Alarms internal to the BCU2
Alarms from the battery and PM11s
Remote Inventory information.
RI The BCU2 contains a Remote Inventory that is usedto store information about the module (part number,name, serial number, etc.). It consists of an EEPROMwhich is connected to the BCB ASIC.
Table 140: BCU2, ACRI System Functions
720 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.17.2 BCU2 LEDs, LCD, Alarms and Buttons
The different LEDs, the LCD, alarms, buttons and the special menu for theBCU2 are described separately below.
12.17.2.1 LEDsThe following table describes the front panel LEDs.
LED Color State Description
On Green ON Normal state - BCU2 internal referencevoltage is available.
OFF BCU2 faulty.
Bat. Red ON Battery backup in operation (batterydischarging) or battery malfunction.
OFF Normal state.
Test Yellow ON n/a
OFF Normal state.
Power ON ON When XBCB bus is connected andOK and internal power supply (48V/5Vconverter) is operational.
OFF Otherwise.
Table 141: BCU2 LED Description
12.17.2.2 LCDThe BCU2 has an LCD on its front panel (see Figure 401). Information isviewed using the front panel Function and Status buttons to scroll throughseveral display options.
The LCD provides one row of alphanumeric information where the row consistsof eight characters.
12.17.2.3 AlarmsThe BCU2 collects alarms and reports them to the OMU on the SUMP. Thealarms are described in the following table.
Alarm Type Description
BCU2 Fault The internal reference voltage used by the BCU2 hasfailed.
PM11 Failure The alarm information specifies the identity number ofthe failed module and the number of modules fitted.
AC Failure The AC mains supply has failed or been switched off.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 721 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
Alarm Type Description
Fan Status The status of the two FANUs located below the ACSR.
Battery Malfunction The identity number of the battery branch that failed isreported. A battery malfunction occurs if:
The battery was automatically disconnected
because of a malfunction during charging
Deep discharge protection occurred.
Table 142: BCU2 Alarms
12.17.2.4 Function ButtonUsing the Function button, the following information can be displayed:
PM11s output voltage (Uload)
Battery voltage (Ubatt)
Output current (Iload)
Battery current (Ibatt), where:
+ = charging
- = discharging.
Battery temperature.
722 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.17.2.5 Status ButtonUsing the Status button, the following information can be displayed:
Alarm type, where the character:
V represents BCU2 failure
R represents a rectifier (PM11) failure
M represents an AC mains failure
B represents a battery malfunction.
Status of the PM11s, represented by a four-character sequence. Each
character position represents a physical PM11 slot position, where:
N - slot not occupied
F - PM11 failed.
Y - PM11 serviceable.
Battery type and number of battery branches.
12.17.2.6 Special MenuThe special menu is activated by pressing the Function and Status buttonssimultaneously, for five seconds. Selections in the special menu are then madeusing the Function and Status buttons individually.
Using the special menu, the following tasks can be performed:
Set battery type
Set number of branches in use.
Refer to the Evolium BTS A9100/A9110 Corrective Maintenance Handbookfor details of how to use the special menu facility.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 723 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.17.3 BCU2 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BCU2.
Test
Function
Bat.
Control Buttons
LCD Display
Status LEDs
On
Camloc Fastener
XBCB Connector
Handle
Status
RS−232
Labels
Temperature Connector
Power ON
Figure 401: BCU2 Front Panel
12.17.4 Connectors
The following table describes the BCU2 front panel connectors.
Connector Description
Temperature For connection of temperature sensor fromBU41 or BU100.
XBCB Provides a:
+ 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS
Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and
Remote Inventory information to the OMU.
Table 143: BCU2 Front Panel Connectors
724 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.18 BACOThe BACO is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It interconnects thebatteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s.
The BACO contains:
Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries
Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries, controlled by the BCU1.
The BACO is housed in the SRACDC. It interconnects up to two batterybranches to the SRACDC backplane DC bus. The battery branches must be ofthe same type and capacity. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
Temperature Sensor
Circuit Breakers
BU41 BACO SRACDC Backplane
ShuntDC Bus
K1
K2
Branch 1
Branch 2
BATOUT+
BATOUT−
UBATT−
RELBATT1
RELBATT2
Sensor Signals
To BCU1
48 VDC nom.
48 VDC nom.
Figure 402: BACO Circuit Schematic
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during batterymaintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when thecurrent drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 provides battery power to the DC bus viarelays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomesexcessive, BCU1 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries. Relays K1and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2, respectively.During battery charging and discharging, the relays operate simultaneously.During battery testing, they operate independently.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 725 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.18.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BACO.
Camloc Fastener
Equipment Labels
Battery Connection Cables
Warning Label
Figure 403: BACO Front Panel
12.18.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BACO connectors.
Connector Description
X200 Connects battery temperature sensor signals toSRACDC backplane.
Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables for each branch.
Table 144: BACO Front Panel Connectors
726 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.19 BAC2The BAC2 is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It interconnects thebatteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s or PM11s.
The BAC2 contains:
Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the batteries
Relays for automatic isolation of the batteries, controlled by the BCU2.
The BAC2 is housed in the ACSR. It interconnects up to two battery branchesto the ACSR backplane DC bus. The battery branches must be of the sametype and capacity. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
Temperature Sensor
Circuit Breakers
BU41 or BU100
BAC2 ACSR Backplane
ShuntDC Bus
K1
K2
Branch 1
Branch 2 (BU41 only)
BATOUT+
BATOUT−
UBATT−
RELBATT1
RELBATT2
Sensor Signals
To BCU2
48 VDC nom.
48 VDC nom.
Figure 404: BAC2 Circuit Schematic
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the batteries during batterymaintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automatically when thecurrent drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to theDC bus via relays K1 and K2, and a shunt resistor. If the battery dischargebecomes excessive, BCU2 deactivates the relays to isolate the batteries.Relays K1 and K2 are controlled by the signals RELBATT1 and RELBATT2,respectively. During battery charging and discharging, the relays operatesimultaneously. During battery testing, they operate independently.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 727 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.19.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the BAC2.
Camloc Fastener
Equipment Labels
Battery Connection Cables
AC Mains and Battery Breakers
Figure 405: BAC2 Front Panel
12.19.2 Connectors
The following table describes the BAC2 connectors.
Connector Description
Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables for each branch.
Table 145: BAC2 Front Panel Connectors
728 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.20 ABACThe ABAC is used in indoor BTS A9100 versions that use an AC power supply.It interconnects the batteries and the DC outputs of the PM08s.
The ABAC contains:
Circuit breakers for manual isolation of the battery
Relays for automatic isolation of the battery, controlled by the BCU1.
The ABAC is housed in the ASIB. It interconnects a maximum of one batterybranch to the ASIB backplane DC bus. The battery branch can be BU41 orBU100. The following figure shows the circuit schematic.
Temperature Sensor
Circuit Breakers
BU41 or BU100
ABAC ASIB Backplane
ShuntDC Bus
K1
Branch 1
BATOUT+
BATOUT−
UBATT−
RELBATT1
Sensor Signals
To BCU1
48 VDC nom.
Figure 406: ABAC Circuit Schematic
Circuit breakers are provided for manual isolation of the battery branch duringbattery maintenance. When in use, the circuit breakers trip automaticallywhen the current drawn exceeds 60 A.
During an AC mains failure, BU41 or BU100 provides battery power to the DCbus via relay K1, and a shunt resistor. If the battery discharge becomesexcessive, the BCU1 deactivates the relay to isolate the battery branch. RelayK1 is controlled by the signal RELBATT1.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 729 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.20.1 Front Panel
The following figure shows the front panel of the ABAC.
Camloc Fastener
Equipment Labels
Battery Connection Cables
+
−
Figure 407: ABAC Front Panel
12.20.2 Connectors
The following table describes the ABAC connectors.
Connector Description
X200 Connects battery temperature sensor signalsto the ASIB backplane.
Battery Connectors Connects to battery terminals. There are twocables only (one branch).
Table 146: ABAC Front Panel Connectors
730 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.21 ADAMADAM is used in the AC/DC power supply of BTS A9100 configurations asthe interface between the PM12s, the batteries and the power distributioninside the BTS.
ADAM consists of:
An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-half of a STASR above the
PM12s (see the following figure)
A small backpanel with the connectors for three PM12s and a terminalfor the wiring of the BTS.
In addition, the ADAM contains on its backpanel:
The relay for battery protection
The relay control
A shunt for measuring the battery current.
The following figure shows the position of ADAM in the STASR.
ADAM
PM12
Figure 408: ADAM, Position in the STASR
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 731 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.21.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.ADAM
Backpanel Frontpanel
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
OMU (SUMA)
Battery Shunt
Signals
Relay Control
PM12/1
PM12/2
PM12/3
−48 VDC Subracks
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
−48 VDC Subracks
Figure 409: ADAM Block Diagram
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has itsown control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
732 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.21.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM.
Figure 410: ADAM Front Side View
12.21.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are three connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via BOBU/BOMU/BOSU) and the back-up battery.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 733 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.22 ADAM2ADAM2 is used in the AC/DC power supply of Compact BTS Outdoorconfigurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and thepower distribution inside the BTS.
ADAM2 consists of:
An air permeable metal frame, mounted in one-third of a STASR above the
PM12s (see the following figure)
A small backpanel with the connectors for two PM12s and terminal for thewiring of the BTS.
In addition, the ADAM2 contains on its backpanel:
The relay for battery protection
The relay control
A shunt for measuring the battery current.
The following figure shows the position of ADAM2 in the STASR.
ADAM2
PM12
Figure 411: ADAM2, Position in the STASR
734 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.22.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.ADAM
Backpanel Frontpanel
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
OMU (SUMA)
Battery Shunt
Signals
Relay Control
PM12/1
PM12/2
−48 VDC Subracks
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
−48 VDC Subracks
Figure 412: ADAM2 Block Diagram
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit (42 V), the relay separates the DC line of the battery. The relay hasits own control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 735 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.22.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM2.
BATT. − 48V
− 48V
0V
Figure 413: ADAM2 Front Side View
12.22.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via DCUC) and the back-up battery.
736 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.23 ADAM4ADAM4 is used in the AC/DC power supply of BTS A9100 MBO1/MBO2configurations as the interface between the PM12s, the batteries and thepower distribution inside the BTS. ADAM4 is installed in combination with twoto four PM12s. If less than four PM12s are installed, the empty PM12 slot iscovered by a dummy panel.
ADAM4 consists of:
An air permeable metal frame, mounted in two third of a STASR above the
PM12s (see the following figure)
A small backpanel with the connectors for four PM12s and terminal for thewiring of the BTS.
In addition, ADAM4 contains on its backpanel:
The relay for battery protection
The relay control
A shunt for measuring the battery current.
The following figure shows the position of ADAM4 in the STASR.
ADAM4
PM12
Figure 414: ADAM4 Position in the STASR
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 737 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.23.1 Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram.
ADAM4
Backpanel Frontpanel
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
OMU (SUMA)
Battery Shunt
Signals
Relay Control
PM12/1
PM12/2
PM12/3
−48 VDC Subracks
0VDC
−48 VDC Battery
−48 VDC Subracks
0VDC 0VDC
PM12/4
Figure 415: ADAM4 Block Diagram
The relay protects the battery in case of discharging. If the voltage reaches thelower limit, the relay separates the -48 VDC line of the battery. The relay has itsown control circuit, so it works independently of the OMU.
738 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.23.2 Appearance
The following figure shows the front side view of ADAM4.
Figure 416: ADAM4 Front Side View
12.23.3 Connectors
On the backpanel there are two connectors for the PM12s. Each of themcontains two blocks with 4x2 high current contacts (one block for 0 VDC andone for -48 VDC) and a 24-pin block for the control signals.
On the front panel there are the terminals for the DC supply of the subracks(via BOMU) and the back-up battery.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 739 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.24 BU41The BU41 is an optional feature used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. Itprovides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.
The principal components of BU41 are four high performance, sealed, lead-acidbatteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connect in series toprovide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. Optionally, asecond branch of four sealed lead-acid batteries can be fitted to double thebackup period. Each battery branch is independently connected to the BACOor BAC2. Note however, that only one battery branch can be connected toan ABAC or ADAM.
When two battery branches are used, both branches must consist of batteriesof the same type and capacity. This is required because the charging andtesting circuits assume both branches are the same.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used bythe BCU1/SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent batteryoverheating.
Each battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge tothe external environment the gasses produced during battery charging.
740 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.24.1 Charging
The BU41 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit for thenumber of battery branches in use.
Battery Type One Branch Two Branches
40 Ah 6 A 12 A
Table 147: BU41 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus batterytemperature.
Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)
0� C 2.3773 57.05
5� C 2.3484 56.36
10� C 2.3215 55.72
15� C 2.2966 55.12
20� C 2.2737 54.57
25� C 2.2528 54.07
30� C 2.2339 53.61
35� C 2.2170 53.21
40� C 2.2021 52.85
45� C 2.1892 52.54
50� C 2.1783 52.29
Table 148: BU41 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.
12.24.2 Discharging and Storage
Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.
Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 741 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.24.3 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top views of BU41.
Equipment Labels
Supplier’s Information Label
Front View
Top View
Vent Tube
Figure 417: BU41 Front and Top Views
742 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.24.4 BU41 Mounted in MBO
The MBO offers a specific battery box. The batteries are arranged as shownin the following figure. The battery box is covered with a plate to secure thebatteries.
Battery Box(Part of BTS)
Upper Block
Lower Block
ExhaustingNipple
ExhaustingTube
Warning Lables
SupplierInformationLable
Front View
InternalBatteryCable
− −
+ +
+ +
− −
EquipmentLables
Figure 418: BU41 in MBO - Front View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 743 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.25 BU100The BU100 is an optional feature used in all outdoor BTS A9100 versions andin indoor versions that use an AC power supply. It provides an emergency DCpower source for use in the event of a mains supply failure.
The principal components of the BU100 are four high performance, sealed,lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They connectin series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch.The battery branch is connected to the BACO, BAC2, ABAC or ADAM asappropriate.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theBCU1, BCU2 or SUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus preventbattery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge thegasses produced during battery charging to the external environment.
744 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.25.1 Charging
The BU100 charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
Battery Type Limit
100 Ah 12 A
Table 149: BU100 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus batterytemperature.
Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)
0� C 2.3773 57.05
5� C 2.3484 56.36
10� C 2.3215 55.72
15� C 2.2966 55.12
20� C 2.2737 54.57
25� C 2.2528 54.07
30� C 2.2339 53.61
35� C 2.2170 53.21
40� C 2.2021 52.85
45� C 2.1892 52.54
50� C 2.1783 52.29
Table 150: BU100 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 745 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.25.2 Discharging and Storage
Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.
Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.
12.25.3 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top views of BU100.
Front View
Top View
Vent Tube
Battery Retainer
Figure 419: BU100 Front and Top Views
746 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.26 BU101The BU101 is an optional feature used in Multistandard Outdoor BTS Cabinets.It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.
The principal components of the BU101 are four high performance, sealed,lead-acid batteries that conform to the DIN 43539 standard. They areconnected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as abranch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM or ADAM4.
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes discharge thegases produced during battery charging to the external environment.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 747 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.26.1 Charging
The BU101 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
Battery Type Limit
100 Ah 12 A
Table 151: BU101 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus batterytemperature.
Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)
0� C 2.3773 57.05
5� C 2.3484 56.36
10� C 2.3215 55.72
15� C 2.2966 55.12
20� C 2.2737 54.57
25� C 2.2528 54.07
30� C 2.2339 53.61
35� C 2.2170 53.21
40� C 2.2021 52.85
45� C 2.1892 52.54
50� C 2.1783 52.29
Table 152: BU101 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature
Note: Avoid excessive battery gas leakage by not exceeding a charging voltage of2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.
748 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.26.2 Discharging and Storage
Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.
Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.
12.26.3 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top view of the BU101. The batterybox is covered with a plate to secure the batteries.
To Circuit Breaker
To Circuit Breaker
Battery Box(Part of BTS)
Battery Battery
Battery Battery
Upper Block
Lower Block
Connection Cable
ExhaustingNipple
ExhaustingTube
Warning Lables
SupplierInformationLable
ExhaustingTube
Jumper
Front View Top View
EquipmentLables
TemperatureSensor
Jumper
Figure 420: BU101 Front and Top View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 749 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.27 BU102The BU102 is an optional feature used in External Battery Cabinets Outdoor.It provides an emergency DC power source for use in the event of a mainssupply failure.
The principal components of the BU102 are four high performance, sealed,gel batteries. They are connected in series to provide a 48 VDC nom. powersource, referred to as a branch. The battery branch is connected to ADAM4 ina BTS cabinet.
A temperature sensor is connected to one of the 0 V battery terminal. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
The battery branch is fitted with venting tubes. The venting tubes divert thegases produced during battery charging to the external environment.
12.27.1 Charging
The BU102 charging characteristics conform to the IEC 896-2 standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
Battery Type Limit
90 Ah 8 A for one battery branch
16 A for more than one battery branch
Table 153: BU102 Battery Type and Charging Current Limit
The following table shows the charging voltage versus battery temperature incase of default setting 2.29 V/ cell.
Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)
0� C 2.38 57.125
5� C 2.3587 56.616
10� C 2.3370 56.1
15� C 2.3162 55.59
20� C 2.295 55.08
25� C 2.2737 54.57
30� C 2.2525 54.06
35� C 2.2312 53.55
40� C 2.21 53.04
Table 154: BU102 Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature
750 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.27.2 Discharging and Storage
Discharging is interrupted at 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) in order to avoiddamaging the batteries.
Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.
12.27.3 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top view of BU102. The battery box iscovered with a plate to secure the batteries.
Clean−upOscillator
RXSynth.
RXSynth.
RFMixer
IFFilter
Modulator&
Up−converter
TX PowerRegulation
TX Synthesizer
2
TXSynthesizer
1
LNA RX0
RFMixer
IFFilter
LNA RX1
TX DriverAmplifier
TX PowerAmplifier
BasebandModulator
DDC DRCS
BBTX
ADC
ADC
I
Q
To combiner
Duplexer
From AntennaNetwork
1
2
TEPAxx/TEPADHE
To DEMon TRED
FromENCT
TREA
Digital part (positioned at analog module)
Transmitter part
Reveiver part
Figure 421: BU102 Front and Top View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 751 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.28 BATSThe small battery BATS is a plug-in unit for the subrack STASR with a width of28 TE. It is used in indoor cabinets. It provides an emergency DC power sourcefor use in the event of a mains supply failure. It contains:
A block of four batteries
Printed board RIBATs
Temperature sensor
Battery breaker.
The following figure shows the block diagram.
SBS8 SBS8SBS8
++++ − −−−
SBS8
Batteries
Temperature SensorCircuitBreaker
FeedThroughClamps
− +48 V
to ADAM
to BCB
RIBATS
Figure 422: BATS Block Diagram
12.28.1 Batteries
The batteries are connected in series and have nominal 48 V and a capacity of8 Ah. A BATS can be plugged in any unused subrack position.
The principal components of BATS are four high performance, sealed, lead-acidbatteries that conform to the IEC 896-2 standard. They are connected in seriesto provide a 48 VDC nom. power source, referred to as a branch. The DC clampsof the module are connected to the battery clamps on the front side of ADAM.
752 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.28.2 Charging
The BATS charging characteristics conform to the DIN 41773 (float charging)standard.
The following table shows the battery type and the charging current limit.
Battery Type Charging Current Limit
8 Ah 2 A
Table 155: BATS Battery Type and Charging Current Limit
The following table shows the recommended charging voltage versus batterytemperature.
Temperature Voltage Per Cell Total Voltage (± 1%)
0� C 2.3773 57.05
5� C 2.3484 56.36
10� C 2.3215 55.72
15� C 2.2966 55.12
20� C 2.2737 54.57
25� C 2.2528 54.07
30� C 2.2339 53.61
35� C 2.2170 53.21
40� C 2.2021 52.85
45� C 2.1892 52.54
50� C 2.1783 52.29
Table 156: BATS Charging Voltage Versus Battery Temperature
Note: In order to avoid excessive battery gas leakage from the battery, the chargingvoltage must not exceed 2.35 V per cell (56.40 V total) at 20� C.
12.28.3 Discharging and Storage
Discharging below 1.75 V per cell (42 V total) can damage the batteries.
Batteries may be stored without recharging only for a restricted time. Thereforemanufacturers instructions (delivered with the product) must be followed.Storage of discharged batteries is not allowed.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 753 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.28.4 RIBATS
The RIBATS is a small PCB mounted on the BATS frame. It collects the value ofthe temperature sensor and transfers this information to the OMU via the BCB.It is directly connected to a backplane connector of the STASR. The RIBATS issupplied from the BTS via the BCB, not from the batteries.
12.28.5 Temperature Sensor
Connected to one of the battery terminals is a temperature sensor. Thismonitors the battery temperature. The output from the sensor is used by theSUMA to regulate the charging voltage and thus prevent battery overheating.
12.28.6 Battery Breaker
A battery breaker is mounted on the front side of BATS: 2 x 60 A, 80 V. Thebattery breaker disconnects the connection between the batteries and ADAM.
12.28.7 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front view of the BATS.
CicuitBreaker
ModuleExtractor
DC Clamps
AlcatelProductIdentification
SerialNumberIdentification
Figure 423: BATS Front View
754 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.29 RIBATThe RIBAT board is part of the battery. Its task is to measure the batterytemperature and to provide the OMU with the temperature value and thebattery Remote Inventory information which includes the information for thebattery type. Knowledge of the temperature value is necessary for charging.The board contains a BCB interface to transfer the information. Dependentingon the configuration, different interfaces are used: the BCB/EBCB, XBCB.
The RIBAT is supplied from the BTS, not from the batteries. The powerconsumption is about 100 mA.
12.29.1 Block Diagram
The connection and addressing differs for different configurations. The followingfigure shows the RIBAT block diagram.Remote Supply Voltage Input
detect BCB/ EBCB Connection
NGTSL
Internal Addressing
External Addressing
D
A
BCB/EBCB
Control Logic
Line term.
XBCB Out
Loop BCB IF to cascaded RIBAT
RI EEPROM
Temperature Sensor
RS 485
TTL
XBCB IN
Figure 424: RIBAT Block Diagram
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 755 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.29.2 Functional Description
The board consists of:
An NGTSL; which is the terminal for the ISL data link
The Remote Inventory EEPROM including the Remote Inventory information
The analog part for temperature measuring
Address switching
the BCB/EBCB, XBCB interfaces.
In order to differ between internal or external addressing and internal orexternal connection, the BCB/EBCB connection is detected. The BCB/EBCBconnection is true if the battery is located inside the BTS cabinet. In this case,addressing is switched to internal and the XBCB interface is disabled by thecontrol logic. If the addressing is switched to external, the XBCB interface isactive. If there is no other terminal or RIBAT connected to XBCB Out, it has tobe terminated with a line termination plug.
The analog part includes signal conditioning and an ADC to digitize thetemperature value. An external PT100 temperature sensor is connectedto the analog part. The ADC outputs are connected directly to the NGTSLalarm inputs.
Power supply is provided remotely either from inside the BTS or via theXBCB connection.
The internal battery of the outdoor BTS is located inside a side compartment.For this, the EBCB is fed to the side compartment. The RIBAT is connected tothe EBCB via a flat band cable like it is done with a backplane. In this caseaddressing is switched to internal and the battery gets subrack number 0 (dueto wire cutting on the flat band cable). Two cascaded batteries are possibleby using different slot numbers (slot 1, slot 2) to address them. One wire ofthe flat band cable is used for this.
The battery temperature range which can be measured is between -10� C and70� C. This range is extended against the operating temperature range of thebatteries (0� C to 50� C) and the minimum operating temperature range of theRIBAT to submit high or low temperature alarms. The measurement resolutionis 0.5� C. Values below -10� C mean a short cut at the temperature sensor.Values above 70� C mean a not-connected or interrupted sensor.
756 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.29.3 Appearance
The RIBAT is a small board with a C96 connector for the flat band cable, aSub-D 9 connector for the temperature sensor and two Sub-D 15 connectorsfor the XBCB input and output. The top view is shown in the following figure.
The temperature sensor is mounted on one pole of the batteries to give agood thermal contact.
EBCB Connector used in case of internal batteries
XBCB Connectors used in case of external batteries
Connector for Temperature Sensor
Figure 425: RIBAT Top View
12.29.4 XBCB Bus Termination
Because the XBCB is an RS-485 bus, it has to be terminated at the end of theline. At the BTS side this is already done on the COAR. At the RIBAT side,this is done by a termination plug. The termination plug consists of an 15-pinSub-D male connector and a small PCB (50 mm x 30 mm) with terminationand pull up/pull down resistors on it.
The plug is connected to the XBCB Out at the RIBAT. In case of cascadedRIBATs, the plug is connected to the remaining XBCB Out.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 757 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.30 DCDPThe DCDP is used in outdoor BTS A9100 versions. It distributes -48 VDC tothe equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its owncircuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCDP is housed in BTS compartment 1 above the top STASR. Thefollowing figure shows the circuit schematic.
−48V Input
F3 25 A
F4 25 A
F6 25 A
F7 25 A
F8 25 A
F2 15 A
F5 25 A
X1
6
6
6
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
Line Load
X5
X4
X3
X1
X2
X6
X7
X9
X8
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
XIOB
Optional Equipment
Spare
Heat Exchanger 1
Heat Exchanger 2
Heat Exchanger 3
Subrack 1/1
Subrack 1/2
Spare or Subrack 1/3
Subrack 2/1
Subrack 2/2
Subrack 2/3
0 V Input
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
F1 15 A
Figure 426: DCDP Circuit Schematic
758 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The DCDP 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via six circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
15 A for F1, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network line equipment)
15 A for F2, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
25 A for F3 - F8, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCDP and connected to each outputconnector.
12.30.1 Front and Top View
The following figure shows the front and top views of the DCDP.
X2 X5
X7
X3X1
X9
X6 X8
X4
X10 X11 X13X12 X14F6 F7F5F4 F8F3F2F1
Front View
Top View
Red 0 V
Blue −48 V
Equipment Labels
Figure 427: DCDP Front and Top View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 759 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.30.2 Front Panel Connectors
The following table describes the DCDP front panel connectors.
Connector Description
X1 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.
X2 - X4 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the microwaveequipment, if fitted.
X5 Spare.
X6 - X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the heat exchangercontrollers.
X9 - X14 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the STASRs.
Table 157: DCDP Front Panel Connectors
12.30.3 Rear Panel Connectors
The following table describes the DCDP rear panel connectors.
Connector Description
-48 V IN Provides the -48 VDC input.
0 V IN Provides the 0 VDC input.
Ground Provides the ground connection for the unit.
Table 158: DCDP Rear Panel Connectors
760 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.31 DCDUThe DCDU is used in Compact BTS Outdoor DC versions. It distributes -48VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected byits own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the cable entry. Thefollowing figure shows the circuit schematic.
0V Rail
−48V Rail
Figure 428: DCDU Circuit Schematic
The DCDU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via six circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
70 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS and is the main breaker
25 A for F2 and F3, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.
15 A for F4, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)
15 A for F5, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
15 A for F6, which supplies the connectors for the heater.
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each outputconnector.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 761 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.31.1 Front and Side View
The following figures show the front and side views of the DCDU.
0V −48V 0V 0V−48V −48V
X1 X10X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
OPTIONS HEX XIOB
SR1 SR2 OPT HEX HEAT
BTS
70 A
Equipment Labels
Figure 429: DCDU Front View
Figure 430: DCDU Side View
762 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.31.2 Front Panel Connectors
The following table describes the DCDU front panel connectors.
Connector Description
X1 - X3 Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment.
X4 - X6 Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment.
X7, X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.
X9, X10 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.
Table 159: DCDU Front Panel Connectors
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 763 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.32 DCDUEThe DCDUE is used in DC A9100 MBS GSM Evolution Outdoor versions. Itdistributes -48 VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-currentprotected by its own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCDUE is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.
Figure 431: DCDUE Circuit Schematic
The DCDUE 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
100 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS
15 A for F2, which supplies the Service Light
15 A for F3 and F4, which supply the heaters.
764 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCDUE.
Figure 432: DCDUE Front and Side View
12.33 DCMUThe DCMU is used in DC A9100 MBS GSM Outdoor versions. It distributes -48VDC to the equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected byits own circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCMU is housed in the left side of the BTS compartment. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 765 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
F1 F2 F3 F4
70A
15A
−48V
−48V
−48V 0V 0V0V
X20 X21
DC
OU
T /
48V
DC
IN /
48V
K1 K2
_ + 1 2 _ +
F5
_ + 1 2 _ +
DC
OU
T /
48V
DC
IN /
48V
15A
15A
Main ground
X1 X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
2
1
−48V −48V0V 0V −48V −48V0V 0V
LIGHT 1 LIGHT 2 HEATDC 1 HEATDC 2
X9
BUSBAR CONNECTION
MBO ROOF
0V BOLT 0V BOLT
EXTERNAL DC IN−48V 0V
C1
−48V
0V
Figure 433: DCMU Circuit Schematic
The DCMU 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
75 A for F1, which supplies the complete BTS
15 A for F2, which supplies the Service Light
15 A for F3 and F4, which supply the heat exchangers.
766 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCMU.
70A 15A 15A 15A
SERVICE LIGHT
HEATING 1 HEATING 2BTS
F1 F2 F3 F4
Front View
Side View
Equipment Labels
Figure 434: DCMU Front and Side View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 767 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.34 DCUCThe DCUC is used in Compact BTS Outdoor versions. It distributes -48 VDC tothe equipment modules. Each DC output is over-current protected by its owncircuit breaker. The circuit breakers are reset manually.
The DCUC is housed in the BTS compartment above the ACUC. The followingfigure shows the circuit schematic.
0V NU GND −48V0V NU GND −48V
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
0V Rail
− 48 V Rail
SR 1 SR 2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT HEX 5 XIOB
X20 X21
0V
0V
0V−48V
−48V
−48V
F1SR1
F2SR2
F3OPT
F4HEX
25A 25A 15A 15A
0V Input
−48V Input
Figure 435: DCUC Circuit Schematic
The DCUC 0/ -48 VDC input supply is distributed to the front panel outputconnectors, via four circuit breakers.
The circuit breaker trip currents are:
25 A for F1 and F2, which supply the connectors for the STASRs.
15 A for F3, which supplies the connectors for the XIOB and optionalequipment (such as microwave or termination of network lines equipment)
15 A for F4, which supplies the connectors for the heat exchangers
The 0 VDC input is grounded in the DCUC and connected to each outputconnector.
768 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.34.1 Front and Side View
The following figure shows the front and side views of the DCUC.
−48V
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
OPTIONS HEX XIOB
0V
−48V −48V0V 0V
−48V
0V
SR1 SR2 OPT HEX
Equipment labelsFront View
Blue − 48V
Black 0V
GND
Side View
Figure 436: DCUC Front and Side View
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 769 / 910
12 Power Supplies and Distribution
12.34.2 Front Panel Connectors
The following table describes the DCUC front panel connectors.
Connector Description
X1 - X3 Provides 0 VDC for the optional equipment.
X4 - X6 Provides -48 VDC for the optional equipment.
X7, X8 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the Heat Exchanger.
X9, X10 Provides 0/ -48 VDC for the XIOB.
Table 160: DCUC Front Panel Connectors
770 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
13 ACRI
13 ACRI
The sections are supported with diagrams, where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the module is also included, showingthe connectors and controls.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 771 / 910
13 ACRI
13.1 ACRI Functional DescriptionThe ACRI is used in indoor and outdoor BTS A9100 versions. There are twofunctionally identical variants. The sole difference is that the indoor variant hasthe BCB interface available on the backplane connector.
The ACRI:
Collects alarms from the SRACDC modules
Controls the SRACDC FANUs.
The ACRI is housed in the SRACDC. The following figure shows the functionalblock diagram.
Power Alarms
ANPS
FACB
DC/DC Converter
XBCB
−48 VDC Input Supply
RIEEPROM
BCB ASIC
FANUs
Output Voltages
Fan Alarms
Figure 437: ACRI Block Diagram
772 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
13 ACRI
The ACRI consists of the functional entities described in the following table.
ANPS The ANPS which the -48 VDC input supply to the DC voltagesrequired by the other components. For more information on theANPS, refer to AN Power Supply (Section 10.1.5).
FACB The FACB reports fan faults and controls the FANUs that coolthe SRACDC modules. For more information on the FANUsand FACB, refer to Fan Units (Section 11.1.1) and Fan Control(Section 11.1.2), respectively.
XBCB The way in which the BCB ASIC transfers information to theOMU in the SUMP depends on the ACRI variant. For the indoorvariant, the information is transferred via the BCB, availableon the backplane. For the outdoor variant, the information istransferred via the XBCB connector on the front panel.
This information consists of:
Alarms from the FACB
Alarms from the battery, PM08s and BCU1
Remote Inventory information.
RI The Remote Inventory is used to store information about themodule (part number, name, serial number, etc.). It consists ofan EEPROM which is connected to the BCB ASIC.
Table 161: ACRI Functional Entities
13.2 ACRI LEDs and AlarmsThe two LEDs on the front panel are connected in parallel. They indicate thestate of the + 5 VDC output of the ANPS.
The alarm information consists of:
Fan status
Number of PM08s fitted
Number of PM08s that are serviceable
Battery malfunction
BCU1 failure.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 773 / 910
13 ACRI
13.3 ACRI Front PanelThe following figure shows the front panel of the ACRI.
POWER ON
Handle
Camloc Fastener
LEDs
Connector
Figure 438: ACRI Front Panel
The ACRI XBCB connector provides a:
+ 5 VDC signal to enable ANPS
Serial interface for the transfer of alarms and Remote Inventory information
to the OMU.
774 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
The sections are supported with diagrams, where necessary, showing thefunctional blocks and their interfaces.
A drawing of the physical appearance of the modules is also included whichshows the connectors.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 775 / 910
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
14.1 Lightning Protector Functional DescriptionAntenna connector lightning protectors are used in outdoor BTS A9100versions. They protect the RF inputs and outputs from the effects of nearbyor direct lightning strikes.
The lightning protectors are described in the sections:
Operating principles
Types.
14.1.1 Operating Principles
Lightning strikes and induced pulses have characteristics which are verydifferent from the desired RF signals transmitted and received by the BTSA9100. These differences allow a lightning strike to be suppressed.
The BTS A9100 lightning protectors are based on a ’quarter-wavelengthshorting stub’. This has the effect of passing all operational RF signals, buteffectively shorting any lightning voltage spikes to the cabinet’s chassis ground.
The protectors can be used in both the transmit and receive signal paths. Theyare installed to form part of the cabinet’s external RF connections.
14.1.2 Types
Even though the LPQG, LPQD, LPQP, and LPQM types can have differentsuppliers, the product numbers are always identical. The following table liststhe product numbers.
Type Variant Product Numbers
LPQG 3BK 05817 AAAA
LPQD 3BK 05818 AAAA
LPQP 3BK 08691 AAAA
LPQM 3BK 25444 AAAA
Table 162: Antenna Connector Lightning Protector Types and Variants
The AAAA variants are functionally identical, differing only in dimensionsand appearance.
776 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
14.1.3 Lightning Power Spectrum
Quarter-wave stub lightning protectors remove lightning current on a frequencyselection basis.
The following figure shows the power spectrum of a typical lightning strike.
Amplitude Density(V/m/Hz)
Frequency (kHz)
2 1000
Figure 439: Lightning Strike Power Spectrum
As lightning has a power spectrum with very little energy above 100 kHz, aband-pass protection filter can be used. This passes the frequencies of interest(which are much above 100 kHz), yet rejects the low frequencies generated bylightning. The antenna connector lightning protectors perform this functionusing the quarter-wavelength shorting stub.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 777 / 910
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
14.1.4 Quar ter-Wave Stub
The quarter-wave stub is a coaxial line exactly one quarter-wavelength long.One end is connected to the through path and the other end is simply shorted.
The following figure shows the equivalent circuit of the antenna connectorlightning protectors.
Signal Path
Signal Conductor
Shield/ Chassis Ground
(180Delay)
100 % Reflection
Short Circuit
Shorting Stub = l /4 (+ 90Delay for Signals of F = 1/l)
Signal
Split
Signal Summed
Figure 440: Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors Equivalent Circuit
During normal operation, the RF transmission signal arrives at the input ofthe shorting stub, where it is split.
One part travels along the matched quarter-wavelength stub, thus changingits phase by 90�. At the short, the signal is reflected and hence shifted by afurther 180�. It then travels back along the stub and is again shifted by 90�
by the time it reaches the junction.
The other part continues along the straight-through path. The reflected andstraight-through signals are therefore exactly one cycle out of phase at thejunction.
The signals are summed at the junction. Apart from negligible jitter, theresulting signal is identical to the original signal.
In contrast to the high frequency transmission signals, the much lower frequencylightning spectrum is not matched to the stub. Its components are, effectively,shorted to ground (as they are shifted completely out of phase by the short). Atthe same time, they have a negligible shift when travelling down the stub.
778 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
14.2 Lightning Protector Electrical CharacteristicsThe following table shows the electrical characteristics. The lightning protectorshave little effect on system performance during normal operation.
Characteristic LPQG LPQD LPQP LPQM
Usablefrequencyrange:
870 - 970MHz
1700 - 1900MHz
1800 - 2000MHz
870 - 970MHz and
1700 - 2200MHz
Insertion loss: ≤ 0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB ≤0.1 dB
VSWR: ≤ 1.1 ≤1.1 ≤1.1 ≤1.1
Impedance: 50 50 50 50
Table 163: Lightning Protector Electrical Characteristics
14.3 Lightning Protector AppearanceLightning protectors can be designed with an internal filter or with a shortingstub (depending on the manufacturer). The following figure shows theappearance of the antenna connector lightning protector with shorting stub.
Quarter Wavelength Shorting Stub
7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector
V−ShapedGrounding Washers
Sealing Washers
Plinth
7/16 female coaxial RF Cable Connector
Figure 441: Lightning Protector Appearance with Shorting Stub
The protectors are mounted in the plinth at the bottom of the cabinet. Eachprotector consists of a coaxial through-connection with the protectionmechanism located below the plinth.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 779 / 910
14 Antenna Connector Lightning Protectors
780 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15 Range Extension Kit
This chapter describes the range extension kit (REK) which is aimed atenhancing the capabilities of the Evolium BTS A9100 in terms of coverage.
The REK is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantlyimpact the density of sites to be implemented over the service area of GSMnetworks.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 781 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.1 Introduction to REKThe basic advantage of the REK is to enhance the capabilities of the EvoliumBTS A9100 in terms of coverage by increasing the size of the cell, whichsignificantly impacts the density of sites to be implemented over the servicearea of GSM networks. Other advantages are range extension of road cell,compensation of the eventual error of site location by radio network planningand compensation of RF performance impairment due to antenna feederand ANx losses.
The REK can be used with a wide variety of Evolium BTS A9100 indoor andoutdoor configurations in GSM 900 with a coupling constraint of maximumone TRX/TRE to each antenna. Cross-polarized antennas can still be usedrespecting this constraint. For practical reasons, configurations are limited to amaximum of six TREs per BTS site, assuming a 3x2 configuration.
The REK is designed to minimize BTS and system impacts. The BTS has noknowledge of the REK’s presence and is not involved in its configuration.Configuration of the REK is reduced to manual attenuator setting at installation.Supervision is minimal. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there isno recovery mechanism. The system impact concerns the handling of thesenew external alarms at the OMC-R level.
The REK is composed of two modules:
A Masthead Amplification Box, to be installed close to the antenna, featuring
power amplification downlink and low noise amplification uplink, along withproper supervision means
A Power Distribution Unit, to be installed in the BTS cabinet or close to
the BTS, providing DC power for the purpose of remotely feeding themasthead amplification module through the antenna feeder and collecting
the alarm signals.
782 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2 Overall Description
15.2.1 Architecture
The following figure shows a two TRX configuration.
The equipment has three sections:
The Masthead Amplification Box. Each MAB provides bi-directionalamplification for one antenna port. The antennas are not part of the MAB.
The use of two separate antennas or one cross-polar antenna (decoupling
>25 dB) is possible
The feeder cables. Up to 11 dB of loss is supported allowing 1/2” cables
with up to 100 m length if used as an extension for a standard EvoliumBTS A9100. The DC feed and supervision of the masthead equipment is
also done via the feeder cables
The Power Distribution Unit. This module provides the interface towards theBTS. The power supply for the masthead equipment and the alarm handling
is provided by this module. This module is located beside the BTS rack forindoor applications and inside the cabinet for outdoor configurations.
PDU
BTS
MAB
SV
B
B
Antenna Port 2
MAB
SV
B
B
Antenna Port 1 Legend:
MAB Masthead Amplification Box
Bias and Lightning Protection
B
SV Supervision Circuit
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PS MAB Power Supply
AL Alarm Interface
ANx Antenna Network
BTS Base Transceiver Station
PS
AL
ANx
RF feeder cables
Figure 442: REK Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 783 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2 Configurations
The REK is usable in site configurations featuring one antenna per TRX, andtherefore well adapted for the implementation of air combining.
The technical constraints are: no TX coupling in the BTS (no ANY in theconfiguration), respectively the sectors, which means only one TRE transmittingon each antenna. (On the ANC, the included combiner will be disabled byremoval of the two bridges and the TREs connected directly to the duplexers).
The different possible site configurations are shown separately below.
15.2.2.1 With One TREThe following figure shows a one-cell configuration using the REK.
MAB MAB
PDU
ANXA B
TRE 1 nc
MAB MAB
PDU
ANCA B
TRE 1 ncnc nc
On the ANC,the two bridgesare removed
− If RX antenna dive rsity is absolutely required, a second MAB must be installed on the path B
or
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 443: Cell with One TRE
If RX antenna diversity is absolutely required, a second MAB must be installedon path B.
784 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2.2 With Two TREs and RX Antenna DiversityThe figure below shows the configuration for one cell with two TREs andRX antenna diversity.
MAB MAB
PDU
ANXA B
TRE 1 TRE 2
MAB MAB
PDU
ANCA B
TRE 1 TRE 2
nc nc
On the ANC, the twobridges are removed
or
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 444: Cell with two TREs and RX Antenna Diversity Active
15.2.2.3 3x1 without RX Antenna Diversity, with ANXAs shown in Figures443 and 444 above, one MAB is required per TRE.However, one PDU can supply two MABs (two TREs connected) These twoTREs do not need to belong to the same sector. Thus a 3x1 configurationrequires only two PDUs if there is no RX antenna diversity.
MAB
PDU1
ANXA B
TRE 1 nc TRE 1 nc
MAB
PDU2
ANCA B
Sector 2 Sector 3
MAB
ANXA B
TRE 1 nc
Sector 1
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 445: 3x1 Configuration without RX Antenna Diversity - ANX Variant
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 785 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2.4 3x1 without RX Antenna Diversity, with ANCA 3x1 configuration without RX antenna diversity using the ANC is shown inthe following figure.
MAB
PDU1
ANCA B
nc
MAB
PDU2
ANCA B
Sector 2 Sector 3
MAB
ANCA B
TRE 1nc nc
TRE 1nc
nc ncncnc
TRE 1nc
Sector 1
On each ANC, the two bridges are removedLegend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 446: 3x1 Configuration without RX Antenna Diversity - ANC Variant
15.2.2.5 3x2 with ANXThe following figure shows a 3x2 configuration using the ANX.
MAB MAB
PDU 1
ANXA B
TRE 1 TRE 2
Sector 1
MAB MAB
PDU 2
ANXA B
TRE 1 TRE 2
Sector 2
MAB MAB
PDU 3
ANXA B
TRE 1 TRE 2
Sector 3
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 447: 3x2 Configuration - ANX Variant
786 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2.6 3x2 with ANCThe figure below shows a 3x2 configuration using the ANC.
MAB MAB
PDU 1
ANCA B
TRE 1nc
TRE 2nc
TRE 1nc
TRE 2nc
TRE 1nc
TRE 2nc
Sector 1
MAB MAB
PDU 2
ANCA B
Sector 2
MAB MAB
PDU 3
ANCA B
Sector 3
On each ANC, the two bridges are removedLegend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 448: 3x2 Configuration - ANC Variant
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 787 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2.7 Extended Cell ConfigurationThe extended cell configuration is composed of one Inner Cell with up tofour TREs, and one Outer Cell with up to four TREs. The REK is used inthe Outer Cell.
ANCA B
TRE 1 TRE 3TRE 4TRE 2
TRE 1nc
TRE 2nc
TRE 3nc
TRE 4nc
Sector 1
MAB MAB
PDU 1
ANCA B
Sector 2
MAB MAB
PDU 2
ANCA B
Sector 2
In the Outer Cell, the bridges are removed on each ANC
OUTER CELL INNER CELL
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 449: Extended Cell Based on ANC (and SUMA) Installation
In case of an Evolium BTS 9100 equipped with ANX and SUMP, the SUMP hasto be replaced by a SUMA.
OUTER CELL INNER CELL
ANX
ANY
A B
TRE 1 TRE 3TRE 4TRE 2
TRE 1 TRE 2 TRE 3 TRE 4
Sector 1
MAB MAB
PDU
ANXA B
Sector 2
MAB MAB
PDU
ANXA B
Sector 2
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 450: Extended Cell Based on ANX (and SUMA) Installation
788 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.2.2.8 BTS ConfigurationsDue to limited DC power distribution in outdoor cabinets which can accept nomore than three PDUs and external alarm limitation, the configurations arelimited to a maximum of six TREs per BTS.
In addition, no multiband configuration is foreseen.
Considering these limitations, the following configurations are possible.
RackConfigurationType Indoor Outdoor ANX ANC
RackLayoutType Notes
MINI 1x1...2 X X X X 1x1...4 (1)
MINI 2x1 X X X X 2x1...2
MINI 2x2 X X X X 2x1...2
MINI 3x1 X X X X 3x1
MEDI 1x4 Low Loss X X X X 2x1...4Low Loss
(1)
MEDI 3x.2 X X X X 3x1...4 (1)
MEDI Extended Cell1x1...4, 1x1...4Low Loss
X X X 1x1...4+ 1x1...4Low Loss
(2)
Table 164: BTS Configurations with REK
(1) These BTS configurations are without TX coupling: no ANY.
(2) In the 1x1...4 Low Loss part, the two bridges of each ANC are removed.
For rack layouts see Configurations - Rack Layouts (Section 2).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 789 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3 Masthead Amplification BoxThe Masthead Amplification Box for GSM 900 (part number 3BK 08848 AAAA)is a bi-directional amplifier for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoorinstallation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna.
The Masthead Amplification Box architecture is shown in the following figure.
To/FromPDU
Bias &Alarm
DetTo/FromAntenna
DUPLEXER
Legend:PDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 451: Block Diagram of the Bi-directional Amplifier
The bi-directional amplifier is composed of:
A circulator at the BTS input
A power amplifier in the Tx path
A low noise amplifier in the Rx path
A duplexer at the antenna output
A reflected power detector at the output of the power amplifier
A Bias T and a lightning protection module
A power regulation (DC voltage regulators for the Tx and Rx amplifiers),not represented in figure above
Alarm circuitry, collecting alarms (from DC regulators, Tx and Rx amplifiers),
not represented in figure above
Two switches for adjusting the gains of the Tx and Rx paths (independent
from each other), not represented in figure above.
790 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3.1 Transmit Power Amplifier and Required Attenuators
The required output power (transmit) of the masthead equipment (includingoutput filter) is 44.5 dBm (28 W). To adapt the amplifier to the different BTStypes and antenna cable losses, an attenuator in front of the amplifier is needed.
Because of the high input power in the standard Evolium BTS A9100, thisattenuator is split into a fixed part (8 dB) and a variable part (range 0...15.5 dB).
The fixed attenuator is built to limit the signal level at the output of the variableattenuator to maximum 2.5 W (34 dBm). The variable attenuator is digital andcan be manually adjusted in steps of 0.5 dB depending on BTS type and cablelosses (see the following figure). The variable attenuator supports an inputpower in the range of 21.65 to 32.75 dBm and is dimensioned for up to 34 dBm(i.e., 2.5 W) to allow some margin.
Figure 452: RX and TX Attenuation Setting
The amplifier itself is composed of one class A and two class AB stages. Theoutput stage is a quadrature to improve the reliability and manufacturabilityof the design.
An isolator is added on the output for protection from operation in a highoutput VSWR as well as reverse intermodulation performance. The insertionloss is 0.35 dB.
The gain is maintained within ±1.5 dB tolerance by employing passivetemperature compensation on the amplifier input. This maintains the gainwithin the required tolerance over the whole range of frequency, temperature,power supply and input power variations, so there is no control loop on theamplifier gain.
The amplifier can be damaged, if the maximum input power is >41 dBm. Athermal protection/shut-down circuitry is incorporated in order to prevent theamplifier from damage in case of a too high temperature inside the MastheadAmplification Box enclosure.
A DC regulator is introduced to avoid gain fluctuations of the power amplifier,because the amplifier is DC-fed via the feeder cable which introduces up to 3 Vof voltage drop (depending on the cable length and DC current).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 791 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3.2 Receive Amplifier
As shown in Figure 451, the receiver amplifier is a balanced two-stage design.Each arm of the balanced amplifier contains two standard LNAs (the firststage is GaAs and the second stage is bipolar for GSM 900). The maximumoverall gain measured from the antenna input to the output of the MastheadAmplification Box is 16 dB for GSM 900. The noise figure remains below 2.5dB (for temperatures up to 50� C.
Temperature compensation is provided through a passive temperature variableattenuator on the amplifier output. Its insertion loss is 2 dB. A DC voltageregulator is also included to minimize the LNA gain variations due to inputvoltage fluctuations.
The receive amplifier includes a manually settable attenuator at its output,which allows decreasing the gain by 10 dB in steps of 1 dB in order to adapt forthe different cable lengths (see Figure 452). It is a digital attenuator, controlledby a manual rotary switch. Its insertion loss is 2 dB in GSM 900. A bandpassfilter is added to ensure adequate rejection of the transmit band signal cominginto the receive amplifier input. Its insertion loss is 1.5 dB.
Since the receive amplifier involves two low noise amplifiers in parallel, anysingle LNA failure will only produce a 6 dB decrease of the amplifier gain.
15.3.3 Output Duplexer
The masthead output duplexer is located at the antenna port of the mastheadbox. It has to prevent the Rx path from being interfered by the own Tx signalsand to suppress the Tx noise in the Rx band. A further function is theattenuation of Tx harmonics if necessary.
In order to achieve a low level of intermodulation (-110 dB) at the output of thelow noise amplifier, the Tx/Rx isolation is 80 dB. The duplexer has a Tx insertionloss of 1.1 dB for GSM 900. The Rx insertion loss is 1.2 dB for GSM 900.
15.3.4 Input Splitter
The masthead input splitter routes the Tx signal coming from the antenna cableto the Tx power amplifier and the output signal of the LNA to the antennacable. As shown in Figure 451 it is implemented with a circulator. Togetherwith the Masthead Amplification Box output duplexer, it prevents the mastheadequipment from self-oscillating.
Another function of the input splitter is to prevent the Masthead AmplificationBox receive amplifier from generating intermodulation by reversely injected Txsignals. Its insertion loss in Tx is 0.35 dB and in Rx is 0.3 dB.
792 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3.5 RF Specifications
The RF specifications of the Masthead Amplification Box are summarized inthe following table.
Parameter Requirement
Transmit Path
Frequency range 925 - 960 MHz
Impedance 50
Input VSWR <1.5 at the input of the mastheadamplification box
Output power 44.5 dBm ±1.5 dB
Gain variation Max ± 1.5 dB versus frequency,temperature and input power ranges
Variable attenuator Tunable from 0...15.5 dB in steps of0.5 dB
Max input level for attenuator setting0 dB
≤41 dBm
Receive Path
Frequency range 880 - 915 MHz
Impedance 50
Input, Output VSWR <1.5
Gain in Rx path 16 dB ±1 dB for -10 to + 40� C
16 dB ±1.5 dB for -40 to + 60� C
Attenuator setting at output 0...10 dB in steps of 1 dB
Output duplexer
Tx bandpass 925 - 960 MHz
Rx Bandpass 880 - 915 MHz
Tx/Rx isolation in Tx and Rx band 70 dB minimum
Table 165: RF Specifications of the Masthead Amplification Box
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 793 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3.6 Supervision Circuits and Alarm Interface
Two alarms per TRX function are provided by the Masthead Amplification Box,one fatal and one non fatal. The fatal alarm is raised in case of a fatal failure(e.g., power amplifier out of order). The non-fatal alarm is raised in case of anon-fatal failure (e.g., acceptable performance degradation). The signaling ofthe alarms from the MAB to the PDU is done via the corresponding antennacable, using low frequency signals that are coupled onto the RF coaxial linesvia the Bias tee and lightning protection module. An alarm is active if itscorresponding frequency is present.
The fatal alarm is activated by:
High reflected power at the power amplifier output
High current draw by the power amplifier
Low input voltage to the power amplifier
High temperature.
The non-fatal alarm is activated by:
Low bias current on the transistors in the receive amplifier (in one or botharms of the balanced amplifier)
High bias current on the transistors in the receive amplifier (in one or botharms of the balanced amplifier).
15.3.7 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection
For each antenna cable this circuit is located at both ends, i.e., inside theMAB and inside the PDU. The bias circuit is used for remote DC feeding andalarm signaling of the masthead box. It is the first circuit at the input of theMAB on the feeder cable side, so that the DC signal is extracted before any RFfunction is performed in the MAB.
Its insertion loss in Tx is 0.5 dB and includes a lightning protector.
794 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.3.8 Mechanical Characteristics
The overall dimensions of the MAB are 38 x 32 x 27 cm (see the followingfigure). The weight is maximum 19 kg.
M6
7/16 female
Alcatel serial no.
label
Alcatel ID no. label
Figure 453: Masthead Amplification Box
The enclosure is constructed from aluminium pieces. The back side is soformed that it can be easily mounted onto the tower. The front side is coveredwith fins which provide cooling.
The receive components are mounted in the back half since they do notdissipate much heat. The transmit amplifier and DC power regulation aremounted in the front half.
The two halves of the enclosure are bolted together with an environmentalseal between them. All RF connectors are placed on the bottom side of theenclosure. Access for gain adjustment is provided on the bottom side viaa removable cover.
The RF connector type is 7/ 16 female on both sides of the MAB (towards thePDU and towards the antenna). The MAB is fitted with a M6 threaded rod forgrounding via a yellow/green 16 mm 2 ground cable (in the installation kit).
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 795 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.4 Power Distribution UnitThe Power Distribution Unit (part number 3BK 08850 ABAA) provides powersupply and alarm interface for two Masthead Amplification Boxes. It is locatedat the BTS site, either wall-mounted close to the BTS in the case of an indoorsite or integrated inside the BTS cabinet in the case of an outdoor BTS.
The primary voltage of the Power Distribution Unit is -48 VDC. The secondaryvoltages are 33.7 VDC and are fed to the two Masthead Amplification Boxes viaBias tees which are integrated parts of the module. The Bias tees also providethe lightning protection at the BTS end of the feeder cable.
The Power Distribution Unit includes two separate DC/DC converters, eachproviding one Masthead Amplification Box with DC power. The powerconsumption for the Power Distribution Unit is 600 W at a power dissipationof 115 W.
The Power Distribution Unit architecture is shown in the following figure.
Power supply
DC/DCconverter
DC/DCconverter
BIAS TBIAS T
interfaceDC filter
TRX 1 −48 V DCAlarm 1 Alarm 2 TRX2
Feeder cable Feeder cable
PDU
supervisioncontrol &
Alarminterface
Alarm
Legend:PDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 454: Power Distribution Unit Block Diagram
796 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.4.1 Supervision and Alarm Interfaces
The two alarm interfaces located in the Power Distribution Unit collect thealarms corresponding to each TRX and coming from the correspondingMasthead Amplification Box (extraction in the Bias T, DC reject filtering anddetection of the alarm low frequency) or from the corresponding DC/DCconverter through the power supply control and supervision circuit.
The Masthead Amplification Box alarm signals consist of low frequency signalsthat are extracted from the feeder cables via the Bias T and after DC cutfiltering. An alarm is active if its corresponding frequency is present. The PowerDistribution Unit itself has only one alarm corresponding to a DC/DC converterfailure, which is fatal. The list of alarm causes and corresponding actions issummarized in the following table.
Alarm Cause FatalNonFatal Action
High reflected powerat the power amplifieroutput.
X - DC power shut down in PowerDistribution Unit.
High current draw bythe power amplifier.
X - DC power shut down in PowerDistribution Unit.
Low input voltage tothe power amplifier.
X - None.
High temperature inthe power amplifier.
X - Power shut down in PA atMasthead Amplification Boxlevel, no action on the LNA.Automatic recovery for bothpower and alarm signal below adefined temperature level.
High and low biascurrent on thetransistors in thereceive amplifier.
- X None.
DC/DC converterfailure.
X - None.
Table 166: List of Alarms
The alarm interfaces provide an external alarm interface towards the BTS (onelogical signal per alarm).
The Power Distribution Unit collects the fatal and non-fatal alarms for each TRXand groups the two non-fatal alarms together using an OR function, resulting inthree external alarms at the output of the alarm interfaces:
Fatal alarm TRX1
Fatal alarm TRX2
Non-fatal alarm TRX1 or TRX2.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 797 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
When several PDUs are used in the same BTS, the non-fatal alarms of thedifferent PDUs are grouped in a single alarm in order to reduce the number ofalarms. This is accomplished by alarm circuitry in the PDU which allows theconnection of those alarms in parallel by an alarm combining cable.
15.4.2 LEDs
LEDs are provided on the front panel of the Power Distribution Unit to indicatethe status and the alarms. The following table describes each LED andprovides a definition of their various operational states.
LED Meaning Color LED On LED OffLEDFlashing
TRX 1 MAB Fatal alarm Red Alarm on Alarm off -
TRX 1 MAB Non-fatalalarm
Red - Alarm off Alarm on
TRX 2 MAB Fatal alarm Red Alarm on Alarm off -
TRX 2 MAB Non-fatalalarm
Red - Alarm off Alarm on
TRX 1 DCDC DC/DCConverterfailure
Red Alarm on Alarm off -
TRX 2 DCDC DC/DCConverterfailure
Red Alarm on Alarm off -
DC INPUTSTATUS
DC Inputstatus
Green DC inputOK
No DCinput
-
Table 167: LEDs of Power Distribution Unit
15.4.3 Reset Buttons
If the power cable is connected to the PDU before complete installation hasbeen carried out, one or more red LEDs can be activated. In this case, resettingthe PDU is required. Resetting is carried out by pressing the ’TRX 1 RESET’and ’TRX 2 RESET’ buttons.
15.4.4 Bias Circuit and Lightning Protection
There is one Bias T per feeder cable. It is used to DC feed the correspondingMasthead Amplification Box and to extract the alarms from the MastheadAmplification Box. It includes a lightning protector which performances areas specified in IEC 1000-4-5 level 4. This lightning protector is sufficient toprotect the BTS. No other lightning protector can be installed between the PDUand the MAB, in order to avoid cutting the DC feed.
798 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.4.5 Mechanical Characteristics
The dimensions of the Power Distribution Unit are a height of 3U, a depth of280 mm and a width of 28 TE (see the following figure).
Front view Rear view Side view
Top view CelwaveSerial no. label
Alcatel IDno. label
Figure 455: Drawing of Power Distribution Unit
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 799 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
All connections are located on the front panel (see the following figure).
TRX 1 MAB TRX 1 MAB
TRX 1 DCDC
TRX 1 BTS
TRX 2 MABTRX 2 MAB
TRX 2 DCDC
DC INPUT STATUS
STS INTERFACE
TRX 2 RESETTRX 1 RESET
DC POWER
TRX 2 BTS
B
G
C
D
G
E
F
H
Legend:
A − ground rod, diam 8 mm
B − TRX 1 MAB female 7/16 connector
C − TRX 1 BTS female 7/16 connector
D − T RX 2 MAB female 7/16 connector
E − TRX 2 BTS female 7/16 connector
F − alarm SubD male 9 pin connector
G − reset button
H − DC status LED − green
I − DC supply SubD male 3 pin high power connector
A I
Figure 456: Power Distribution Unit Front Panel
The RF connectors are of 7/ 16 female type on ANx and feeder sides of thePDU. The PDU is fitted with a M6 threaded rod for grounding via a yellow/green16 mm 2 ground cable (in the installation kit).
800 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.5 REK Installation
15.5.1 Masthead Amplification Box Installation
The MAB is fixed on the same vertical tubular support (∅ 40 to ∅ 200 mm)as the antenna using mounting hardware (two hose clamp steel bands andtwo hose clamp lock sets) as close as possible to the antenna. The MAB ismounted vertically on the pole with the connectors pointing downwards. Thefollowing figure shows the installation of MAB on the pole.
MastMAB
70mm70mm
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification Board
Figure 457: MAB Installation on the Pole
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 801 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.5.2 Power Distribution Unit Installation
The PDUs are fitted in a subrack and the subrack is fixed on the wall or in a 19”rack. This is a standard 3U high, 19” subrack with front fixation which can carryup to three PDUs. The following figure shows the installation of a PDU insidean Evolium BTS A9100 outdoor or in a 19” rack for an indoor site. Figure 459shows the installation of a PDU for an indoor site on the wall (with brackets).The first PDU is to the left in the PDU subrack.
Figure 458: Installation of PDU in an Evolium BTS A9100 Outdoor or in 19”Rack for Indoor
Blind plate
x 2
Bracket
Figure 459: Wall Installation of PDU for Indoor Site
802 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.6 REK Cabling
15.6.1 Cabling Overview
Depending on the installation, the distance between the BTS, PDU, and MABcan be variable. Thus RF jumper cables have been defined to cover thisflexibility.
15.6.1.1 Indoor Cabling OverviewThe following figure shows an indoor cabling overview of the Evolium BTSA9100.
GRD connection
GRD connection
Ground bar
RF jumper
RF jumper
RF jumper
RF jumper
FEEDER
MAB
ANT BTS
AN
TE
NN
A
Installation on wall or 19" rack
Alarmcombining cableDC cable
to power supply
3x2,5mm
PDU
towardsecond
PDU
towardthird PDU
Alarmextensioncable
BTS indoor
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 460: Evolium BTS A9100 Indoor Cabling Overview
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 803 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.6.1.2 Outdoor Cabling OverviewThe following figure shows an outdoor cabling overview of the Evolium BTSA9100.
RF jumper RF jumper
MAB
ANT BTS
AN
TE
NN
A
GRD connection
Ground bar
FEEDER
cablecombining
Alarm
GRD connection
extension cableAlarm ANx
DC cableto power supply
Options panel19" rack
PDU
BTS outdoor
DCDP
Jumper set foroutdoor BTSRF jumper
Cable gland
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 461: Evolium BTS A9100 Outdoor Cabling Overview
The following sections describe the cabling of the MAB and PDU for indoorand outdoor versions in more details.
804 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.6.2 Masthead Amplification Box Cabling
The following figure shows the cabling of the MAB in detail. There are two 7/ 16female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the lower side downward. The ANTconnector is connected to the antenna by an RF jumper. The BTS connector isconnected to the transmission/reception coaxial cable going down to the BTS(Power Distribution Unit) by an RF jumper. The connectors on the jumpers aresealed at both ends. The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of MastheadAmplification Box and to the ground or copper bar on the other side.
antenna
pole fixation
pole fixation
insulation4x
Jumper cable
Ground bar Copper bar
Feeder
OR
MAB
Ground cable
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification Board
Figure 462: Cabling of Masthead Amplification Box
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 805 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.6.3 PDU Cabling in Indoor BTS
The following figure shows the cabling of the PDU in an indoor Evolium BTSA9100 in detail. Between the PDU and MABs, classical RF jumpers are usedwithout lightning protectors in the form of quarter wave stubs or attenuators.Lightning protectors at the feeder entry in the shelter (necessary for operationwithout the REK) are suppressed, because they cut the DC power supply to theMAB. The PDU itself contains lightning protectors.
The ’TRX 1 MAB’ 7/ 16 female connector is connected to the antenna feederline with an RF jumper. The ’TRX 1 BTS’ 7/ 16 female connector is connectedto the antenna output of the Evolium BTS A9100 with an RF jumper.
When a second MAB is connected to the same PDU, these connections aredone to ’TRX 2 MAB’ and ’TRX 2 BTS’.
The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of the MAB and to the ground orcopper bar on the other side.
The alarm cable has two parts. The alarm combining cable can be connectedto three PDUs with three Sub-D 9 pin female connectors at the ’BTS Interface’.The 15-pin connector on the other end is connected to the alarm extensioncable. The other end of the alarm extension cable is connected to the alarminterface of the Evolium BTS A9100.
Connection to a DC power supply is via a 10 m cable 3x2.5 mm 2 with tipson one end and a Sub-D connector 3-pin (high current) at the PDU end. Theoutput of the -48 VDC power supply is protected by a 15 A fuse.
MAB
Feeder
Jumper cable
Jumper cable
PDU
DC POWER
BTS INTERFACE
TRX MAB
TRX BTS
BlueYellow/GreenBrown (black)
−48V
GND
0V
DC Power supply cable
to second
and third PDU
BTS Indoor
cable
combining
Alarm
cable
Ground
Cooper bar
Alarm extension
cable
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 463: PDU Cabling for Indoor Evolium BTS A9100
806 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.6.4 PDU Cabling in Outdoor BTS
The following figures show the cabling of the PDU in the outdoor Evolium BTSA9100 in detail. The versions just differ in connecting the DC power supply.
Lightning protectors at the feeder entry in the shelter (necessary for operationwithout the REK) are removed, because they cut the DC power supply to theMAB. The PDU itself contains lightning protectors.
The ’TRX 1 MAB’ 7/ 16 female connector is connected to an RF jumper. TheRF jumper is connected to the 7/ 16 coaxial socket fitted at the bottom of theEvolium BTS A9100. The ’TRX 1 BTS’ 7/ 16 female connector is connectedwith the ANx of the Evolium BTS A9100 with an RF jumper.
When a second MAB is connected to the same PDU, these connections aredone to the ’TRX 2 MAB’ and ’TRX 2 BTS’.
The ground cable is connected to the M6 rod of the PDU and the FASTONconnector in the middle compartment.
The alarm cable has two parts. The alarm combining cable can be connectedto three PDUs with three Sub-D 9-pin female connectors at the ’BTS Interface’.The 15-pin connector on the other end is connected to the alarm extensioncable. The other end of the alarm extension cable is connected to the alarminterface of the Evolium BTS A9100. For outdoor BTS, the alarm cable hasto go to the left compartment, crossing two times the bottom of the BTS bycable glands.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 807 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
For outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 equipped with a DC bus bar, the DC powersupply cable is connected to this bus bar (see the following figure). If thereis no bus bar, the PDU is connected to the DCDP panel at the high currentoutputs via a specific DC cable (see Figure 465). This cable has two branchesto supply the racks with the TREs and the relevant PDU. In this way, PDU1 isconnected with DCDP X9, PDU2 with DCDP X12, and PDU3 with DCDP X14.
DC POWERBTS INTERFACE
TRX MAB
TRX BTS
MAB
Feeder
Jumper cable
Cable gland
PDU
DC Power supply cable
ANx
to second and third PDU
EVOLIUM BTS A9100
BUS
RF 7/16
extension
Jumper cable
Jumper cable
combining
Alarm
Alarm
Ground
BAR
Coaxial socket
cable
PDU − ANx
PDU − Feeder
cable
cable
BTS Bottom Plate
GND
Fastion connector
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 464: PDU Cabling for Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 with DC Bus Bar
808 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
DC POWERBTS INTERFACE
TRX MAB
TRX BTS
MAB
Feeder
Jumper cable
Cable gland
PDU
DC Power supply cable
ANx
to second and third PDU
EVOLIUM BTS A9100
RF 7/16
extension
Jumper cable
Jumper cable
combining
Alarm
Alarm
Ground
Coaxial socket
cable
PDU − ANx
PDU − Feeder
cable
cable
BTS Bottom Plate
Middle compartment
to
rack
supply
DCDP
GND
Fastion connector
Legend:MAB Mast Amplification BoardPDU Power Distribution Unit
Figure 465: PDU Cabling for Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100 without DC Bus Bar
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 809 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.7 REK Cables
15.7.1 Ground Cable
The ground cables for the MAB and the indoor PDU (part number 3BK 08824AAAA) and the outdoor PDU (part number 3BK 07934 AAAA) installationare shown in the following figures.
Shrinkable tubeShrinkable tube
10000 mm
Lug 5 8 Lug 5 6
Figure 466: Ground Cable for MAB and Indoor PDU
Faston connectorThermo−retractable label with marking
10000 mm
Lug 6
Figure 467: Ground Cable for Outdoor PDU
810 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.7.2 Alarm Cable
The alarm cable has two parts: the alarm combining cable, 0.6 m (part number3BK 08819 AAAA) and the alarm extension cable indoor, 8 m (part number3BK 08818 AAAA) or the alarm extension cable outdoor, 2 m (part number3BK 08915 AAAA) as shown in the following figure.
SubD 15 pinfemale
3x SubD 9 pin female
SubD 15 pin male
2000 mm (outdoor)
8000 mm (indoor)
Alarm Combining Cable
Alarm Extension Cable
Figure 468: Alarm Combining/Extension Cable
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 811 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
15.7.3 DC Power Supply Cable
The DC power supply cable for indoor Power Distribution Unit installation (partnumber 3BK 08916 AAAA) is shown in the following figure.
(10000 100 mm
−48 V blueGND ye−green
0 V brownSubD 3 pin female
high current
Figure 469: DC Power Supply Cable for Indoor Power Distribution Unit
The DC power supply cable for PDU installation in outdoor Evolium BTS A9100with a DC power supply bus bar (part number 3BK 08919 AAAA) is shown inthe following figure. The DC power supply cable for PDU installation in outdoorEvolium BTS A9100 without a DC power supply bus bar (part number 3BK08918 AAAA) is shown in Figure 471.
A3 (0V)
A2 (GND)
A1 (−48V)
SubD 3 HP female Mate N lock 3 male
700 mm
0VGND−48V
Figure 470: DC Power Supply Cable for PDU in Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100with Power Supply Bus Bar
SubD 3 HP female
SubD 3 HP male700 mm1300 mm
Faston, female
BROWN
YE−GR
BLUE
0VNot usedGND−48V
A3A2A1
A3 A2 A1
Figure 471: DC Power Supply Cable for PDU in Outdoor Evolium BTS A9100without Power Supply Bus Bar
812 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
15 Range Extension Kit
15.7.4 Jumper Cable
For indoor installation of the REK, there are four jumper cables (MAB/PowerDistribution Unit) available with a length of 1 m (part number 3BK 05360BAAA), 2 m (part number 3BK 05360 CAAA), 3 m (part number 3BK 05360DAAA), and 5 m (part number 3BK 05360 ELAA).
MAB jumper cables are identical for indoor and outdoor Evolium BTS A9100.For outdoor installation of the REK, there are two different jumper cables for thePDU: RF cable PDU - ANx (part number 3BK 07965 AAAA) and RF cable PDU- feeder (part number 3BK 07965 ABAA).
The following figure shows the jumper cable.
Figure 472: Jumper Cable
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 813 / 910
15 Range Extension Kit
814 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
The TMA is designed to compensate the feeder losses which significantlyimpact the density of sites to be implemented over the service area of GSMnetworks.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 815 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.1 Introduction to TMAA significant part of the benefits brought by the outstanding sensitivity of theEvolium BTS A9100 can be lost if the losses incurred by signals along thefeeder cable between the receiving antenna and the antenna coupling module(ANxx) are too high. In fact, the noise factor of the system is degraded by anamount depending on the feeder loss.
The basic idea of tower-mounted amplification is to implement a low-noiseamplifier as close as possible to the antenna (see figure below), so as tocompensate for all losses incurred by received signals. The TMA solution canbe used in GSM 900 or GSM 1800 indoor and outdoor configurations.
Antennas
TMAs
Feeders
TRE TRE
Antenna Networkcombining: ANCx
Mobile Unit
BTS
Duplexer Duplexer
Duplexer Duplexer
Figure 473: Principles of Tower-Mounted Amplification
Tower-mounted amplification appears as an efficient sensitivity enhancementtechnique. However, both uplink and downlink power budgets must beconsidered for the calculation of the coverage ranges. The smallest availablepath loss determines the range. In that respect, tower-mounted amplificationcan be beneficial in those cases where system performance is limited by aweaker uplink budget.
On the other hand, in a balanced uplink/downlink situation, the introduction oftower-mounted amplification can be an efficient means to reduce the outputpower level of all mobile stations. The uplink power control mechanism providedat each base station will force all mobiles to reduce their emission level.
Two benefits can be obtained in that case:
Lower output favorably impacts the standby time of every mobile station
Lower output power contributes to minimizing the electromagnetic pollution
within the service area.
816 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
In summary, the decision to exploit tower-mounted amplification can beinfluenced by system design considerations but also result from the applicationof the Operator’s internal policy.
The counterpart of getting better sensitivity by means of a tower-mountedamplifier is the risk of degrading the blocking and intermodulationcharacteristics of the base station if the value of the amplification gain greatlyexceeds the value of the feeder losses. The attention of Operators is drawn tothe fact that, in such a case, the site equipment might not fully comply withETSI requirements settled in GSM rec 05.05.
The TMA can be used with a wide variety of Evolium BTS A9100 indoor andoutdoor configurations in GSM 900, GSM 1800 or GSM 1900 with a couplingconstraint of a of one TRX/TRE maximum to each antenna. Cross-polarizedantennas can still be used respecting this constraint. For practical reasons,configurations are limited to a maximum of six TREs per BTS site assuminga 3x2 configuration.
The TMA is designed to minimize BTS and system impacts. The BTS hasno knowledge of the TMA presence and is not involved in its configuration.Supervision is minimal. It only involves external alarms to the BTS and there isno recovery mechanism. The system impact concerns the handling of thesenew external alarms at the OMC-R level.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 817 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.2 ArchitectureFor TMA usage two solutions are available:
Tower Mounted Amplifier with external solution
Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC support.
16.2.1 Tower Mounted Amplifier with External Solution
The TMA with external solution is basically composed of three modules (seefigure below):
A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA), installed close to the antenna, featuring
the transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplifiedby a low-noise amplifier
A Bias T module, used to insert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cableto feed the TMA. The Bias T module is suited for GSM 900, GSM 1800,
and GSM 1900
A Power Distribution Unit (PDU), installed in the BTS cabinet or close tothe BTS, providing DC power to remotely feed the masthead amplification
module through the antenna feeder and collect the alarm signals.
Antennas
TowerMounted
Amplifiers
Feeders
. . .Duplexer
. . .
.
.
.
Bias T
Bias T
Power Distribution UnitExternal Alarms 48 V DC
BTS
Duplexer
Duplexer Duplexer
Figure 474: TMA with External Solution Architecture
The PDU is designed to supply and to monitor up to six TMAs (typical BTSconfiguration of 3x2 TRXs/TREs), independently of their frequency band (i.e.,the same PDU equipment can be used with the TMA of GSM 900, GSM 1800,and GSM 1900. In fact, the PDU has no frequency notation).
For indoor BTS installations, the PDU can be installed on the wall or in aseparate transmission cabinet (if available) and be powered by the BTS powersupply. For outdoor BTS configurations, it is possible to install the PDU insidethe BTS cabinet. The PDU is also powered by the BTS power supply.
818 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.2.2 Tower Mounted Amplifier with AGC Support
The TMA withAGC support is basically composed of two modules (seefigure below):
A Tower-Mounted Amplifier (TMA), installed close to the antenna, featuringthe transmit signal bypassed to the antenna and the receive signal amplified
by a low-noise amplifier
An Antenna Network module (AGC) containing the Bias T module used toinsert the DC voltage in the RF antenna cable to feed the TMA and the
power supply providing the DC power to remotely feed the mastheadamplification module through the antenna feeder.
TRE
TRE
AGC
BTS
Duplexer
Duplexer
TMA
AGC Power Supply, Switching andSupervision
Bias
Bias
AdjustableAGC Rx Gain
Feeder Cable Loss
FixedTMA Rx Gain
Bias
Duplexer
Duplexer
TMA
Bias
Figure 475: TMA with AGC Support Architecture
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 819 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.3 Tower-Mounted AmplifierThe tower-mounted amplifier is available for GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM1900, as shown in the following table.
Part number
GSM 900 3BK 08451 AAAA
GSM 1800 3BK 08497 AAAA
3BK 08497 BAAA
3BK 08497 CAAA
3BK 08497 DAAB
GSM 1900 3BK 08498 AAAA
3BK 08498 BAAA
Table 168: TMA Part Numbers
820 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.3.1 Appearance
The tower-mounted amplifier includes a low noise amplifier for the receive pathand a double duplexer TX/RX for one antenna port. It is designed for outdoorinstallation on a tubular mounted support below the antenna. Amplifiers forGSM 900 and GSM 1800/ GSM 1900 are offered by different manufacturers.Therefore, the appearance of TMAs can differ, as shown in the followingfigures as an example.
Connectors 7/16 female onthe bottom face of the box
Ground terminalscrew M6
Front View
Top View Side View
BTS ANT
Figure 476: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 900
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 821 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
BTSANTConnectors 7/16 female onthe bottom face of the box
Ground terminalscrew M6
Front View
Bottom View
Side View
Stainless steelattachment collar
Antenna Mast
Figure 477: Tower-Mounted Amplifier for GSM 1800/ GSM 1900
16.3.2 Frequency Range
The RX and TX frequency ranges of the tower-mounted amplifiers aresummarized in the following table.
Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Frequency rangeRX
925 - 960 MHz 1710 - 1785 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz
Frequency rangeTX
880 - 915 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz 1930 - 1990 MHz
Table 169: Frequency Ranges of the Tower-Mounted Amplifiers
Other RF specifications depend on which TMA version of a specificmanufacturer is used, the current position of the BTS, the TMA, and theantenna on site and the corresponding cable lengths.
822 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.3.3 Mechanical Characteristics
The overall dimensions and weights of the examples shown above are listed inthe following table.
Parameter GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900
Dimensions 357.5 x 168 x 112mm
265 x 158 x 95mm
265 x 158 x 95mm
Weight 6 kg 2.5 kg 2.5 kg
Table 170: Tower-Mounted Amplifiers, Weight and Dimensions
The back side of the tower-mounted amplifier is so formed that it can be easilyattached on the same vertical tubular support as the antenna using one (GSM1800/ GSM 1900) or two (GSM 900) stainless steel attachment collars providedas close as possible to the antenna.
The equipment is guaranteed to be watertight when the equipment is installedwith the connectors downwards and the two coaxial cables (jumpers) connectedto the equipment. The connectors on the jumpers are insulated at both ends,i.e., one at the antenna connector, two at the tower-mounted amplifier, and oneat the feeder head.
There are two 7/ 16 female connectors marked BTS and ANT on the front(lower side down). The antenna connector is connected to the antenna by anRF jumper. The BTS connector is connected to the transmission/receptioncoaxial cable going down to the BTS by an RF jumper.
The tower-mounted amplifier is fitted with an M6 threaded rod for grounding viaa black 16 mm² ground cable (in the installation kit) connected to the pylonor building ground, depending on the installation.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 823 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.4 Power Distribution UnitThe Power Distribution Unit (wall installation: part number 3BK 08456 AAAA,19” installation: part number 3BK 08456 ABAA) provides power supply and analarm interface for up to six tower-mounted amplifiers. It is located at the BTSsite, either wall-mounted close to the BTS in an indoor site or integrated insidethe BTS cabinet in an outdoor BTS.
The primary voltage of the Power Distribution Unit is -48 VDC. The secondaryvoltages are + 12 VDC and are fed to the six tower-mounted amplifiers viaBias tees which are not integrated parts of the module. The BTS is informedby an alarm indication if there is a defective DC/DC converter, a malfunctionof the tower-mounted amplifier, or an connection error of the various partsof cables and equipment.
The Power Distribution Unit includes three separate DC/DC converterseach providing two tower-mounted amplifiers with DC power. The powerconsumption for the Power Distribution Unit is 30 W.
16.4.1 Appearance
The Power Distribution Units are shown in the following figures.
1 21 21 21 21 21 21 2 1 14
Main powersupply cable
Top View Side View
Ground braid collars
Serial no. label
Fixing hole
LEDs
Reset button
Power switch
Terminal blocks(secondary powerconnection)
Ground connector (M6)Terminal block(for alarm cable)
Figure 478: Power Distribution Unit, Wall Version for BTS Indoor
824 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
Power supplycable
Top View Front View
Ground braid collars
Ground connector (M6)
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1
21
14
Figure 479: Power Distribution Unit, 19” Version for BTS Outdoor
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 825 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.4.2 Switches and LEDs
There is a main power switch used to switch the main power on or off. Thecorresponding orange LED indicates the presence of -48 V primary voltage.Three green LEDs indicate the presence of the secondary voltage for twochannels each (1 + 2, 3 + 4, 5 + 6). The output channels can be separatelyswitched on/off. A corresponding red LED indicates the presence of + 12 VDCsecondary voltage.
16.4.3 Reset Button
Each channel has a separate reset button. If pressed for at least two seconds,the concerned red LED goes out. The PDU is also fitted with a main resetbutton to reset all channels used in a single action.
16.4.4 Switching On
Before switching on the power supply at the PDU input, all switches have tobe in the OFF position (all LEDs are also OFF). When the main power isswitched on, the orange LED ’main power’ indicates the presence of primaryvoltage, while the three green LEDs indicate that the secondary power forall separate channels is available.
The six red LEDs (for channel 1 to channel 6) indicate when the tower-mountedamplifier alarms come on. After switching on the separate channel switchesand pressing the reset buttons, the corresponding tower-mounted amplifiersare supplied and the red LEDs are OFF.
16.4.5 PDU LEDs
LEDs are provided on the top (wall installation) or on the side (19” installation) ofthe Power Distribution Unit to indicate the status and the alarms. The followingtable describes each LED and provides a definition of their operational states.
LED Color LED On LED Off
-48 VDC Orange Main poweravailable
No main poweravailable
POWER TMA 1 and 2 Green Secondary poweravailable
DC/DC converteris faulty (alarm)
POWER TMA 3 and 4 Green Secondary poweravailable
DC/DC converteris faulty (alarm)
POWER TMA 5 and 6 Green Secondary poweravailable
DC/DC converteris faulty (alarm)
TMA 1 to TMA 6 Red TMA malfunctionor connectionerrors (alarm)
No fault
Table 171: Power Distribution Unit LEDs
826 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.5 Bias TThe Bias T unit (part number 3BK 08453 ABAA or 3BK 08454 ABAA) is apower supply injector to transport the + 12 VDC power supply energy tothe tower-mounted amplifier through the coaxial cable between the antennaand the BTS.
The injector is designed for indoor and outdoor installation between the BTSand the coaxial transmission-reception cable.
Two Bias T versions are available:
Bias T for indoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 male/ side TMA; female/ side
BTS
Bias T for outdoor BTS-RF connectors 7/ 16 female/ side TMA; male/side BTS.
The outdoor version is normally combined with a 90� bend. Both indoor andoutdoor versions are combined with a surge arrestor.
The Bias T units are shown in the following figures.
7/16 Male connectorto TMA
7/16 Female connectorto BTS
Ground TerminalScrew M6
Male Connectorto PDU
ANT
BTS
Figure 480: Bias T, Indoor Version
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 827 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
7/16 Female connectorto TMA
7/16 Male connectorto BTS
Ground TerminalScrew M6
Male Connectorto PDU
ANT
BTS
Figure 481: Bias T, Outdoor Version
Figure 482: Surge Arrestor
828 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.6 Installation
16.6.1 Indoor Installation
Depending on the installation, the distance between the BTS, the PowerDistribution Unit, and the Tower-Mounted Amplifier can be variable. Thus RFjumper cables have been defined to cover this flexibility. The PDU and Bias Tare installed outside the BTS.
The following figure shows an indoor installation.
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper
Wall Installation
RF jumper
Feeder
TMA
ANT BTS
AN
TE
NN
A
DC cableto power supply
Alarmcable
Surge Arrestor
PDU
BTS indoor
GND connection
Bias T for BTS Indoor
Bias T Injector Cable
RF jumper
Figure 483: Indoor Installation
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 829 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.6.2 Outdoor Installation
Contrary to indoor installation, in an outdoor installation the PDU and Bias Tare installed inside the BTS. The PDU has a 19” version which is installed ina subrack. The Bias T, including 90� bend and surge arrestor, are installedin the bottom or top of the cabinet.
The following figures show the principle outdoor installations for BTS versionswith a Bias T installation on the bottom.
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper
RF jumper
RF jumper
Feeder
TMA
ANT BTS
AN
TE
NN
A
DC cable topower supply
Bias T with 90
Surge Arrestor
ANx
PDU 19" subrack
Bus bar
Ground cable
19’’ subrack
Alarm cable
COAR
’Octopus’ cablefitted with 6 cables
BTS Outdoor
Cable gland
Figure 484: Principle Outdoor Installation for Evolium A9100 BTS
830 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
GND connection
Ground bar
RF jumper
RF jumper
RF jumper
Feeder
TMA
ANT BTS
AN
TE
NN
A
DC cable topower supply
Bias T with 90
Surge Arrestor
ANxPDU 19" subrack
Bus bar
Ground cable
19’’ subrack
Alarm cable
OUTC
’Octopus’ cablefitted with 6 cables
BTS Outdoor
Figure 485: Principle Outdoor Installation for Evolium A9100 BTS Evolution
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 831 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.7 TMA Cables
16.7.1 Indoor/Outdoor BTS Cables
Cables for both indoor and outdoor BTS installation of the TMA are described.
16.7.1.1 TMA Ground CableThe TMA ground cable (part number 3BK 08452 ABAA) is shown in thefollowing figure.
Shrink sheath Ring tongue M6 Ring tongue M8
Figure 486: Ground Cable for Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.7.1.2 Jumper CableFor indoor and outdoor installation of the tower-mounted amplifier, there areseveral jumper cables with different cable lengths (part numbers 3BK 05360xxxx or 3BK 07965 xxxx). Variant ’xxxx’ represents cable lengths.
The following figure shows the jumper cable.
Figure 487: Jumper Cable
832 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.7.2 Indoor BTS Cables
The Bias T cable and the cable set used for indoor BTS installations aredescribed in the following sections.
16.7.2.1 Bias T CableThe Bias T cable (part number 3BK 25482 AAAA) is shown in the followingfigure.
Bias T side PDU side
Figure 488: Bias T Cable
16.7.2.2 Indoor Cable SetFor indoor installation there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25484AAAA) containing a ground cable, a DC power supply cable, and an alarmcable. All cables are shown in the following figures.
braid overturned
Figure 489: Indoor DC Cable
30 mm shrink sheath
Lug M6
Figure 490: Indoor Ground Cable
FM2A armored cable
Figure 491: Indoor Alarm Cable
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 833 / 910
16 Tower-Mounted Amplifier
16.7.3 Outdoor BTS Cables
The cable and cable set used for outdoor BTS installations are described in thefollowing sections.
16.7.3.1 Octopus CableThe ’Octopus’ cable (part number 3BK 25483 AAAA) is fitted with six cablesand is shown in the following figure.
Straight cable plug
Bulkhead feedthroughcable jack
Spacer Female connectors
Figure 492: ’Octopus’ Cable
16.7.3.2 Outdoor Cable SetFor outdoor installation there is a specific cable set (part number 3BK 25485AAAA) containing a ground cable, a DC power supply cable, and an alarmcable. All cables are shown in the following figures.
Mate N lock 3 male
0 VNot used−48 V
braid overturned
Figure 493: Outdoor DC Cable
30 mm shrink sheath
Figure 494: Outdoor Ground Cable
Figure 495: Outdoor Alarm Cable
834 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17 Cable Descriptions
This chapter describes the internal and external cables.
Where appropriate, the pin-to-pin interconnections between cable connectorsare illustrated in diagrams.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 835 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1 Internal CablesThe physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor internalcables are given in the following sections.
17.1.1 ANCO
The ANCO (part number 3BK 26151) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
Shield
Lightning Protector AN
Type 7/16, straight, male Type 7/16, right angle, male
Figure 496: ANCO Connections
17.1.2 ANIC
The ANIC (part number 3BK 07921) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
Shield
ANANT Cabinet Connector
M3 Thread
Type 7/16, straight, female Type 7/16, right angle, male
Figure 497: ANIC Connections
836 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.3 ANLC
The ANLC (part number 3BK 26349) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
Shield
Lightning Protector AN
Type 7/16, Straight, Male Type 7/16, Right Angle, Male
Figure 498: ANLC Connections
17.1.4 ANOC
The ANOC (part number 3BK 07965) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
Shield
Lightning Protector AN
Type 7/16, right angle, male Type 7/16, right angle, male
Figure 499: ANOC Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 837 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.5 BOBU
Both Variant AA and Variant CA of the BOBU are described.
17.1.5.1 Variant AA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK08742) Variant AAare shown in the following figure.
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P19
P20
P21
P22
P13
P23P24P25
P26
P27
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18 P28
Figure 500: BOBU Variant AA Appearance
838 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.5.2 Variant AA Circuit SchematicThe BOBU Variant AA connections are shown in the following figure.
PDU3 (STASR 6)
PDU2 (STASR 4)
XIOB Supply
Service Light
Smoke Alarm, +24 V / 0 V
654321
Layer:123
Signal:WATERHEX2−1HEX2−2
121110987
654321 121110987
PDU1 (STASR 1)
Light Filter
Heater Filter
COAR Alarms
−48 V Filter
0 V Bolt
Ground Bolt
STASR 2
Door 1 and 2 Switches
HEAT
Supply Option X3
Supply Option X1
Supply Option X2
Supply Option X4
STASR 6
STASR 3
STASR 1
STASR 5
STASR 4
HEX2 (BTS 1)
Water
STASR 4
HEX2
STASR 6
STASR 5
STASR 1
STASR 2
STASR 3
XIOB and Options
or Loop
Bottom
Top
Layer:78 T / B9
Signal:−48VG−48V0 / −48VGGND−0V
Layer:4 T / B5 T / B6
Signal:SMOKE / DOOR124V / DOOR2XGND
Layer:101112 T / B
Signal:GND−0VNF1LIF1 / LIF2
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
HEX2 (BTS 2)
Figure 501: BOBU Variant AA Circuit Schematic
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 839 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.5.3 Variant AA ConnectorsThe connectors of the BOBU are shown in the following table.
Connector Type
P1, P12 Wieland GST 1813 S, male with female contacts.
P2, P3, P4 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.
P5, P6, P7, P8, P11 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.
P9, P14, P15, P16 Anderson Powerpole, unisex.
P10, P17 Mate-N-Lock, female with female contacts.
P13 9-pin Sub-D, female.
P18 Mate-N-Lock, male with male contacts.
P19 DIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm 2
P20, P28 Mate-N-Lock, male with female contacts.
P21, P22 FASTON 6.3, female contacts.
P23, P24 Lug, ring, crimp, 6 mm.
P25 Lug, ring, crimp, 8 mm.
P26 Triple FASTON, male with female contacts.
P27 Triple FASTON, female with female contacts.
Table 172: BOBU Variant AA Connectors
840 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.5.4 Variant CA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOBU (part number 3BK 08742) Variant CAare shown in the following figure.
Figure 502: BOBU Variant CA Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 841 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.5.5 Variant CA Circuit SchematicThe BOBU Variant CA connections are shown in the following figure.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES
Figure 503: BOBU Variant CA Circuit Schematic
842 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.6 BOMU
Diagrams illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.
17.1.6.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMU (part number 3BK 25672) are shown inthe following figure.
Figure 504: BOMU Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 843 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.6.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMU connections are shown in the following figure.
Figure 505: BOMU Circuit Schematic
844 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.7 BOMUE
Diagrams illustrate both the BOMU’s appearance and its circuit schematics.
17.1.7.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMUE (part number 3BK 27262) are shown inthe following figure.
Figure 506: BOMUE Appearance
17.1.7.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMUE connections are shown in the following figure.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 845 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
Figure 507: BOMUE Circuit Schematic
846 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.8 BOMUT
Diagrams illustrate both the BOMUT’s appearance and its circuit schematics.
17.1.8.1 AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOMUT (part number 3BK 27143) are shown inthe following figure.
Figure 508: BOMUT Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 847 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.8.2 Circuit SchematicThe BOMUT connections are shown in the following figure.
Figure 509: BOMUT Circuit Schematic
848 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.9 BOSU
The BOSU variants, AA and CA, are described in terms of appearance andconnections.
17.1.9.1 Variant AA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant AAare shown in the following figure.
P3
P1
P2
P4
P6
P5
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
Figure 510: BOSU Variant AA Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 849 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.9.2 Variant AA Circuit SchematicThe BOSU Variant AA connections are shown in the following figure.
Service Filter
Service Light
ACSB/ASCU
−48 VDC Input
654321
Heater Filter
COAR Alarms
Keyswitch
Ground Bolt
Door Switch
Heater Module HEAT2
HEX2 Alarm
Layer:123456 T / B
Signal:XGNDDOORHEX2GNDNF1LIF1 / LIF2
654321
Top
Bottom
P1
P2
P4
P6
P5
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P3
(or loop)
Wieland GST 1813 S, male with female contactsTripple Faston, female with female contactsAnderson Powerpole, unisexDIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm9−pin Sub−D femaleLug, ring, crimp, 8 mmLug, ring, crimp, 6 mmMatenlock, male with male contacts
P1, P3:P2:P4:, P6:P5, P11:P7:P8:P9, P10:P12:
0 VDC Input
Figure 511: BOSU Variant AA Circuit Schematic
850 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.9.3 Variant CA AppearanceThe front and side views of the BOSU (part number 3BK 08741) Variant CAare in the following figure.
Figure 512: BOSU Variant CA Appearance
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 851 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.9.4 Variant CA Circuit SchematicThe BOSU Variant CA connections are shown in the following figure.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL SCHEME CONNECTORS TECHNOLOGIES
Figure 513: BOSU Variant CA Circuit Schematic
852 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.10 BTSRI3
The connections for the BTSRI3I (part number 3BK 25973) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
1
P2 P3 P4 P5
BTSRISTASR 1
Break in wire for coding purposes
Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, femaleFlat cable connector, 50 pins, female
P1:P2 − P4:P5:
STASR 2 STASR 3
44 45
1
TFBP
Figure 514: BTSRI3 Connections
17.1.11 BTSRI5
The connections for the BTSRI5 (part number 3BK 25974) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
1
P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
1BTSRI
STASR 1
Break in wire for coding purposes
Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, femaleFlat cable connector, 50 pins, female
P1:P2 − P6:P7:
STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP
44 45 46 47
Figure 515: BTSRI5 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 853 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.12 BTSRIMA
The connections for the BTSRIMA (part number 3BK 07720) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
1
P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
1BTSRI
STASR 1
Break in wire for coding purposes
Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, femaleFlat cable connector, 50 pins, female
P1:P2 − P6:P7:
STASR 2 STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR 5 TFBP
44 45 46 47
Figure 516: BTSRIMA Connections
17.1.13 BTSRIMI
The connections for the BTSRIMI (part number 3BK 07720) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
1
P2 P3 P4
1BTSRI
STASR 1 STASR 2 TFBP
Break in wire for coding purposes
Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, femaleFlat cable connector, 50 pins, female
P1:P2, P3:P4:
44
Figure 517: BTSRIMI Connections
854 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.14 BTSRIOUT
The connections for the BTSRIOUT (part number 3BK 08126) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
1
P2 P3
1BTSRI
STASR 1 STASR 2
Break in wire for coding purposes
44
Non−removable, self cutting, 50 pinsDIN 41612, 64 pins, rows A and C only, female
P1:P2, P3, P4:
Variant AA
P4
1
STASR 3
Variant CA
Figure 518: BTSRIOUT Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 855 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.15 BUMA
The BUMA (part number 3BK 07762) cableform connections are shown inthe following figure.
P4
XIOB
1
3
2
13 14
134
GND
Filter
Breakers
XIOB
Top Fan Backplane
Subrack 5
Subrack 4
Subrack 3
Subrack 2
Subrack 1
Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers
−48 V GND 0 V−48 VGND 0 V
0 V
GND
−48 V
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x7 (Red)
x7 (Blue)
x7 (Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x7
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P3
P2
P1
P1 P2 P3
P5 to P10
Spade, male, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female
P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P10:
Figure 519: BUMA Connections
856 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.16 BUMI
The BUMI (part number 3BK 07763) cableform connections are shown inthe following figure.
P4
XIOB
1
3
2
134
GND
Filter
Breakers
XIOB
Top Fan Backplane
Subrack 2
Subrack 1
Subrack 1, 2 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers
−48 V GND 0 V−48 VGND 0 V
0 V
GND
−48 V
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x4 (Red)
x4 (Blue)
x4 (Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x4
P4
P5
P6
P7
P3
P2
P1
P1 P2 P3
P5 to P713 14
Spade, male, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female
P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P7:
Figure 520: BUMI Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 857 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.17 CA12
The connections for the CA12 (part number 3BK 08086) are shown in thefollowing figure.
1
P1 P2 P3 P4
1
BTSRIOUT Connector
STASR 3 STASR 4 STASR5
Break in wire for coding purposes
45 46 47
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, female
P1:P2 − P4:
Figure 521: CA12 Connections
17.1.18 CA-2MMC2
The CA-2MMC2 (part number 3BK 08289) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Black
6
5
9
7
9−pin Sub−D female
1
9−pin Sub−D male
Microwave UL
5
4
2
1
3
6
7
8
1
9
9
COAR
6
5
9
1
Transparent
Screen
Black
Transparent
Screen
Figure 522: CA-2MMC2 Connections
858 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.19 CA-ABIS
The CA-ABIS (part number 3BK 07922) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
1
Shield
9−pin Sub−D male
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
51
96
SUM side BTSCA
9
1
6
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5
9−pin Sub−D female
Figure 523: CA-ABIS Connections
17.1.20 CA-ACB2
The CA-ACB2 (part number 3BK 08091) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
P3P1
1
5
4
2
5
9
1
6
1
6
5
9
BTS Compartment 2 COAR
6
5
P1
P2
9−pin Sub−D maleReceptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.59−pin Sub−D female
P1:P2:P3:
Figure 524: CA-ACB2 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 859 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.21 CA-ACSC
The CA-ACSC (part number 3BK 08078) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
1
P4P1
4
2
7
6
5
1
6
Side Compartment COAR
5
9
6
5
P1
P3
P2
1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D maleReceptacle Faston 4.8 x 0.5DIN wire ferrules
P1 − P4:P2:P3:
Figure 525: CA-ACSC Connections
17.1.22 CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP
The CA-ADABM (part number 3BK 25139) connections and the CA-ADABP(part number 3BK 25138) connections are shown in the following figure.
DIN wire ferrule
ADAMBattery Breaker
Lug, ring crimp, M6
CA−ADABM:
CA−ADABP:
Blue
Black
Figure 526: CA-ADABM, CA-ADABP Connections
860 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.23 CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP
The CA-ADACM (part number 3BK 25248) connections and the CA -ADACP(part number 3BK 25247) connections are shown in the following figure.
DIN wire ferrule
Battery Interconnection
CA−ADACP:
Blue
Black
ADAM CA−ADACM:
DIN wire ferrule
Figure 527: CA-ADACM, CA-ADACP Connections
17.1.24 CA-ADCO
The CA-ADCO (part number 3BK 07953) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Clamp strip, Phoenix FK−MPC 1,5/16−STF−3,81
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
10
1112
13
14
15
16
Figure 528: CA-ADCO Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 861 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.25 CA-ALPC
The CA-ALPC (part number 3BK 26348) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
9−Pin Sub−D Male 9−Pin Sub−D Female
Figure 529: CA-ALPC Appearance
Alarm −
Alarm −
Alarm +
Alarm +
To Door Switch
To DCUC X8
To DCUC X7
− 48 V
0 V
− 48 V
0 VOUTC
HEX5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
5
6
7
P3
P1
P2
P4
P5
9
P1 9−Pin Sub−D FemaleP2 Wire FerrulesP3 9−Pin Sub−D MaleP4, P5 Twin Wire Ferrules
Figure 530: CA-ALPC Circuit Schematic
862 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.26 CA-APC2
The CA-APC2 (part number 3BK 08215) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
6
P5P1
11
7
15
14
12
1
15
BTS Compartment 1 COAR
8
9
6
5
P1
P2
P3
1
6
5
9
3
4
1
2P4
9−pin Sub−D maleDIN wire ferrulesReceptagle Faston 4.8x0.59−pin Sub−D female
P1:P2, P4:P3:P5:
Figure 531: CA-APC2 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 863 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.27 CA-ASMC
The CA-ASMC (part number 3BK 08807) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
P1
4
3
1
Brown
Blue
P3
Black 2
ACSBACIB
14
2 Black 1
Yellow/Green
P2
P2P1
Quardruple Faston, female, 6.3x0.8Lug, ring, crimp, 5 mmDIN wire ferrules 2.5 mm 2
P1:P2:P3:
Figure 532: CA-ASMC Connections
17.1.28 CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP
The CA-BABRM (part number 3BK 25141) connections and the CA-BABRP(part number 2BK 25140) connections are shown in the following figure.
Interconnection AreaBattery Breaker
Lug, ring crimp, M6
CA−BABRM:
CA−BABRP:
Blue
Black
Lug, ring crimp, M6
Figure 533: CA-BABRM, CA-BABRP Connections
17.1.29 CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP
The CA-BRCM (part number 3BK 25246) connections and the CA-BRCP (partnumber 3BK 25245) connections are shown in the following figure.
DIN wire ferruleAngled Crimp Connector for M6
CA−BRCM:
CA−BRCP:
Blue
Black
Battery Battery Breaker
Figure 534: CA-BRCM, CA-BRCP Connections
864 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.30 CA-BTSCA
The CA-BTSCA (part number 3BK 07923) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
SUM side BTSCA
37−pin Sub−D female37−pin Sub−D male
11
Figure 535: CA-BTSCA Connections
17.1.31 CA-CSTR
The connections for the CA-CSTR (part number 3BK 25178) are shown inthe following figure.
1
P1 P2 P3 P4
1
BTSRIOUT Connector
STASR 7 RIBAT2 RIBAT1
Break in wire for coding purposes
45 50
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, femaleP1 − P3:
P4:
COAR
Figure 536: CA-CSTR Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 865 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.32 CA-DFUX
The CA-DFUX (part number 3BK 08503) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
P31
20
19
37
Pair 1
Pair 4
Pair 3
Pair 2
Pair 7
Pair 6
Pair 5
Pair 8
P1
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
20
23
22
21
26
25
24
27
28
10
13
12
11
16
15
14
17
18
29
32
31
30
35
34
33
36
37
Microwave UX
P2
TX Red
Pair 1
Pair 4
Pair 3
Pair 2
Pair 7
Pair 6
Pair 5
Pair 8
Rx Blue
SUM
P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
Pouyet, P44920−CA blue
Pouyet, P44920−CA red
37−pin Sub−D male
P1:
P2:
P3:
Figure 537: CA-DFUX Connections
866 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.33 CA-GCMW
The CA-GCMW (part number 3BK 07934) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Yellow/Green
Lug, ring, crimp
Ground Microwave Equipment
Receptacle, Faston 5.3 x 0.8
Figure 538: CA-GCMW Connections
17.1.34 CA-Ground
The CA-Ground (part number 3BK 25182) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Bottom PlateLPFU
Lug, ring crimp, M6
CA−BABRM:
CA−BABRP:
Blue
Black
Lug, ring crimp, M8
Figure 539: CA-Ground Connections
17.1.35 CA-Ground1
The CA-Ground1 (part number 3BK 08118) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
DIN wire ferrule
ACSBSRACDC
Yellow/Green
Lug, ring crimp, 8 mm
Figure 540: CA-Ground1 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 867 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.36 CA-Ground2
The CA-Ground2 (part number 3BK 08177) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Lug, ring, crimp, 8 mm
ACSBSRACDC
Yellow/Green
Lug, ring, crimp, 8 mm
Figure 541: CA-Ground2 Connections
17.1.37 CA-H2PC1
The CA-H2PC1 (part number 3BK 08077) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5 1
9 6
HEX2 DCDP
5
9
1
6
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
9−pin Sub−D female 9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 542: CA-H2PC1 Connections
868 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.38 CA-H2PC2
The CA-H2PC2 (part number 08092) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
1
9−pin Sub−D female
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
COAR DCDP
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
5
9
1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 543: CA-H2PC2 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 869 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.39 CA-H2PC3
The CA-H2PC3 (part number 3BK 08093) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1
9−pin Sub−D female
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5
9
HEX2 COAR
1
6
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5
9
1
6
9−pin Sub−D female
Figure 544: CA-H2PC3 Connections
17.1.40 CA-HOAP
The CA-HOAP (part number 3BK 25820) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
7
6
5
Matenlock, male
3
2
1
6
BOMUHEX3
5
9
3
1
2
14
9
4
9−pin Sub−D female
Figure 545: CA-HOAP Connections
870 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.41 CA-MLBP
The CA-MLBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Plug for three female contacts
5 1
Microwave UL
1
5
3
Matenlock, male
BOBU
2
1
12
Figure 546: CA-MLBP Connections
17.1.42 CA-MXBP
The CA-MXBP (part number 3BK 08886) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Sub−D size A for three HP contacts, male and female
3 1
Microwave UX
1
3
2
Matenlock, male
BOBU
1
2
12
Figure 547: CA-MXBP Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 871 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.43 CA-OHAC
The CA-OHAC (part number 3BK 08810) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
7
6
1
Matenlock, male
3
2
1
6
BOSU or BOBUHEX2
5
9
2
4
3
14
9−pin Sub−D male
9
1
HEX2
9−pin Sub−D female
Figure 548: CA-OHAC Connections
872 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.44 CA-ONCCx
The CA-ONCCx cable has three connection types. Each type is illustrated in aseparate diagram.
17.1.44.1 Type 1 ConnectionsThe CA-ONCCx type 1 connections are shown in the following figure.
1
2
P5
BOBU
1
2
Customer Equipment
P1
BOBU
12
6
COAR/ABIS2
5
9
7
3
6
P2, P3, P4
1
P1, P5
9
8
P2SUM
5
4
2
1
9
8
7
6
P3COAR/ABIS1
7
6
9
8
P4
Matenlock, male
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 549: CA-ONCCx Type 1 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 873 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.44.2 Type 2 ConnectionsThe CA-ONCCx type 2 connections are shown in the following figure.
6
1
P5
DCDP
6
1
Customer Equipment
P1
DCDP
6
COAR/ABIS2
5
9
7
3
6
P1 to P5
1
9
8
P2SUM
5
4
2
1
9
8
7
6
P3COAR/ABIS1
7
6
9
8
P4
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 550: CA-ONCCx Type 2 Connections
874 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.44.3 Type 3 ConnectionsThe CA-ONCCx type 3 connections are shown in the following figure.
Customer Equipment
6
COAR/ABIS2
5
9
7
3
6
P1, P2, P3
1
9
8
P1SUM
5
4
2
1
9
8
7
6
P2COAR/ABIS1
7
6
9
8
P3
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 551: CA-ONCCx Type 3 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 875 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.45 CA-OSCP1
The CA-OSCP1 (part number 3BK 08095) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
9−pin Sub−D female1
6
Side Compartment
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5
9
Figure 552: CA-OSCP1 Connections
876 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.46 CA-OSCP2
The CA-OSCP2 (part number 3BK 08096) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
9−pin Sub−D female1
6
BTS Compartment 1
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
5
9
Figure 553: CA-OSCP2 Connections
17.1.47 CA-OSCP3
The CA-OSCP3 (part number 3BK 25548) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
15− Pin Sub−D Female
CBO
Figure 554: CA-OSCP3 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 877 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.48 CA-OSPC
The CA-OSPC (part number 3BK 08079) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Sub−D size A for three HP contactsThree Faston 6.8x0.8, female
3 1
STASR DCDP
1
3
2
0 V
GND
−48 V
Figure 555: CA-OSPC Connections
17.1.49 CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP
The CA-PCAN (part number 3BK 25115) and the CA-PCAP (part number 3BK25114) connections are shown in the following figure.
DIN wire ferrule
ADAMDCBREAK
Lug, ring crimp, M6
CA−PCAN: Blue
CA−PCAP: Black
Figure 556: CA-PCAN, CA-PCAP Connections
17.1.50 CA-PCOS
The CA-PCOS (part number 3BK 08809) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Triple Faston, female
4
3
1
13
1
2
Triple Faston, male
3
BOBUSTASR
14
Figure 557: CA-PCOS Connections
878 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.51 CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP
The CA-PDCM (part number 3BK 25232) connections and the CA-PDCP (partnumber 3BK 25231) connections are shown in the following figure.
DIN wire ferrule
Battery Interconnection
CA−PDCP:
Blue
Black
ADAM CA−PDCM:
DIN wire ferrule
Figure 558: CA-PDCM, CA-PDCP Connections
17.1.52 CA-RFMW
The CA-RFMW (part number 3BK 07931) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Shield
Microwave EquipmentConnection Area
N type, male N type, female
Figure 559: CA-RFMW Connections
17.1.53 CA-RIBCO
The connections for the CA-RIBCO (part number 3BK 26347) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
P1 :P2/P3 :
P2
STASR 1
P3
STASR 2
OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment
Break wire for coding purposesFlat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female
44*
* :
Figure 560: CA-RIBCO Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 879 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.54 CA-RICPT1
The connections for the CA-RICPT1 (part number 3BK 25537) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
P1 :P2/P3 :
P2
STASR 2
P3
STASR 3
OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment
44
Break wire for coding purposes
45
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and C only, female
1
Figure 561: CA-RICPT1 Connections
17.1.55 CA-RICPT2
The connections for the CA-RICPT2 (part number 3BK 25538) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
P1 :P2/P4 :
P2
STASR 4
P3
STASR 5
OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment 1
464544
Break wire for coding purposes
47
P4
STASR 6
48
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female
1 1
Figure 562: CA-RICPT2 Connections
880 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.56 CA-RIMO1
The connections for the CA-RIMO1 (part number 3BK 25822) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
P1 :P2/P5 :
P2
STASR 1
P3
STASR 2
OUTCFlatCableConnectorSideCompart−ment
Break wire for coding purposes
P4
STASR 3
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female
P5
STASR 7
44* 45* 44, 45,46, 47,48*
* :
Figure 563: CA-RIMO1 Connections
17.1.57 CA-RIMO2
The connections for the CA-RIMO2 (part number 3BK 25823) are shown inthe following figure.
P1
P1 :P2/P5 :
P2
STASR 4
P3
STASR 5
OUTCFlatCableConnectorBTSCompart−ment 1
Break wire for coding purposes
P4
STASR 6
Flat cable connector, 50 pins, femaleDIN 41612, 64 pins, row A and only, female
P5
STASR 0
48*47* 44, 45*
* :
44, 45,46*
Figure 564: CA-RIMO2 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 881 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.58 CA-SENSP
The CA-SENSP (part number 3BK 26147) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
9−Pin Sub−D Female
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
Resistor 105 Ohm 1%
Figure 565: CA-SENSP Connections
17.1.59 CA-XBCBO
The CA-XBCBO (part number 3BK 08205) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
ACRI COAR
15−pin Sub−D male15−pin Sub−D male
1515
Figure 566: CA-XBCBO Connections
882 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.60 CA-XIOC
The CA-XIOC (part number 3BK 26353) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
XIOB
Mate−N Lock, MaleDIN Wire Ferrules
To DCUC X9
To DCUC X10 1 − 48V (Blue)
2 Not Used
3 0V (Black)
13
Figure 567: CA-XIOC Connections
17.1.61 CA-XIOPC
The CA-XIOPC (part number 3BK 08087) connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1
9−pin Sub−D maleMatenlock, female
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
XIOB
DCDP
5
9
1
3
2
13
Figure 568: CA-XIOPC Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 883 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.62 CIMA Bus Bar
The CIMA (part number 3BK 07762) bus bar connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
Top FanBackplane
Subrack 5
Subrack 4
Subrack 3
Subrack 2
Subrack 1
P4
XIOB
1
3
2
13 14
134
Subrack 1 − 5 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers
−48 V GND 0 V−48 VGND 0 V
0 V
GND
−48 V
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x7 (Red)
x7 (Blue)
x7 (Black)
x7
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P3
P2
P1
P1 P2 P3
P5 − P10
Circuit Breakers
Ground (M8 bolt)
0 VDC Filter
XIOB
Fixing Rail
Fixing Holes
Bus Bar
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
Spade, made, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female
P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P10:
Figure 569: CIMA Bus Bar Connections
884 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.63 CIMI Bus Bar
The CIMI (part number 3BK 07763) bus bar connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
P4
XIOB
1
3
2
134
Subrack 1, 2 and Top Fan BackplaneGND Bolt Filter Breakers
−48 V GND 0 V−48 VGND 0 V
0 V
GND
−48 V
x4
P1 P2 P3
P5 − P713 14
Fixing Holes
Bus Bar
Fixing Rail
x4 (Red)
x4 (Blue)
x4 (Black)
P4
P3
P2
P1
Circuit Breakers
Ground (M8 bolt)
0 VDC Filter
XIOBx3 (Red, Blue, Black)
Top FanBackplane
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)P5
Subrack 2
Subrack 1
P6
P7x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
x3 (Red, Blue, Black)
Spade, made, M8 holeSpade, male, M6 holeSpade, male, open tongue, M5Matenlock, femaleTriple Faston, female
P1:P2:P3:P4:P5 − P7:
Figure 570: CIMI Bus Bar Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 885 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.1.64 RXRC
The RXRC (part number 3BK 07920) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
ShieldANTRE/AN
P1 P2
AlignmentHole
Note: For ANS modules only one RXRC line is fitted
Subminiature connectors, 50 series SMB, straight, femaleP1, P2:
Figure 571: RXRC Connections
17.1.65 TXRC
The TXRC (part number 3BK 07919) connections are shown in the followingfigure.
Shield
ANTRE/AN
Coaxial connector, 50 series N Coaxial connector, 50 series N
Figure 572: TXRC Connections
886 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2 External CablesThe physical and electrical characteristics for the indoor and outdoor externalcables are given in the following sections.
17.2.1 CA01
The CA01 (part number 3BK 07594) Abis cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Shield
Customer dependent9−pin Sub−D male
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
BTS A9100 side Customer’s Distribution Board
5
9
Figure 573: CA01 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 887 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.2 CA02
The CA02 (part number 3BK 07595) Abis cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Shield
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
BTS A9100 side Customer’s Distribution Board
5
9
Customer dependent9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 574: CA02 Connections
17.2.3 CA03
The CA03 (part number 3BK 07596) Abis cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Shield
TX
RX
Figure 575: CA03 Connections
888 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.4 CA04
The CA04 (part number 3BK 07597) Abis cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Shield
Figure 576: CA04 Connections
17.2.5 CA-CBTE
The CA-CBTE (part number 3BK 07951) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Shield
9−pin Sub−D male1
6
SUM BTS Terminal
5
9
1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D female
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
8
9
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
8
9
Figure 577: CA-CBTE Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 889 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.6 CA-GC35
The CA-GC35 (part number 3BK 08031) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
BTS A9100 Customer’s Ground Point
Lug, ring, crimp, 9 mm
Figure 578: CA-GC35 Connections
17.2.7 CA-GND
The CA-GND (part number 3BK 25349) cable connection is shown in thefollowing figure.
Lug, Ring M8 Lug, Ring M8
Figure 579: CA-GND Connection
17.2.8 CA-PC2W16
The CA-PC2W16 (part number 3BK 08029) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
BTS A9100 Customer’s −48/0 VDC Source
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4
Black Wire 0 V Black Wire 0 V
Blue Wire −48 V Blue Wire −48 V
Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm
Figure 580: CA-PC2W16 Connections
890 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.9 CA-PC35BK
The CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
Customer’s 0 VDC Source
Black Wire 0 V Black Wire 0 V
Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm
BTS A9100
Figure 581: CA-PC35BK Connections
17.2.10 CA-PC35BL
The CA-PC35BL (part number 3BK 08032) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
BTS A9100 Customer’s −48 VDC Source
Blue Wire −48 V Blue Wire −48 V
Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm Lug, ring, crimp, 5.8 mm
Figure 582: CA-PC35BL Connections
17.2.11 CA-PCEBM
The CA-PCEBM (part number 3BK 25260) cable connection is shown inthe following figure.
Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Ring M6
Lug, Pin
Figure 583: CA-PCEBM Connection
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 891 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.12 CA-PCEBP
The CA-PCEBP (part number 3BK 25259) cable connection is shown inthe following figure.
Shrinking Sleeve Lug, Ring M6
Lug, Pin
Figure 584: CA-PCEBP Connection
17.2.13 CA-RIBEB
The CA-RIBEB (part number 3BK 25258) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
15 pin male connector
123123123
123123123
15 pin female connector
1
8
9
15Wiring list
COAR/OUTC SideP1/male
1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15
External Battery SideP2/female
1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15
Quad Number
IIIIIIiV 1
8
9
15
Figure 585: CA-RIBEB Connections
892 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.14 CA-RIBEO
The CA-RIBEO (part number 3BK 26138) cable connections are shown inthe following figure.
15 pin male connector(to OUTC at BTS )
123412341234
123412341234
15 pin female connector(to first RIBAT at externalBattery Cabinet outdoor;assembling on site afterguiding through cable gland)
1
8
9
15Wiring list
COAR/OUTC SideP1/male
1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15
External Battery SideP2/female
1/9, 2/104/12, 6/145/13, 83/11, 7/15
Quad Number
IIIIIIiV
1
8
9
15
Figure 586: CA-RIBEO Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 893 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.15 OCC23
The OCC23 (part number 3BK 08303) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
G2 BTSBTS A9100
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
5
9
Shield Solder Point1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D male 9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 587: OCC23 Connections
894 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.16 OCC33
The OCC33 (part number 3BK 08304) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
BTS A9100
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
5
9
Shield Solder Point1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D male 9−pin Sub−D male
BTS A9100
Figure 588: OCC33 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 895 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.17 SCG2/3
The SCG2/3 (part number 3BK 08101) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
9−pin Sub−D male
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
G2 BTS BTS A9100
5
9
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
5
9
Shield Solder Point
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 589: SCG2/3 Connections
896 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.18 SCG3
The SCG3 (part number 3BK 07950) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
COAR of First BTS A9100 COAR of Second BTS A9100
5
9
1
4
3
2
7
6
5
8
9
1
6
5
9
9−pin Sub−D male 9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 590: SCG3 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 897 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.19 SCM1/3
The SCM1/3 (part number 3BK 08102) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
P1
7
6
9
2
5
8
3
4
1
6
BTS A9100 G1 BTS Mark1
5
9
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
5
9
P2
Shield Solder Point
P3
1
6
5
9
P1
P3
P2
9−pin Sub−D maleP1, P2, P3:
Figure 591: SCM1/3 Connections
898 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
17 Cable Descriptions
17.2.20 SCM2/3
The SCM2/3 (part number 3BK 08103) cable connections are shown in thefollowing figure.
1Shield
9−pin Sub−D male
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
G1 BTS Mark2 BTS A9100
5
9
1
3
4
5
8
9
2
7
6
1
6
5
9
Shield Solder Point
9−pin Sub−D male
Figure 592: SCM2/3 Connections
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 899 / 910
17 Cable Descriptions
900 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
18 Environment
18 Environment
The sections are supported with data tables, where necessary. Referencesto the relevant European and International standards are also given, whenappropriate.
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 901 / 910
18 Environment
18.1 Indoor Climatic and Mechanical ConditionsThis section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for thesafe and efficient operation of indoor BTS A9100 equipment.
It includes information on the following:
Environmental requirements
Operational conditions
Transportation conditions
Storage conditions.
18.1.1 Environmental Requirements
The BTS A9100 equipment housings provide the necessary environmental andsafety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019, for indoor equipment.
18.1.2 Operational Conditions
Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 3.1E, ETS 300019-1-3, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -5� CClimatic
High temperature +45� C
Low relative humidity 5 %
High relative humidity 90 %
Low absolute humidity 1 g/ m3
High absolute humidity 25 g/ m3
Rate of change of temperature 0.5� C/ min
Low air pressure 70 kPa
High air pressure 106 kPa
Mechanical Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz 0.3 mm p-p
(Vibration) Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz 0.1 m/ s2
Shock - 40 m/ s2
Table 173: Environmental Conditions for Indoor Operation
902 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
18 Environment
18.1.3 Transportation Conditions
Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2.2, ETS 300019 -1-2, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -40� C
High temperature +70� C
High relative humidity 95 %
High absolute humidity 60 g/ m3
Climatic
Low air pressure 70 kPa
Displacement amplitude (frequency 2- 9 Hz) 3.5 mm
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9-200 Hz) 10 m/ s2
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 200-500 Hz) 15 m/ s2
Free Fall 100 mm
Steady State Acceleration 20 m/ s2
Mechanical
Static Load 5 kPa
Table 174: Environmental Conditions for Transportation
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 903 / 910
18 Environment
18.1.4 Storage Conditions
Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1.2, ETS 300 019-1-1, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -25� C
High temperature +55� C
Low relative humidity 10 %
High relative humidity 100 %
Low absolute humidity 0.5 g/ m3
High absolute humidity 29 g/ m3
Low air pressure 70 kPa
Climatic
High air pressure 106 kPa
Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 - 9 Hz) 1.5 mm
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 - 200 Hz) 5 m/ s2
Steady State Acceleration 40 m/ s2
Mechanical
Static Load 5 kPa
Table 175: Environmental Conditions for Storage
904 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
18 Environment
18.2 Outdoor Climatic and Mechanical ConditionsThis section describes the climatic and mechanical conditions required for thesafe and efficient operation of outdoor BTS A9100 equipment.
It includes information on the following:
Environmental requirements
Operational conditions
Transportation conditions
Storage conditions.
18.2.1 Environmental Requirements
The BTS A9100 equipment housings provide the necessary environmentaland safety protection according to the standard ETS 300 019, for outdoorequipment.
18.2.2 Operational Conditions
Operational conditions are specified in accordance with Class 4.1E, ETS 300019-1 -4, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -45� CClimatic
High temperature +45� C
Low relative humidity 8 %
High relative humidity 100 %
Low absolute humidity 0.26 g/ m3
High absolute humidity 30 g/ m3
Rate of change of temperature 0.5� C/ min
Low air pressure 70 kPa
High air pressure 106 kPa
Mechanical Displacement amplitude in Frequency Range 2-9 Hz 1.5 mm p-p
(Vibration) Acceleration amplitude in Frequency Range 9-200 Hz 5 m/ s2
Shock - 70 m/ s2
Table 176: Environmental Conditions for Outdoor Operation
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 905 / 910
18 Environment
18.2.3 Transportation Conditions
Transportation conditions are specified in accordance with Class2.2, ETS 300019 -1-2, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -40� C
High temperature +70� C
High relative humidity 95 %
High absolute humidity 60 g/ m3
Climatic
Low air pressure 70 kPa
Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 - 9 Hz) 3.5 mm
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9-200 Hz) 10 m/ s2
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 200-500 Hz) 15 m/ s2
Free Fall 100 mm
Steady State Acceleration 20 m/ s2
Mechanical
Static Load 5 kPa
Table 177: Environmental Conditions for Transportation
906 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
18 Environment
18.2.4 Storage Conditions
Storage conditions are specified in accordance with Class 1.2, ETS 300 019-1-1, as shown in the following table.
Type Condition Limit
Low temperature -25� C
High temperature +55� C
Low relative humidity 10 %
High relative humidity 100 %
Low absolute humidity 0.5 g/ m3
High absolute humidity 29 g/ m3
Low air pressure 70 kPa
Climatic
High air pressure 106 kPa
Displacement amplitude (frequency 2 - 9 Hz) 1.5 mm
Acceleration amplitude (frequency 9 - 200 Hz) 5 m/ s2
Steady State Acceleration 40 m/ s2
Mechanical
Static Load 5 kPa
Table 178: Environmental Conditions for Storage
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 907 / 910
18 Environment
18.3 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThis section describes the EMC compatibility of BTS A9100 equipment.
It provides information on the following:
EMC immunity
Transient bursts
Spurious emissions.
BTS A9100 equipment complies with the following EMC standards:
European Directive 89/336/EEC
ETS 300 342 Part 2, and Draft ETSI EN 300 342 Part 2.
18.3.1 EMC Immunity
This section contains information on EMC immunity. EMC immunity ensures thenormal operation of BTS A9100 equipment when subjected to the conditionsspecified in the following table.
Parameter Standard
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 1000-4-2: Levels 2 and 3.
RF Common Mode IEC 1000-4-6: 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz.
Radiated Fields IEC 1000-4-3: 3 V/ m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz (+ 1.8 GHz excepted reception band).
Transient Pulse Immunity IEC 1000-4-4: Levels 2 and 3 (see Table Permitted Transient Bursts (180)).
ETS 300 342-2.
Surges (on AC lines) IEC 1000-4-5: level 500 V at differential mode; level 1 kV at common mode.
Note that all outdoor Evolium™ BTS A9100 external lines have better surgeprotection characteristics than that defined in IEC 1000-4-5.
Table 179: EMC Immunity
908 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13
18 Environment
18.3.2 Transient Bursts
The following table shows the IEC 1000-4-4 Levels 2 and 3 transient voltagebursts. These are the voltage bursts that the different types of lines canwithstand without causing permanent defects to the equipment.
Peak Amplitude Level Line Type
±2000 V 3 AC power lines
±1000 V 2 DC power lines
±500 V 2 Signal lines (including RF)
Table 180: Permitted Transient Bursts
Note: The amplitudes shown in the above table must not exceed 50 ns duration orhave a rise time of less than 5 ns.
18.3.3 Spurious Emissions
Potential EMC emissions of BTS A9100 equipment (unintentionally produced)are shown in the following table.
Type Standard Frequency Range
Conducted Emissions onPower Lines:
EN 55022 Class B (AC powered BTS)
EN 55022 Class A (DC powered BTS)
150 kHz - 30 MHz
Radiated Emissions fromEnclosure:
GSM 11.21 30 MHz - 4 GHz
Table 181: EMC Emissions
3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13 909 / 910
18 Environment
18.4 Acoustic NoiseThis section describes the acoustic noise parameters which apply to BTSA9100 equipment. The acoustic noise generated by the equipment is measuredaccording to ISO 7779 and ISO 9296. Noise limits for the measurements are inaccordance with GSM 11.22 and ETS 300 753, respectively.
18.5 Safety RequirementsSafety standards cover protection against:
Electric shock
Skin burns
Radio frequency radiation hazards
Fire hazards
Mechanical hazards
Energy hazards
Chemical hazards.
The indoor and outdoor BTS are compliant with the following safety standards:
Indoor BTSEN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting EquipmentEN60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
Outdoor BTSEN60215 - Safety Requirements for Radio Transmitting EquipmentEN60950 - Safety of Information Technology EquipmentEN41003 - Safety Requirements for Apparatus for Connection toTelecommunications NetworksISO 3864 - Safety Colors and Safety Signs.
910 / 910 3BK 20942 AAAA TQZZA Ed.13